ELMARK HOLDING SE

CATALOGUE 2021
ELMARK BRAND
 www.elmarkholding.eu

WHAT MAKES US DIFFERENT?

ELMARK is European trusted brand for LV electrical automation and supplies,

EUROPEAN indoor and outdoor luminaires. Our diversified portfolio offers an effective
MANUFACTURER path to fast growth, we answer to our existing customers’ needs and at the
same time we have the opportunity to establish new markets. We have more
than 20 years of experience in providing high performance solutions across
a range of different sectors such as residential, hospitality and recreation,
office, industry, road and cityscape.

Our well-balanced portfolio ensures excellent market coverage with

outstanding quality. We have built trust and creditability with our partners
DIVERSIFIED
as ELMARK enjoys the recognition of INTERTEK for safe and reliable products,
PORTFOLIO manufactured in accordance with the European safety requirements and
quality standards.

ELMARK showcases and maintains product safety and performance, we

provide 7 years worldwide warranty as confidence in our production quality.

For more than 15 years partnership with ALLIANZ, Germany we do not have
a single claim for the International insurance which guarantees coverage
INTERNATIONAL of damages that may occur as a result of any act or omission relating to
INSURANCE ELMARK products. We always stay in tune with the environment, safety
standards and comfort demand.

Our research and development department currently works on new

features and technologies important for the future, that will generate
benefits to all our partners, such as smart buildings solutions tailored to
clients personal needs and comfort. We constantly develop our product
portfolio into a meaningful, differentiated and winning asset. Thanks to
CERTIFIED continuous improvement and developments we successfully leverage our
QUALITY core competences of lighting and electrical under one roof.

ELMARK Dynamic NEW Starts production

Brand expansion company of Low Voltage
was on Bulgarian in Electrical
born market ROMANIA Equipment

2000 2002 2003 2004

 ELMARK BRAND
www.elmarkholding.eu 

PRODUCTION FACILITIES
ELMARK Production Complex consists of a manufacturing plant and
testing centres for both low- voltage electrical and lighting solutions. We
#K#

successfully combine automated technology with experience to meet

quality highest standards, ensure high efficiency and add value to our
clients.

The Complex together with the adjacent warehouse facilities occupy a

total area of 10,000 m2, strategically located in Bulgaria, nearby the Black
Sea where it benefits from its proximity to major transport links and direct
access to European market.

NEW ELMARK Moves NEW NEW

company Holding AD to a new Logistic company
in has been Headquarter centre of in
SERBIA established of 3500 sq.m 5000 sq.m CROATIA

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009

ELMARK BRAND


HEADQUARTER

COMMERCIAL BENEFITS

ELMARK offers its customers

#K#
unrivalled combination of products at
PROFIT MIX TRAINING
competitive prices.
We are proud with our widespread
international network of
highly-valued business partners in
over 50 countries. Understanding
our clients‘ requirements stays at the
centre of our business cooperation.
We apply proven industry and market MARKETING DEDICATED
concepts and training for both
business-to-business and
SUPPORT ACCOUNT MANAGER
business-to-consumer companies.

We focus to build strong and lasting

relationships and maintain friendly
communication with our partners.
All of our customers are provided
with a dedicated account manager
to deliver the highest level of AFTERSALES SUPPORT LONG TERM PARTNERSHIP
customer service.

NEW NEW company NEW Intertek: S Mark NEW

Production in GREECE and company NEW Automatic company
line for LED BOSNIA AND in Testing Equipment for in
Lighting HERZEGOVINA HUNGARY LV & Lighting Lab SLOVENIA

2010 2011 2012 2013 2014

 ELMARK BRAND


Slovakia

Hungary
Romania
Slovenia Croatia

Bosnia and Herzegovina

Serbia

Bulgaria
Greece Headquarter, Factory
and Central Warehouse

ELMARK SHOWROOMS
Bulgaria, Romania, Croatia, Slovenia, Serbia,
Bosnia and Herzegovina, Hungary, Greece, Slovakia, Dubai
#K#

ELMARK DISTRIBUTORS
Albania, Azerbaijan, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Estonia,
Finland, France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Kosovo, Latvia, Lithuania,
Malta, Montenegro, Moldova, Poland, Portugal, Republic of North UAE, Dubai
Macedonia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, The Netherlands, Ukraine,
United Kingdom, Emiratele Arabe Unite, KSA, Kuwait, Sultanate of
Oman, Iraq, Qatar, Israel, Kingdom of Bahrain, Indonesia, Vietnam,
Egypt, Libya, Morocco, Reunion Island, Rwanda, Kenya, Uganda,
Tanzania, Djibouti, Mexico, Bolivia, USA

OUR VISION MISSION OUR VALUES

ELMARK aims to be your ELMARK is focused to ensure high reliability and cost Ethical / Respectful /
trusted partner that effective solutions to all consumers. We keep improving Team Player / Dedicated /
offers the balance of our components and products, productivity, quality Caring / Sustainable /
high quality, efficiency control, added value, and cost reduction in order to Flexible
and comfort. offer market-aligned solutions worldwide.

Middle East-Sales and NEW NEW Building Second ELMARK DIGITAL,

Logistics Branch and company product line Logistic Centre E-Business Platform,
Test Centre in Dubai in Decorative of 4000 sq.m, Mobile Application,
Silicon Oasis, UАЕ SLOVAKIA Lighting Retail Franchise Check & Order System

2015 2016 2017 2018

ELMARK BRAND
 www.elmarkholding.eu

TECHNICAL SUPPORT AND CONSULTING

We operate from 10 different locations
across the globe to ensure flexible
approach to every project worldwide.
Our experienced engineers and advisors
have a proven ability to provide
technical expertise on different projects
from small private clients to large-scale TECHNICAL EXPERT
market centres. We ensure viable and
sustainable product solutions as well as DOCUMENTATION ADVICE
clear and useful advice.

Our ELMARK library offers a variety

of technical documents to provide
guidance on standards, safety, usage
and installation. Each product dossier
contains certificates, Data Sheet with
product specification, test reports,
Photometric Data (IES) Files that help
professionals select products and PROFESSIONAL SERVE
systems that are most appropriate for TEAM COMPLEX PROJECTS
their requirements.

#K#
LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN
Successful inventory management
plays a key role for our growth
strategy. ELMARK keeps in stock more
than 10 000 finished products to
answer customer demand and reduce
the lead time. Our customized ERP,
WMS and digital business solutions
increase our organization productivity
and visibility at all levels. Flexibility
and cost-effective operations
helps us increase speed, improve
competitiveness and maintain
customer satisfaction. ELMARK fleet of
vehicles and trusted logistic partners
provide fast and reliable delivery
solutions.

FLEXIBLE STOCK MOBILE CHECK ECOMMERCE

SUPPLY CHAIN AVAILABILITIES & ORDER APP DATABASE
 WARRANTY
www.elmarkholding.eu 

EXTENDED WARRANTY UP TO 7 YEARS

The production of ELMARK products is closely supervised by qualified engineers to guarantee high quality level. We
warrant that our products are manufactured in accordance with all applicable European standards and are free from
defects in materials and workmanship.

We are proud with ALLIANZ GERMANY recognition for the lack of claims for 15 consecutive years in regard of
insurance “Product liability” for 1 500 000 EUR. ELMARK guarantees professional production and products durability and
offers its clients the possibility to receive an Extended Warranty for all ELMARK products that have been purchased.

Extended warranty package:

total 7 years full warranty for products in Automation
total 5 years full warranty for products in Electrical materials
total 5 years full warranty for products in LED Lighting
total 5 years full warranty for products in Decor lighting

Register your purchase at www.elmarkholding.eu and get

up to 7 years extended warranty for ELMARK products.

For more information

read the General Terms
and Conditions
 QUALITY
CERTIFICATES www.elmarkholding.eu
QUALITY

8
CERTIFICATES

Allianz Bulgaria Insurance Co. Ltd.

declares that no claim has been raised
against ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC and
no indemnification has been paid for
14 consecutive years.
 QUALITY
www.elmarkholding.eu CERTIFICATES

QUALITY
9
CERTIFICATES
 QUALITY
CERTIFICATES www.elmarkholding.eu

#N#
QUALITY

10
CERTIFICATES
 QUALITY
www.elmarkholding.eu CERTIFICATES
#N#

QUALITY
11
CERTIFICATES
 CIRCUIT BREAKERS, INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES
CONTENT www.elmarkholding.eu

AUTOMATION

C40N-4,5kA C60N-6kA C100L-10kA

MCB MCB MCB
PAGE 39 PAGE 45 PAGE 47

VOLTAGE RELAY NT00 RT18 ISS

DEVICES FOR MCB HIGH POWER DEVICE HIGH POWER DEVICE SWITCH DISCONNECTOR
PAGE 54 PAGE 59 PAGE 62 PAGE 64
CONTENT

12
ISS2 EQ2M DS1 MAX DW1
SWITCH DISCONNECTOR MANUAL SWITCHING MCCB ACB
PAGE 66 PAGE 67 PAGE 68 PAGE 82
CATALOGUE 2020

EQ1 JEL1 JEL5 SPD

CHANGE-OVER SWITCH RCD RCBO SURGE ARRESTERS
PAGE 83 PAGE 85 PAGE 88 PAGE 93
 CONTACTORS, CONTROL AND PROTECTION, SOLAR SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu CONTENT

LT1-D CJ19-43 LT4-D LT01

CONTACTORS CONTACTORS CONTACTORS AUXILIARY CONTACTS
PAGE 97 PAGE 101 PAGE 102 PAGE 103

K20 LT2-E TM2 LT5-D

MODULE CONTACTORS OVERLOAD RELAYS THERMOM. BREAKER STARTERS
PAGE 104 PAGE 106 PAGE 108 PAGE 113

CONTENT
13
STAR/DELTA ELM 2000+ ELM 2500 HY-RPCF
STARTERS INVERTERS SOFT STARTERS COSΦ REGULATORS
PAGE 114 PAGE 117 PAGE 120 PAGE 123
CATALOGUE 2020

500W SET ULTRACELL 100Ah HALF CUT CELL RAILS

SOLAR POWER BATTERIES SOLAR PANEL MOUNTING STRUCTURE
PAGE 124 PAGE 127 PAGE 129 PAGE 131
 TIMERS, RELAYS AND MONITORING CONTROL
CONTENT www.elmarkholding.eu

INVERTERS ELECTRICAL TM 181 EL-PMT-1

SOLAR SYSTEMS GASOLINE GENERATORS TIMERS TIMERS
PAGE 148 PAGE 156 PAGE 158 PAGE 159

EL-SDT-1 CE2J MES TYPE EVT5

#N#
TIMERS DIGITAL COUNTERS TRANSFORMERS TRANSFORMERS
PAGE 162 PAGE 165 PAGE 168 PAGE 170
CONTENT

14
ELM60.2 ELM90.22 EL-ED16R DD4F-S01
RELAYS RELAYS BASES MEASUREMENT DEVICES KWH METERS
PAGE 171 PAGE 172 PAGE 176 PAGE 179
CATALOGUE 2020

AMPERE METER CSA EL-CM DR-45

ANALOGUE METERS LIMIT SWITCHES SENSORS POWER SUPPLIES
PAGE 180 PAGE 181 PAGE 188 PAGE 190
 INDUSTRIAL PLUGS, DISTRIBUTION BOXES, TERMINALS
www.elmarkholding.eu CONTENT

LW26-GS EL-2211T AD56-22-W ASW-13

ROTARY SWITCHES BUTTONS LED INDICATORS SWITCHES
PAGE 193 PAGE 197 PAGE 198 PAGE 202

ELD-G-DIN EL1-B174 MBP LTE1101J

#N#

BUTTONS LED INDICATORS BUTTONS TELPHER CONTROL WARNING LIGHTS

PAGE 203 PAGE 204 PAGE 205 PAGE 206

CONTENT
INSTALLATION

15
MS290 HT-013 HTN 2141
SIRENS INDUSTRIAL PLUGS IP44 INDUSTRIAL PLUGS IP67
PAGE 207 PAGE 208 PAGE 213
CATALOGUE 2020

EC69025 EC69025 JXF ATTIS

INDUSTRIAL BOARDS ASSEMBLED BOARDS METAL BOARDS PLASTIC BOXES
PAGE 217 PAGE 219 PAGE 225 PAGE 228
 CABLE INSTALATION SYSTEM, ACCESSORIES
CONTENT www.elmarkholding.eu

PP SERIES GTL SVS PLASTIC TRUNKING

ABS PLASTIC BOARDS NONISOLATED TUBES ISOLATED TERMINALS INSTALATION SYSTEMS
PAGE 232 PAGE 236 PAGE 238 PAGE 242

PLASTIC TRUNKING DOUBLECOAT PVC INSULATED SELF-EXTIGUISHING

#N#
AIR CONDITIONING FLEXIBLE PIPE STEEL SPIRALS CONDUIT & ACCESORIES
PAGE 248 PAGE 249 PAGE 251 PAGE 251
CONTENT

16
CABLE TRAY EARTHING ROD EARTHING STRIP ALUMINUM CONDUCTOR
METAL TRAYS & ACCESORIES LIGHTING PROTECTION LIGHTING PROTECTION LIGHTING PROTECTION
PAGE 256 PAGE 258 PAGE 260 PAGE 260
CATALOGUE 2020

EARTHING ACCESSOIRES EC350 CONSOLE BOX Ø65 B10

LIGHTING PROTECTION FLUSH MOUNTING BOXES CONSOLE BOXES WATERPROOF BOXES
PAGE 261 PAGE 264 PAGE 265 PAGE 269
 CABLES, TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu CONTENT

B 9/T DIN LTU2UK PVC INSULATING

WATERPROOF BOXES MOUNTING RAIL TERMINALS TAPES
PAGE 270 PAGE 271 PAGE 273 PAGE 280

GL MT-8 HANGING E27 ST41

#N#

HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES CABLE TIE HOLDER LAMP HOLDERS SENSORS

PAGE 282 PAGE 285 PAGE 289 PAGE 291

CONTENT
CABLES
AND
MULTIPLUGS
17
MAK - 3 4 HOLES WITH KEY CLIP
CABLE REELS MULTIPLUGS MULTIPLUGS
PAGE 296 PAGE 297 PAGE 300
CATALOGUE 2020

NYY H03VV-F NYM H05RR-F

POWER CABLES INSIDE POWER CABLES CONDUCTORS RUBBER CABLES
PAGE 305 PAGE 309 PAGE 315 PAGE 317
 TOOLS, VENTILATION
CONTENT www.elmarkholding.eu

TOOLS

UTP DRILL EL-D11 ANGLE GRINDER EL-AG01

COMMUNICATION CABLES ELECTRICAL TOOLS ELECTRICAL TOOLS
PAGE 319 PAGE 323 PAGE 324

DRILL DRIVER EL-CD51 ANGLE GRINDER EL-CAD52 BATTERY CHARGER ЕМ890G

#N#
CORDLESS TOOLS CORDLESS TOOLS CORDLESS TOOLS DIGITAL MULTIMETERS
PAGE 328 PAGE 329 PAGE 329 PAGE 330
CONTENT

18
INFRARED EL-1805 CRIMPING CRIMPING
TEMPERATURE METERS VOLTAGE TESTER HAND TOOLS HYDRAULIC TOOLS
PAGE 335 PAGE 337 PAGE 339 PAGE 341
CATALOGUE 2020

INSULATED 1000V NON-INSULATED PLASTIC CHROME PLATING

HAND TOOLS HAND TOOLS CUTTER KNIFES TAPE MEASURE
PAGE 344 PAGE 348 PAGE 358 PAGE 361
 DOORBELS, SMART HOME CONTROL
www.elmarkholding.eu CONTENT

CUTTING CROSS HEAD WORK GLOVES PLASTIC ORGANIZER

DISCS DRILLS SAFETY ACCESSORIES TOOLS BOXES
PAGE 362 PAGE 365 PAGE 369 PAGE 371

AA & AAA ZOOM FLASHLIGHT SCREWS ANCHORS

#N#

BATTERIES WORKS & HOBBY LIGHTS FIXINGS & FASTENERS FIXINGS & FASTENERS
PAGE 372 PAGE 374 PAGE 377 PAGE 384

CONTENT
19
PLUGS STEEL STRAP GRAPHITE MASTIC BITUM SEALANT
FIXINGS & FASTENERS FIXINGS & FASTENERS FIXINGS & FASTENERS FIXINGS & FASTENERS
PAGE 387 PAGE 392 PAGE 393 PAGE 396
CATALOGUE 2020

VENTILATION

ALS SILENT PAS HPIWF3

DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS INDUSTRIAL FANS INDUSTRIAL FANS
PAGE 403 PAGE 407 PAGE 409
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS, DECORATIVE LIGHTING
CONTENT www.elmarkholding.eu

ELECTRIC
WATER
HEATERS
AIR CONDUIT ALUMINUM END GRILLE REVISION OPENING PVC
ACCESSORIES FOR FANS ACCESSORIES FOR FANS ACCESSORIES FOR FANS
PAGE 410 PAGE 412 PAGE 415

BILIGHT BELLISLIMO MODECO CLOUD COMPACT

#N#
WATER HEATER WATER HEATER WATER HEATER WATER HEATER
PAGE 417 PAGE 419 PAGE 421 PAGE 423
CONTENT

HEATING
APPLIANCES
20
PANEL COVECTORS FAN HEATERS BATHROOM HEATERS
HEATING APPLIANCES HEATING APPLIANCES HEATING APPLIANCES
PAGE 425 PAGE 427 PAGE 428
CATALOGUE 2020

SMART
HOME
CONTROL
4 ZONES SWITCH RF DIMMER SWITCH WIFI SMART SOCKET
SMART HOME CONTROL SMART HOME CONTROL SMART HOME CONTROL
PAGE 432 PAGE 438 PAGE 439
 DECORATIVE LIGHTING
www.elmarkholding.eu CONTENT

WIFI 4 CHANEL SWITCH Wi-Fi SMART CAMERA INFRARED ALARM SENSOR VIDEO DOOR PHONE
SMART HOME CONTROL SMART HOME CONTROL SMART HOME CONTROL SMART HOME CONTROL
PAGE 442 PAGE 449 PAGE 450 PAGE 451

DOORBELLS

DOORBELL DOORBELL WITH SENSOR BELL TRANSFORMER

#N#

WIRELESS DOORBELLS WIRELESS DOORBELLS WIRELESS DOORBELLS

PAGE 454 PAGE 458 PAGE 459

CONTENT
SWITCHES
AND
SOCKETS
21
CITY SERIES LECCE SERIES RHYME SERIES
SWITCHES & SOCKETS SWITCHES & SOCKETS SWITCHES & SOCKETS
PAGE 462 PAGE 470 PAGE 485
CATALOGUE 2020

DECORATIVE
LIGHTING

WATER HEATER SWITCH WATERPROOF MARCELLA

SWITCHES SWITCHES & SOCKETS MODERN
PAGE 490 PAGE 493 PAGE 497
ELECTRICAL
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

С4XN
number of poles (1,2,3)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C40N 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

breaking capacity in (kA)

tripping curve C FUNCTIONS: • Maximum current release containing:
CX rated current in (A) • protection of the electrical circuits from overload or Ì copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
tripping curve С short circuits of the outer circuit Ì resistance: from 0.6 to 180m
• it can be used as a device for commutation and Ì welding effort: <150 000 N/mm
Documents corresponding to control of electrical circuits Ì bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180
the product: • in combination with auxiliary devices it allows depending on the current
Standard EN60898-1 remote control, commutation or indication of the Ì thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to
EN60947-2 protected circuit 63A)
• for mounting in residential and industrial buildings Ì magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated
• for mounting at a distance from the transformer post metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
from 150 to 850 m Ì thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
• allows protection of consumers generating short Ì drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm
circuit currents up to 4500 A Ì contact head of the movable contact –
composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
TECHNICAL DATA: Ì dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up
• Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz to 63A)
• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with Ì static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
standard EN 60 898-1: 4500A Ì composition of the contact head: silver graphite
• Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu CAg(5)
• Isolating voltage:≥2000V • Power supply (conducting)
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 4000 Ì power supply busbar 1P63, 2P63, 3P63
• Mechanical (number of cycles): 20000 Ì rigid conductors up to 25 mm
• Class of current limiting:3 Ì flexible conductors up to 16 mm
• IP code: IP>20 • Tightening moment:1.33Nm
• Tripping:
Ì C – the maximum current release breaks between MOUNTING:
5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply • vertical
cables and conventional consumers • DIN-rail
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with • for mounting in housing or industrial environment
composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235– A without serious interference
• Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon • ambient temperature: -5°C to + 65°C±2° C
PA66, UV rays wear resistance
• Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the
outer parts: 960°C / 3s

AUTOMATION
1P 2P 3P
35
Dimensions (mm)
C D1 D2 D3 H1
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

5 40 65 72 78
H2 W1 W2 W3 W4
45 18 36 54 72
 AUTOMATION
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Number Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
of poles current In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) category Curve C
C41N / 2A 1P 2 4.5 1.0 12/240 B 41660C
C41N / 4A 1P 4 4.5 1.0 12/240 B 41661C
C41N / 6A 1P 6 4.5 1.0 12/240 B 41651C
C41N / 10A 1P 10 4.5 1.5 12/240 B 41652C
C41N / 16A 1P 16 4.5 2.5 12/240 B 41653C
C41N / 20A 1P 20 4.5 2.5 12/240 B 41654C
C41N / 25A 1P 25 4.5 4.0 12/240 B 41655C
C41N / 32A 1P 32 4.5 6.0 12/240 B 41656C
C41N / 40A 1P 40 4.5 10.0 12/240 B 41657C
C41N / 50A 1P 50 4.5 10.0 12/240 B 41658C
C41N / 63A 1P 63 4.5 10.0 12/240 B 41659C

Type Number Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
of poles current In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) category Curve C
C42N / 6A 2P 6 4.5 1.0 6/120 B 41670C
C42N / 10A 2P 10 4.5 1.5 6/120 B 41671C
C42N / 16A 2P 16 4.5 2.5 6/120 B 41672C
C42N / 20A 2P 20 4.5 2.5 6/120 B 41673C
C42N / 25A 2P 25 4.5 4.0 6/120 B 41674C
C42N / 32A 2P 32 4.5 6.0 6/120 B 41675C
C42N / 40A 2P 40 4.5 10.0 6/120 B 41676C
C42N / 50A 2P 50 4.5 10.0 6/120 B 41677C
C42N / 63A 2P 63 4.5 10.0 6/120 B 41678C
AUTOMATION

Type Number Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
of poles current In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) category Curve C
C43N / 6A 3P 6 4.5 1.0 4/80 B 41641C
36 C43N / 10A 3P 10 4.5 1.5 4/80 B 41642C
C43N / 16A 3P 16 4.5 2.5 4/80 B 41643C
C43N / 20A 3P 20 4.5 2.5 4/80 B 41644C
C43N / 25A 3P 25 4.5 4.0 4/80 B 41645C
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

C43N / 32A 3P 32 4.5 6.0 4/80 B 41646C

C43N / 40A 3P 40 4.5 10.0 4/80 B 41647C
C43N / 50A 3P 50 4.5 10.0 4/80 B 41648C
C43N / 63A 3P 63 4.5 10.0 4/80 B 41649C
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

С6XN
number of poles (1,2,3,4)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C60N 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

breaking capacity in (kA)

tripping curve C FUNCTIONS: • Heat resistance of internal non-electrical
CX rated current in (A) • protection of the electrical circuits from overload or components: 850°С / 10 s
tripping curve С,B short circuits of the outer circuit • Maximum current release containing:
• it can be used as a device for commutation and Ì coil: solenoid
Documents corresponding to control of electrical circuits Ì resistance: from 0.6 to 180m
the product: • in combination with auxiliary devices it allows Ì welding effort: <150 000 N/mm
Standard EN60898-1 remote control, commutation or indication of the Ì bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180
protected circuit depending on the current
• for mounting in industrial buildings with high Ì thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to
contamination level of the electric systems 63A)
• for mounting at a distance from the transformer post Ì thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
from 150 to 850 m Ì drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm
• allows protection of consumers generating short Ì contact head of the movable contact –
circuit currents up to 6000 A composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
Ì dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up
TECHNICAL DATA: to 63A)
• Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz Ì static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with Ì composition of the contact head: silver graphite
standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A CAg(5)
• Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu • Power supply (conducting)
• Isolating voltage:≥2000V Ì power supply busbar 1P63, 2P63, 3P63
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 8000 Ì rigid conductors up to 25 mm
• Mechanical (number of cycles): 50000 Ì flexible conductors up to 16 mm
• Class of current limiting: 3 • Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
• IP code: IP>20
• Tripping curve: MOUNTING:
Ì B – the maximum current release breaks between • vertical
3 and 5 In; used to protect long circuits and • DIN-rail
generators • for mounting in housing or industrial environment
Ì C – the maximum current release breaks between without serious interference
5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply • ambient temperature: -5°C to + 65°C±2° C
cables and conventional consumers
• Joining terminal: Combined screw clamp made of
1.5 cold extruded Q235-A material with additional
coating

AUTOMATION
• Plastic box – nylon glass filled FR material
• Status indicator
• Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
1P 2P 3P 4P
• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the
outer parts: 960°C / 3s

37

Dimensions (mm)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

C D1 D2 D3 H1
5 50 65 72 81
H2 W1 W2 W3 W4
45 18 36 54 72

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Number Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
of poles current capacity conductor (pcs) category Curve C Curve B
In (A) (kA) (mm²)
C61N / 1A 1P 1 6 1.0 12/240 B 41100C 41501C
C61N / 2A 1P 2 6 1.0 12/240 B 41102C 41502C
C61N / 4A 1P 4 6 1.0 12/240 B 41104C 41504C
C61N / 6A 1P 6 6 1.0 12/240 B 41106C 41506C
C61N / 10A 1P 10 6 1.5 12/240 B 41110C 41510C
C61N / 16A 1P 16 6 2.5 12/240 B 41116C 41516C
C61N / 20A 1P 20 6 2.5 12/240 B 41120C 41520C
C61N / 25A 1P 25 6 4.0 12/240 B 41125C 41525C
C61N / 32A 1P 32 6 6.0 12/240 B 41132C 41532C
C61N / 40A 1P 40 6 10.0 12/240 B 41140C 41540C
C61N / 50A 1P 50 6 10.0 12/240 B 41150C 41550C
C61N / 63A 1P 63 6 10.0 12/240 B 41163C 41563C

Type Number Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
of poles current capacity conductor (mm²) (pcs) category Curve C Curve B
In (A) (kA)
C62N / 2A 2P 2 6 1.0 6/120 B C 41602C
C62N / 4A 2P 4 6 1.0 6/120 B 41204C 41604C
C62N / 6A 2P 6 6 1.0 6/120 B 41206C 41606C
C62N / 10A 2P 10 6 1.5 6/120 B 41210C 41610C
C62N / 16A 2P 16 6 2.5 6/120 B 41216C 41616C
C62N / 20A 2P 20 6 2.5 6/120 B 41220C 41620C
C62N / 25A 2P 25 6 4.0 6/120 B 41225C 41625C
C62N / 32A 2P 32 6 6.0 6/120 B 41232C 41632C
C62N / 40A 2P 40 6 10.0 6/120 B 41240C 41640C
AUTOMATION

C62N / 50A 2P 50 6 10.0 6/120 B 41250C 41650C

C62N / 63A 2P 63 6 10.0 6/120 B 41263C 41663C

38
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

Type Number Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
of poles current capacity conductor (pcs) category Curve C Curve B
In (A) (kA) (mm²)
C63N / 2A 3P 2 6 1.0 4/80 B 41302C 41702C
C63N / 4A 3P 4 6 1.0 4/80 B 41304C 41704C
C63N / 6A 3P 6 6 1.0 4/80 B 41306C 41706C
C63N / 10A 3P 10 6 1.5 4/80 B 41310C 41710C
C63N / 16A 3P 16 6 2.5 4/80 B 41316C 41716C
C63N / 20A 3P 20 6 2.5 4/80 B 41320C 41720C
C63N / 25A 3P 25 6 4.0 4/80 B 41325C 41725C
C63N / 32A 3P 32 6 6.0 4/80 B 41332C 41732C
C63N / 40A 3P 40 6 10.0 4/80 B 41340C 41740C
C63N / 50A 3P 50 6 10.0 4/80 B 41350C 41750C
C63N / 63A 3P 63 6 10.0 4/80 B 41363C 41763C

Type Number Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
of poles current capacity conductor (pcs) category Curve C Curve B
In (A) (kA) (mm²)
C64N / 2A 4P 2 6 1.0 3/60 B 41402C 41802C
C64N / 4A 4P 4 6 1.0 3/60 B 41404C 41804C
C64N / 6A 4P 6 6 1.0 3/60 B 41406C 41806C
C64N / 10A 4P 10 6 1.5 3/60 B 41410C 41810C
C64N / 16A 4P 16 6 2.5 3/60 B 41416C 41816C
C64N / 20A 4P 20 6 2.5 3/60 B 41420C 41820C
C64N / 25A 4P 25 6 4.0 3/60 B 41425C 41825C
C64N / 32A 4P 32 6 6.0 3/60 B 41432C 41832C
C64N / 40A 4P 40 6 10.0 3/60 B 41440C 41840C
C64N / 50A 4P 50 6 10.0 3/60 B 41450C 41850C

AUTOMATION
C64N / 63A 4P 63 6 10.0 3/60 B 41463C 41863C

39
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)
 AUTOMATION
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) www.elmarkholding.eu

С10XL
number of poles (1,2,3)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C100L 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

breaking capacity in (kA)

tripping curve B, C FUNCTIONS: ≥20000
CX rated current in (A) • protection of the electrical circuits from overload or • Class of current limiting:3
tripping curve C, B short circuits of the outer circuit • IP code: IP>20
• it can be used as a device for commutation and • Tripping curve: C
Documents corresponding to control of electrical circuits
the product: • in combination with auxiliary devices it allows MOUNTING:
Standard EN60898-1 remote control, commutation or indication of the • vertical
EN60947-2 protected circuit • DIN-rail
• possibility for labeling
TECHNICAL DATA:
• Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with
standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A
• Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
• Isolating volatage:≥2000V, 1 min at impulse wave
1.2/50μs
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000 1P 2P 3P

• Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):

Type Number Rated current Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
of poles In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) (pcs) category Curve C Curve B
C101L/6A 1P 6 10 1.0 12 / 240 B 41101C 41101C/B
C101L/10A 1P 10 10 1.5 12 / 240 B 41103C 41103C/B
C101L/16A 1P 16 10 2.5 12 / 240 B 41105C 41105C/B
C101L/20A 1P 20 10 2.5 12 / 240 B 41107C 41107C/B
C101L/25A 1P 25 10 4.0 12 / 240 B 41108C 41108C/B
C101L/32A 1P 32 10 6.0 12 / 240 B 41109C 41109C/B
C101L/40A 1P 40 10 10.0 12 / 240 B 41111C 41111C/B
C101L/50A 1P 50 10 10.0 12 / 240 B 41112C 41112C/B
C101L/63A 1P 63 10 16.0 12 / 240 B 41113C 41113C/B
AUTOMATION

Type Number Rated current Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
40 of poles In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) (pcs) category Curve C Curve B
C102L/6A 2P 6 10 1.0 6/120 B 41201C 41201C/B
C102L/10A 2P 10 10 1.5 6/120 B 41203C 41203C/B
C102L/16A 2P 16 10 2.5 6/120 B 41205C 41205C/B
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

C102L/20A 2P 20 10 2.5 6/120 B 41207C 41207C/B

C102L/25A 2P 25 10 4.0 6/120 B 41208C 41208C/B
C102L/32A 2P 32 10 6.0 6/120 B 41209C 41209C/B
C102L/40A 2P 40 10 10.0 6/120 B 41211C 41211C/B
C102L/50A 2P 50 10 10.0 6/120 B 41212C 41212C/B
C102L/63A 2P 63 10 16.0 6/120 B 41213C 41213C/B

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

Type Number Rated current Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
of poles In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) (pcs) category Curve C Curve B
C103L/6A 3P 6 10 1.0 4 / 80 B 41301C 41301C/B
C103L/10A 3P 10 10 1.5 4 / 80 B 41303C 41303C/B
C103L/16A 3P 16 10 2.5 4 / 80 B 41305C 41305C/B
C103L/20A 3P 20 10 2.5 4 / 80 B 41307C 41307C/B
C103L/25A 3P 25 10 4.0 4 / 80 B 41308C 41308C/B
C103L/32A 3P 32 10 6.0 4 / 80 B 41309C 41309C/B
C103L/40A 3P 40 10 10.0 4 / 80 B 41311C 41311C/B
C103L/50A 3P 50 10 10.0 4 / 80 B 41312C 41312C/B
C103L/63A 3P 63 10 16.0 4 / 80 B 41313C 41313C/B

Type Number Rated current Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
of poles In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) (pcs) category Curve C Curve B
C104L/6A 4P 6 10 1.0 3/60 B 41401C 41401C/B
C104L/10A 4P 10 10 1.5 3/60 B 41403C 41403C/B
C104L/16A 4P 16 10 2.5 3/60 B 41405C 41405C/B
C104L/20A 4P 20 10 2.5 3/60 B 41407C 41407C/B
C104L/25A 4P 25 10 4.0 3/60 B 41408C 41408C/B
C104L/32A 4P 32 10 6.0 3/60 B 41409C 41409C/B
C104L/40A 4P 40 10 10.0 3/60 B 41411C 41411C/B
C104L/50A 4P 50 10 10.0 3/60 B 41412C 41412C/B
C104L/63A 4P 63 10 16.0 3/60 B 41413C 41413C/B

AUTOMATION
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS DP1N (1P + E) 7+0
standard
YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
+extended

FUNCTIONS: • Rated breaking capacity Ics = 50% Icu

• protection of the electrical circuits from overload or • Insulating voltage: ≥2000V
short circuit of the outer circuit • Tripping curve: C – the maximum current release
• it can be used as a device for commutation and breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main
control of electrical circuits power supply
• it breaks simultaneously the lead and the neutral • cables and conventional consumers
conductor as the heat protection is only at the lead 41
conductor CONNECTING:
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
TECHNICAL DATA: • Power supply (conducting):
• Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz Ì power supply busbar DP1N
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with Ì flexible or rigid conductor

standard EN 60 898-1: 4500 A • Mounting: on DIN-rail

Type Rated current In (A) Breaking capacity Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
(kA) conductor (mm²) (pcs) category Curve C
DP1N / 6 6 4.5 1.0 12 / 240 B 41006
DP1N / 10 10 4.5 1.5 12 / 240 B 41010
DP1N / 16 16 4.5 2.5 12 / 240 B 41016
DP1N / 20 20 4.5 2.5 12 / 240 B 41020
DP1N / 25 25 4.5 4.0 12 / 240 B 41025
DP1N / 32 32 4.5 6.0 12 / 240 B 41032

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) www.elmarkholding.eu

С100M constructive series

number of poles (1;2;3;4)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C100M 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

DX rated current FUNCTIONS: Ì bimetal plate – composition: TB180/0.5

tripping curve С, D, B • protection of the electrical circuits from overload or Ì thickness: 0.8mm
short circuits of the outer circuit Ì magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated
Documents corresponding to • it can be used as a device for commutation and metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
the product: control of electrical circuits Ì thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
Standard EN60898-1 • in combination with auxiliary devices it allows Ì drawing effort: 20N/mm²
EN 60947-2 remote control, commutation or indication of the Ì contact head of the movable contact –
protected circuit composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
Ì dimension 6x6x1
TECHNICAL DATA: Ì static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
• Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz Ì composition of the contact head: silver graphite
• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with CAg(5)
standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A • Power supply (conducting)
• Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu Ì power supply busbar
• Isolating volatage:≥2000V Ì rigid conductors up to 50
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000 Ì flexible conductors up to 35
• Mechanical wear resistance (number of • Tightening moment:1.33Nm
cycles):≥20000
• Class of current limiting:3 MOUNTING:
• IP code: IP>20 • vertical
• Tripping curve: C,D • DIN-rail
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with • possibility for labeling
composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 – A • for mounting in industrial environment
• Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon • ambient temperature: -5°C to + 65°C±2° C
PA66, UV rays wear resistance
• Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the
outer parts: 960°C / 3s
• Maximum current release containing:
Ì copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
Ì resistance: from 148 to 230m
Ì welding effort: <400 N/
1P 2P 3P 4P
AUTOMATION

42
Dimensions (mm)
C D1 D2 D3 H1
5 50 65 74 45
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

H2 W1 W2 W3 W4
81 27 54 81 108

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

Type Number of Rated current Breaking capacity Packing/Box Product Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue
poles In (A) (kA) (pcs) category number number number
Curve B Curve C Curve D
C100M 1P 80 10 9 / 180 B 41180B 41180 41180D
C100M 1P 100 10 9 / 180 B 41190B 41190 41190D
C100M 1P 125 10 9 / 180 B 41195B 41195 41195D

Type Number of Rated current Breaking capacity Packing/Box Product Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue
poles In (A) (kA) (pcs) category number number number
Curve B Curve C Curve D
C100M 2P 80 10 6 / 120 B 41282 41280 41281
C100M 2P 100 10 6 / 120 B 41292 41290 41291

Type Number of Rated current Breaking capacity Packing/Box Product Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue
poles In (A) (kA) (pcs) category number number number
Curve B Curve C Curve D
C100M 3P 80 10 4 / 60 B 41382 41380 41381
C100M 3P 100 10 4 / 60 B 41392 41390 41391

AUTOMATION
Type Number of Rated current Breaking capacity Packing/Box Product Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue
poles In (A) (kA) (pcs) category number number number
Curve B Curve C Curve D 43
C100M 4P 80 10 3 / 60 B 41482 41480 41481
C100M 4P 100 10 3 / 60 B 41492 41490 41491 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) www.elmarkholding.eu

C6XDC
number of poles (1,2)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C60DC 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

breaking capacity in (kA)

tripping curve C FUNCTIONS: Ì thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
CX rated current in (A) • for lowering constant current voltaic arc and use of Ì drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm
tripping curve С the breaker at constant current consumer protection Ì contact head of the movable contact –
• protection of the electrical circuits from overload or composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
Documents corresponding to short circuit of the outer circuit at alternating current Ì dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up
the product: and constant current power supply circuits to 63A)
Standard EN60898-1 • for commutation and control of electrical circuits Ì static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
EN60898-2 • in combination with auxiliary alternating current Ì composition of the contact head: silver graphite
devices for remote control, commutation or indication CAg(5)
of the protected circuit Ì metal magnetic plate for lowering the constant
• for mounting in industrial buildings current arc
• for protection of consumers generating short circuit • Conducting:
currents to 6000 A at alternating current power supply Ì power supply busbar 1P63, 2P63
Ì rigid conductors up to 25 mm
TECHNICAL DATA: Ì flexible conductors up to 16 mm
• Rated voltage: 240V; AC/DC • Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
• Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with
standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A MOUNTING
• Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu • vertical
• Insulating voltage: ≥2000V • DIN-rail
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥4000 • for mounting in housing or industrial environment
• Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): without serious current interference
≥20000 • Ambient temperature: -5°C to + 65°C±2° C
• Class of current limiting: 3
• IP code: IP>20
• Tripping curve: C – the maximum current release
breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect power
supply cables and conventional consumers
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with
composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235– A
• Plastic box – nylon glass filled FR material 1P 2P
• Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the
outer parts: 960°C / 3s
• Maximum current release containing:
AUTOMATION

Dimensions (mm)
Ì Coil: solenoid
C D1 D2 D3 Ì resistance: from 0.6 to 180m
5 49 65 72 Ì welding effort: <150 000 N/mm
H1 H2 W1 W2 Ì bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180
78 45 18 36 according to the current
Ì thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to
63A)

44
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

Type Number of Rated current Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
poles In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) (pcs) category Curve C
C61DC / 1A 1P 1 6 1.0 12/240 B 41164C
C61DC / 2A 1P 2 6 1.0 12/240 B 41165C
C61DC / 4A 1P 4 6 1.0 12/240 B 41166C
C61DC / 6A 1P 6 6 1.0 12/240 B 41167C
C61DC / 10A 1P 10 6 1.5 12/240 B 41168C
C61DC / 16A 1P 16 6 2.5 12/240 B 41169C
C61DC / 20A 1P 20 6 2.5 12/240 B 41170C
C61DC / 25A 1P 25 6 4.0 12/240 B 41171C
C61DC / 32A 1P 32 6 6.0 12/240 B 41172C
C61DC / 40A 1P 40 6 10.0 12/240 B 41173C
C61DC / 50A 1P 50 6 10.0 12/240 B 41174C
C61DC / 63A 1P 63 6 10.0 12/240 B 41175C

Type Number of Rated current Breaking Recommended Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
poles In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) (pcs) category Curve C
C62DC / 2A 2P 2 6 1.0 6/120 B 41176C
C62DC / 4A 2P 4 6 1.0 6/120 B 41177C
C62DC / 6A 2P 6 6 1.0 6/120 B 41178C
C62DC / 10A 2P 10 6 1.5 6/120 B 41179C
C62DC / 16A 2P 16 6 2.5 6/120 B 41181C
C62DC / 20A 2P 20 6 2.5 6/120 B 41182C
C62DC / 25A 2P 25 6 4.0 6/120 B 41183C

AUTOMATION
45
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)
 AUTOMATION
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to SINGLE POLE MONITORING VOLTAGE

the product:
EN 60255-1; IEC60947-5-1 RELAY MN1
7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

FUNCTIONS: • Time dalay: 0.1-10s adjustable

• Protect electrical equipment from over & under • Reset time: 0.2 sec max
voltage • Current ratting: 3A/AC-15
• Voltage measurement accuracy <1% • Mechanical life: 1X10⁷
• Relay status is indicated by LED • Electrical life: 1X10⁵
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS: • Ambiente temperature: -10C°/+55C°
• Rated voltage: 220V AC; 50/60Hz • Dimensions: 90x18x64mm
• Hysteresis: 0-20% adjustable • Mounting: on DIN rail
Type Rated voltage Hysteresis Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
ELMARK MN1 220V AC 0-20% adjustable 12 / 240 B 41900

Documents corresponding to THREE POLE MONITORING VOLTAGE

the product:
EN 60255-1; IEC60947-5-1 RELAY MN3
7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

FUNCTIONS: • Time dalay: 0.1-10s adjustable

• Protect electrical equipment from over & under • Reset time: 0.2 sec max
voltage • Current ratting: 3A/AC-15
• Voltage measurement accuracy <1% • Mechanical life: 1X10⁷
• Relay status is indicated by LED • Electrical life: 1X10⁵
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS: • Ambiente temperature: -10C°/+55C°
• Rated voltage: 415V AC; 50/60Hz • Dimensions: 90x18x64mm
• Hysteresis: 0-20% adjustable • Mounting: on DIN rail
Type Rated voltage Hysteresis Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
AUTOMATION

ELMARK MN3 415V AC 0-20% adjustable 12 / 240 B 41927

46
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SINGLE-PHASE DIGITAL VOLTAGE

AND CURRENT PROTECTOR
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Power consumption: ≤ 1.5W

• Under-voltage protection • Mechanical life: 100 000
• Over-voltage protection • Relative humidity: 45-90% Rh
• Over-current protection • Altitude: up to 2000m
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS: • Pollution level: 2 class
• Operated voltage range: 80-400V AC; 50/60Hz ( • Dimensions: 36x80x66mm
Single-phase) • Mounting: on DIN rail
• Rated current: 63A FACTORY SETTING:
• Over-voltage protection value: 230-300V AC • Over-voltage trip value: 270V
• Under-voltage protection value: 140-230VAC • Under-voltage trip value: 170V
• Over-current protection value: 1-63A • Over-current trip value: 63A
• Voltage power off time: 0-400s • Voltage power off time: 2s
• Current power off time: 0-30s • Starting delay time: 2s
• Voltage range setting step: 1V • Current power off time: 2s
• Time range setting step: 1s
Type Rated Over-voltage Under-voltage Over-current Packing/ Product Catalogue number
voltage protection range protection range protection range Box (pcs) category
ELMARK MN4 220V AC 230-300V AC 140-230V AC 1-63A 1/100 B 41906

THREE-PHASE DIGITAL VOLTAGE

AND CURRENT PROTECTOR
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Power consumption: ≤ 1.5W

• Under-voltage protection • Mechanical life: 100 000
• Over-voltage protection • Relative humidity: 45-90% Rh

AUTOMATION
• Over-current protection • Altitude: up to 2000m
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS: • Pollution level: 2 class
• Operated voltage range: 140-500V AC; 50/60Hz ( • Dimensions: 72x80x66mm
Three-phase) • Mounting: on DIN rail
• Rated current: 63A FACTORY SETTING:
• Over-voltage protection value: 390-500V AC • Over-voltage trip value: 420V
• Under-voltage protection value: 140-370VAC • Under-voltage trip value: 210V
• Over-current protection value: 1-63A • Over-current trip value: 63A
• Voltage power off time: 0-400s • Voltage power off time: 2s
• Starting delay time: 2s 47
• Current power off time: 0-30s
• Voltage range setting step: 1V • Current power off time: 2s
• Time range setting step: 1s AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type Rated Over-voltage Under-voltage Over-current Packing/ Product Catalogue number
voltage protection range protection range protection range Box (pcs) category
ELMARK MN4 400V AC 390-500V AC 140-370V AC 1-63A 1/50 B 41907
 AUTOMATION
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Type designation:
МN - constructive series
COMBINED VOLTAGE CIRCUIT-BREAKER МN2 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

number of poles - 1
Documents corresponding FUNCTIONS: • IP code: IP>20
to the product: • when the voltage is reduced below 170V operation is CONNECTION METHOD:
Standard EN60898-1 initiated and the automatic switch is turned off
• Double connector: flat (tunnel) screw connector
• when the voltage is increased above 280V operation
is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off • Conductors: flexible up to 1.5mm²
• allows manual turning on of the switch after • Tightening moment of the screw: 1.33Nm
powering is restored MOUNTING:
• indication of the position of the device • vertical, by means of two pins attached to the rivets
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS: of the circuit-breaker, while the operating mechanism
• Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz is connected to the switching off mechanism of the
• Insulation voltage: ≥2000V circuit breaker after the sealing lid is demounted
Type Rated voltage Type breaker Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
ELMARK MN 2 60 230V С60 12 / 240 F 41909

SHUNT RELEASE MX 7+0

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

FUNCTIONS: • Conductors: flexible up to 1.5mm²

• remote circuit breaker switching off at voltage feed • Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
• allows manual switching on of the breaker at voltage • The power supply of the release is accomplished at
recovery the outlet of the breaker
• indication of the device’s location MOUNTING:
TECHNICAL DATA: • vertical, clamps with two pins to the breaker’s rivets
• Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz and the executive mechanism is joined up to the
• Isolating voltage: ≥2000V
switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting
• IP code: IP>20
the seal cover
CONNECTING:
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal

Type Rated voltage Type breaker Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
AUTOMATION

ELMARK MX 60 230V С60 12 / 240 B 41902C

48
AUXILIARY CONTACT OF 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

FUNCTIONS: CONNECTING:
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

• at circuit breaker switching off it sends a signal to the • Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
control or signalization system • Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up
• indication of the location of the auxiliary contact and to 1.5mm
the breaker MOUNTING:
TECHNICAL DATA: • vertical, clamps with two pins to breaker’s rivets, and
• Rated voltage: 230V the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching
• Isolating voltage: ≥2000V mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal
• IP code: IP>20 cover

Type Rated voltage Type breaker Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
ELMARK OF 60 230V С60 12 / 240 B 41901C

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Documents corresponding to the

product:
BASES FOR HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60269-1
The series bases for high power safety device is manufactured of permitivity alloy with mounted contact jaws
of electrolytic copper supplied with special springs for contact compression and easy fuse links taking out. All
current leading parts are connected to inlet outlet terminals with bolts; the terminals also end with bolts, to which
the power supply conductors are connected. The bases are offered in five type sizes corresponding to the five
types of fuse links.
Remark : Fuse bases SIST are made of resin / Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

Base type Overall dimensions (mm)

А1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C1 C2 Ød
SIST00 25 100 120 - 30 25 60 7.5
SIST 0 25 150 170 - 30 37 72 7.5
SIST1 25 175 200 30 58 38 84 10.5
SIST2 25 200 225 30 60 38 100 10.5
SIST3 25 210 250 30 60 40 105 10.5

Base type Fuse link type Rated current (А) Rated voltage Weight Packing / Box Product Catalogue
Un (V) (gr) (pcs) category number
SIST00 NТ 00 up to 160 600 193 5 / 120 B 12001

Base type Fuse link type Rated current (А) Rated voltage Weight Packing / Box Product Catalogue
Un (V) (gr) (pcs) category number
SIST0 NТ 0 up to 160 600 295 3 / 54 B 12010

Base type Fuse link type Rated current (А) Rated voltage Weight Packing / Box Product Catalogue

AUTOMATION
Un (V) (gr) (pcs) category number
SIST1 NТ 1 up to 250 600 550 3 / 36 B 12100

Base type Fuse link type Rated current (А) Rated voltage
Un (V)
Weight
(gr)
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Product Catalogue
category number
49
SIST2 NТ 2 up to 400 600 770 1 / 20 B 12200
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Base type Fuse link type Rated current (А) Rated voltage Weight Packing / Box Product Catalogue
Un (V) (gr) (pcs) category number
SIST3 NТ 3 up to 630 600 965 1 / 20 B 12300

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
FUSE LINKS FOR HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICE 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60269-1
EN 60269-2 The series fuse links for high power safety devices TWO OPERATING CLASSES OF NH FUSES ARE
is designed for short circuit protection. They are AVAILABLE:
distinguished with high speed of operation and high • Operating class gL/gG – general purpose, line
reliability. The element is a ceramic (porcelain) body protection, slow acting
filled with fine quartz sand for voltaic arc lowering.
In the ceramic body is mounted a fusible, specially TECHNICAL DATA:
profiled wafer connecting the current leading • Rated voltage: 500V
terminals. These terminals are manufactured of copper • Rated short circuit current: 120 kA
alloy with special nickel coating and have the form of • IP code: IP 00
knives to provide more contact surface. The fuse links • Ambient temperature: -5 to +65°C
correspond to “gL – gG” class which means that they • Altitude: up to 2000m
are with common function and normal response time.
NH Fuses

Base type Overall dimensions (mm)

А B C D H
NT00 78 40 15 29 56.5
NT 0 125 68 15 29 56.5
NT1 135 68 21 48 62
NT 2 150 68 27 58 72
NT 3 150 68 33 67 84.5
NT00C 78 40 15 21 56,5
NT1C 135 68 21 29 62
NT2C 150 68 33 48 84,5

Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
NT00 16 500,600 3 / 90 B 10001
NT00 25 500,600 3 / 90 B 10002
NT00 32 500,600 3 / 90 B 10003
NT00 40 500,600 3 / 90 B 10004
NT00 50 500,600 3 / 90 B 10005
NT00 63 500,600 3 / 90 B 10006
AUTOMATION

NT00 80 500,600 3 / 90 B 10008

NT00 100 500,600 3 / 90 B 10009
NT00 125 500,600 3 / 90 B 10012
NT00 160 500,600 3 / 90 B 10016

50

Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

NT0 16 500,600 3 / 90 B 10015

NT0 25 500,600 3 / 90 B 10025
NT0 32 500,600 3 / 90 B 10032
NT0 40 500,600 3 / 90 B 10040
NT0 50 500,600 3 / 90 B 10050
NT0 63 500,600 3 / 90 B 10063
NT0 80 500,600 3 / 90 B 10080
NT0 100 500,600 3 / 90 B 10090
NT0 125 500,600 3 / 90 B 10092
NT0 160 500,600 3 / 90 B 10096

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
NT1 80 500,600 3 / 36 B 10108
NT1 100 500,600 3 / 36 B 10110
NT1 125 500,600 3 / 36 B 10112
NT1 160 500,600 3 / 36 B 10116
NT1 200 500,600 3 / 36 B 10120
NT1 225 500,600 3 / 36 B 10122
NT1 250 500,600 3 / 36 B 10125

Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
NT2 160 500,600 1 / 24 B 10216
NT2 200 500,600 1 / 24 B 10220
NT2 250 500,600 1 / 24 B 10225
NT2 315 500,600 1 / 24 B 10231
NT2 400 500,600 1 / 24 B 10240

Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
NT3 500 500,600 1 / 24 B 10350
NT3 630 500,600 1 / 24 B 10363

AUTOMATION
Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
NT00C 16 500,600 3/120 B 10001C
NT00C 25 500,600 3/120 B 10002C
NT00C 32 500,600 3/120 B 10003C
NT00C 40 500,600 3/120 B 10004C
NT00C 50 500,600 3/120 B 10005C
NT00C 63 500,600 3/120 B 10006C 51
NT00C 80 500,600 3/120 B 10008C
NT00C 100 500,600 3/120 B 10009C
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
NT1C 80 500,600 3/54 B 10108C
NT1C 100 500,600 3/54 B 10110C
NT1C 125 500,600 3/54 B 10112C
NT1C 160 500,600 3/54 B 10116C

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES www.elmarkholding.eu

Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
NT2C 160 500,600 1/30 B 10216C
NT2C 200 500,600 1/30 B 10220C
NT2C 250 500,600 1/30 B 10225C

Documents corresponding to the

product:
ISOLATING SWITCHES 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3

Designed in two types – horizontal and vertical. They TECHNICAL DATA:
represent a combination of low voltage isolating switch • Rated voltage: 500V
and high power safety devices mounted in a common • Rated short circuit current: according to the
plastic corpus. They are used for low voltage distribution mounted fuse links
boards and complete transformer substations (CTS)
where visible circuit distribution is necessary. They • Number of poles: 3
provide safety and convenience at fuse links change. • Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
The plastic corpus increases the IP code and the plastic • Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles
lid provides simultaneous circuits switching on/off. The • IP code: IP 40
lid allows easy removing which is additional measure • Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
at repairs. The vertical isolating switches are mounted • Ambient temperature: -5 to +65°C
directly to the power supply rails which enables the • Altitude: up to 2000m
exploitation and improves the safety of the staff.

Base type Overall dimensions (mm)

А B C D E
THB -160 105 160 85 45 100
THB - 250 185 220 111 66 180
THB - 400 210 260 130 88 205
THB - 630 256 270 140 94.5 245

Type In (A) Un (V) Fuse link size Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
AUTOMATION

THB 160 500, 660 NT00 1 / 18 B 44801

THB 250 500, 660 NT1 1/6 B 44802
THB 400 500, 660 NT2 1 /4 B 44803
THB 630 500, 660 NT3 1/4 B 44804

52
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Overall dimensions (mm)

А B C D E F G H W1 W2
50 99 185 290 2 57 58 746 146 195

Type In (A) Un (V) Fuse link size Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HG2B 160 500, 660 NT00 1 /4 B 44805
HG2B 250 500, 660 NT1 1 /4 B 44806
HG2B 400 500, 660 NT2 1 /4 B 44807
HG2B 630 500, 660 NT3 1 /4 B 44808

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Documents corresponding to the

product:
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS RT18 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60269-2;
IEC269-2 The series of switch disconnectors are developed for
short-circuit protection. They have a high speed of
start and high reliability. They have a plastic body of
non-flammable plastics adapted for mounting on a DIN
rail, where a porcelain round plug, which is filled with
fine quartz sand for extinguishing the electric arc. LED
indicator is mounted on the front panel to show fuse
link condition. In this ceramic body is mounted melting,
specifically profiled plate, which connects the input
power terminals. These terminals are produced from
copper alloy with especially laid nickel layer and contact
with the projecting bolts from the plastic body. There
are offered two types of insertions according to the
degree of quick operation: normally quickly operating
ones – class “gG”. Suitable for DC system.

TECHNICAL DATA: Overall dimensions

• Rated voltage: 500V
• Insulation voltage: >2500V
• Rated current on short-circuit: 100 кА
• Direct mounting to the load
• Two insulated points to the load
• IP code: IP 44
• Cross-section of the supply conductors: up to 35mm²
• Environmental temperature: -5° to +65°С
• Utization category: AC - 20B; DC - 20B
• Altitude: up to 2000m

Base type Number of Rated Type of the fuse Base dimensions (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue
poles current A B W E Box (pcs) category number
(А)
1PRT18 - 32x 1P 32 xxG1038 37 82 18 78 12 / 240 B 10RT1831
1NRT18 - 32x 1P+N 32 xxG1038 37 82 36 78 6 / 120 B 10RT18311

AUTOMATION
2PRT18 - 32x 2P 32 xxG1038 37 82 36 78 6 / 120 B 10RT1832
3PRT18 - 32x 3P 32 xxG1038 37 82 54 78 4 / 80 B 10RT1833
3NRT18 - 32x 3P+N 32 xxG1038 37 82 72 78 3 / 60 B 10RT18331
1PRT18 - 63x 1P 63 xxG1451 37 105 27 110 6 / 108 B 10RT1861
1NRT18 - 63x 1P+N 63 xxG1451 37 105 54 110 6 / 108 B 10RT18611
2PRT18 - 63x 2P 63 xxG1451 37 105 54 110 6 / 108 B 10RT1862
3PRT18 - 63x 3P 63 xxG1451 37 105 81 110 6 / 108 B 10RT1863
3NRT18 - 63x 3P+N 63 xxG1451 37 105 108 110 6 / 108 B 10RT18631
53
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES www.elmarkholding.eu

FUSE FOR SWITCH DISCONNECTORS RT18

Type of the fuse Voltage Rated current Size of the fuse Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
class gG (V) (А) A x ØB x C (pcs) category
01G1038 500 1 38xØ10.3x10mm 10 / 2000 B 10G10381
02G1038 500 2 38xØ10.3x10mm 10 / 2000 B 10G10382
04G1038 500 4 38xØ10.3x10mm 10 / 2000 B 10G10384
06G1038 500 6 38xØ10.3x10mm 10 / 2000 B 10G10386
10G1038 500 10 38xØ10.3x10mm 10 / 2000 B 10G103810
RT18 Type
16G1038 500 16 38xØ10.3x10mm 10 / 2000 B 10G103816
20G1038 500 20 38xØ10.3x10mm 10 / 2000 B 10G103820
25G1038 500 25 38xØ10.3x10mm 10 / 2000 B 10G103825
32G1038 500 32 38xØ10.3x10mm 10 / 2000 B 10G103832
40G1451 500 40 51xØ14.3x12mm 10 / 500 B 10G145140
50G1451 500 50 51xØ14.3x12mm 10 / 500 B 10G145150
63G1451 500 63 51xØ14.3x12mm 10 / 500 B 10G145163

FUSE FOR SWITCH DISCONNECTORS EL-D02

Type of the fuse Voltage Rated current Size of the fuse Product Catalogue number
class gG (V) (А) A x ØB x C category
RO 26/32 2A 500 2 Ø11x 36mm F 10R0232
RO 26/32 4A 500 4 Ø11x 36mm F 10R0234
RO 26/32 6A 500 6 Ø11x 36mm F 10R0236
AUTOMATION

RO 26/32 10A 500 10 Ø11x 36mm F 10R0240

RO 26/32 16A 500 16 Ø11x 36mm F 10R0246
RO 26/32 20A 500 20 Ø15x 36mm F 10R0248
RO 26/63 40A 500 40 Ø15x 36mm F 10R0640
EL-D02 Type RO 26/63 50A 500 50 Ø15x 36mm F 10R0650

54
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS

Documents corresponding
to the product:
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS FROM 20A
TO 125A SERIES
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-3 and IEC947-3

FUNCTIONS: • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥10000

• switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits • Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):
• breaking of electrical circuits ≥20000
• can be used as a main breaker • IP code: IP>20
• it has no protective function • Mounting: DIN-rail
• • Plastic material of UV rays
TECHNICAL DATA: • Ambient temperature: -20°C + 65°C
• Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
• Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or flexible
conductors
• Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
• Isolating voltage: ≥500V
Dimensions (mm)
H1 H2 D1 D2 D3
81 45 50 65 76
W1 W2 W3 W3
17,5 35 52,5 70

Type Number of poles Rated Recommended Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
current In (A) conductor (mm²) category
ISS 1P 40 10 12 / 240 B 41914
ISS 1P 63 16 12 / 240 B 41911
ISS 1P 80 25 12 / 240 B 41912
ISS 1P 100 35 12 / 240 B 41913

AUTOMATION
ISS 1p 125 50 12 / 240 B 41916

55
Type Number of poles Rated Recommended Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
current In (A) conductor (mm²) category
ISS 2P 40 10 6 / 120 B 41924
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS

ISS 2P 63 16 6 / 120 B 41921

ISS 2P 80 25 6 / 120 B 41922
ISS 2P 100 35 6 / 120 B 41923
ISS 2p 125 50 6 / 120 B 41925

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Number of poles Rated Recommended Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
current In (A) conductor (mm²) category
ISS 3P 20 2.5 4/80 B 41935
ISS 3P 32 6.0 4/80 B 41936
ISS 3P 40 10 4 / 80 B 41934
ISS 3P 63 16 4 / 80 B 41931
ISS 3P 80 25 4 / 80 B 41932
ISS 3P 100 35 4 / 80 B 41933
ISS 3p 125 50 4 / 80 B 41937

Type Number of poles Rated Recommended Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
current In (A) conductor (mm²) category
ISS 4P 40 10 3 / 60 B 41944
ISS 4P 63 16 3 / 60 B 41941
ISS 4P 80 25 3 / 60 B 41942
ISS 4P 100 35 3 / 60 B 41943
ISS 4p 125 50 3 / 60 B 41945
AUTOMATION

56
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS

PADLOCK ADAPTOR FOR MCB

An adaptor makes it possible to block the operating lever whether switched ON or OF

Type Product category Catalogue number

Padlock adaptor for MCB B 41904

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu ISOLATING SWITCHES ISS2

DOCUMENTS CORRESPONDING SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS2

TO THE PRODUCT:
Standard EN 60947-1 FROM 125A TO 800A
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6

The series three- and four-pole load switch TECHNICAL FEATURES:
disconnectors ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in • Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz
main electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, • Double connector: screw connection
switching on of generators because of the fact they • Connection: solid or flexible conductors
are not affected by the frequency variations. High • Insulation voltage: ≥1000V
mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. • Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V
Simple and secure management. • Electrical endurance (number of cycles): ≥5 000
FUNCTIONS: • Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): ≥10 000
• switching on and off of electrical circuits under load • IP code: IP>20
• disconnection of electrical circuits • Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts
• used as main circuit-breaker • Plastic resistant to UV raysPlastic resistant to UV rays
• resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the • Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºС
protected circuit
• it has no protective function

Type Dimensions (mm)

A B C D E J J1 K R S T Y
ISS2-125/3 140 135 125 27 73 120 120 65 20 25 3.5 25
ISS2-125/4 170 135 125 27 73 150 150 65 20 25 3.5 25
ISS2-160/3 140 135 125 27 73 120 120 65 20 25 3.5 25
ISS2-160/4 170 135 125 27 73 150 150 65 20 25 3.5 25
ISS2-250/3 180 170 138 35 86 160 160 90 25 30 3.5 25
ISS2-250/4 230 170 138 35 86 210 210 90 25 30 3.5 25
ISS2-400/3 230 240 165 50 110 210 210 140 32 40 5 37
ISS2-400/4 295 240 165 50 110 275 275 140 32 40 5 37
#K#

ISS2-630/3 230 260 165 50 110 210 210 140 40 50 6 37

ISS2-630/4 295 260 165 50 110 275 275 140 40 50 6 37
ISS2-800/3 378 312 240 50 140 353 353 175 60 56 8 48
ISS2-800/4 498 312 240 50 140 473 473 175 60 56 8 48

AUTOMATION
Type Rated current Maximum Tightening Packing/Box Product Catalogue Catalogue
In (A) breaking moment (Nm) (pcs) category number three- number
capacity Icu (A) pole four-pole
ISS2-125in 125 1250 6.5 1 / 12 B 41951 41961
ISS2-125out 125 1250 6.5 1 / 12 B 41952 41962
ISS2-160in 160 1250 6.5 1 / 12 B 41953 41963
ISS2-160out 160 1250 6.5 1 / 12 B 41954 41964
ISS2-250in 250 2000 10 1/6 B 41955 41965
ISS2-250out 250 2000 10 1/6 B 41956 41966 57
ISS2-400in 400 3200 14.5 1/2 B 41957 41967
ISS2-630in 630 4000 14.5 1/2 B 41958 41968
ISS2-800in 800 1000 27 1/2 B 41959 41969
ISOLATING SWITCHES ISS2

Note: ISS2-xxx in – load circuit-breaker for mounting in the interior of a board

ISS2 -xxx out – load circuit-breaker with an extended lever for mounting on the front panel of the board

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
MANUAL SWITCHING TO RESERVE SERIES EQ 2M www.elmarkholding.eu

DOCUMENTS CORRESPONDING
TO THE PRODUCT:
MANUAL SWITCHING TO RESERVE SERIES
EQ 2M FROM FROM 160A TO 800A
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6
The series three- and four-pole load isolating switch EQ TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS:
2 M xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical • Rated voltage: not higher than 690V; 50/60Hz
boards for disconnection of the circuits, manual • Double connector: screw connection
switching between two power supplies or switching • Connection: hard or flexible conductors
ON of generators because of the fact they are not • Insulation voltage: ≥1000V
affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical • Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V
strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and • Electrical endurance (number of cycles): ≥5 000
secure management. • Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): ≥10 000
FUNCTIONS: • IP code: IP>20
• switching on and off of low voltage electrical circuits • Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts
under load • Plastic resistant to UV rays
• disconnection of the electrical circuit from one of the • Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºС
power supplies, while providing immediately switching • Small size
to the other • Indication which of the two supplies is operating
• used as main switch
• resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the
protected circuit
• it has no protective function

Type Dimensions (mm)

A B C D E J J1 K R S T Y Y1
ЕQ2M-160/3 270 135 212 89 150 120 65 95 20 25 3.5 55 25
EQ2M-160/4 300 135 212 104 150 150 65 95 20 25 3.5 55 25
ЕQ2M-250/3 307 170 260 110 180 160 65 115 25 30 3.5 70 25
EQ2M-250/4 357 170 260 135 180 210 65 115 25 30 3.5 70 25
ЕQ2M-400/3 372 240 297 150 236 210 77 180 32 40 5 83 37

#K#
EQ2M-400/4 432 240 297 180 236 275 77 180 32 40 5 83 37
ЕQ2M-630/3 372 240 297 150 236 210 77 180 40 50 6 83 37
EQ2M-630/4 432 240 297 180 236 275 77 180 40 50 6 83 37
ЕQ2M-8003 372 240 297 150 236 210 77 180 60 56 8 83 48
EQ2M-800/4 432 240 297 180 236 275 77 180 60 56 8 83 48
AUTOMATION

Type Rated current Maximum breaking Tightening moment Packing/Box Product Catalogue Catalogue
In (A) capacity Icu (A) (Nm) (pcs) category number three- number four-
pole pole
ЕQ2M-160 160 1250 6.5 1/4 B 44641 44641P
ЕQ2M-250 250 2000 10 1/2 B 44642 44642P
ЕQ2M-400 400 3200 14.5 1/2 B 44643 44643P
ЕQ2M-630 630 4000 14.5 1/2 B 44644 44644P
58
ЕQ2M-800 800 1000 27 1/2 B 44645 44645P
MANUAL SWITCHING TO RESERVE SERIES EQ 2M

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Documents corresponding
to the product:
HIGH BREAKING CAPACITY LEVEL
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2 (MCCB) DS1 MAX FROM 63A... 800A

FUNCTIONS: Ì possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal

• high breaking capacity level • Plastic elements
• switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits Ì not keeping the burning material nylon PA66
• breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful Ì box permitivity strength: >16MV/m
consumers • Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the
• can be used as a main breaker in housing or outer parts: 960°C
industrial distributing installations • Static contacts – alloy: pure copper T2Y2
• endures high currents of short circuit in the Ì аcontact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
protected circuit Ì аthickness: depends on the current
• remarkable with high reliability of current • Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
characteristics control: manual • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
• possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for ≥10000
automation • Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):
≥20000
TECHNICAL DATA:
• IP code: IP>20
• Rated operating voltage: 415/690V; 50/60Hz
• Mounting:
• Isolating voltage: 2000V
Ì joining with bolts
• Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V
Ì mounting position: vertical
• Connecting:
• Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
Ì rigid or flexible conductors
• Test button
Ì front conductors joining
• Ambient temperature: -20°/65°C.
Type Overall dimensions (mm)
L1 L2 L3 L4 a b d
DS1 MAX 125/63 3P M 92 150 110 92 30 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/80 3PM 92 150 110 92 30 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/100 3P M 92 150 110 92 30 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/125 3P M 92 150 110 92 30 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 250/160 3P M 92 165 110 90 35 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 250/200 3P M 107 165 110 90 35 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 250/250 3P H 107 165 110 90 35 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 400/400 3P H 150 257 146 106 44 194 7
DS1 MAX 630/630 3P H 182 270 155 116 116 200 7
DS1 MAX 800/800 3P H 210 28 155 116 70 243 7

AUTOMATION
DS1 MAX 125/63 4P M 122 150 110 92 60 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/80 4PM 122 150 110 92 60 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/100 4P M 122 150 110 92 60 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/125 4P M 122 150 110 92 60 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 250/160 4P M 142 165 110 90 70 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 250/200 4P M 142 165 110 90 70 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 250/250 4P H 142 165 110 90 70 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 400/400 4P H 198 257 146 106 44 194 7
DS1 MAX 630/630 4P H 240 270 155 116 116 200 7 59
DS1 MAX 800/800 4P H 280 280 155 116 70 243 7
Type Rated Operating Maximum breaking Thermal Packing/ Product Catalogue Catalogue number
current breaking capacity (kA) lcu current box category number three- four-poles
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ln (A) capacity (kA) 415V 690V adjusment (A) poles
lcs
DS1 MAX - 125 63 36 50 20 50,4-63 1/16 B 44163MM 444163MM
DS1 MAX - 125 80 36 50 20 64-80 1/16 B 44164MM 444164MM
DS1 MAX - 125 100 36 50 20 80-100 1/16 B 44165MM 444165MM
DS1 MAX - 125 125 36 50 20 100-125 1/16 B 44166MM 444166MM
DS1 MAX - 250 160 36 50 20 128-160 1/6 B 44160MM 444160MM
DS1 MAX - 250 200 36 50 20 160-200 1/6 B 44200MM 444200MM
DS1 MAX - 250 250 42 65 25 200-250 1/6 B 44250MH 444250MH
DS1 MAX - 400 400 50 85 30 320-400 1/3 B 44401MH 444401MH
DS1 MAX - 630 630 50 85 30 504-630 1/2 B 44630MH 444630MH
DS1 MAX - 800 800 65 100 50 640-800 1/2 B 44800MH 444800MH
 AUTOMATION
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding
to the product:
HIGH BREAKING CAPACITY LEVEL
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2 (MCCB) DS1 MAX TO 800A-ELECTRONIC TYPE

FUNCTIONS: TECHNICAL DATA:

• high breaking capacity level • Rated operating voltage: 415/690V; 50/60Hz
• switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits • Isolating voltage: 2000V
• breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful • Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V
consumers • Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
• can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial • Connecting:
distributing installations Ì rigid or flexible conductors
• endures high currents of short circuit in the protected Ì front conductors joining
circuit Ì possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
• remarkable with high reliability of current • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥ 10000
characteristics • Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥
• control: manual 20000
• possibilities for electrical module parameters • IP code: IP>20
adjustment through direct modules (combination of • Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the
keys) thus providing accurate protection from overload outer parts: 960°C
and short circuit • Mounting:
• simultaneous protection of the three phases Ì joining with bolts
• possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for Ì mounting position: vertical
automation • Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
• contactor for TT test 15V DC • Test button
• Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºС

Type Rated Operating Maximum breaking Thermal Packing/ Product Catalogue Catalogue
current breaking capacity (kA) lcu current box category number three- number four-
ln (A) capacity 415V 690V adjusment poles poles
(kA) lcs (A)
DS1 MAX - 400E 400 50 85 30 200-400 1/3 B 44940MH 444940MH
AUTOMATION

DS1 MAX - 630E 630 50 85 30 400-630 1/2 B 44963MH 444963MH

DS1 MAX - 800E 800 65 100 50 630-800 1/2 B 44980MH 444980MH

60

Tripping characteristic:
Ir1(A) Over-load long time delay
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

tripping current
Ir1 adjustment, according to the DS1 MAX - 400E
different rated current of MCCB.
t1(s) Long time delay tripping
time t1 adjustment.
Ir2(XIr1) Short circuit short
time delay tripping time Ir2
adjustment. DS1 MAX - 630E
t2(s) Short time delay tripping
time t2 adjustment.
Ir3(XIr1) Short circuit
instantaneous tripping current Ir3
adjustment. DS1 MAX - 800E
Ir0(XIr1) Pre-alarm tripping current
Ir0 adjustment.

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Documents corresponding
to the product:
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)
DS1 SERIES FROM 40A TO 1250A
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
FUNCTIONS: • Connecting:
• switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits Ì rigid or flexible conductors
• breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful Ì front conductors joining
consumers Ì possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
• can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial • Plastic elements
distributing installations Ì not keeping the burning material nylon PA66
• endures high currents of short circuit in the protected Ì box permitivity strength: >16MV/m
circuit • Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the
• remarkable with high reliability of current outer parts: 960°C
characteristics • Static contacts – alloy: pure copper T2Y2
• control: manual Ì contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
• possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for Ì thickness: depends on the current
automation • Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000
TECHNICAL DATA: • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• Rated operating voltage: 415/690V; 50/60Hz cycles):≥20000
• Isolating voltage: 2000V • IP code: IP>20
• Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V • Mounting:
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal for the Ì joining with bolts
breakers up to 160A and a bolt connection for the Ì mounting position: vertical
breakers from 250A to 1600A • Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
• Test button
• Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºС

Type Overall dimensions (mm) Installation dimensions (mm)

W H D H1 D1 A B W1 H2 Ød Øe
#K#

DS1-125/3P 76.2 120 70 90 25 100 50 4

DS1-160/3P 90 120 70 93 30 100 60 5
DS1-250/3P 105 170 104 238 143.5 35 139 70 210 6 8.5
DS1-400/3P 140 257 104 316 144 44 214 87.5 285 6 11
DS1-630/3P 210 275 104 310 172 70 230 140 280 6 11

AUTOMATION
DS1-800/3P 210 275 104 347 172 70 230 140 307 6 16
DS1-1600/3P 210 410 140 410 210 70 300 140 350 10 12
DS1-125/4P 110 120 70 90 25 100 50 4
DS1-160/4P 120 120 70 93 30 100 60 5
DS1-250/4P 140 170 104 238 143.5 35 139 70 210 6 8.5
DS1-400/4P 184 257 104 316 144 44 214 87.5 285 6 11
DS1-630/4P 280 275 104 310 172 70 230 140 280 6 11
DS1-800/4P 280 275 104 347 172 70 230 140 307 6 16
DS1-1600/4P 280 410 140 410 210 70 300 140 350 10 12 61

Type Rated Operating Maximum breaking Thermal current Section of the Packing/Box Product Catalogue
current breaking capacity (кА) Icu adjustment (A) conductor (pcs) category number
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

In (A) capacity (kA) Ics 415V 690V (mm²) tree-poles

DS1-125 40 16 35 10 fixed 16 1 / 20 F 44040

DS1-125 50 16 35 10 fixed 16 1 / 20 F 44050
DS1-125 100 16 35 10 fixed 35 1 / 20 F 44090
 AUTOMATION
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Rated current Operating Maximum breaking Thermal Section of the Packing/Box Product Catalogue
In (A) breaking capacity (кА) Icu current conductor (pcs) category number
capacity (kA) Ics 415V 690V adjustment (A) (mm²) tree-poles

DS1 - 160 80 22 35 15 56 - 80 25 1 / 20 F 44164

DS1 - 160 100 22 35 15 70 - 100 50 1 / 20 F 44165

Type Rated current Operating Maximum breaking Thermal Section of the Packing/Box Product Catalogue
In (A) breaking capacity (кА) Icu current conductor (pcs) category number
capacity (kA) Ics 415V 690V adjustment (A) (mm²) tree-poles

DS1 - 630 500 65 75 25 fixed 185 1/2 F 44500

Type Rated current Max. breaking Operating Section of the Protection from Packing/Box Product Catalogue
In (A) capacity (kA) breaking power supply overload (pcs) category number
Icu capacity (кА)Ics conductor (mm²)
DS1 - 1250 1000 85 65 240 fixed 1/1 F 44000
DS1 - 1250 1250 85 65 240 fixed 1/1 F 44502

#K#
AUTOMATION

62
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Documents corresponding
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB)
DS2 SERIES
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2 FUNCTIONS: • Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥6000V
• no auxiliaries available for this type of MCCB • Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
• switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits • Connecting:
• breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful Ì rigid or flexible conductors
consumers Ì front conductors joining
• can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial Ì possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
distributing installations • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥6000
• endures high currents of short circuit in the protected • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
circuit cycles):≥10000
• remarkable with high reliability of current • IP code: IP>20
characteristics • Mounting:
• control: manual Ì joining with bolts
Ì mounting position: vertical
TECHNICAL DATA: • Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
• Rated operating voltage: 400V; 50/60Hz • Test button
• Isolating voltage: 690V • Ambient temperature: -20°÷55ºС

Type Overall dimensions (mm)

W L H H1
DS2-63 76 135 73,5 90,5
DS2-500 180 270 111,5 160
DS2-630 180 270 111,5 160
DS2-800 210 274,3 109 145,8
#K#

Type Rated Max. Operating Recommended Protection Packing/Box Product Catalogue

current breaking breaking capacity conductor from (pcs) category number

AUTOMATION
In (A) capacity (кА) Ics (mm²) overload tree-poles
(kA) Icu
DS2-63 63 18 12 16 fixed 1/12 F 44006
DS2-800 800 65 48 240 fixed 1/1 F 44008

63
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
 AUTOMATION
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(MCCB) DS1 TO 1600A-ELECTRONIC TYPE
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2 FUNCTIONS: TECHNICAL DATA:
• switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits • Rated operating voltage: 415/690V; 50/60Hz
• breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful • Isolating voltage: 2000V
consumers • Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V
• can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial • Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
distributing installations • Connecting:
• endures high currents of short circuit in the protected Ì rigid or flexible conductors
circuit Ì front conductors joining
• remarkable with high reliability of current Ì possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
characteristics • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000
• control: manual • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• possibilities for electrical module parameters cycles):≥20000
adjustment through direct modules (combination of • IP code: IP>20
keys) thus providing accurate protection from overload • Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the
and short circuit outer parts: 960°C
• simultaneous protection of the three phases • Mounting:
• possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for Ì joining with bolts
automation Ì mounting position: vertical
• contactor for TT test 15V DC • Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
• Test button
• Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºС

#K#
AUTOMATION

PROTECTING FUNCTIONS:
Function L – step adjustment for protection against overload. Adjustment of the operating current I1=0.4+1xIn
with discreet coefficients as the value can be 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.7; 0.8; 0.9; 0.95 and 1
Time delay adjustment t1 of the protection against overload – step adjustment with four values A-3s; B-6s; C-12s;
D-18s when current is I=6I1. The diagram of the current curves is presented on fig.1
Adjustment of the transitory protection current against short circuit I3=X x I1 where X can take discreet value OFF;
1.5; 2; 4; 6; 8; 10

64 Type Rated Operating Maximum breaking Thermal current Section of the Packing/Box Product Catalogue
current breaking capacity (кА) Icu adjustment (A) conductor (pcs) category number
In (A) capacity 415V 690V (mm²) tree-poles
(kA) Ics
DS1 - 630Е 630 65 75 25 252 - 630 240 1/2 F 44963
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

DS1 - 1250Е 1000 85 100 65 400 - 1000 240 1/1 F 44999

DS1 - 1250Е 1250 85 100 65 500 - 1250 240 1/1 F 44925
DS1 - 1600Е 1600 85 100 65 640 - 1600 240 1/1 F 44960
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SHUNT RELEASE (MX) 7+0

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

The device is used for remote control of breakers as at MOUNTING:

voltage signal it starts operating and switches off the Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting
breaker to which it is mounted
CONNECTING:
TECHNICAL DATA: Connected with the operative system through the
• rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz provided conductors
• electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up to 400A
• electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 630-800A
• available joining conductors

*Until Supply Last- 3 year standard+0 year extended warranty

DS1-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX

Type Product Catalogue number Type Product Catalogue number
category 400V 230V category 400V 230V
DS1 630/3300* F 44455 DS1 MAX 400/3300 B 444511M 44452M
DS1 MAX 630/3300 B 44455M 44456M
DS1 MAX 800/3300 B 44459M 44460M
#K#

DS1-THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED DS1 MAX-THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITH

MX MOUNTED MX
Type Product Catalogue number Type Product Catalogue number

AUTOMATION
category 400V 230V category 400V 230V
DS1 125/40* F 44317 44318 DS1 MAX 125/63 B 44326M 44327M
DS1 125/50* F 44321 44322 DS1 MAX 125/80 B 44331M 44332M
DS1 125/100* F 44336 44337 DS1 MAX 125/100 B 44336M 44337M
DS1 160/100* F 44463 44464 DS1 MAX 125/125 B 44340M 44341M
DS1 630/500* F 44359 44360 DS1 MAX 250/160 B 44333M 44344M
DS1 MAX 250/200 B 44347M 44348M
DS1 MAX 250/250 B 44351M 44352M 65
DS1 MAX 400/400 B 44355M 44356M
DS1 MAX 630/630 B 44363M 44364M
DS1 MAX 800/800 B 44367M 44368M
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS www.elmarkholding.eu

UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (MN) 7+0

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

The device switches off and/or does not allow the MOUNTING:
switching on of the breaker to which it is mounted at Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting
power breakdown or voltage decrease under certain Note: The breakers are offered with mounted
limits accessory

TECHNICAL DATA: CONNECTING:

• operating voltage: 230/400V 50Hz Connected with the operative system through the
MN for DS1 - 125-160 • electromagnetic coil 6VA for breakers up to 400A provided conductors
• electromagnetic coil 10VA for breakers 630-800A
• available joining conductors
• switches off at voltage decrease under 75% of the
operating

*Until Supply Last - 3 year standard+0 year extended warranty

DS1-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN

Type Product Catalogue number Type Product Catalogue number
category 400V 230V category 400V 230V
MN for DS1 - 250-800
DS1 630/3300* F 44487 44488 DS1 MAX 400/3300 B 44483M 44484M
DS1 MAX 630/3300 B 44487M 44488M
DS1 MAX 800/3300 B 44491M 44492M

#K#
DS1-THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED DS1 MAX-THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITH
MN MOUNTED MN
AUTOMATION

Type Product Catalogue number Type Product Catalogue number

category 400V 230V category 400V 230V
DS1 125/40* F 44383 44384 DS1 MAX 125/63 B 44391M 44392M
DS1 125/50* F 44387 44388 DS1 MAX 125/80 B 44395M 44396M
DS1 125/100* F 44399 44402 DS1 MAX 125/100 B 44399M 44402M
DS1 160/100* F 44475 44476 DS1 MAX 125/125 B 44407M 44408M
DS1 630/500* F 44427 44428 DS1 MAX 250/160 B 44411M 44412M
66 DS1 MAX 250/200 B 44415M 44416M
DS1 MAX 250/250 B 44419M 44420M
DS1 MAX 400/400 B 44423M 44424M
DS1 MAX 630/630 B 44431M 44432M
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

DS1 MAX 800/800 B 44435M 44436M

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Documents corresponding
to the product:
AUXILIARY CONTACT (OF) 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2 According to the way of mounting the auxiliary devices TECHNICAL DATA:
can be divided into two groups: • for breakers up to 160A operating current through
• internal devices – accessories for whose mounting it the auxiliary contact: 3A
is necessary to dismount the cover of the breakers and • for breakers from 250 to 800A operating current
fix them in specially designed jacks through the auxiliary contact: 6A
• external devices – they are mounted right on the top • available joining conductors
cover of the breaker • labeling of the cables
INTERNAL DEVICES MOUNTING:
Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting
AUXILIARY CONTACT (OF) NOTE:
The device changes its condition conformably to the The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
breaker’s condition; it has a NO and a NC contactor. CONNECTING:
Connected with the operative system through the
provided conductors

*Until Supply Last - 3 year standard+0 year extended warranty

DS1-THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITHMOUNTED DS1 MAX-THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITH

OF MOUNTED OF
Type Product category Catalogue number Type Product category Catalogue number
DS1 125/40* F 44301 DS1 MAX 125/63 B 44303M
DS1 125/50* F 44302 DS1 MAX 125/80 B 44304M
DS1 125/100* F 44305 DS1 MAX 125/100 B 44305M
DS1 630/500* F 44311 DS1 MAX 125/125 B 44306M
DS1 MAX 250/160 B 44307M
DS1 MAX 250/200 B 44308M
DS1 MAX 250/250 B 44309M
#K#

DS1 MAX 400/400 B 44310M

DS1 MAX 630/630 B 44312M
DS1 MAX 800/800 B 44313M

AUTOMATION
DS1 -ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF 67
Product category Catalogue number 400V
DS1 630/3300* F 44457 AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS www.elmarkholding.eu

MCCB WITH AUXILIARY DEVICES MOUNTED

(MX+OF) AND (MN+OF)
7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

*Until Supply Last- 3 year standard+0 year extended warranty

DS1-THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF
Product category Catalogue number 400V Catalogue number 230V
DS1 125/40* F 44319 44320
DS1 125/50* F 44323 44324
DS1 125/100* F 44338 44339
DS1 160/100* F 44465 44466
DS1 630/500* F 44361

DS1 MAX-THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN+OF

Product category Catalogue number 400V Catalogue number 230V
DS1 MAX 125/63 B 44393M 44394M
DS1 MAX 125/80 B 44397M 44398M
DS1 MAX 125/100 B 44405M 44406M
DS1 MAX 125/125 B 44409M 44410M
DS1 MAX 250/160 B 44413M 44414M
DS1 MAX 250/200 B 44417M 44418M
DS1 MAX 250/250 B 44421M 44422M
DS1 MAX 400/400 B 44425M 44426M
DS1 MAX 630/630 B 44433M 44434M
DS1 MAX 800/800 B 44437M 44438M
AUTOMATION

DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN+OF

Product category Catalogue number 400V Catalogue number 230V
DS1 MAX 400/3300 B 44485М 44486M
68 DS1 MAX 630/3300 B 44489M 44490M
DS1 MAX 800/3300 B 44493M 44494M
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF

Product category Catalogue number 400V Catalogue number 230V
DS1 MAX 400/3300 B 44453M 44454M
DS1 MAX 630/3300 B 44457M 44458M
DS1 MAX 800/3300 B 44461M 44462M

DS1 MAX- THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF

Product category Catalogue number 400V Catalogue number 230V
DS1 MAX 125/63 B 44328M 44330M
DS1 MAX 125/80 B 44334M 44335M
DS1 MAX 125/100 B 44338M 44339M
DS1 MAX 125/125 B 44342M 44343M
DS1 MAX 250/160 B 44345M 44346M
DS1 MAX 250/200 B 44349M 44350M
DS1 MAX 250/250 B 44353M 44354M
DS1 MAX 400/400 B 44357M 44358M
DS1 MAX 630/630 B 44365M 44366M
DS1 MAX 800/800 B 44369M 44370M
#K#

DS1-THERMOMAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN+OF

Product category Catalogue number 400V Catalogue number 230V
DS1 125/40 F 44385 44386
DS1 125/50 F 44389 44390
DS1 125/100 F 44405 44406

AUTOMATION
DS1 125/125 F 44409 44410
DS1 160/100 F 44477 44478
DS1 630/500 F 44429 44430

69
DS1-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN+OF
Product category Catalogue number 400V Catalogue number 230V AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
DS1 630/3300 F 44489 44490
 AUTOMATION
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS www.elmarkholding.eu

REMOTE CONTROL (MANUAL) 5+2

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Description: Mounting:
The device switches off/on the breaker to which The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover
manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is mounted at
• two operating positions of the executive mechanism the door of the distribution box, using an extension
fixed at 90°C axis it is joined to the base

REMOTE CONTROL FOR MCCB, DS1

Type of the breaker Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
A B C Dmin Dmax (pcs) category

DS1 125A* 25 50 50 65 115 1 F 44967

DS1 160A* 30 50 50 65 115 1 F 44968
DS1 250A* 35 70 70 80 130 1 F 44969
DS1 400A* 45 107 107 85 105 1 F 44970
DS1 630A* 70 119 119 110 110 1 F 44971
DS1 800A* 70 119 119 110 110 1 F 44972

*3 year standard+0 year extended warranty

AUTOMATION

REMOTE CONTROL FOR MCCB, DS1 MAX

Type of the breaker Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
A B C Dmin Dmax (pcs) category

DS1 MAX 63A 25 50 50 65 115 1 B 44966M

DS1 MAX 125A 25 50 50 65 115 1 B 44967M
70 DS1 MAX 250A 35 70 70 80 130 1 B 44969M
DS1 MAX 400A 45 107 107 85 105 1 B 44970M
DS1 MAX 630/800A 70 119 119 110 110 1 B 44972M
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

REMOTE CONTROL (ELECTRICAL) 5+2

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Description:
The device switches off/on the breaker to which
manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted
• two operating positions of the executive mechanism
fixed at 90°C

Mounting:
DS1 - 125-160 The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover
(scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is mounted at
the door of the distribution box, using an extension
axis it is joined to the base

ELECTRICAL REMOTE CONTROL FOR MCCB DS1

Type of the breaker Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
(pcs) category Operating voltage (V)
A A1 B B1 H 230V 400V
DS1 125 103.5 110 30 90 92 1 F 44912 44907
DS1 160 103.5 110 35 90 92 1 F 44913 44908
DS1 250 139 - 132 - 105 1 F 44914 44909
DS1 400 226 - 132 - 132 1 F 44915 44910
DS1 - 250-800
DS1 630 226 - 132 - 132 1 F 44911
DS1 800 226 - 132 - 132 1 F 44911

*3 year standard+0 year extended warranty

ELECTRICAL REMOTE CONTROL FOR MCCB DS1 MAX

AUTOMATION
Type of the breaker Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
(pcs) category Operating voltage (V)
L1 B B H H1 230V 400V
DS1 MAX 63A 116 90 50 77 12,5 1 B 44917M 44906M
DS1 MAX 125A 116 90 50 77 12,5 1 B 44912M 44907M
DS1 MAX 250A 116 90 70 77 15 1 B 44914M 44909M
DS1 MAX 400A 176 130 107 115 27 1 B 44915M 44910M
DS1 MAX 630A 176 130 119 115 31 1 B 44916M 44911M 71
DS1 MAX 630A 176 130 119 115 31 1 B 44916M 44911M
DS1 MAX - 63-250
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS www.elmarkholding.eu

TERMINAL PLATES FOR MCCB - DS1

AND DS1 MAX TYPE

Straight copper electro-tinned extensions enabling cable connection outside the switch terminals and providing
excellent contact with the switch terminal base. Terminal extensions with different cross section are available
depending on the switch rated power.

MOUNTING:
Extensions are directly bolt mounted to the switch terminal base.

TERMINAL PLATES FOR MCCB - DS1

Type Product category Rated current (А) Catalogue number 3pcs/set
TP 125 F 125 31125
TP 160 F 160 31160
TP 250 F 250 31250
TP 400 F 400 31400
TP 630 F 630 31630
TP 800 F 800 31850

TERMINAL PLATES FOR MCCB - DS1 MAX

Type Product category Rated current (А) Catalogue number 3pcs/set Catalogue number 4pcs/set

#K#
TP 125 MAX B 125 31125M -
TP 250 MAX B 250 31250M -
TP 400 MAX B 400 31400M 314400M
TP 630 MAX B 630 31630M 314630M
TP 800 MAX B 800 31850M 314850M
AUTOMATION

72
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER DW1 SERIES

Documents corresponding
to the product:
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER(MCCB)
DW1 SERIES
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-2; IEC

947-2
The DW1 series is an intelligent type circuit breaker • Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the
used to control and protect low voltage electrical power supply railConnecting:
distribution network. Possibility to set the parameters Ì copper rails
of the circuit protection, built in under voltage release, Ì busway connection – at the back
remote control, earth protection and load monitoring. • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥2000
FUNCTIONS: • Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥9000
• switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits • IP code: IP54
• breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful • Mounting:
consumers Ì clamping with bolts
• used as a main breaker in housing or industrial Ì mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum 5°
distributing installations • Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
• endures high currents of short circuit in the protected • Test button
circuit • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics • Installation altitude: up to 2000m
• motor control BASIC PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS:
• mounted auxiliary devices for automation - under • Overload protection with long time delay
voltage release, earth protection, intelligent controlling • Short circuit protection with short time delay, time
block with a possibility for a choice of the protected inversion limit
function • Short circuit protection with short time delay, time
TECHNICAL DATA: fixed limit
• Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz • Instantaneous short circuit protection
• Isolating voltage: 690V • Earth protection function
• Surge voltage wear resistance: 2kV • Full stability function
• “Overload alarm” function
• Test function
• Auto diagnostics function

A commutation type of breakers with RS 485

connection for duplex transmission of all function
parameters, adjustment and data can also be produced
at client’s order and delivery terms agreement.
Type Dimensions
A H W

AUTOMATION
DW1-2000 FIXED 362 402 373
DW1-3200 FIXED 422 402 363
DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT 375 432 461
DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT 435 432 494
DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT 550 432 494
DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT 813 452 504

Type Rated current Rated voltage Breaking capacity (кА) Electrical wear resistance Mechanical wear resistance Packing/Box Product Catalogue number 73
In (A) Un (V) 400 V 690 V (number of cycles) (number of cycles) (pcs) category

DW1-2000 FIXED 1600 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1 B 44208

DW1-2000 FIXED 2000 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1 B 44209
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER DW1 SERIES

DW1-3200 FIXED 2500 AC400V 100 65 2000 9000 1/1 B 44255

DW1-3200 FIXED 3200 AC400V 100 65 2000 9000 1/1 B 44329
DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT 1600 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1 B 44208DO
DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT 2000 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1 B 44209DO
DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT 2500 AC400V 100 65 2000 9000 1/1 B 44255DO
DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT 3200 AC400V 100 70 2000 9000 1/1 B 44329DO
DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT 3600 AC400V 100 75 2000 9000 1/1 B 44436DO
DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT 4000 AC400V 100 75 2000 9000 1/1 B 44440DO
DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT 5000 AC400V 120 75 2000 9000 1/1 B 44650DO
DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT 6300 AC400V 120 75 2000 9000 1/1 B 44663DO

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
DUAL POWER CHANGE-OVER SWITCH www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding
to the product:
DUAL POWER CHANGE-OVER SWITCH
EQ1 SERIES (ATS)
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2; EN 60947-6-1
The system for dual power change-over switch EQ1 TECHNICAL DATA:
is designed to provide continuous power supply and • Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
two electrical sources automatic switch in case of • Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥6000V
failure or deviation from the set parameters. It switches • Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the
only when the three phases of the second power power supply rail
supply source are available. The system for dual power • Connecting:
change-over switch consists of two molded case Ì copper rails
circuit breakers mounted on a metal frame connected Ì flexible or rigid conductors
with common operating mechanism and controlled • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥2000
by a command device that controls the system • Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):
parameters’ correspondence. ≥6000
FUNCTIONS: • IP code: IP21
• Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits at • Mounting:
main power supply discrepancy Ì clamping with bolts
• Switching to dual power change-over at power Ì mounting position: vertical gradient, maximum 5°
supply phase lack • Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-
• with option to connect to fire alarm controller. In case flammable
of fire, the ATS switches off both power supply sources • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful • Installation altitude: up to 2000m
consumers BASIC FUNCTIONS OF THE CONTROL DEVICE:
• Used as a main breaker in housing or industrial • Overload protection
distributing installations supplied with a generator or • Instantaneous short circuit protection
a second power supply source (hospitals, post offices, • Under phase protection
military sites, control rooms) • Undervoltage protection
• Remarkable with high reliability of current • Possibility for setting the change-over time between
characteristics the two sources – min 3s
• Control: motor • Possibility for automatic switch-over to the main
• Controls the following circuit parameters: power supply source after restoring its parameters
Ì presence of the three phases The system for dual power change-over switch is
Ì the phase voltage to be in the set limits offered in two types:
Ì overload • with display (control device) mounted on the
Ì short circuit at the outlet mounting plate (integrated type)
• with separated control display
Type of the breaker Overall dimensions (mm)
AUTOMATION

A B C D H
EQ1 - 100 405 365 230 250 <170
EQ1 - 225 450 410 230 250 <190
EQ1 - 400 570 510 300 330 <200
EQ1 - 630 680 620 300 330 <250
EQ1 - 800 750 690 300 330 <250

74 Type Rated Max. Operating Section of the Electrical wear Mechanical Packing / Product Catalogue
current breaking breaking power supply resistance wear resistance Box (pcs) category number
In (A) capacity capacity (кА) conductor (number of (number of
(kA) Icu Ics (mm²) cycles) cycles)
DUAL POWER CHANGE-OVER SWITCH

EQ1 - 100 100 50 35 35 2000 6000 1/1 B 44100

EQ1 - 225 225 50 35 70 2000 6000 1/1 B 44225
EQ1 - 400 400 100 65 180 2000 6000 1/1 B 44403
EQ1 - 630 630 100 65 240 1000 3000 1/1 B 44633
EQ1 - 800 800 100 65 240 1000 3000 1/1 B 44833
EQ1 - 100* 100 50 35 35 2000 6000 1/1 B 44101
EQ1 - 225* 225 50 35 70 2000 6000 1/1 B 44226
EQ1 - 400* 400 100 65 180 2000 6000 1/1 B 44404
EQ1 - 630* 630 100 65 240 1000 3000 1/1 B 44634
EQ1 - 800* 800 100 65 240 1000 3000 1/1 B 44834

Note: *Dual power change-over switch with separated control display

 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

Documents corresponding
to the product:
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL
CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL1
7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

EN 61008-1
EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1
The residual current device works with no extra power • Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of
supply to the operating mechanism. It compares 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A
the magnitude of the currents through the neutral • Type of the plastic:
and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on Ì material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66
toroid and together with the secondary winding form Ì permitivity strength: >18MV/m
a measurement transformer. The power conductors • Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields • Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type
generated at electrical current flow through them • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥5000
are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
of some of the conductors or at presence of a person cycles):≥10000
under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the • IP code: IP>20
TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual • Indication for operating (switched on) position
field generates in the secondary current winding, • Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-
called current leakage. The device breaks when the flammable
value of this current exceeds the limit value of the • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
residual current breaker. • Installation altitude: up to 2000m

FUNCTIONS: CONNECTING:
• switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at • power supply busbar (only for bipolar)
insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers • flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding
• switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at section
presence of a person under voltage
• used to protect not only particular consumers/ MOUNTING:
circuits, but also the whole panel • on DIN-rail
• remarkable with high reliability of current • mounting position: vertical
characteristics
• control: manual switching on and automatic The residual current device is mounted in the
switching off at exit failure distribution box, and after the device the neutral
conductor and the earthing conductor must not be
TECHNICAL DATA: connected together. In order to work accurately, the
• Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50/60 Hz device must have three- or five-conductor grid with
• Rated current: according to the table separate protective conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing
• Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors). The

AUTOMATION
• Time delay until break: <0.1s at I Δ n and <0.04s at corpus of the consumer depending on the grid type
2I Δ n must be connected either to the protective conductor
• Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥2000V or be earthed. (Fig.1)
• Short circuit current wear resistance: 4500А, 6000А

Dimensions (mm)

W1 W2 H H1 H2 D1 D2
35 70 81 35 45 50 72 75
CONNECTING SCHEME RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

FIG. 1

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES www.elmarkholding.eu

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL
CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL1 AND JEF
7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Residual current devices JЕL 1, 6kA - Type АС - alternating fault currents sensible. Impulse withstand voltage
2000VAC
Type Number Breaking Rated current Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
of poles capacity In (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
30 100 300 500
JEL 1 2P 6 10.0 1 / 60 B 40210 40212 40213 40214
JEL 1 2P 6 16.0 1 / 60 B 40216 40217 40218 40219
JEL 1 2P 6 20.0 1 / 60 B 40292 40293 40294 40295
JEL 1 2P 6 25.0 1 / 60 B 40221 40222 40223 40224
JEL 1 2P 6 32.0 1 / 60 B 40231 40232 40233 40234
JEL 1 2P 6 40.0 1 / 60 B 40241 40242 40243 40244
JEL 1 2P 6 63.0 1 / 60 B 40261 40262 40263 40264
TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT JEL 1 2P 6 80.0 1 / 60 B 40281 40282 40283 40284
JEL 1 2P 6 100.0 1 / 60 B 40291 40296 40297 40298

Type Number Breaking Rated current Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

of poles capacity In (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
30 100 300 500
JEL 1 4P 6 10.0 1 / 30 B 40410 40412 40413 40414
JEL 1 4P 6 16.0 1 / 30 B 40416 40417 40418 40419
JEL 1 4P 6 20.0 1 / 30 B 40492 40493 40494 40495
JEL 1 4P 6 25.0 1 / 30 B 40421 40422 40423 40424
JEL 1 4P 6 32.0 1 / 30 B 40431 40432 40433 40434
JEL 1 4P 6 40.0 1 / 30 B 40441 40442 40443 40444
AUTOMATION

JEL 1 4P 6 63.0 1 / 30 B 40461 40462 40463 40464

TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT JEL 1 4P 6 80.0 1 / 30 B 40481 40482 40483 40484
JEL 1 4P 6 100.0 1 / 30 B 40491 40496 40497 40498

76
Type Number of Breaking Rated current Packing/Box Product Leakage current I Δ Catalogue number
poles capacity In (A) (pcs) category n (mA)
(kA)
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

JEF* 2P 4.5 10 1/60 F 300 40713JEF

JEF* 2P 4.5 10 1/60 F 30 40710JEF
JEF* 2P 4.5 16 1/60 F 300 40718JEF
JEF* 2P 4.5 20 1/60 F 300 40794JEF
JEF* 2P 4.5 25 1/60 F 300 40723JEF
JEF* 2P 4.5 32 1/60 F 300 40733JEF
JEF* 2P 4.5 63 1/60 F 300 40763JEF

*3 year standard+0 year extended warranty

TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

Documents corresponding
to the product:
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL
CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL1A
7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

EN 61008-1
EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1
These are Residual Current Devices (RCDs) JEL 1A with TECHNICAL DATA:
enhanced sensibility and fast - operating protection • Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50 Hz
devices applicable in circuits with harmonic or direct • Rated current: according to the table
pulsating current component presence. • Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
• Time delay until break: <0.1s at I Δ n and <0.04s at
FUNCTIONS: 2I Δ n
• switching off electrical circuits on load at conductor • Short circuit current wear resistance: 6000А
insulation breaking to the consumer • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥5000
• switching off electrical circuits on load at direct and • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
indirect contact cycles):≥10000
• switching off electrical circuits on load at alternating • IP code: IP>20
earth fault currents during consequent light impact
TYPE A FOR AC/DC CURRENT • switching off consumers at harmonic presence due CONNECTING:
to luminescent lights • power supply busbar (only for bipolar)
• switching off consumers in DC circuits at fault • flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding
currents presence section
• mechanical indicator for ON position
MOUNTING:
• on DIN-rail
• mounting position: vertical

Residual current devices JЕL 1A, 6kA - Type А - alternating and pulsating direct fault currents sensible Impulse
withstand voltage 2000VAC/ 400VDC
Type Number Breaking Rated current Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
of poles capacity In (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
30 100 300 500
JEL 1A 2P 6 10.0 1 / 60 B 40510 40512 40513 40514
JEL 1A 2P 6 16.0 1 / 60 B 40516 40517 40518 40519
JEL 1A 2P 6 20.0 1 / 60 B 40592 40593 40594 40595
JEL 1A 2P 6 25.0 1 / 60 B 40521 40522 40523 40524
JEL 1A 2P 6 32.0 1 / 60 B 40531 40532 40533 40534
TYPE A FOR AC/DC CURRENT JEL 1A 2P 6 40.0 1 / 60 B 40541 40542 40543 40544

AUTOMATION
JEL 1A 2P 6 63.0 1 / 60 B 40561 40562 40563 40564
JEL 1A 2P 6 80.0 1 / 60 B 40581 40582 40583 40584
JEL 1A 2P 6 100.0 1 / 60 B 40591 40596 40597 40598

77
Type Number Breaking Rated current Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
of poles capacity In (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
30 100 300 500
JEL 1A 4P 6 10.0 1 / 30 B 40610 40612 40613 40614
JEL 1A 4P 6 16.0 1 / 30 B 40616 40617 40618 40619
JEL 1A 4P 6 20.0 1 / 30 B 40692 40693 40694 40695
JEL 1A 4P 6 25.0 1 / 30 B 40621 40622 40623 40624
JEL 1A 4P 6 32.0 1 / 30 B 40631 40632 40633 40634
JEL 1A 4P 6 40.0 1 / 30 B 40641 40642 40643 40644
JEL 1A 4P 6 63.0 1 / 30 B 40661 40662 40663 40664
JEL 1A 4P 6 80.0 1 / 30 B 40681 40682 40683 40684
JEL 1A 4P 6 100.0 1 / 30 B 40691 40696 40697 40698

TYPE A FOR AC/DC CURRENT

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES www.elmarkholding.eu

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL
CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL2
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Residual current devices JЕL2, 4,5kA - Type АС - alternating fault currents sensible. Impulse withstand voltage
2000VAC
Type Number Breaking Rated current Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
of poles capacity In (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
30 100 300 500
JEL 2 2P 4,5 10.0 1 / 60 F
JEL 2 2P 4,5 16.0 1 / 60 F 40716 40718
JEL 2 2P 4,5 32.0 1 / 60 F
JEL 2 2P 4,5 40.0 1 / 60 F 40743 40744
JEL 2 2P 4,5 63.0 1 / 60 F 40761 40763
TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT

Type Number Breaking Rated current Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

of poles capacity In (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
30 100 300 500
JEL 2 4P 4,5 16.0 1 / 30 F
JEL 2 4P 4,5 40.0 1 / 30 F 40844
JEL 2 4P 4,5 63.0 1 / 30 F 40863 40864

TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT

AUTOMATION

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL
CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL2 SIGMA
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Number Breaking Rated current Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

of poles capacity In (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
78 30 100 300 500
JEL 2 SIGMA 2P 6 10.0 1 / 30 F 40213S
JEL 2 SIGMA 2P 6 16.0 1 / 30 F
JEL 2 SIGMA 2P 6 20.0 1 / 30 F 40292S 40294S 40295S
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

JEL 2 SIGMA 2P 6 25.0 1 / 30 F 40223S

TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT JEL 2 SIGMA 2P 6 40.0 1 / 30 F 40242S
JEL 2 SIGMA 2P 6 63.0 1 / 30 F 40262S 40263S
JEL 2 SIGMA 4P 6 20.0 1 / 30 F 40492S 40494S
JEL 2 SIGMA 4P 6 25.0 1 / 30 F 40423S
JEL 2 SIGMA 4P 6 32.0 1 / 30 F 40432S
JEL 2 SIGMA 4P 6 40.0 1 / 30 F 40443S
JEL 2 SIGMA 4P 6 63.0 1 / 30 F 40464S
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu COMBINED RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

Documents corresponding
to the product:
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

EN 61 009-1; EN 61009-2; OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER (RCBO)- JEL5

DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATING SYSTEM: • Time delay until break:

It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and Ì of the residual current device: <0.1s at I Δ n and
residual current electromagnetic device. It combines <0.04s at 2I Δ n
the properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker Ì of the circuit breaker: <0.1s
reacts at short circuit or overload in the protected • Circuit breaker tripping curve: C
circuit, and the electromagnetic residual current • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥2000V
device - at failure in the conductors’ insulation. It • Breaking capacity: 10000
compares the magnitude of the currents through • Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of
the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A
are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary • Type of the plastic:
TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT winding form a measurement transformer. The power Ì material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66
conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic Ì dielectrical strength: >18MV/m
fields generated at electrical current flow through • Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the • Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type
insulation of some of the conductors or at presence • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥5000
of a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
and the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This cycles):≥10000
residual magnetic field generates in the secondary • IP code: IP>20
current winding, called current leakage. When the • Indication for operating (switched on) position
value of this current exceeds the limit value of the • Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-
residual current breaker the device breaks and the flammable
residual current device switches off from the power • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
supply grid. The device operates without any extra • Installation altitude: up to 2000m
power supply to the electromagnetic residual current
and is not influenced by voltage varying or decreasing. CONNECTING:
• flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding
FUNCTIONS: section
• switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short
circuit or overload MOUNTING:
• switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at • on DIN-rail
insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers • mounting position: vertical
• switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at
presence of a person and animals under voltage The residual current device is mounted in the
• used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, distribution box, and after the device the neutral
but also the whole panel conductor and the earthing conductor must not be

AUTOMATION
• remarkable with high reliability of current connected together. In order to work accurately, the
characteristics device must have three- or five-conductor grid with
• control: manual switching on and automatic separate operating neutral conductor (N) and separate
switching off at failure in the insulation after the breaker protecting conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S
or TT with three or five conductors).
TECHNICAL DATA:
• Rated operating voltage: 230V 50 Hz
• Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table
• Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
79
Dimensions (mm)
W1 H C1 C2 D1 D2
35 81 35 45 50 72
COMBINED RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

Combined electromagnetic residual current device and circuit breaker 2P 6kA

Type Number of Breaking Rated Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
designation poles capacity current (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA) (A)
30 100 300 500
JEL5 2р 6 10 1 / 60 B 40010 40011 40013 40015
JEL5 2р 6 16 1 / 60 B 40016 40017 40018 40019
JEL5 2р 6 25 1 / 60 B 40025 40021 40023 40026
JEL5 2р 6 32 1 / 60 B 40032 40031 40033 40035
JEL5 2р 6 40 1 / 60 B 40040 40041 40043 40045

TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
COMBINED RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding
to the product:
ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

EN 61 009-1; EN 61009-2; CIRCUIT BREAKER (RCBO)

DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATING SYSTEM: TECHNICAL DATA:

It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and • Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50 Hz
residual current electromagnetic device. It combines • Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table
part of the properties of the two elements. The circuit • Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
breaker reacts at short circuit in the protected circuit, • Time delay until break:
and the electromagnetic residual current device - at Ì of the residual current device: <0.1s at I Δ n and
failure in the conductors’ insulation. It compares the <0.04s at 2I Δ n
rate of the currents through the conductors in an Ì of the circuit breaker: <0.1s
electronic comparator. The residual current device • Circuit breaker tripping curve: C
operates normally at voltage feed. The voltage is • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥2000V
TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT needed for the comparator’s energizing – a semi- • Breaking capacity: 4500A; 6000А; 10000А
conductor element with constantly set leakage • Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
current rate. This rate is compared with the actual rate. • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥500
When the margin of the comparison is neutral, the • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
residual current device does not operate, but at failure cycles):≥2000
in the protected circuit insulation when it exceeds the • IP code: IP>20
set margin it operates and switches off the protection. • Indication for operating (switched on) position
For the normal operation of the residual current
device, the power supplying circuit voltage must be CONNECTING:
over 170V and there must be no time variation. • power supply busbar (for two- or three polar)
• flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding
FUNCTIONS: section
• switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short
circuit or overload MOUNTING:
• switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits • on DIN-rail
at insulation damage of the conductors to the • mounting position: vertical
consumers • Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-
• switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at flammable
presence of a person under voltage • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• used to protect not only particular consumers/ • Installation altitude: up to 2000m
circuits, but also the whole panel
• remarkable with high reliability of current The residual current device is mounted in the
characteristics distribution box, and after the device the neutral
AUTOMATION

• control: manual switching on and automatic conductor and the earthing conductor must not be
switching off at exit failure connected together. In order to work accurately, the
device must have separate conductors for operational
neutral conductor (N) and protective conductor
(e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five
conductors).

Dimensions (mm)
80 W1 H C1 C2 D1 D2
35 81 35 45 50 72

Combined electronic residual current device with circuit breaker 2P, 6кА
COMBINED RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

Type Number of poles Breaking Rated current Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
designation capacity (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
30
JEL 4 C10 2р 6 10 1 / 60 B 40211E
JEL 4 C16 2р 6 16 1 / 60 B 40215E
JEL 4 C20 2р 6 20 1 / 60 B 40225E
JEL 4 C25 2р 6 25 1 / 60 B 40240E
JEL 4 C32 2р 6 32 1 / 60 B 40265E
JEL 4 C40 2р 6 40 1 / 60 B 40274E

TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu COMBINED RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

Combined electronic residual current device with circuit breaker 2P, 6кА
Type Number of poles Breaking Rated current Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
designation capacity (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
30
JEL 4 C10 2р 6 10 1 / 60 B 40211CE
JEL 4 C16 2р 6 16 1 / 60 B 40215CE
JEL 4 C20 2р 6 20 1 / 60 B 40225CE
JEL 4 C25 2р 6 25 1 / 60 B 40240CE
JEL 4 C32 2р 6 32 1 / 60 B 40265CE
JEL 4 C40 2р 6 40 1 / 60 B 40274CE

TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT

ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED

CIRCUIT BREAKER (RCBO) JEL3
7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Combined electronic residual current device with circuit breaker 2P, 10кА
Type designation Number of Breaking Rated Packing/Box Leakage Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
poles capacity current (pcs) current I Δ n category curve B curve C
(kA) (A) (mA)
JEL 3 C6 1p+N 10 6 5/100 30 B 40906B 40906
JEL 3 C10 1p+N 10 10 5/100 30 B 40910B 40910
JEL 3 C16 1p+N 10 16 5/100 30 B 40916B 40916
JEL 3 C20 1p+N 10 20 5/100 30 B 40920B 40920
TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT JEL 3 C25 1p+N 10 25 5/100 30 B 40925B 40925
JEL 3 C32 1p+N 10 32 5/100 30 B 40932B 40932

AUTOMATION
JEL 3 C40 1p+N 10 40 5/100 30 B 40940B 40940

81
Combined electronic residual current device with circuit breaker 2P, 6кА
Type designation Number of Breaking Rated Packing/Box Leakage Product Catalogue number Catalogue number
poles capacity current (pcs) current I Δ n category curve B curve C
(kA) (A) (mA)
COMBINED RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

JEL 3 B6 1p+N 6 6 5/100 30 B 40956B 40956C

JEL 3 B10 1p+N 6 10 5/100 30 B 40960B 40960C
JEL 3 B16 1p+N 6 16 5/100 30 B 40966B 40966C
JEL 3 B20 1p+N 6 20 5/100 30 B 40970B 40970C
JEL 3 B25 1p+N 6 25 5/100 30 B 40975B 40975C
JEL 3 B32 1p+N 6 32 5/100 30 B 40982B 40982C
JEL 3 B40 1p+N 6 40 5/100 30 B 40990B 40990C

TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
SURGE ARRESTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED

CIRCUIT BREAKER (RCBO) JEL6
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Combined electronic residual current device 2P

Compares the leakage current between the phase and neutral conductors or between two phases.
Type Number of poles Breaking Rated current Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
designation capacity (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
30
JEL 6 C50 2P 6 50 6 / 120 F 40265

Combined electronic residual current device 3P

Compares the leakage current between the phases
Type Number of poles Breaking Rated current Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
designation capacity (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
30 300
JEL 6 C16 3P 6 16 3 / 60 F 40318
JEL 6 C25 3P 6 25 3 / 60 F 40325 40323
JEL 6 C40 3P 6 40 3 / 60 F 40340 40343

Combined electronic residual current device 3P+N

Compares the leakage current between the three phases and neutral conductors.
AUTOMATION

Type Number of poles Breaking Rated current Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
designation capacity (A) (pcs) category Leakage current I Δ n (mA)
(kA)
300
JEL 6 C40 3P+N 6 40 2 / 40 F 40447
JEL 6 C50 3P+N 6 50 2 / 40 F 40436

82
SURGE ARRESTERS
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu SURGE ARRESTERS

COMBINED SURGE ARRESTERS TYPE 1 + 2 7+0

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Combined surge arresters Type 1 + 2 are coordinated in advance.They can manage and prevent the high energy
during a thunderbolt and to assure the better level of security of electricity of the electrical equipment

Surge arresters Type 1 is used to catch the energy caused by higher electricity compared to the capacity of direct
thunderbolt. The security device has passed a successful test according to the standards with electric wave
10/350 (class 1 test).

Surge arresters Type 2 is used to catch the energy caused by higher electricity, compared to the capacity of
indirect strike or commutative overvoltage. The security device has passed a successful test according to the
standards with electric wave 8/20 (class 2 test).

Response time: <25 nS

Voltage protection level: 1,5kV

Type Max inpluse current Iimp Max discharge current Imax Nominal line voltage Earthing system Product Catalogue number
of arrester (10/350μS) (8/20 μS) Un (V) category
SPD-X/1P+N 12.5kA 50kA 230 TT,TN-S B 64502
SPD-X/3P 12.5kA 50kA 230/400 TN-C B 64503
SPD-X/3P+N 12.5kA 50kA 230/400 TT,TN-S B 64504

Three phase protection TN-C system Three phase protection TN-S system

AUTOMATION
Monophase protection TT system

83
SURGE ARRESTERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
SURGE ARRESTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to
the product:
SURGE ARRESTERS SPD TYPE 7+0
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN61 643-1

The surge arrester consists of a semi-conductor according to the tables
valve element that opens at certain conditions. At • Rated discharge current In – the rated value of
normal conditions of the system, the surge arrester discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20μs, which can be
has infinitely high resistance between the protected repeatedly led to the ground: according to the tables
conductors and earthing circuit. At voltage increase • Full discharge current Imax – the peak value of the
due to atmospheric nature or system failure, the valve discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20μs, which the
element opens and leads the excessive voltage to the surge arrester can bear once: according to the table
grounded circuit. • Constant operating current: up to 800μA for 1P, 2P
After reversion of the normal voltage the valve and 3P; up to 600μA for 1P + N, 3P + N
element closes. The arrester can endure high • Indication for damaged surge arrester
momentary overloading. • Offered in types: 1P; 1P + N; 3P; 3P + N

FUNCTIONS: CONNECTING:
• protection of heavy-loaded electrical circuits from • flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding
overload section
TYPE AC FOR AC CURRENT
• used to protect not only particular consumers/
circuits, but also the whole panel MOUNTING:
• remarkable with high reliability of current • on DIN-rail
characteristics • mounting position: vertical
• control: automatic switching off at exit failure and • mounting in the distribution box on the front or right
recovery after eliminating the danger before the breaker according to the attached schemes
• Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-
TECHNICAL DATA: flammable
• Rated operating voltage Uc: - the operating voltage • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
of the surge arrester 275/440V; 50Hz • Installation altitude: up to 2000m
• Surge voltage Up: the voltage created in surge
arrester terminals at rated discharge current running:

Dimensions (mm)
COLOUR CODE for all types 5кА - yellow; white – 10кА; green – 20 кА and red 40кА

C H1 H2 D1 D2
5 90 45 43,5 58
AUTOMATION

84
SURGE ARRESTERS

The surge arrester selection is made according to the overload risk level or atmosphere activity, named B, C or D
(from high to low risk level).

THE COMPANY OFFERS THE FOLLOWING MODELS OF ARRESTERS:

Model SPD – Bxxxx – for systems with exceptionally high risk level. Mounted mainly in the beginning of the
installation or in the main panel.
Model SPD – Cxxxx – for systems with high or average risk level. Mounted in the beginning of the installation or
before the breaker.
Model SPD – Dxxxx – for systems with low risk level. Suitable for secondary protection of consumers in
combination with SPD – Bxxxx/SPD – Cxxxx

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu SURGE ARRESTERS

Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
SPD-D5/1p 5 10 275 1.2 17 / 170 B 64101
SPD-C10/1p 10 20 275 1.2 17 / 170 B 64102
SPD-C20/1p 20 40 275 1.8 17 / 170 B 64103
SPD-B40/1p 40 60 275 2 17 / 170 B 64104

Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
SPD-D5/1pN 5 10 275 1.2 8 / 80 B 64201
SPD-C10/1pN 10 20 275 1.2 8 / 80 B 64202
SPD-C20/1pN 20 40 275 1.8 8 / 80 B 64203
SPD-B40/1pN 40 60 275 2 8 / 80 B 64204

Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
SPD-D5/3p 5 10 440 1.2 5 / 50 B 64301
SPD-C10/3p 10 20 440 1.2 5 / 50 B 64302
SPD-C20/3p 20 40 440 1.8 5 / 50 B 64303
SPD-B40/3p 40 60 440 2 5 / 50 B 64304

Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

AUTOMATION
SPD-D5/3pN 5 10 440 1.2 4 / 40 B 64401
SPD-C10/3pN 10 20 440 1.2 4 / 40 B 64402
SPD-C20/3pN 20 40 440 1.8 4 / 40 B 64403
SPD-B40/3pN 40 60 440 2 4 / 40 B 64404

85
SURGE ARRESTERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
SURGE ARRESTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

COMBINED SURGE ARRESTERS AC – DC 7+0

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Specially designed surge arresters providing protection of solar and photo - voltaic systems; designed to protect
system against overvoltages resulting from indirect light impact. They could be installed in earthed and non -
earthed systems. They break photo - voltaic generator electric circuit when voltage reaches or over passes limit
threshold value, providing photo - voltaic protection against destroying.

COLOUR CODE for all types 5кА - yellow; white – 10кА; green – 20 кА and red 30кА

Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
SPD-DC-D5/1p 5 10 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.2 17 / 170 B 64105
SPD-DC-C10/1p 10 20 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.5 17 / 170 B 64106
SPD-DC-C20/1p 20 40 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.8 17 / 170 B 64107
SPD-DC-B40/1p 30 60 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 2.2 17 / 170 B 64108

TYPE AC FOR AC/DC

CURRENT

Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
SPD-DC-D5/1pN 5 10 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.2 8 / 80 B 64205
SPD-DC-C10/1pN 10 20 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.5 8 / 80 B 64206
SPD-DC-C20/1pN 20 40 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.8 8 / 80 B 64207
SPD-DC-B40/1pN 30 60 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 2.2 8 / 80 B 64208
AUTOMATION

TYPE AC FOR AC/DC

CURRENT

Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
SPD-DC-D5/3p 5 10 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 1.2 5 / 50 B 64305
SPD-DC-C10/3p 10 20 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 1.5 5 / 50 B 64306
86 SPD-DC-C20/3p 20 40 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 1.8 5 / 50 B 64307
SPD-DC-B40/3p 30 60 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 2.2 5 / 50 B 64308
SURGE ARRESTERS

TYPE AC FOR AC/DC

CURRENT

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LH1-D

Documents corresponding to the

product:
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LH1 - D 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1

The products are in accordance with LH 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors • Composition of the power contact surfaces:
the directives of EC “Low voltage for control of circuits and consumers operating in class unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
directives (LVD) no. 2006/95/EC” AC3. • Surge voltage wear resistance: >6000V
and “Electromagnetic Compatibility It is suitable for consumers with rated current up to • Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC
Directives (EMC) no. 2004/108/EC”. 95A. The contactors are offered in a type with 1 NO • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15
contact Uc
for operating circuit making and the models over 40A • Joining terminal: screw terminal
also have 1NC operating contactor. • Connecting:
Ì flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
FUNCTIONS: Ì rigid conductors
• switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥500000
controlling signal to the coil • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• making of control systems cycles):≥500000
• used as an operating element in process control • Number of cycles per hour: 500 UP TO 32A; 600 for
panels 40-95A
• remarkable with high reliability of current • Pole leaking power: up to 10W
characteristics
• reliable separation of power contactors MOUNTING:
• secured cover of the movable part of the contactor • on DIN-rail or
• -ith bolts to the surface
TECHNICAL DATA: • mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum ± 5°
• Operation class: AC 3 • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 60°C
• Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to • Altitude: up to 2000m
690V; 50/60Hz
#K#

Type Overall dimensions (mm)

a b Ф А B C
LH1 - D09-12 34/35 50/60 4.5 47 70 82
LH1 - D2510 40 48 4.5 57 80 95
LH1 - D3210 40 48 4.5 57 80 100
LH1 - D4011 40 100 6.5 77 126 116

AUTOMATION
Type number Motor rated capacity (kW) Coil capacity
Rated Tightening Coil Packing/ Product Catalogue
(VA)
current moment voltage Box (pcs) category number
220V 380V 415V 440V 660V closed open in AC-3 (N.m)
230V 400V 690V 440Vtp up

230 73321 87
LH1 - D3210 1NO 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 7.5 90 32A 2.5 1/50 F
400 73322
230 73401
LH1 - D4011 1NO 11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 1/20 F
400 73402
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LH1-D
 AUTOMATION
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-D/HK www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-D/HK 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1

LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors • Coil material: pure copper type QA-1
for control of circuits and consumers operating in class • Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 360
AC3. It is suitable for consumers with rated current up • Moveable part material: Bakelite
to 95A. The contactors are offered in a type with 1 NO • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: operating range
contact for operating circuit making and the models of coil
over 40A also have 1NC operating contactor. • Joining terminal: screw terminal
• Connecting:
FUNCTIONS: Ì flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
• switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at Ì rigid conductors
controlling signal to the coil • Electrical wear resistance (number of
• making of control systems cycles):≥1000000
• used as an operating element in process control • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
panels cycles):≥10000000
• remarkable with high reliability of current • Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 600 for
characteristics 40-95A
• reliable separation of power contactors • Pole leaking power: up to 13W
• secured cover of the movable part of the contactor
MOUNTING:
TECHNICAL DATA: • on DIN-rail
• Operation class: utilization category AC-3 • with bolts to the surface
• Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to • mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum ± 5°
690V; 50/60Hz • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
• Composition of the power contact surfaces: flammable (self-extinguishing material)
unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V • Altitude: up to 2000m
• Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC

Type Overall dimensions (mm)

a b Ø A B C
LT1-HK 06~12/LT-1K 34/35 45 4.5 45 50 50
LT-D 09~12 34/35 50/60 4.5 47 70 82
LT1 D18 34/35 50/60 4.5 47 70 87
LT1 D25 40 48 4.5 57 80 95
LT1 D32 40 48 4.5 57 80 100
AUTOMATION

LT-D 40~65 40 100/110 6.5 77 126 116

LT-D 80~95 40 100/110 6.5 87 126 127

88
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-D/HK

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-D/HK

Type number Rated capacity (kW) Power Rated Tightening Section of Packing/ Product Catalogue number according to the coil voltage (V)
consumption current in moment the power Box (pcs) category
of coil (VA) AC-3 440V (N.m) supply
220V 380V 415V 440V 660V closed open to up conductor 230V 400V 12V 24V 36V 48V 110V
230V 400V 690V inrush hold
LT 1 - HK 0610
1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 7 60 6A 1.7 0.75-2.5 1 / 100 B 23061E 23062E 23063E 23064E 23065E 23066E 23067E
1NO
LT 1 - HK 0910
2.2 3.7 3.7 3.7 4 7 60 9A 1.7 0.75-2.5 1 / 100 F 23091E 23092E 23094E 23095E 23096E 23097E
1NO*
LT 1 - HK 1210
3 4 4 4 5 7 60 12A 1.7 0.75-2.5 1 / 100 F 23121E 23122E 23125E 23126E 23127E
1NO*
LT 1 - HK 0610
1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 7 60 6A 1.7 0.75-2.5 1 / 100 F 23062 23063 23065 23066 23067
1NO*
LT1 - D0910
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1 / 50 B 23091 23092 23093 23094 23095 23096 23097
1NO
LT1 - D0901
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1 / 50 B 23273 23270 23271 23272 23277 23278 23279
1NC
LT1 - D1210
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1 / 50 B 23121 23122 23123 23124 23125 23126 23127
1NO
LT1 - D1201
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1 / 50 B 23274 23280 23281 23282 23283 23284 23285
1NC
LT1 - D1810
4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1 / 50 B 23181 23182 23183 23184 23185 23186 23187
1NO
LT1 - D1801
4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1 / 50 B 23275 23286 23287 23288 23289 23290 23291
1NC
LT1 - D2510
5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1 / 50 B 23251 23252 23253 23254 23255 23256 23257
1NO
LT1 - D2501
5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1 / 50 B 23276 23292 23293 23294 23295 23296 23297
1NC
LT1 - D3210
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 7.5 90 32A 2.5 2.5-10 1 / 50 B 23321 23322 23323 23324 23325 23326 23327
1NO
#K#

LT1 - D4011
11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 2.5-16 1 / 20 B 23401 23402 23403 23404 23405 23406 23407
1NO+1NC
LT1 - D5011
15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50A 5 6-25 1 / 20 B 23501 23502 23503 23504 23505 23506 23507
1NO+1NC
LT1 - D6511
18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65A 5 6-25 1 / 20 B 23651 23652 23653 23654 23655 23656 23657
1NO+1NC

AUTOMATION
LT1 - D8011
22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80A 9 10-50 1 / 15 B 23801 23802 23803 23804 23805 23806 23807
1NO+1NC
LT1 - D9511
25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95A 9 10-50 1 / 15 B 23951 23952 23953 23954 23955 23956 23957
1NO+1NC

89
Note: *Until supply last - 3 year standard+0 year extended warranty LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-D/HK

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-F www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-F 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1

The contactors LT 1- F are alternating current • Movable part composition: bakelite
contactors used to control circuits and consumers • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: operating range
operating in normal working conditions with of coil
switching on /off the consumer and dirty working • Joining terminal: screw terminal
environment. They are suitable for consumers with • Connecting:
electrical power consumption from 115A to 800A. Ì flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
Ì rigid conductors
FUNCTIONS: Ì rail
• frequently switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical • Electrical wear resistance (number of
circuits at controlling signal to the coil cycles):≥10000000
• making of systems for consumers’ control • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• used as an operating element in process control cycles):≥10000000
panels • Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 200
• remarkable with high reliability of current • Pole leaking power: from 16 to 80W
characteristics • Mounting:
• reliable separation of power contactors Ì with bolts to the surface
• secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Ì mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum±
10°C
TECHNICAL DATA: • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
• Operation class: utilization category AC-3 flammable (self-extinguishing material)
• Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
1000V; 50/60Hz • Altitude: up to 2000m
• Composition of the power contact surfaces:
unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
• Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
• Coil composition: pure coil copper QA-1 type
• Magnetic core composition: steel alloy 360

Type Overall dimensions (mm)

A B C L M Q Q1 P
LT 1 F150 163.5 170 171 107 150 26 57.5 40
LT 1 F225 168.5 197 181 113.5 172 21 51.5 48
LT 1 F265 201.5 203 181 141 178 39 66.5 48
AUTOMATION

LT 1 F400 213 206 219 145 182 43 74 48

LT 1 F630 309 304 255 155 264 60 89 80
LT 1 F800 309 304 255 155 264 60 89 80

Type number Motor rated capacity (kW) Power Rated Tightening Packing/ Product Catalogue number according to the coil voltage (V)
consumption current in moment Box (pcs) category
90 of coil (VA) AC-3 440V (N.m)
220V 380V 415V 440V 500V 660V 1000V closed open to up 230V 400V 24V* 36V 48V 110V
230V 400V 690V
LT1 - F115 30 55 59 59 59 80 60 45 550 115 A 18 1/4 B 23111 23112 23114 23115 23116 23117
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-F

LT1 - F150 40 75 80 80 90 100 65 45 550 150 A 25 1/4 B 23151 23152 23155 23156 23157
LT1 - F225 63 110 110 110 129 129 100 55 805 225 A 35 1/2 B 23861 23862 23865 23866 23867
LT1 - F265 75 132 140 140 160 160 147 10 700 265 A 35 1/2 B 23261 23262 23265 23266 23267
LT1 - F400 110 200 220 250 257 280 185 18 1000 400 A 50 1/1 B 23751 23752
LT1 - F630 200 335 375 400 400 450 450 25 1500 630 A 50 1/1 B 23771 23772
LT1 - F800 250 450 450 450 450 475 450 15 1300 800 A 50 1/1 B 23881 23882

Note: At mounting the containers from the series in control schemes a distance must be provided at the side of the contactor in case of eventual coil
change.
*Until Supply Last- Product category F

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS- LP-1D

Documents corresponding to the

product:
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS WITH DIRECT
CURRENT COIL LP1-D
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1

The contactors LP1 D are alternating current contactors • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
with DC operating of coil for control. The power plugs • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: operating range
of the contactor are designed for control of alternating of coil
current circuits and consumers operating in normal • Joining terminal: screw terminal
operating class AC-3 with frequently switching on/ • Connecting:
off the consumer and dirty working environment. The Ì flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
contactors are suitable for consumers with electrical Ì rigid conductors
power consumption from 9A to 225A. • Electrical wear resistance (number of
cycles):≥10000000
FUNCTIONS: • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• switching on/off alternating current consumers in cycles):≥10000000
direct current controlling schemes at controlling signal • Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A; 600 for
to the coil 40-95A
• making of systems for consumers’ control • Pole leaking power: up to 13W
• used as an operating element in process control panels
• remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics MOUNTING:
• reliable separation of power contacts • on DIN-rail
• secured cover of the movable part of the contactor • with bolts to the surface
• mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
TECHNICAL DATA:
• Rated operating voltage of the coil: from 12V DC to • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
220V DC flammable (self-extinguishing material)
• Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
690V DC • Altitude: up to 2000m
• insulation voltage: 690V
Type Overall dimensions (mm)
A B C a b
LP 1 D0910 47 76 95 34/35 50/60
LP 1 D1210 47 76 95 34/35 50/60
LP 1 D1810 47 76 95 34/35 50
LP 1 D2510 57 86 101 40 50
LP 1 D3210 57 86 101 40 50
LP 1 D4011 77 129 176 40 100
LP 1 D5011 77 129 176 40 100

AUTOMATION
LP 1 D6511 77 129 176 40 100
LP 1 D9511 87 129 182 40 100
LP 1 F115 163.5 170 171 40 150
LP 1 F150 163.5 170 171 40 150
LP 1 F225 168.5 197 181 48 172

Type Rated Auxiliary Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) Packing/Box Product Catalogue number according to the coil voltage (V DC)
current (А) contact 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V (pcs) category 12V 24V 36V 48V 110V 230V
(pcs.)
LP 1 D0910 9 1NO 2.20 4.00 4.00 4.00 5.50 1/40 B 23962 23098 23130 23971 23980 23139
91
LP 1 D1210 12 1NO 3.00 5.50 5.50 5.50 7.50 1/40 B 23963 23128 23131 23972 23981 23140
LP 1 D1810 18 1NO 4.00 7.50 7.50 7.50 10.0 1/30 B 23964 23188 23132 23973 23982 23141
LP 1 D2510 25 1NO 5.50 11.0 11.0 11.0 15.0 1/20 B 23925 23258 23133 23974 23983 23142
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS- LP-1D

LP 1 D3210 32 1NO 7.50 15.0 15.0 15.0 18.5 1/30 B 23966 23328 23134 23975 23984 23143
LP 1 D4011 40 1NO+1NC 11.0 18.5 18.5 18.5 30.0 1/10 B 23967 23408 23135 23976 23985 23144
LP 1 D5011 50 1NO+1NC 15.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 33.0 1/10 B 23968 23508 23136 23977 23986 23145
LP 1 D6511 65 1NO+1NC 18.5 30.0 30.0 30.0 37.0 1/10 B 23969 23658 23137 23978 23987 23146
LP 1 D9511 95 1NO+1NC 25.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 1/10 B 23970 23958 23138 23979 23988 23147
LP 1 F115 115 1NO 30.0 55.0 59.0 59.0 80.0 1/4 B 23118* 23914 23917 23989 23148
LP 1 F150 150 1NO 40.0 75.0 80.0 80.0 100 1/4 B 23158* 23915 23918 23990 23149
LP 1 F225 225 1NO 63.0 110 110 110 129 1/2 B 23916 23919 23994 23201

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS CJ19-43 www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING
ON OF CAPACITOR BANKS CJ19-43
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1

The AC contactors CJ19-43 are specially designed AC; 50/60Hz

electrical devices for commutation of three phase • Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to
capacitors used for power correction. They are 690V AC
alternating current contactor LT1 Dxx with mounted a • insulation voltage: 690V
group for peak current lowering from the transitional • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
process of the capacitor’s switching on/off. This group • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15
is a combination of current limiting resistors, switched Uc
on in the beginning of the transitional process • Number of the contacts: 3 NO power contacts +1NO
(switching on/off of the capacitor group). operative
The contactors are suitable for capacitors with rate up • Joining terminal: screw terminal
to 50 kVAr. • Connecting:
Ì flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
FUNCTIONS: Ì rigid conductors
• switching on/off of capacitor banks for reactive • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥300000
power compensation • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• making of systems for compensation of the energy cycles):≥1000000
reactive component • Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600
• lowering of the peak transitional currents at • Pole leaking power: up to 13W
switching on/off of the capacitor
• remarkable with high reliability of current MOUNTING:
characteristics • on DIN-rail or
• reliable separation of power contacts • with bolts to the surface
• secured part of the contactor against consumer • mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
contact • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
• do not allow manual operation flammable (self-extinguishing material)
• Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
TECHNICAL DATA: • Altitude: up to 2000m
• Operation class: utilization category AC6b
• Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V

Type Overall dimensions (mm)

A B C D
AUTOMATION

CJ19-32 DPK 56 74 130 150

CJ19-40 DPK 75 127 180 150
CJ19-65 DPK 85 127 200 157
CJ19-95 DPK 85 127 200 157
CJ19-115DPK 122 165 230 157
CJ19-150DPK 122 165 230 157
CJ19-170DPK 122 165 230 157

92 Type Rated current (А) Rated capacity Coil voltage Packing/Box Product Catalogue
of the consumer (kVAr) (V) (pcs) category number
400/440V 690V
CJ19-32 DPK 32 8 12.5 230 1/20 B 23932
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS CJ19-43

CJ19-32 DPK 32 8 12.5 400 1/20 B 23910

CJ19-40 DPK 40 12.5 15 230 1/16 B 23900
CJ19-40 DPK 40 12.5 15 400 1/16 B 23940
CJ19-65 DPK 65 25 30 230 1/16 B 23961
CJ19-65 DPK 65 25 30 400 1/16 B 23965
CJ19-95 DPK 95 30 36 230 1/16 B 23909
CJ19-95 DPK 95 30 36 400 1/16 B 23995
CJ19-115 DPK 115 35 40 230 1/4 B 23991
CJ19-150 DPK 150 40 50 230 1/4 B 23992
CJ19-170 DPK 170 50 60 230 1/4 B 23993

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LOW VOLTAGE REVERSE CONTACTORS

Documents corresponding to the

product:
REVERSE CONTACTORS LT4-DXX 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1

LT 4-Dxx series contactors is suitable for across- the line • insulation voltage: 690V
starting and reversing of-3 phase squirrel cage and slip • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
ring motors. It consist of two magnetic contactors LT1D. • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15
The contactor is provided whit a built-in interlock safety Uc
mechanism. The contactor is used for reverse control of • Number of plugs: 3 NO power contacts +1NO
induction motors with shortly rotor. operative (for contactors over 40A there is also
The contactors from the series are offered for consumers additional 1NC contact)
up to 95A. • Joining terminal: screw terminal
• Connecting:
FUNCTIONS: Ì flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
• switching on of electrical motors in one direction Ì rigid conductors
of rotation and reversing of the rotation direction at
outside command NOTE: The contactors are offered without factory
• making of control systems cabling
• remarkable with high reliability of current • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1 000
characteristics 000
• reliable switching on or separation of power contacts • Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10
• secured part of the contactors against consumer 000 000
contact • Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600
• secured cover of the movable part of the contactor • Pole leaking power: up to 13W
• impossibility for simultaneous switching on of the two
contactors from the group due to mechanical locking MOUNTING:
• on DIN-rail or
TECHNICAL DATA: • with bolts to the surface
• Operation class: AC 3 • mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
• Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
AC; 50/60 Hz (self-extinguishing material)
• Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
690V AC • Altitude: up to 2000m

Type Rated current Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(А) 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V (pcs) category number

LT 4 D1810 18 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 1 / 20 B 23301

LT 4 D2510 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 1 / 20 B 23302

AUTOMATION
LT 4 D3210 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 1 / 20 B 23303
Type Overall dimensions (mm)
LT 4 D4011 40 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 30 1/8 B 23304
A B C
LT 4 D6511 65 18.5 30 30 30 37 1/8 B 23305
LT 4 - D1810 100 70 83 LT 4 D9511 95 25 45 45 45 45 1/6 B 23306
LT 4 - D2510 130 80 98
LT 4 - D3210 130 80 105
LT 4 - D4011 167 126 116
LT 4 - D6511 167 126 116 93
LT 4 - D9511 182 127 127

TIME DELAY CONTACT BLOCK LT02-DXX 5+2

standard
7 YEAR TOTAL *for industrial
usage, 3 years
LOW VOLTAGE REVERSE CONTACTORS
+extended WARRANTY warranty

LT02-Dxx is designed to set time intervals from 0.1 to 180s in different control schemes. It is used most frequently
in combination with contactors from LT1-Dxx series to form “star/delta” starters for electrical motor control, as it
provides the necessary time for motor winding.

Type Number of contacts Time delay Delay Product category Catalogue number
LТ02-DT0 NO+NC 0.1~3s ON B 23901
LТ02-DT2 NO+NC 0.1~30s ON B 23902
LТ02-DT4 NO+NC 10~180s ON B 23903
LT02-DT22 NO+NC 0.1~30s OFF B 239022

Dimensions (mm)
W W2 L1 h1 h2 H
33 45 48 22 14 59
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
AUXILIARY CONTACTS 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-4-1
AUXILIARY CONTACTS • insulation voltage: 690V
At necessity the element provide auxiliary number of • Joining terminal: screw terminal
contacts. They are specially designed for mounting • Connecting:
on the movable part of the magnetic core of the Ì flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
contactors LT 1K/D series. Ì rigid conductors

FUNCTIONS: MOUNTING:
• extending the number of the operative contactors • on the movable cover of the contactor through
up to 4 in different pinching
• Combinations • mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
Ì switches on simultaneously with the other • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
contact system of the contactor flammable (self-extinguishing material)
• Operation class: AC 3
Type For Contactor Series Number of Rated current Section of the Product category Catalogue number
contacts conductor (mm²)

LT01-DN02 LT1-D & LT1-F 2NC 6A 0,5-1 B 23002

LT01-DN11 LT1-D & LT1-F NO+NC 6A 0,5-1 B 23011
LT01-DN20 LT1-D & LT1-F 2NO 6A 0,5-1 B 23020
LT01-DN22 LT1-D & LT1-F 2NO+2NC 6A 0,5-1 B 23022
Dimensions (mm)
LT01-DN40 LT1-D & LT1-F 4NO 6A 0,5-1 B 23040
LT01-DN04 LT1-D & LT1-F 4NC 6A 0,5-1 B 23004
H W L W1 W2
LT01-KN11 LT1-HK NO+NC 6A 0,5-1 B 23001
32 40 35 26 45
LT01-KN22 LT1-HK 2NO+2NC 6A 0,5-1 B 23003
H2 L1 L2
48 6,5 37

AUXILIARY CONTACTS LT03-DN11 5+2

7 YEAR TOTAL *for industrial
AUTOMATION

standard WARRANTY
usage, 3 years
+extended warranty

Providing on necessity additional number of plug Ì flexible conductors with or without cable end
points and are mounted sideward to the movable part Ì solid conductors
of the magnetic cores of contactors of the series LT1D • Mounting method:
till 65A. Variants with two additional plug points NO Ì mounting position – sideward to the contactor
and NC are offered. • Plastic: resistant to UV and non-burning (self-
extinguishing material)
94 FUNCTIONS:
• expanding the number of the operational plug
points
• switching on simultaneously with the rest of the
contact system
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS

• of the contactor
Dimensions (mm)
W1 W2 H L A TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS:
73 48 22 12,5 72 • Environment operational regime: АС 3
• Insulation voltage: 690V
• Double connector: screw connector
• Connection:

Type Rated current Section of the conductor (mm²) Product category Catalogue number

LТ03-DN11 6A 0,5-1 B 23311

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MODULE CONTACTORS

Documents corresponding to the

product:
MODULE CONTACTORS K SERIES 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 61095
Modular contactors K series are used for commutation AC; 50/60 Hz
of mono-phase and three-phase low power electrical • Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to
consumers. They provide connection between the 690V AC
consumers in small overall dimensions, silent work, • insulation voltage: 690V
mounting only at DIN-rails. • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
• Joining terminal: screw terminal
FUNCTIONS: • Connecting:
• switching on of consumers Ì flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
• making of control systems Ì rigid conductors
• remarkable with high reliability of current
characteristics MOUNTING:
• reliable switching on or separation of power • on DIN-rail or
contacts • mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
TECHNICAL DATA: flammable (self-extinguishing material)
• Operation class: AC 7a • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V • Altitude: up to 2000m
Type In Coil voltage (V) Contacts Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
K20 20A 230V 2NO 1/12/120 B 23008
C K20 20A 230V NO+NC 1/12/120 B 23007
K20 20A 230V 2NC 1/12/120 B 23009
H1 K20 25A 230V NO+NC 1/12/100 B 23012
K20 25А 230V 2NO 1/12/100 B 23013
K20 25A 230V 2NC 1/10/100 B 23014
K20 40A 230V NO+NC 1/6/60 B 23015
Dimensions (mm)
K20 40A 230V 2NO 1/6/60 B 23016
H1 C D1 D2 A E K20 40A 230V 2NC 1/6/60 B 23017
#K#

81 5 31 66 18 9
K20 100A 230V 2NO 1/4/40 B 23080
K20 100A 230V 1NO+1NC 1/4/40 B 23083
K20 100A 230V 2NC 1/4/40 B 23084
K40 25A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/6/60 B 23410
K40 25A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/6/60 B 23411

AUTOMATION
K40 25A 230V 4NO 1/6/60 B 23412
K40 25A 230V 4NC 1/6/60 B 23413
K40 40A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/4/40 B 23422
K40 40A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/4/40 B 23423
K40 40A 230V 4NO 1/4/40 B 23409
K40 40A 230V 4NC 1/4/40 B 23424
K40 63A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/4/40 B 23425
K40 63A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/4/40 B 23426
K40 63A 230V 4NO 1/4/40 B 23427
95
K40 63A 230V 4NC 1/4/40 B 23428
K40 80A 230V 4NO 1/2/20 B 23480
K40 80A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/2/20 B 23483
MODULE CONTACTORS

K40 80A 230V 4NC 1/2/20 B 23484

K40 80А 230V 3NO+1NC 1/2/20 B 23485

Dimensions (mm)
C D1 D2 H3 H4
5 66 48 45 20
E F
35 85

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1 The thermal relays LT 2- K/Exx series are three pole • Connecting:
relays designed for protection of induction motors Ì flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable
from overload or overheat. They are mounted to terminal for joining to the consumer
contactors LT 1 K/Dxx series and an operating circuit Ì to the contactor through the relay terminals
for motor control is passed through their NC contacts. Ì the connecting terminals with the consumer can
They have bimetallic releases /1 per phase/ through be adjusted according to the type of the contactor
them the motors current flows and indirectly mated. • Electrical wear resistance (number of
The bimetallic releases bend subject to the influence cycles):≥1000000
of mating and this results in tripping of the relay. • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
The contacts change switch position. The choice cycles):≥10000000
of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation • Indication for protection activating
at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees • Possibility for choice of the protection restoring
maximum constant operation, increases the (through the blue button)
effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. • Possibility for range adjustment of the protection
activating
FUNCTIONS: • Possibility for operation at higher frequency
• switching off alternating current consumers at MOUNTING:
current overload • mounting to the contactor: to the terminals of the
• making of control systems for consumers contactor as it is additionally clamped to its frame
• used as a protective operating element in control through a pin
panels of induction motors • mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum
• remarkable with high reliability of current ± 5°
characteristics • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
flammable (self-extinguishing material)
TECHNICAL DATA: • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz • Installation altitude: up to 2000m
• Rated operating current range: up to 690V AC
• insulation voltage: >690V NOTE: To protect the consumer from short circuit,
• Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V before the combination contactor- thermal relay, a
• Joining terminal: screw terminal suitably measured breaker or safety device should be
• temperature compensation: -25 +55 mounted.
• tripping category: class 10A
AUTOMATION

Type Dimensions (mm)

a b c m x y v z
LT 2 - Kxx 81 50 0 98 47 92 44 17
LT 2 - E13xx 86 55 10.7 108 47 92 44 17
LT 2 - E23xx 86 55 9 109 47 92 44 17
LT 2 - E33xx 115 76 9.5 124 54 109 70 30
96
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

For contactor Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Packing/Box Product Catalogue
LT1-K06 type 220V 380V 660V (A) adjustment range (pcs) category number
230V 400V 690V
LT2-K0303 - - - 0.30 0.25 - 0.30 1 / 100 B 13403
LT2-K0306 - 0.37 1.10 1.20 0.80 - 1.20 1 / 100 B 13406
LT2-K0307 0.37 0.75 1.50 1.80 1.20 - 1.80 1 / 100 B 13407
LT2-K0308 0.75 1.10 2.20 2.60 1.80 - 2.60 1 / 100 B 13408
LT2-K0310 1.10 1.50 3.00 3.70 2.60 - 3.70 1 / 100 B 13410
LT2-K0312 1.10 2.20 4.00 5.50 3.70 - 5.50 1 / 100 B 13411
LT2-K0314 2.20 4.00 5.50 8.00 5.50 - 8.00 1 / 100 B 13412
LT2-K0316 3.00 5.00 7.50 11.5 8.00 - 11.5 1 / 100 B 13413

For contactor Rated current (A) Protection Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue
LT1-K06 type adjustment range category number
LT2-K0301* 0.16 0.10 - 0.16 1 / 100 F 13401
LT2-K0302* 0.25 0.16 - 0.25 1 / 100 F 13402
LT2-K0304* 0.54 0.30 - 0.54 1 / 100 F 13404
LT2-K0305* 0.80 0.54 - 0.80 1 / 100 F 13405

*3 year standard+0 year extended warranty

For contactor Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Packing/Box Product Catalogue
LT1-D9 to (A) adjustment range (pcs) category number

AUTOMATION
220V 380V 660V
LT1-D25 type 230V 400V 690V
LT2-E1301 - - - 0.16 0.10 - 0.16 1 / 100 B 13001
LT2-E1302 - - - 0.25 0.16 - 0.25 1 / 100 B 13002
LT2-E1303 - - - 0.40 0.25 - 0.40 1 / 100 B 13003
LT2-E1304 - - 0.37 0.63 0.40 - 0.63 1 / 100 B 13004
LT2-E1305 - - 0.55 1.00 0.63 - 1.00 1 / 100 B 13005
LT2-E1306 - 0.37 1.10 1.60 1.0 - 1.60 1 / 100 B 13006
LT2-E1307 0.37 0.75 1.50 2.50 1.6 - 2.50 1 / 100 B 13007 97
LT2-E1308 0.75 1.50 3.00 4.00 2.5 - 4.00 1 / 100 B 13008
LT2-E1310 1.10 2.20 4.00 6.00 4.0 - 6.00 1 / 100 B 13010
LT2-E1312 2.00 3.70 5.50 8.00 5.5 - 8.00 1 / 100 B 13012
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

LT2-E1314 2.20 4.00 7.50 10.0 7.0 - 10.0 1 / 100 B 13014

LT2-E1316 3.70 5.50 11.0 13.0 9.0 - 13.0 1 / 100 B 13016
LT2-E1321 4.00 7.50 15.0 18.0 12.0 - 18.0 1 / 100 B 13021
LT2-E1322 5.50 9.00 18.5 25.0 17.0 - 25.0 1 / 100 B 13022
LT2-E1353 9.00 11.0 18.5 33.0 23.0 - 32.0 1 / 100 B 13053

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS www.elmarkholding.eu

For contactor Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Packing/Box Product Catalogue
LT1-D32 type 220V 380V 660V (A) adjustment range (pcs) category number
230V 400V 690V
LT2-E2353 11 11 18.5 32 23.0 - 32.0 1 / 100 B 13253
LT2-E2355 15 15 22.0 36 28.0 - 36.0 1 / 100 B 13255

For contactor Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Packing/Box Product Catalogue
LT1-D40 to 220V 380V 660V (A) adjustment range (pcs) category number
LT1-D95 type 230V 400V 690V
LT2-E3355 18.5 18.5 30 40 30.0 - 40.0 1 / 50 B 13355
LT2-E3357 22 22 30 50 37.0 - 50.0 1 / 50 B 13357
LT2-E3359 30 30 37 65 48.0 - 65.0 1 / 50 B 13359
LT2-E3363 45 45 55 80 63.0 - 80.0 1 / 50 B 13363
LT2-E3365 55 55 75 93 80.0 - 93.0 1 / 50 B 13365

For contactor LT1-F115 Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Packing/Box Product Catalogue
to LT1-F150 220V 380V 660V (A) adjustment range (pcs) category number
230V 400V 690V
LT2-F4367 40 75 100 150 90-150 1/30 B 13367
AUTOMATION

For contactor LT1-F225 Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Packing/Box Product Catalogue
to LT1-F400 220V 380V 660V (A) adjustment range (pcs) category number
230V 400V 690V
LT2-F4368 63 110 129 220 132-220 1/30 B 13368
98 LT2-F4369 100 160 220 330 200-330 1/18 B 13369
LT2-F4370 147 250 335 500 300-500 1/18 B 13370
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

For contactor LT1-F630 Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Packing/Box Product Catalogue
220V 380V 660V (A) adjustment range (pcs) category number
230V 400V 690V
LT2-F4371 200 335 450 630 380-630 1/18 B 13371

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu THERMOMAGNETIC AUTOMATIC BREAKER

THERMOMAGNETIC AUTOMATIC BREAKER

TM2/TM3
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

The thermomagnetic automatic breakers TM 2-Exx TECHNICAL DATA:

series are devices designed for control and protection • Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz
of induction motors from overload, overheat or short • Rated operating current range: from 0.1 to 80A
circuit. The overload motor protection is carried according to the type in table 1
out by the built in the breaker thermal elements, • insulation voltage: 690V
and the short circuit protection is carried out by • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
the magnetic elements. These magnetic elements • Joining terminal: screw terminal
allow the adjustment of the current leakage which • Connecting:
is 13 times the maximum current of the thermal Ì flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable
Dimensions protection. The overload protection elements include terminal for joining to the consumer
automatic compensation for the ambient temperature Ì to the contactor through the relay terminals
changes. In combination with under voltage release Ì the connecting terminals with the consumer can
the thermomagnetic breaker TM 2-Exx also provides be adjusted according to the type of the contactor
protection of the motors from fall out of a phase from • Electrical wear resistance (number of
the power supply. The choice of a suitable protection cycles):≥1000000
prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
conditions and guarantees maximum constant cycles):≥10000000
operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs • Indication for protection activating
the term of exploitation. • Switching on of the breaker manually with button
“I” and switching off with button “O” manually or
FUNCTIONS: automatically at failure or after activating of the
Auxiliary UVR
• switching off alternating current consumers at protection
contact
current overload • Possibility for range adjustment of the protection
• switching off the electrical circuit to the consumer at activating
inlet short circuit • Possibility for operation at higher frequency
• protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase • Possibility for independent operation or as an
voltage (if there is under voltage release) element of an automation system
• used as a protective operating element in control • tripping category: class 10A
panels of induction motors
• remarkable with high reliability of current MOUNTING:
characteristics • mounting to DIN-rail
• possibility for change/choice of the protection • mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
current (according to the operating current of the • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-

AUTOMATION
motor) flammable (self-extinguishing material)
Dimensions (mm) • automatic compensation of the ambient • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
H l1 l2 d D temperature • Altitude: up to 2000m
89 16 50 10 9,2
w1 w2 h1 h2
44,5 18 22 45

99
THERMOMAGNETIC AUTOMATIC BREAKER

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
THERMOMAGNETIC AUTOMATIC BREAKER www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Rated capacity of three-phase motor in AC-3 category instantaneous short- Current setting Thermal current Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue
220V 400V 440V 500V 690V circuit release (A) range (A) Ithe TM2-E category number
230V 410V (A)

TM2-E01 - - - - - 1.5 0.1 - 0.16 0.16 1 / 50 B 48001

TM2-E02 - 0.06 0.06 - - 2.4 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 1 / 50 B 48002
TM2-E03 0.06 0.09 0.09 - - 5.0 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 1 / 50 B 48003
TM2-E04 - 0.12 0.18 - 0.37 8.0 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 1 / 50 B 48004
TM2-E05 0.09 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 13.0 0.63 - 1.00 1 1 / 50 B 48005
TM2-E06 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 22.5 1 - 1.60 1.6 1 / 50 B 48006
TM2-E07 0.37 0.75 0.75 1.10 1.50 33.5 1.6 - 2.50 2.5 1 / 50 B 48007
TM2-E08 0.55 1.10 1.50 1.50 2.20 51.0 2.5 - 4.00 4 1 / 50 B 48008
TM2-E10 1.10 2.20 2.20 3.00 4.00 78.0 4 - 6.30 6.3 1 / 50 B 48010
AUTOMATION

TM2-E14 1.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.50 138 6 - 10.0 9 1 / 50 B 48014

TM2-E16 2.20 5.50 5.50 7.50 9.00 170 9 - 14.0 13 1 / 50 B 48016
TM2-E20 4.00 7.50 7.50 9.00 15.0 223 13 - 18.0 17 1 / 50 B 48020
TM2-E21 5.50 9.00 11.0 11.0 18.5 327 17 - 23.0 21 1 / 50 B 48021
TM2-E22 5.50 11.0 11.0 15.0 22.0 327 20 - 25.0 23 1 / 50 B 48022
TM2-E32 7.50 15.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 416 24 - 32.0 24 1 / 50 B 48032
TM3-E40 11.0 18.5 22.0 25.0 33.0 480 25 - 40.0 32 1 / 15 B 48040
100 TM3-E63 15.0 30.0 33.0 40.0 55.0 550 40 - 63.0 50 1 / 15 B 48063
TM3-E80 22.0 40.0 45.0 55.0 63.0 665.5 56 - 80.0 64 1 / 15 B 48080
THERMOMAGNETIC AUTOMATIC BREAKER

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR TM2

Documents corresponding to the

product:
VOLTAGE RELEASE (VR) FOR TM2 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1 For increasing the effectiveness of the MOUNTING:
thermomagnetic breakers TM 2-Exx operation, they • laterally to a breaker
can be supplied with auxiliary devices, designed • At the side of the breaker through special openings
for widening the practice range and improving the
technical characteristics of the breakers.
The release is designed to switch off the
thermomagnetic breaker when the controlling voltage
falls under breaking level 0.55 to 0.7 UN and does not
allow switching on of the breaker unless the voltage is
over 0.85 Un.

FUNCTIONS:
• switching off the breaker at power supply voltage fall
under 0.55 – 0.7 Un
• does not allow switching on of the breaker when the
power supply voltage is under 0.85 Un
Type Voltage Product Catalogue • prevents unwarranted secondary start of the breaker
(V) category number at falling off and restoring of the power supply voltage
ТМ2 АU225 230 B 48099 • protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase
ТМ3 АU385 400 B 48098 voltage
• used as a protective operating element in control
panels of induction motors
• remarkable with high reliability of current
characteristics

Documents corresponding to the WATERTIGHT BOX FOR TM2-E

product:
Standard EN 60529
Specially designed plastic box with silicon screen for
increasing the IP code from dust and moisture to IP
65. Designed for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers of
up to 32A

AUTOMATION
• Mounting:
Ì mounting position: vertical gradient, maximum± 5°
Ì mounted to horizontal surfaces (walls) with bolts
Ì the breaker TM2 Exx is fixed inside of it on rail
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and
non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)

Type Product Catalogue 101

category number
ТМ2 Е B 8083 AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR TM2

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR TM2 www.elmarkholding.eu

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK TM2 AE11-

FRONT MOUNTING
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

It is designed to switch on operational systems

or signalization. Designed with one NO and one
NC contact. It changes the position of its contacts
Type Product Catalogue according to the position of the breaker (switched on/
category number off ) to which it is mounted. 21 22

ТМ2 АE11 B 48912 • Mounting:

Ì laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
13 14
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
flammable (self-extinguishing material)
• Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• Altitude: up to 2000m

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK TM2 AE11-

SIDE MOUNTING
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

It is designed to switch on operational systems

or signalization. Designed with one NO and one
NC contact. It changes the position of its contacts
according to the position of the breaker (switched on/
off ) to which it is mounted.
• Mounting:
Ì laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
flammable (self-extinguishing material)
Type Product Catalogue • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
category number • Altitude: up to 2000m
ТМ2 АN11 B 48911
ТМ3 АN11 B 48913
AUTOMATION

102
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR TM2

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu STARTERS

Documents corresponding to the

product:
STARTERS FOR DIRECT START 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1 The electromagnetic starters LT 5 Dxx series are NOTE: In case you need different controlling coils
devices designed for remote control, direct control voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional
and protection of induction motors or other electrical representatives.
consumers. They are a combination of contactors LT • Rated operating voltage: 690V
1 Dxx series and thermal protection LT 2 Exx factory • Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC
cabled. The starters are offered on the market in metal • insulation voltage: 690V
or plastic boxes with the corresponding IP code from • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
dust and moisture. At mounting there should be • Joining terminal: screw terminal
provided protection of the device from short circuit • Little power consumption and small dimensions
through breakers or disconnectors. If necessary, at • Connecting:
client’s order the factory mounted thermal protection Ì flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable
in the pneumatic starter can be substituted. The choice terminal for joining to the consumer and section
of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation according to the motor power
at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees Ì two by two inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for
maximum constant operation, increases the the cables
with thermal overload relays effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. • Possibility for range adjustment of the protection
activating
FUNCTIONS: • IP code: IP 44
• switching on/off alternating current consumers • Possibility for operation at higher frequency
• does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on • Mounting:
of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage Ì mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws
• protects the motor from overload in the range of the Ì mounting position: vertical gradient, maximum± 5°
corresponding thermal protection • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
• remarkable with high reliability of current flammable (self-extinguishing material)
characteristics • Metal corpus: corrosion-proof coating
• Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
TECHNICAL DATA: • Altitude: up to 2000m
• Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 230/400V
AC; 50/60 Hz

AUTOMATION
103
STARTERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
STARTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Rated capacity of motors Rated Thermal relay Coil Packing/Box Product Catalogue
50/60Hz AC-3 category current adjustment voltage (V) (pcs) category number
220V 380V 415V (A) range
230V 400V 440V
230 1 / 16 B 43091
LT5 D093 2.2 4.0 4.0 9 7 .. 10A
400 1 / 16 B 43092
230 1 / 16 B 43121
LT5 D123 3.0 5.5 5.5 12 9 .. 13A
400 1 / 16 B 43122
230 1 / 16 B 43181
LT5 D185 4.0 7.5 9.0 18 12 .. 18A
400 1 / 16 B 43182
140

120

166
2 x PE13

2 x PE13
Note: Upon request the thermal relay will be replaced
88

2 x 5.5

150

Type Rated capacity of motors Rated Thermal relay Coil Packing/Box Product Catalogue
50/60Hz AC-3 category current adjustment voltage (V) (pcs) category number
220V 380V 415V (A) range
230V 400V 440V
230 1 / 16 B 43251
LT5 D255 5.5 11 11 25 17 .. 25A
400 1 / 16 B 43252
230 1 / 16 B 43321
LT5 D325 7.5 15 15 32 23 .. 32A
400 1 / 16 B 43322
142

135

Note: Upon request the thermal relay will be replaced

AUTOMATION

185

2 x PE16 16
2 x 5.5
101

PE13

165

Type Rated capacity of motors Rated Thermal relay Coil Packing/Box Product Catalogue
104 50/60Hz AC-3 category current
(A)
adjustment
range
voltage (V) (pcs) category number
220V 380V 415V
230V 400V 440V
230 1/6 B 43401
LT5 D405 11.0 18.5 22 40 30 .. 40A
STARTERS

400 1/6 B 43402

230 1/6 B 43651
LT5 D655 18.5 30.0 37 65 48 .. 65A
400 1/6 B 43652
230 1/6 B 43951
LT5 D955 25.0 45.0 45 95 80 .. 93A
400 1/6 B 43952
161
150

312
2 x PE29
Note: Upon request the thermal relay will be replaced
4 x 7.7
105
181

PE13 195

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu STARTERS

Documents corresponding to the

product:
”STAR/DELTA”STARTER 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1 The electromagnetic starters LT 3 Dxx series are • protects the motor from overload in the range of the
devices designed for remote control, direct control and corresponding thermal protection
protection of induction motors coiled and operating • indication of the operating condition through a valve
according to a starter scheme “star/delta”. They are a indicator
combination of three contactors LT 1 Dxx series, time • possibility for mounting of additional contacts (for
relay and a set of buttons “start” and “stop” factory the open type)
cabled. They provide the easy motor unwinding giving • remarkable with high reliability of current
possibility for setting the time for unwinding in “star” as characteristics
the time for switching between “star” and “delta” is fixed
to 0.5 seconds. TECHNICAL DATA:
The starters are offered on the market in two types: • Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC;
• closed type – metal boxes providing the 50/60 Hz
corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP 54) NOTE: In case you need different controlling coils
as at mounting there should be provided protection voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional
of the device from short circuit through breakers or representatives.
disconnectors • Rated operating voltage: 690V
• open type – for mounting in distribution boxes as • Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93A AC
at mounting there should be provided protection • insulation voltage: >690V
of the device from short circuit through breakers or • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
disconnectors • Joining terminal: screw terminal
The starters are offered on the market without • Little power consumption and small dimensions
mounted thermal protection which is purchased • Connecting:
separately according to the motor capacity. The choice Ì flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable
of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation terminal for joining to the consumer and section
at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees according to the motor power
maximum constant operation, increases the Ì three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices
effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. for the cables
If necessary, at client’s order the power supply • Possibility for operation at higher frequency
operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be • IP code: IP54
changed. • Mounting:
Ì mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws
FUNCTIONS: Ì mounting position: vertical gradient, maximum± 5°
• switching on/off alternating current three phase • The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint
motors operating according to a scheme “star - delta” • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on • Altitude: up to 2000m

AUTOMATION
of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage

105
STARTERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
STARTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Type designation Overall dimensions (mm)

(without a box) height width depth
LТ3-D25А 135 170 160
LТ3-D32А 135 170 160
LТ3-D40А 150 285 190
LТ3-D65А 150 285 190
LТ3-D95А 150 310 190

Type designation Rated capacity (kW) Rated Coil Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(without a box) 220V 380V 415V 440V current voltage (pcs) category number
230V 400V (A) (V AC)

LТ3-D25А 11 15 15 15 25 400 1/6 B 43253

LТ3-D32А 15 18.5 18.5 18.5 32 400 1/6 B 43323
LТ3-D40А 18.5 22 22 22 40 400 1/4 B 43403
LТ3-D65А 30 55 55 55 65 400 1/4 B 43653
LТ3-D95А 37 75 75 75 95 400 1/4 B 43953

Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor.
The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are
chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor.

Type designation Overall dimensions (mm)

(with box) height width depth

LT 3 -B-D25A 370 240 160

LT 3 -B-D32A 370 240 160
AUTOMATION

LT 3 -B-D40A 470 265 160

LT 3 -B-D65A 470 265 160
LT 3 -B-D95A 470 265 160

Type designation Rated capacity (kW) Rated Coil Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(with box) 220V 380V 415V 440V current voltage (pcs) category number
230V 400V (A) (V AC)
106 LT 3 - B - D25А 11 15 15 15 25 400 1/4 B 43254
STARTERS

Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor.
The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are
chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor.

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu STARTERS

Documents corresponding to the

product:
REVERSE STARTER 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1 The electromagnetic starters LT4 Dxx series are devices TECHNICAL DATA:
used for direct start, reverse start and protection of • Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC;
induction motors with short connected rotor. They 50/60 Hz
are a combination of two contactors LT1 Dxx series
supplied with two buttons “start” and one “stop” factory NOTE: In case you need different controlling coils
cabled. They provide the unwinding of the motor in voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional
one of the directions with possibility for pushing the representatives.
button “stop” and giving command from the other • Rated operating voltage: 690V
“start” for changing the motor winding direction. • Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC
The two contactors are mechanically blocked and • insulation voltage: 690V
do not allow simultaneous start in both winding • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
directions. The starters are offered – closed type in • Joining terminal: screw terminal
metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code • Little power consumption and small dimensions
from dust and moisture (IP54) as at mounting there • Connecting:
with thermal overload relays should be provided protection of the device from Ì flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable
short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. The terminal for joining to the consumer and section
starters are offered with mounted thermal protection according to the motor power
which can be substituted according to the motor Ì three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices
power. The choice of a suitable protection prevents for the cables
motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions • Possibility for operation at higher frequency
and guarantees maximum constant operation, • IP code: IP 44
increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of • Mounting:
exploitation. Ì mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws
If necessary, at order the power supply operating Ì mounting position: vertical gradient, maximum± 5°
voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed. • The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint
• Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
FUNCTIONS: • Altitude: up to 2000m
• switching on alternating current three phase motors
in one winding direction, switching off and change of
the winding direction at giving a signal
• does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on
of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage
• protects the motor from overload in the range of the
corresponding thermal protection
• remarkable with high reliability of current

AUTOMATION
characteristics

Type designation Rated capacity (kW) Overall dimensions (mm) Rated Coil Packing/ Product Catalogue
(with a box) 220V 380V 415V 440V height width depth current voltage Box (pcs) category number
230V 400V (A) (V AC)

LT 4 - B - D25А 11.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 240 240 160 25 400 1/8 B 43001
SCHEME “REVERSE” LT 4 - B - D40А 18.5 22.0 22.0 22.0 270 265 160 40 400 1/2 B 43003 107
LT 4 - B - D95А 37.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 270 265 160 95 400 1/4 B 43005
LT 4 - B - D25А 11.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 240 240 160 25 230 1/4 B 43006
LT 4 - B - D32А 15.0 18.5 18.5 18.5 240 240 160 32 230 1/4 B 43007
STARTERS

LT 4 - B - D40А 18.5 22.0 22.0 22.0 270 265 160 40 230 1/4 B 43008
LT 4 - B - D65А 30.0 55.0 55.0 55.0 270 265 160 65 230 1/4 B 43009
LT 4 - B - D95А 37.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 270 265 160 95 230 1/4 B 43010

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
FREQUENCY INVERTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
ELM 2000+ FREQUENCY INVERTERS 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN61800-3
EN61800-5-1 High-tech motor control concept, based on advanced • Display:
DSP-technology - ready for V/Hz, SENSORLESS Ì 7 segment, 4 characters
VECTOR, CLV and PMM motor control - intelligent Ì Config-Parameters and -value, programmable to
AUTOTUNING functions for easy setup display various working parameters
Flexible inverter control, dual high resolution analogue • I/O Channels and control functions:
inputs, free mappable digital I/O channels Ì Inverter control- Via terminals / Keypad / Serial link
(or combination of all)
Ready for all commonly used fieldbus systems
Ì Digital inputs- 6 (8) Dig. inputs (NPN-PNP
Universal function-set for all kind of industrial and selectable) pulstrain-input
residential applications, including integrated Ì Speed reference input- Potentiometer (on keypad
PID/pump controller routines unit, external), analogue signal (terminals),
Ì keypad, internal programmable value, pulsetrain,
Smart PC-tools, for inverter control, parametrization and serial link
troubleshooting. Parameter-duplication stick Ì Analogue channels- analogue channels - 12 BIT:
0…10V, 0...5V, -10V...0...10V, 0..(4)20 mA,
Brake chopper integrated Ì all free scalable in gain and offset, and
TECHNICAL FEATURES: mathematically concatenable
Ì Analogue outputs- 2 analogue outputs,
• Power range: programmable in gain and function (0…10V,
Ì 0,4……400 kW 0(4)..20 mA)
• Power input: Ì Digital outputs- 2 digital outputs (free mapping to
Ì Rated input voltage- 1-Phase 220V~240V~±15%); different functions)
3-Phase 380V-460V (+/-)15% Ì Relais output- 1 switchover contact 3A
Ì Input frequency- 44….67 Hz 250VAC/30VDC (programmable assignment)
Ì Data link- Serial link RS 485 (MODBUS)
• Motor output: Ì Special functions- 24V / 50 mA auxiliary power
Ì Output frequency- 0-650 Hz supply on terminals, 10V potentiometer power
Ì Frequency resolution- 0,01 Hz Ì supply, 5V/100 mA power supply on modbus
Ì Overload capability- 150% - 60 sec. / 10 min connector Simple PTC / KLIXON motor protection
• Control mode: • Protection:
Ì Motor control algorithm- V/Hz-SpaceVector, SLV- Ì Electrical- Overvoltage, undervoltage
SENSORLESS VECTOR,Torque/Speed control Ì Overcurrent, overload, motor-overload, output
Ì mode CLV-Closed loop vector,Permanent Magnet short-circuit
Synchronous Motor Ì Thermal- Heatsink overtemperature, I²xt
AUTOMATION

Ì Chopper frequency- 0.8…16 kHz (fixed / random) motorprotection

Ì V/Hz curve- Linear, exponential, and user-
programmable curve • Operating conditions:
Ì Starting torque- 150% rated torque at 0,5 Hz (in Ì Protection class IP20
SLV Mode) Ì Working temperature -10+50 °C
Ì Torque compensation- Automatic / Manual Ì Humidity- 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing, non-
Ì Motor data input- Manual, from nameplate / corrosive
AUTOTUNING Ì Altitude- 1000 m, above 1% derating / 100m
108 Ì Control range- 1:100 in SLV mode,1:1000 in CLV Ì Vibration- Max. 0,5 g
mode,1:20 in PMSM mode
Ì Speed precision +/- 0,5% (SLV),+/- 0.02% (CLV)
Ì Torque precision +/- 5% (SLV)
Ì DC-Brake- User programmable functions
FREQUENCY INVERTERS

Ì Brake chopper- Chopper transistor integrated (up

to 90 kW)

Type of sign
ELМ2000+ 0015 T3
power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase
motor power
inverter model

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu FREQUENCY INVERTERS

Type Input Maximum Maximum Dimentions Weights (kg) Product Catalogue

voltage (V) output power current (WxDxH-mm) category number
(kW) output (А)
E2000-0004 S2B 230 0.4 2.5A 80x140x135 1.40 B 423400P
E2000-0007 S2B 230 0.7 4.5A 80x140x135 1.50 B 423401P
E2000-0015 S2B 230 1.5 7A 106x180x150 2.00 B 423402P
E2000-0022 S2B 230 2.2 10A 106x180x150 2.10 B 423403P
E2000-0007 T3 400 0.7 2A 106x180x150 2.00 B 423404P
E2000-0015 T3 400 1.5 4.6A 106x180x150 2.10 B 423405P
E2000-0022 T3 400 2.2 6.5A 106x180x170 2.20 B 423406P
E2000-0030 T3 400 3.0 7A 138x235x152 2.50 B 423407P
E2000-0040 T3 400 4.0 9A 138x235x152 3.00 B 423408P
E2000-0055 T3 400 5.5 12A 156x265x170 3.50 B 423409P
E2000-0075 T3 400 7.5 17A 156x265x170 4.50 B 423410P
E2000-0110 T3 400 11.0 23A 205x340x196 4.80 B 423411P
LCD REMOTE FRAMESIZE E2000-0150 T3 400 15.0 32A 205x340x196 8.00 B 423412P
KEYPAD FOR CABINET IP66
E2000-0185 T3 400 18.5 38A 205x340x196 8.50 B 423413P
423432P
E2000-0220 T3 400 22.0 44A 270x435x235 9.00 B 423414P
E2000-0300 T3 400 30.0 60A 315x480x235 22.50 B 423415P
E2000-0370 T3 400 37.0 75A 315x480x235 24.00 B 423416P
E2000-0450 T3 400 45.0 90A 360x555x265 24.50 B 423417P
E2000-0550 T3 400 55.0 110A 360x555x265 41.50 B 423418P
E2000-0750 T3 400 75.0 150A 410x650x300 42.00 B 423419P
E2000-0900 T3 400 90.0 180A 410x650x300 56.00 B 423420P
E2000-1100 T3 400 110.0 220A 516x765x326 56.50 B 423421P
E2000-1320 T3 400 132.0 265A 560x910x342 87.00 B 423422P
E2000-1600 T3 400 160.0 320A 560x910x342 123.00 B 423423P
E2000-1800 T3 400 180.0 360A 400x1310x385 124.00 B 423424P
E2000-2000 T3 400 200.0 400A 535x1340x380 125.00 B 423425P
E2000-2200 T3 400 220.0 440A 535x1340x380 185.00 B 423426P
CABLE FOR REMOTE KEYPAD E2000-2500 T3 400 250.0 480A 600x1465x380 186.00 B 423427P
IP66 - 1.5meter E2000-2800 T3 400 280.0 530A 600x1465x380 225.00 B 423428P
423433P
E2000-3150 T3 400 315.0 580A 600x1465x380 230.00 B 423429P
E2000-3550 T3 400 355.0 640A 600x1600x388 233.00 B 423430P

AUTOMATION
E2000-4000 T3 400 400.0 690A 600x1600x388 234.00 B 423431P

109
FREQUENCY INVERTERS

PARAMETER
COPY STICK
423434P

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
FREQUENCY INVERTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
ELM 1000 FREQUENCY INVERTERS 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN60898-1
EN 60947-2 Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase • activation of output safety functions option
induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide • electronic motor protection
for the implementation of some control laws, thus
becoming an indispensable part of the control systems TECHNICAL FEATURES:
for conveyors and packaging machines, pumps, air • Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz
conditioning systems, etc. The ELM 1000 inverter provides • Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10%
the so-called no-sensor control, V/f control and impulse • Unbalance of phases: < 3%
control while the output load can reach up to 150% • Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
within 60 seconds. It features easy definition of curves • Output frequency: 0 – 400 Hz
and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use • Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max
of control panel buttons. The inverter can auto calibrate
• Overload capacity:
according to the motor power, i.e. if the inverter is
connected to a motor with power different from that set Ì constant: up to 110%
by the inverter manufacturer, it automatically adjusts its Ì momentary: up to 150%
programmable parameters to suit the motor parameters. • Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1%
• Type of connection:
FUNCTIONS: Ì the connection of the inverter to the power
• rotation speed increase – automatic and manual supply should always be done through a circuit
• sliding compensation: from 0 to 20%
• no-sensor control of the motor breaker of the MCB or MCCB type
• adjustment of the V/F control curve – linear or Ì connection of consumer to power terminals:
quadratic through conductors suitable for the power
• energy saving through automatic optimization of the Ì connection of control circuits: flexible conductor
V/F curve up to 1.5 mm²
• PID control law implementation option
• omission of resonance frequencies NOTE: It is not recommendable to mount contactors
• JOG function or other commutation devices between the frequency
• ‘counter’ function inverter and the motor, except as described in the
• automatic restart option in case of power supply product passport.
failure • Mounting:
• fifteen speed degrees control option Ì mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts
• control choice from the control panel; external or Ì mounting position – vertical gradient maximum ± 5°
COM terminal
• frequency control from the control panel, external NOTE: When more than one inverter is mounted in
Type Overall dimensions (mm)
potentiometer by current or by voltage a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by
• auto-calibration in accordance with the switched side and when this is not possible, the appropriate
H W A B D d motor
cooling conditions should be provided.
G0007S2B 150 105 139 94 120 Ø4 • incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise
rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc. • Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-
AUTOMATION

G0015S2B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5 extinguishing material)

• outgoing discrete control signal 24V
G0022S2B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5 • outgoing analogue control signal 0 – 10V • Ambient temperature: -10° to 65° C
G0007T3B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5 • DC brake in static mode • Altitude : up to 2000 m
G0015T3B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5 • dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor – • Function enhancement option: through the
used in inert electric motor load inclusion of additional modules
G0022T3B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5
• output voltage adjustment option
G0037T3B 250 162 233 145 150 Ø6
G0040T3B 250 162 233 145 150 Ø6 Type Input voltage (V) Maximum output Maximum current Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue
G0055T3B 300 200 282 182 160 Ø6 power (kW) output (А) category number
110 G0075T3B 300 200 282 182 160 Ø6 ELМ1000-G0007T3B 400 0.75 2 1/4 F 423307M
G0110T3C 340 225 322 160 220 Ø6 ELМ1000-G0040T3B 400 4.0 9 1/1 F 423340M
G0150T3C 380 230 362 186 225 Ø6 ELМ1000-G0110T3C 400 11 23 1/1 F 423391M
ELМ1000-G0150T3C 400 15 32 1/1 F 423392M
FREQUENCY INVERTERS

Type of sign
ELМ1000- G -0150 T3 С
lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid
power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase
motor power
inverter type: G=constant momentum
inverter model
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu SOFT STARTER

Documents corresponding to the

product:
SOFT STARTER ELM 2500 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN60947-4-2
EN 60947-1
Soft starters are designed to control the start of • Control functions
three-phase induction motors with short-circuited Ì output faults
rotor. A number of motor control issues are avoided Ì motor faults diagnostics
through them, and namely: prolonged start moments, Ì keyboard or outward control
auto-ignition of motor, there is no need of stardelta Ì delayed start option
switching, auto-transformer switching, resistant Ì faults memory
switching, etc. The ELM 2500 soft starter pertains TECHNICAL FEATURES:
to the AC53b type of starters as per the standard • Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz
requirements and it provides rotation of motor and • Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10%
once the operation mode is set, a shunt contactor • Unbalance of phases: < 3%
of the LT 1 D/F series is switched to control motor • Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
operation as the soft starter is not designed to control • Obligatory bypass contactor installation
motors in a set mode. Under a stop command in • Mounting :
accordance with the selected control scheme, the Ì mounting to a flat surface through bolts
soft starter can or can not be included in shutting the Ì mounting position – vertical gradient maximum
motor down. ± 5°

FUNCTIONS: NOTE: When more than one soft starter is mounted

• System functions in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side
Ì over-voltage protection – motor will switch off by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate
when power supply exceeds the preset limits cooling conditions should be provided.
Ì overload protection – protects the motor from • Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-
overloading extinguishing material)
Ì phase loss protection • Altitude : up to 2000 m
Ì temperature overload protection

Type Overall dimensions (mm)

A B C E F d
EL M25015 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25022 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25037 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25045 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6

AUTOMATION
EL M25055 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25075 510 260 194 389 232 Ø8

Type Power of motor Rated current Type of bypass Section of Packing/Box Product Catalogue 111
(kW) (A) contactor power supply (pcs) category number
conductors
EL M25015 15 30 LT 1-D 50 10 1/1 F 42225015
SOFT STARTER

EL M25045 45 90 LT 1-D 95 25 1/1 F 42225045

EL M25055 55 110 LT 1-F 115 25 1/1 F 42225055
EL M25075 75 150 LT 1-F 150 35 1/1 F 42225075
 AUTOMATION
COMPLEX COMPENSATING DEVICES www.elmarkholding.eu

COMPLEX COMPENSATING DEVICES 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The use of electrical energy in industry is invariably • active – broader spread. The system controls the
connected with its transformation. The development form of the consumed current and generates different
of semiconductor elements and the broader coming capacity depending on the load changes.
of semi-conductor transformers, frequency control, When designing the electro distributing system of
welding machines and electrical arc furnaces in industrial projects the following tasks are taken into
industrial projects have a negative impact over the consideration:
electrical power quality in the electro distributing • defining the factor of non-sinusoid of the consumers
systems. Induction machines need reactive energy to and the voltage harmonic components
create electromagnetic field. The reactive component • defining the additional loading of the capacitor
of current is taken from the electro distributing batteries from the harmonic components and
systems but it leads to additional losses in the power calculating the filtering elements if needed
supply system and makes shorter the exploitation The calculation of the compensating device capacity
term of electrical devices. This leads to curving of the is done by reading the reactive energy of the system
sinusoid form of current and voltage and interferences and the working time of the system. Compensating
with harmonic character. Compensating the reactive devices represent a device of one or several metal
power means to fill up the system in such a way that boxes with common rail system, automatic regulator
the needed reactive power to be created from the for cosφ control RPSF-xx series, different number
compensating device instead of being taken from of capacitor batteries (according to the capacity of
the electro transportation system. This leads to killing the device) with different capacity HY 111 series,
the voltage fall and cable losses and increasing the contactors for capacitor batteries control CJ 19-43
outlet power of the power transporters and cutting series, protective elements, etc.
down the bills for overconsumption of reactive energy
paid by consumers to the electricity supply company. The broadest spreading of compensation has acquired
In practice compensating the reactive energy the compensation of harmonics and reactive energy
and high harmonics through LC filters combined with capacitors for high voltage. Capacitors HY 111
in compensating installations has the broadest series are voltage remeasured and are able to endure
spreading. overload from harmonic components up to 7% from
the basic harmonics. They are used in systems with
THERE ARE SEVERAL TYPES OF COMPENSATION high harmonics foul up to 25%.
ACCORDING TO THEIR LOCATION:
individual compensation – when to every single motor The high harmonics composition is defined after
or consumer is mounted a compensating system. It measuring the influence rate of each separate
is applied to powerful motors and transformers with harmonics compared to the first one. In Bulgaria
fixed capacity. mostly spread are 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13 harmonics. The
installation compensation – when the consumers capacitors are remeasured for voltage 415V and are
AUTOMATION

from the whole section (workshop) are grouped and normally mounted right in the compensation systems.
compensation is accomplished for the whole section.
overall compensation – accomplished at full When the high harmonics are over 25% the system
compensation in the inlet of the installation. is taken to be foul and in this case except using
capacitors, filters for leveling the harmonics are to be
ACCORDING TO THE TYPE OF THE used as well. These filters are calculated on the basis of
COMPENSATING DEVICES COMPENSATION CAN the corresponding voltage harmonics and differ for the
BE: different harmonics. They are calculated using complex
112 • passive – when the system supplies constant mathematical programme which reads the foul rate,
reactive power. In this case the system does not react the significance per cent of the voltage harmonic
to changes in the size and nature of the harmonic component, etc.
components and also to the per cent increase of the
reactive energy in time.
COMPLEX COMPENSATING DEVICES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu COSΦ REGULATOR

Documents corresponding to the

product:
CAPACITOR BATTERIES FOR REACTIVE ENERGY
COMPENSATION
2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60831-1
EN 60831-2
Capacitor batteries HY 111 series are specially capacitors.
designed three phase dry capacitors for compensation The capacitor battery can be used both for passive and
of reactive energy and correction of the capacity active compensation.
factor. It represents an aluminum cylindrical body in
TECHNICAL DATA:
which a metal polypropylene folio is mounted which • Rated operating voltage: 450V; 50Hz
does not require special impregnation. The permittivity • insulation voltage: 690V
characteristics are acquired through filling with a • Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
special mixture on a vegetable base (resins). The • Capacity: from 5,0 to 100,0 kVAr at 450V
capacitor battery is constructed in such a way that at • Tolerance: ±5%
failure (overload from voltage, current or temperature) • Operating temperature: -40°C - +65°C
breaks the connection to the upper cover where are • Capacity losses: 0.5W/kVAr
the connections to the power supply. This is done by a • Built in discharging resistance
• Admissible current overload: twice as much the peak
specially constructed valve for overpressure mounted
current
right above the capacitor element. The breaking of • Discharge time: <50V per minute
the inner couplings provides protection to the staff • Altitude: 2000m
and environment from damage due to capacitor
element failure. There is a three phase capacitor in the MOUNTING:
cylindrical body with built in resistor for rarefying the • With bolt M12 orM16 to a flat horizontal base

Type of the battery Dimensions Operating voltage Battery capacity Capacity (µF) Packing/Box Product Catalogue
H / Ø (mm) (V) (kVAr) (pcs) category number
HY 11A5 210/76 450 5.0 3X26.2 6 B 49005
HY 11A7 210/76 450 7.5 3X39 6 B 49007
HY 111A8* 230/80 450 8.0 3X39 6 F 49008
HY 111A10 240/76 450 10.0 3X52.4 6 B 49010
HY 111A15 240/86 450 15.0 3X78.9 6 B 49015
HY 111A20 240/116 450 20.0 3X105 6 B 49020
HY 111A30 280/160 450 30.0 3X157 6 B 49030
HY 111A50 345/180 450 50.0 3X262 6 B 49050
HY 111A100 300/300 450 100.0 3X524 6 B 49100

AUTOMATION
HY 111A12** 230 / 85 690 12.5 3X27.9 6 B 49031
HY 11A25** 280 / 115 690 25 3X55.7 6 B 49032

Dimensions (mm)
D H1 H3
30 35 16 Note: *Until supply last, **Suitable for wind generators
113
COSΦ REGULATOR

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
COSΦ REGULATOR www.elmarkholding.eu

CONTROLLER FOR AUTOMATIC REGULATION

OF THE CAPACITY FACTOR (COSΦ REGULATOR)
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The automatic regulators of the capacity factor RPCF- TECHNICAL DATA:

xx series are devices for monitoring of low voltage • Rated operating voltage: 230/400V
systems and control of switching on of capacitor • Operating frequency: 45 – 65Hz
batteries for the capacity factor compensation. There • insulation voltage: 690V
is possibility for adjustment of the system parameters • Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
• Measurement range: from 0 to 9999kVAr
and control. Manufactured by the latest CMOS
• Measurement accurateness:
technology, they are distinguished with high degree • voltage: ±1.0%
of data security, easy programming and secure control • current: ±1.0%
of the outlets. There is possibility for indication and • capacity coefficient: ±1.0%
setting the parameters of the power supply system as: • reactive energy: ±2.0%
capacity coefficient, display of the system parameters • Operating temperature: -10+65°C
such as voltage, current and capacity, losses, • Humidity: 30 – 60%
protection against overload, overload indication or lack • Display: 4 digital
of voltage, etc. • Responsiveness: 20mA
• Outlet: 7A
The change of parameters is performed through a
• Number of outlets: 12 and 16
combination of buttons on the front panel. There • Altitude: up to 2500m
is light diode to indicate which parameter is being
displayed on the screen and which outlets are in MOUNTING:
operation. The display is four digital. There is possibility Оn the front panel of the box through cutting an
for choice of the working conditions: manual or opening
automatic.

Type Number of steps Dimensions H (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HY-RPCF12 12 122x122 8 B 49120
HY-RPCF16 16 144x144 8 B 49160
AUTOMATION

114
COSΦ REGULATOR

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu OFF-GRID SYSTEMS

SOLAR POWER OFF-GRID SYSTEMS

The Solar Home Power system is a fixed installation designed for domestic application. They is powered by solar
energy using solar cells that convert solar energy (sunlight) directly to electricity.
The Solar Home Power system are the perfect compact solution for an independent power supply in remote
locations where electricity is unavailable, unreliable or expensive. Can be used in houses, Huts & Cottages, holiday
areas, offices and etc
The Solar Home Power system can achieve energy independence - no accession contracts, monthly charges and
the need to build an energy grid to your home.
The Solar Home Power Systems are compact, portable and easily mountable. They are an economical solution to
all your power problems.

HOME SOLAR POWER OFF-GRID SYSTEM 500W SET 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: INVERTER:
• Solar power supply • 500W
• Ouput
SOLAR PANEL: Ì USB 5V
• Type: Polycrystalline 18V 150W Ì 12V DC
• Optimum Operating Voltage: 18V Ì 220V AC: Universal socket
• Optumum Operating Current: 8.33A • Size LxWxH (mm): 200x94x228
• Open- Circuit Voltage: 20.88V
• Short- Circuit Current: 9.57A SET INCLUDED:
• Power: 150W • Solar panel 18V 150W: 1 pc
• Sizes LxWxH(mm): 1490x680x5 • Inverter 500W: 1 pc

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Type Solar panel Inverter Battery Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(pcs) category number
ELM- 500SOL 18V 150W 500W 100Ah Not included 1 E 98SOL500

Recommended with a battery 100Ah with a catalog number: 98BAT100

Discharging time at 75% consumption from total Inverter power ( about 375W) by using 100Ah battery: 3.2h

115
OFF-GRID SYSTEMS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
OFF-GRID SYSTEMS www.elmarkholding.eu

HOME SOLAR POWER OFF-GRID SYSTEM 800W SET 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: INVERTER:
• Solar power supply • 800W
• Ouput
SOLAR PANEL: Ì USB 5V
• Type: Polycrystalline 18V 150W Ì 12V DC
• Optimum Operating Voltage: 18V Ì 220V AC: Universal socket
• Optumum Operating Current: 8.33A • Size LxWxH (mm): 300x100x220
• Open- Circuit Voltage: 20.88V
• Short- Circuit Current: 9.57A SET INCLUDED:
• Power: 150W • Solar panel 18V 150W: 1 pc
• Sizes LxWxH(mm): 1490x680x5 • Inverter 800W: 1 pc

Type Solar panel Inverter Battery Packing/Box Product Catalogue

(pcs) category number
ELM- 800SOL 18V 150W 800W 100Ah Not included 1 E 98SOL800

Recommended with a battery 100Ah with a catalog number: 98BAT100

Discharging time at 75% consumption from total Inverter power ( about 600W) by using 100Ah battery: 2h
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

116
OFF-GRID SYSTEMS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu OFF-GRID SYSTEMS

HOME SOLAR POWER OFF-GRID SYSTEM 2000W SET 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: INVERTER:
• Solar power supply • 2000W
• Output
SOLAR PANEL: Ì USB 5V
• Type: Polycrystalline 36V 250W Ì 12V DC
• Optimum Operating Voltage: 36V Ì 220V AC: Universal socket
• Optumum Operating Current: 13.89A • Size LxWxH (mm): 300x100x220
• Short- Circuit Current: 15.97A
• Power: 2x250W SET INCLUDED:
• Solar panel 36V 250W: 2 pc
• Inverter 2000W: 1 pc

Type Solar panel Inverter Battery Packing/Box Product Catalogue

(pcs) category number
ELM- 2000SOL 36V 250Wx2 2000W 2x250Ah Not included 1 E 98SOL2000

Recommended with two battery 250Ah with a catalog number: 98BAT250

Discharging time at 75% consumption from total Inverter power ( about 1500W) by using 2 battery 250Ah: 4h
#N#

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

117
OFF-GRID SYSTEMS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
BATTERIES www.elmarkholding.eu

VRLA BATTERY ULTRACELL 100AH 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

APPLICATON: 5HR 1.75V/cell, 25°C- 85 Ah/17.0A

• Golf Trolleys 3HR 1.75V/cell, 25°C- 73.8 Ah/24.6A
• Garden Equipment 1HR 1.60V/cell, 25°C- 59.7 Ah/59.7A
• Portable Equipment • Max Discharge Current: 1200A (5s)
• Solar/Wind Mill Units • Internal resistance: Approx 5mΩ
• Medical Equipment • Operating Temp Range:
• Traffic Lights Discharge: -15 ~ 50°C
Charge: 0 ~ 40°C
TECHNICAL DATA: Storage: -15 ~ 40°C
• Nominal Voltage: 12V • Nominal Operating Temp Range: 25 ± 3°C
98BAT100 • Nominal Capacity (10HR): 100Ah • Container Material: ABS
• Cycle Life in Relation to Depth of Discharge: • Indoor use
Extracted Capacity 50%: 1200 Cycles • Dimension LxWxH (mm):
Extracted Capacity 20%: 3600 Cycles 330±3ммx173±3ммx232±3мм
• Rated Capacity: • Weight: 30.4 kg
20HR 1.80V/cell, 25°C- 103 Ah/5.15A • Catalogue number: 98BAT100
10HR 1.80V/cell, 25°C- 100 Ah/10.0A • Product category: E

Discharge Characteristics Cycle Life in Relation to Depth of Discharge

#N#
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Float Charging Characteristics General Relation of Capacity vs. Storage Time

118
BATTERIES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu BATTERIES

VRLA BATTERY ULTRACELL 250AH 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

APPLICATON: 5HR 1.75V/cell, 25°C- 212.5 Ah/42.5A

• UCG Series VRLA batteries can be used for: 3HR 1.75V/cell, 25°C- 184.5 Ah/61.5A
• Golf Trolleys 1HR 1.60V/cell, 25°C- 149.3 Ah/149.3A
• Garden Equipment • Max Discharge Current: 2500A (5s)
• Portable Equipment • Internal resistance: Approx 2.5mΩ
• Solar/Wind Mill Units • Operating Temp Range:
• Medical Equipment Discharge: -15 ~ 50°C
98BAT250 • Traffic Lights Charge: 0 ~ 40°C
Storage: -15 ~ 40°C
TECHNICAL DATA: • Nominal Operating Temp Range: 25 ± 3°C
• Nominal Voltage: 12V • Container Material: ABS
• Nominal Capacity (10HR): 250Ah • Indoor use
• Cycle Life in Relation to Depth of Discharge: • Dimension LxWxH (mm):
Extracted Capacity 50%: 1200 Cycles 522±3ммx268±3ммx226±3мм
Extracted Capacity 20%: 3600 Cycles • Weight: 70 kg
• Rated Capacity: • Catalogue number: 98BAT250
20HR 1.80V/cell, 25°C- 258 Ah/12.9A • Product category: E
10HR 1.80V/cell, 25°C- 250 Ah/25A

Discharge Characteristics Cycle Life in Relation to Depth of Discharge

#N#

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Float Charging Characteristics General Relation of Capacity vs. Storage Time

119
BATTERIES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
SOLAR PANELS www.elmarkholding.eu

MONOCRYSTALLINE HALF CUT CELL SOLAR PANEL 10+0

standard
+extended 10 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Mono half cut cells Solar Panel that are cut in half. That improves the module’s performance and durability. When
solar cells are halved, their current is also halved, so resistive losses are lowered and the cells can produce a
little more power. Smaller cells experience reduced mechanical stresses, so there is a decreased opportunity for
cracking. Half-cell modules have higher output ratings and are more reliable than traditional panels.

Catalogue number: 98SOL380M

SPECIFICATION
• irradiance 1000 W/m2, AM 1.5, gand cell temperature of 25°C
• Peack power (Pmax): 340
• Maximum power voltage (Vmp): 34.40
• Maximum power current (Imp): 9.90
• Open circuit voltage (Voc): 40.50
• Short circuit current (Isc): 10.50
• Module efficiency (%): 20.2
• Maximum system voltage (V): 1500
• Power tolerance (W): 0-5
• Cell type: 158.75mm, 9BB
• Number of cells: 120 (6x10+6x10)
• Dimensions HxWxD (mm): 1689x996x35
• Weight (kg): 19.5
• Max. load (Pa): 5400
• EC Declaration of conformity

CHARACTERISTICS AT DIFFERENT IRRADIATIONS

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

CHARACTERISTICS AT DIFFERENT TEMPERATURES

120
SOLAR PANELS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu SOLAR PANELS

D
MECHNICAL DATA TEMPERATURE CHARACTERISTICS
Cell Type: 158.75mm, 9BB Temp. Coeff. of Isc (TK Isc): 0.04% /°C
Number of Cells: 120 cells (6x10+6x10) Temp. Coeff. of Voc (TK Voc): -0.28% /°C
Weight: 19.5kg Temp. Coeff of Pmax (TK Pmax): -0.37% /°C
Dimension: 1689x996x35mm
Max Load: 5400 Pascals
Junction Box: IP68 rated
Connector: MC4 Compatible
Wire Type: PV Wire

ADVANTAGES OF HALF CELL SOLAR PANELS:

• It is superior in low sunlight performance.
• It is not affected by shade as much as standard panels.
• It is more durable for long life performance
• It it is less susceptible to micro cracking. (cracks that develop in cells over time)
• They perform better under high heat conditions than standard solar panels.
• They are less susceptible to hot spots, a major cause of panel failure.
Dimensions (mm)
• They are much higher efficiency than standard panels.

H W D
HALF CELL MODULE STANDART MODULE
1689 996 35

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

121
SOLAR PANELS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
MOUNTING STRUCTURE www.elmarkholding.eu

SOLAR MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Since solar panels are designed for outdoor installation and are subject to continuous weather conditions, the
type of material that makes the structure is important for the reliability of the entire system. Due to the envisaged
long service life of more than 25 years, the construction and attachment of the panels to it must be secure.
The mounting structure are available for ground and in different variants according to the type of the roof - metal,
bitumen or tile, flat or pitched.

1 | TILE ROOF MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR PITCHED ROOF, SET

TECHNICAL DATA: FEATURES:
• Installation Site: tile roof • You can choose your own configuration of elements
• Panel type: framed or the proposed ready-made variants of kits for
• Roof Slope: Up to 60 degree different power
• Wind Speed: Up to 60 m/s • Variuos roof hooks for different tile roofs
• Snow load: 1.4 KN/m2 • Suitable for all framed PV modules
• Easy and fast installation
• Pre-assembled components save the installation
time and cost

SUITABLE COMPONENTS FOR PITCHED TILE ROOF

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Rails- 2100mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423200

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Rail connector- 140mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423201

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Mid clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423202

122
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423203

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Tile Roof Hook 1 stainless steel E 423204

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Tile Roof Hook 2 stainless steel E 423205

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Tile Roof Hook 13 stainless steel E 423206

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Tile Roof Hook 14 stainless steel E 423207

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Grounding Clip stainless steel E 423208

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Description Material Product category Catalogue number
Earth lug Aluminium E 423209

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 1- 2x4/6mm² stainless steel E 423210 123
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 2- 4x90°4/6mm²/3x90°10mm² stainless steel E 423211

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
MOUNTING STRUCTURE www.elmarkholding.eu

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 8- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423212

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 9- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423213

BASIC ELEMENTS QUANTITY CALCULATION FOR EACH SOLAR

POWER SYSTEMS STRUCTURE SETS FROM 3.6 TO 30KW:
Quantity from each elements are calculated for solar panel with dimensions 1689x996x35mm and peak
power 340W with catalogue number 98SOL380M.

ELEMENT ELEMENT QTY

Description Catalogue at at at at at at
number 3.6 kW 5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 20 kW 30 kW

Rails- 2100mm 423200 12 16 30 46 60 90

Rail connector- 140mm 423201 8 12 22 34 45 67
Mid clamp for framed panel 30-50mm 423202 18 26 66 78 102 154
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm 423203 24 32 60 92 120 180

Tile Roof Hook 1 423204 26 34 64 98 126 190
Grounding Clip 423208 18 26 66 78 102 154
Earth lug 423209 12 16 32 48 60 92

SETS CATALOGUE NUMBERS:

The quantity elements for each structure set is to described in the table upper.
Solar power systems (kW) Product category Catalogue number
3.6 E 423270P/TR
124 5 E 423271P/TR
10 E 423272P/TR
15 E 423273P/TR
20 E 423274P/TR
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

30 E 423275P/TR

TILE ROOF MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR

PITCHED ROOF

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu MOUNTING STRUCTURE

2 | SANDWICH ROOF MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR PITCHED ROOF, SET

TECHNICAL DATA: FEATURES:
• Installation: tin roof mounting brackets • Universal roof brackets for different tin roofs
• Panel type: framed • Suitable for all framed PV modules
• Panel orientation: landscape or portrait • Easy and fast installation
• Roof slope: up to 60 degree • Pre-assembled components save the installation
• Max wind speed: up to 60 m/s time and cost
• Snow load: 1.4 KN/m2

SUITABLE COMPONENTS FOR PITCHED SANDWICH ROOF:

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Rails- 2100mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423200

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Rail connector- 140mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423201

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Middle clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423202

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423203

125

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

MOUNTING STRUCTURE

L-feet for tin roof stainless steel E 423216

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Tin Roof Hook 2 stainless steel E 423217

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
MOUNTING STRUCTURE www.elmarkholding.eu

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Tin Roof Hook 3 stainless steel E 423218

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Grounding Clip stainless steel E 423208

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Earth lug Aluminium E 423209

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 1- 2x4/6mm² stainless steel E 423210
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 2- 4x90°4/6mm²/3x90°10mm² stainless steel E 423211

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

126 Cable clip 8- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423212
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 9- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423213

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu MOUNTING STRUCTURE

BASIC ELEMENTS QUANTITY CALCULATION FOR EACH SOLAR

POWER SYSTEMS STRUCTURE SETS FROM 3.6 TO 30KW:
Quantity from each elements are calculated for solar panel with dimensions 1689x996x35mm and peak
power 340W with catalogue number 98SOL380M.

ELEMENT ELEMENT QTY

Description Catalogue at at at at at at
number 3.6 kW 5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 20 kW 30 kW

Rails- 2100mm 423200 12 16 30 46 60 90

Rail connector- 140mm 423201 8 12 22 34 45 67
Middle clamp for framed panel 30-50mm 423202 18 26 66 78 102 154
End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm 423203 24 32 60 92 120 180
L-feet for tin roof 423216 26 34 64 98 126 190
Grounding Clip 423208 18 26 66 78 102 154
Earth lug 423209 12 16 32 48 60 92

SETS CATALOGUE NUMBERS:

The quantity elements for each structure set is to described in the table upper.
Solar power systems (kW) Product category Catalogue number
3.6 E 423270P/DR
5 E 423271P/DR
10 E 423272P/DR
15 E 423273P/DR
20 E 423274P/DR
30 E 423275P/DR

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

SANDWICH ROOF MOUNTING OPTION 1 SANDWICH ROOF MOUNTING OPTION 2
127
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

SANDWICH ROOF MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR PITCHED ROOF

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
MOUNTING STRUCTURE www.elmarkholding.eu

3 | SHINGLE ROOF MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR PITCHED ROOF, SET

TECHNICAL DATA: FEATURES:
• Installation Site: shingle roof • Suitable for all framed PV modules
• Panel type: framed • Easy and fast installation
• Roof Slope: Up to 60 degree • Pre-assembled components save the installation
• Wind Speed: Up to 60 m/s time and cost
• Snow load: 1.4 KN/m2

SUITABLE COMPONENTS FOR PITCHED SHINGLE ROOF:

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Rails- 2100mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423200

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Rail connector- 140mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423201

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Middle clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423202

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423203

128

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

MOUNTING STRUCTURE

L-feet with cone hole stainless steel E 423214

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Flashing plate 280x280 stainless steel E 423215

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Grounding Clip stainless steel E 423208

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Earth lug Aluminium E 423209

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 1- 2x4/6mm² stainless steel E 423210

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 2- 4x90°4/6mm²/3x90°10mm² stainless steel E 423211

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Description Material Product category Catalogue number
Cable clip 8- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423212

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 9- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423213 129
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
MOUNTING STRUCTURE www.elmarkholding.eu

BASIC ELEMENTS QUANTITY CALCULATION FOR EACH SOLAR

POWER SYSTEMS STRUCTURE SETS FROM 3.6 TO 30KW:
Quantity from each elements are calculated for solar panel with dimensions 1689x996x35mm and peak
power 340W with catalogue number 98SOL380M.

ELEMENT ELEMENT QTY

Description Catalogue at at at at at at
number 3.6 kW 5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 20 kW 30 kW

Rails- 2100mm 423200 12 16 30 46 60 90

Rail connector- 140mm 423201 8 12 22 34 45 67
Middle clamp for framed panel
423202 18 26 66 78 102 154
30-50mm
End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm 423203 24 32 60 92 120 180
L-feet with cone hole 423214 26 34 64 98 126 190
Flashing plate 280x280 423215 26 34 64 98 126 190
Grounding Clip 423208 18 26 66 78 102 154
Earth lug 423209 12 16 32 48 60 92

SETS CATALOGUE NUMBERS:

The quantity elements for each structure set is to described in the table upper.
Solar power systems (kW) Product category Catalogue number
3.6 E 423270P/SR
5 E 423271P/SR
10 E 423272P/SR
15 E 423273P/SR
20 E 423274P/SR
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

30 E 423275P/SR

130
SHINGLE ROOF MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR PITCHED ROOF
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu MOUNTING STRUCTURE

4 | TRIANGULAR MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR GROUND AND FLAT ROOF, SET

TECHNICAL DATA: FEATURES:
• Installation Site: flat roof • Triangular mounting brackets with stable structure,
• Panel type: framed it can be installed directly on rooftop, ground or pre-
• Wind Speed: Up to 60 m/s made cement blocks as your option
• Snow load: 1.4 KN/m2 • Suitable for all framed PV modules
• Easy and fast installation
• Pre-assembled components save the installation
time and cost

SUITABLE COMPONENTS FOR TRIANGULAR MOUNTING STRUCTURE

FOR GROUND AND FLAT ROOF:

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Rails- 2100mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423200

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Rail connector- 140mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423201

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Middle clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423202

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423203

131
MOUNTING STRUCTURE
Description Material Product category Catalogue number
15° Triangular mounts Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423223

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

30° Triangular mounts Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423227

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
MOUNTING STRUCTURE www.elmarkholding.eu

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

L-connector for rail stainless steel E 423224

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Hex nut anchor Galvanized steel C M517215

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Grounding Clip stainless steel E 423208

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Earth lug Aluminium E 423209
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 1- 2x4/6mm² stainless steel E 423210

132
Description Material Product category Catalogue number
Cable clip 2- 4x90°4/6mm²/3x90°10mm² stainless steel E 423211
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 8- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423212

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 9- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423213

BASIC ELEMENTS QUANTITY CALCULATION FOR EACH SOLAR

POWER SYSTEMS STRUCTURE SETS FROM 3.6 TO 30KW:
Quantity from each elements are calculated for solar panel with dimensions 1689x996x35mm and peak
power 340W with catalogue number 98SOL380M.

ELEMENT ELEMENT QTY

Description Catalogue at at at at at at
number 3.6 kW 5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 20 kW 30 kW

Rails- 2100mm 423200 12 16 30 46 60 90

Rail connector- 140mm 423201 8 12 22 34 45 67
Middle clamp for framed panel 30-
423202 18 26 66 78 102 154
50mm
End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm 423203 24 32 60 92 120 180
30° Triangular mounts 423227 12 16 30 46 60 90
L-connector for rail 423224 24 32 60 92 120 180
Hex nut anchor M517215 26 34 64 98 126 190
Grounding Clip 423208 18 26 66 78 102 154
Earth lug 423209 12 16 32 48 60 92

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

SETS CATALOGUE NUMBERS:
The quantity elements for each structure set is to described in the table upper.
Solar power systems (kW) Product category Catalogue number
3.6 E 423270F/TR
TRIANGULAR MOUNTING STRUCTURE 5 E 423271F/TR
FOR GROUND AND FLAT ROOF 10 E 423272F/TR
15 E 423273F/TR
20 E 423274F/TR
30 E 423275F/TR
133
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
MOUNTING STRUCTURE www.elmarkholding.eu

5 | BALLASTED TRIANGULAR MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR FLAT ROOF, SET

TECHNICAL DATA: FEATURES:
• Installation Site: flat roof • Triangular mounting brackets with stable structure,
• Panel type: framed it can be installed directly on rooftop, ground or pre-
• Wind Speed: Up to 60 m/s made cement blocks as your option
• Snow load: 1.4 KN/m2 • Suitable for all framed PV modules
• Easy and fast installation
• Pre-assembled components save the installation
time and cost

SUITABLE COMPONENTS FOR BALLASTED TRIANGULAR MOUNTING

STRUCTURE FOR FLAT ROOF:

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Rails- 2100mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423200

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Rail connector- 140mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423201
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Middle clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423202

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423203

134
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

15° Triangular mounts Aluminium 6005-T5 E 423223

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

30° Triangular mounts Aluminium 6005-T5 423227

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

L-connector for rail stainless steel E 423224

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Angle Plate stainless steel E 423225

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Grounding Clip stainless steel E 423208

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Earth lug Aluminium E 423209

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Description Material Product category Catalogue number
Cable clip 1- 2x4/6mm² stainless steel E 423210

135
Description Material Product category Catalogue number
Cable clip 2- 4x90°4/6mm²/3x90°10mm² stainless steel E 423211
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 8- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423212

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
MOUNTING STRUCTURE www.elmarkholding.eu

Description Material Product category Catalogue number

Cable clip 9- 2x90°4/6mm² stainless steel E 423213

BASIC ELEMENTS QUANTITY CALCULATION FOR EACH SOLAR

POWER SYSTEMS STRUCTURE SETS FROM 3.6 TO 30KW:
Quantity from each elements are calculated for solar panel with dimensions 1689x996x35mm and peak
power 340W with catalogue number 98SOL380M.

ELEMENT ELEMENT QTY

Description Catalogue at at at at at at
number 3.6 kW 5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 20 kW 30 kW

Rails- 2100mm 423200 12 16 30 46 60 90

Rail connector- 140mm 423201 8 12 22 34 45 67
Middle clamp for framed panel 30-
423202 18 26 66 78 102 154
50mm
End clamp for framed panel 30-50mm 423203 24 32 60 92 120 180
30° Triangular mounts 423227 12 16 30 46 60 90
L-connector for rail 423224 24 32 60 92 120 180
Angle Plate 423225 12 16 30 46 60 90
Grounding Clip 423208 18 26 66 78 102 154
Earth lug 423209 12 16 32 48 60 92
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

BALLASTED TRIANGULAR MOUNTING

STRUCTURE FOR FLAT ROOF
SETS CATALOGUE NUMBERS:
The quantity elements for each structure set is to described in the table upper.
Solar power systems (kW) Product category Catalogue number
3.6 E 423270F/BTR
5 E 423271F/BTR
10 E 423272F/BTR
15 E 423273F/BTR
20 E 423274F/BTR
30 E 423275F/BTR
136
MOUNTING STRUCTURE

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu INVERTERS

H1Z2Z2-K UNIPOLAR CABLE FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC

AND SOLAR PLANTS WITH UV RESISTANT SHEATH
5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS: TECHNICAL DATA:

• Operating voltage: AC- 1.0KV; DC- 1.5KV • Conductor: Tinned copper multi-wires class 5
• Max. operating voltage: AC- 1.2KV; DC- 1.8KV • Insulation: LSZH reticulated elastomeric compound
• Test volatge: AC- 6.5KV for 5 min; DC- 15KV for 5 min with neutral colour
• Ambient work temperature: from -40 to + 90 °C • Outer sheath: LSZH reticulated elastomeric
• Max. short circuit temperature: +250 ° C for 5s compound
• Maximum pulling stress: 15 N/mm² in operation, 50 • UV resistant
N/mm² during installation • Colour: Black and red
• Reaction to fire - Performance: EN 50575:2016 Eca

Cross section Colour Outer diameter Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (m) category

4 black 5,6 58 100 E M411079/BL

4 red 5,6 58 100 E M411079/R

SOLAR CABLE LENGTH, INCLUDED TO EACH SET

3.6kW 5kW 10kW 15kW 20kW 30kW Catalogue number
x50m x50m x50m x75m x100m x100m M411079/BL
x50m x50m x50m x75m x100m x100m M411079/R

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

SINGLE MALE/FEMALE CABLE COUPLER IP67 SET, MC4 COMPATIBLE

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Rated voltage: 1000V
• Rated current: 30A
• Test voltage: 6KV(50Hz)
• Contact material: Copper, sliver plated
• Operating temperature: -40 to +125°C
• Suitable cable cross section: 2.5mm²; 4mm² and
6mm²
137
Type Range of cable Conductor cross Packing Product Catalogue number
glands (mm) section (mm²) (m) category

Single male/female couplers, SET 3-6 4/6 1/5 E 411078/MF

INVERTERS

EC Declaration of conformity

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
INVERTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

DOUBLE MALE SINGLE FEMALE CABLE COUPLER IP67, MC4

COMPATIBLE

Type Range of cable Conductor cross Packing Product Catalogue number

glands (mm) section (mm²) (m) category

2 male/ 1 female coupler 3-6 4/6 E 1 411080/M

EC Declaration of conformity

DOUBLE FEMALE SINGLE MALE CABLE COUPLER IP67, MC4

COMPATIBLE

Type Range of cable Conductor cross Packing Product Catalogue number

glands (mm) section (mm²) (m) category

2 female/ 1 male coupler 3-6 4/6 E 1 411080/F

EC Declaration of conformity
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

DC PHOTOVOLTAIC ISOLATOR
FOUR POLES SWITCH 1200V, IP66
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

DC switches shall be installed between the solar arrays and solar inverter for isolation the PV array during system
installation or any maintenance.

TECHNICAL DATA: FEATURES:

• Rated insulation voltage (Ui): 1200V • Vertical and horizontal installation
• Rated heating current (Ith): 32A • UV resistance
• Poles: 4P • Flame retardant material
138 • Mechanical life: 10 000 cycles • Breatle valve
• Operating temperature: -25 to +70°C • Lockable at off position
• Storage temperature: -40 to +70°C
• IP code: IP66
INVERTERS

• Handle colour: Black

Model Poles Rated Rated heating IP code Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
insulation current (A) (pcs) category
voltage (V)
EL-DC4P 4 1200 32 66 1/20 E 98SOL4P/DC

DC SWITCH QUANTITY, INCLUDED TO EACH SET

3.6kW 5kW 10kW 15kW 20kW 30kW Catalogue number
1 2 2 2 2 3 98SOL4P/DC
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu INVERTERS

PV ON-GRID TIE INVERTERS, SOLIS 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Converts the variable direct current (DC) output of a photovoltaic (PV) solar panel into a utility frequency
alternating current (AC) that can be fed into a commercial electrical grid. The output current has a standard
output of 220/230V for single phase and 220/380V, 230/400V for three phase.
Inverters (3.6-30)kW are reliable preferred equipment for residential, industrial and commercial pv power stations.
Smaller size, higher efficiency, huge large color display for visual inspection of product operation.

FEATURES COMMUNICATION
• Super high frequency switching technology • RS485
• Wide voltage range and low startup voltage • Wi-Fi- optional with WI-FI stick with cat. number
• Precise MPPT algorithm 423050
• Intergrated Export Power Manager (EPM)
• Friendly and adaptable connection to the grid CERTIFICATION
• IP protection: IP65 • TÜV Rheinland CERTIFICATED
• Compliance Document
PROTECTION: • Certificate of Conformity
• DC reverse-polarity protection
• Short circuit protection
• Output over current protection
• Surge protection
• Grid monitoring
• Anti-islanding protection
• Temperature protection

Model Recommended Rated output Operation MPPT Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
max. PV power power phase number (mm) (mm) (mm) category
Solis-mini-3600-4G 4kW 3.6kW Single 1 310 373 160 E 423001
Solis-1P5K-4G 5.8kW 5kW Single 2 310 543 160 E 423002
Solis-3P10K-4G 12kW 10kW Three 2 310 563 219 E 423020
Solis-3P15K-4G 18kW 15kW Three 2 310 563 219 E 423021

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Solis-3P20K-4G 24kW 20kW Three 2 310 563 219 E 423022
Solis-3P30K-5G 36kW 30kW Three 3 530 700 356.5 E 423023

139
INVERTERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
INVERTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

ENERGY STORAGE INVERTER, SOLIS 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The AC-Coupled inverter is used for upgrade the existing SOLIS single phase on-grid power generation system to
a hybrid system which can work with batteries to optimize self-consumption. Energy storage inverter is a good
choice for ON- GRID and OFF-GRID integrated storage solutions.

FEATURES PROTECTION:
• Compatible with any existing SOLIS single phase • Battery reverse protection
grid-tied PV system, option to upgrade • Battery over and under voltage protection
• Compatible with both lead-acid battery and li-ion • Short circuit protection
battery • Output over current protection
• Off-grid backup function • Temperature protection
• Emergency Power Supply function (EPS)
• Intelligent Energy Menagement System (EMS) COMMUNICATION
• Natural cooling without external fan • RS485
• Intelligent debugging APP which support one-click • CAN
inverter configuration • Wi-Fi- optional with WI-FI stick with cat. number
• Various work mode for diff erent application scenario 423050
• IP protection: IP65
CERTIFICATION
• TÜV SÜD CERTIFICATED
• Attestation of Conformity
• Certificate

Model Max. Operation Battery Battery Battery Width Height Depth Product Catalogue
charging phase type voltage capacity (Ah) (mm) (mm) (mm) category number
power (W) range (V)
Li-ion/
SOLIS-RAI-3K-48ES-5G 3000W Single Lead- 40-60V 50-2000Ah 403 525 170 E 423040
acid*
*Battery voltage range: 42-58V | Battery type: Li-ion/Lead-acid | Battery capacity: 50 - 2000Ah | Battery not
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

included | Compatible with Pylontech US2000

140
INVERTERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu INVERTERS

SINGLE PHASE HYBRID INVERTER SOLIS, 5KW 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This inverter is used for residential hybrid system, witch can work with batteries to optimize self consumption. This
unit is a good choice for ON- GRID and for OFF-GRID integrated storage solutions. Can operate in both ON- GRID
and in OFF-GRID mode.

FEATURES PROTECTION:
• Uninterrupted power supply, 20ms reaction • Ground fault monitoring
• 5kW backup power to support more important loads • Battery over and under voltage protection
• With shifting and peak shaving capabilities friendly • Short circuit protection
to grid • Output over current protection
• Multiple working modes to make maximize self- • Temperature protection
consumption, increase benefit • DC reverse-polarity protection
• Higher charge-discharge efficiency, improving the
economic benefits COMMUNICATION
• Compatible with lithium & lead-acid batteries, • RS485
increased more choice in different markets • Wi-Fi- optional with WI-FI stick with cat. number
• Fanless design, long lifespan 423050
• Intelligent BMS function, improving battery’s
reliability CERTIFICATION
• With high-frequency isolation technology, making • TÜV SÜD CERTIFICATED
system safer and long lifespan • Attestation of Conformity
• 24-hour fully intelligent energy management, Real- • Certificate
time grasp of PV plant status • Compliance Document
• Remotely control & upgrade function, making digital • Bestätigung
power plant maintenance at your fingertips

Model Recommended Rated Operation MPPT Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
max. PV power output phase number (mm) (mm) (mm) category
power
SOLIS-RHI-5K-48ES-5G 8kW 5kW Single 2 333 505 249 E 423041
*Battery voltage range: 42-58V | Battery type: Li-ion/Lead-acid | Battery capacity: 50 - 2000Ah | Battery not
included | Compatible with Pylontech US2000

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

141
INVERTERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
INVERTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

WIFI STICK FOR INVERTERS 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Solar power system can be monitored remotely via WIFI to provide you accurate and comprehensive data
analysis and fault alarm at any time and place, make product operation more stable and reliable, and realize stable
and intelligent operation and maintenance management services. This is posssible with WIFI stick, which you
need to connect to your inverter.

FEATURES
• Quick installation and easy operation
• Easy visualization of data and other information via
Internet
• Enabling local and remote monitoring
• WiFi communication supporting remote monitoring

Model Max.number of Remote communication Firmware Data storage Preferences Protection Product Catalogue number
inverters updates setting class category
8MBYTE
EL-WIFI 1 WiFi(802.11/b/g/n) Wireless Web Sever IP65 E 423050
FLASH
* WiFi communication range: 100m in outdoor open area without obstruction.

SINGLE AND THREE PHASE MULTIFUNCTION

SMART DIN KWH METERS
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

DTSD1352 is a smart meter designed for power supply system, industrial and mining enterprises and utilities
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

to calculate the electricity consumption and manage the electric demand. It features the high precision, small
size and simple installation. It integrates the measurement of all electrical parameters with the comprehensive
electricity metering and management provides various data on previous 12 months, checks the 31st harmonic
content and the total harmonic content, realizes the remote communication and the remote control with
switching input and relay output and boasts the alarm output. It is fitted with RS485 communication port and
adapted to MODBUS-RTU. DTSD1352 can be used in all kinds of control systems, SCADA systems and energy
management systems

FEATURES
• 8 bits lcd display • Optional communication protocol and functions:
• Measure parameters: Voltage, current,active Modbus RTU RS485
power,reactive power, apparent power, power factor • Multi-tariff :frozen KWH historical, KWH in 3 months,
142 and frequency (U,I ,P,Q,S,PF,F) adapt 4 time zones, 2 time interval lists, 14 time
interval by day and 4 tarriff rates

Model Type Measuring range Overall dimensions (mm) Product category Catalogue number
INVERTERS

DDSD1352 Single phase 10 (60A) 88x36x70 E 423060

DTSD1352 Three phase 10 (80A) 80x126x70 E 423061

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu INVERTERS

SOLIS EXPORT MANAGER EPM3-5G 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The Solis export power manager is the ideal solution for smart energy management for both residential and
commercial systems.The unit allows you to adjust export values to satisfy local network regulatory requirements.
Energy management with the Solis export power manager allows for higher self-consumption and efficient use of
the locally generated PV power.

FEATURES COMMUNICATION:
• Smart & strong: Simultaneous control of 80 X Solis • With inverter: Modbus RS485
inverters • Maximum communication inverter numbers: 10
• Saving & high precision: Simultaneously monitor the • Maximum communication distance: 1000m
operating data of the 80 X Solis inverter, saving the • Monitoring: Wi-Fi stick or GPRS stick for single
cost of the monitoring system inverter conection Wi-Fi box or GPRS box for 2-10
• Friendly & compatible: Saving & high precision: inverters conection
Support “Δ” and “Y” grid systems
TECHNICAL DATA
• Realizing reactive compensation of the system,
• Input frequency range: 45-65 Hz
which ensure the power factor of the system is up to
• Input voltage range: L to N: 100-277 V
standard
• Ambient temperature: -25°C to +60°C
• The control accuracy is up to 3%, which improves the
• Ingress protection: IP65
system’s spontaneous use rate
• Relative humidity: 5%-95%
• Supports simultaneous access of Solis inverters with
• CT connection: Plug terminal
different power
• Weight: 2.1 kg

Model Rated voltage (V) Input Maximum Length Width Height Product Catalogue number
current communication (mm) (mm) (mm) category
(A) inverter numbers
Solis-EPM3-5G 400V, 3/N/PE or 3/PE 5 10 364 276 114 E 423051

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

SOLIS EXPORT MANAGER EPM3-5G-PLUS 5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The Solis export power manager is the ideal solution for smart energy management for both residential and
commercial systems.The unit allows you to adjust export values to satisfy local network regulatory requirements.
Energy management with the Solis export power manager allows for higher self-consumption and efficient use of
the locally generated PV power.

FEATURES COMMUNICATION:
• Smart & strong: Simultaneous control of 80 X Solis • With inverter: Modbus RS485
inverters • Maximum communication inverter numbers: 80
• Saving & high precision: Simultaneously monitor the • Maximum communication distance: 1000m
143
operating data of the 80 X Solis inverter, saving the • Monitoring: Wi-Fi box (Built in)
cost of the monitoring system
TECHNICAL DATA
• Friendly & compatible: Saving & high precision:
• Input frequency range: 45-65 Hz
INVERTERS

Support “Δ”” and “Y” grid systems

• Input voltage range: L to N: 320-480V
• Realizing reactive compensation of the system, which
• Dysplay: LCD
ensure the power factor of the system is up to standard
• Ambient temperature: -25°C to +60°C
• The control accuracy is up to 3%, which improves the
• Ingress protection: IP65
system’s spontaneous use rate
• Relative humidity: 5%-95%
• Supports simultaneous access of Solis inverters with
• CT connection: Plug terminal
different power
• Weight: 5.4 kg

Model Rated voltage (V) Input Maximum Length Width Height Product Catalogue number
current communication (mm) (mm) (mm) category
(A) inverter numbers
Solis-EPM3-5G-PLUS 400V, 3/N/PE 5 80 488 446 149 E 423052
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
BATTERIES www.elmarkholding.eu

PYLONTECH LITHIUM BATTERY, US2000 SERIES 7+3

standard
+extended 10 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Lithium battery US2000 series is the latest generation lithium iron phosphate battery module and is a perfect
solution for residential storage facilities. The easy in modulating makes it possible to create storage systems of
small or large capacities. The first installation can be expanded depending on the change in energy requirements
in time latter.

FEATURES excellent discharge performance and cycle life.

• The whole module is non-toxic, non-polluting and • Compact and fashionable design fits in your home
environmentally friendly. environment.
• Cathode material is made from LiFePO4 with safety • Compatible with most of the available Hybrid
performance and long cycle life. inverters.
• Battery management system (BMS) has protection
TECHNICAL DATA:
functions including over-discharge, over-charge, over-
• Nominal voltage: 48V
current and high/low temperature.
• Nominal capacity: 2400Wh
• Vertical industry integration ensures more than 6000
• Usable capacity: 2200Wh
cycles with 90% DoD.
• Dimension: 442x410x89mm
• The system can automatically manage charge and
• Charge voltage: 52.5- 53.5V
discharge state and balance current and voltage of
• Discharge voltage: 45- 53.5V
each cell.
• Communication port: RS485, CAN
• Flexible configuration, multiple battery modules can
• Configuration (max. in 1 battery group): 8pcs
be in parallel for expanding capacity and power.
• IP code: IP20
• Adopted self-cooling mode rapidly reduced system
• Cooling type: Natural cooling
entire noise.
• Working temperature: Charge: from 0 to 50°C,
• The module has less self-discharge, up to 6 months
Discharge: from-10 to 50°C
without charging on shelf.
• Humidity: 5-85%
• No memory effect, excellent performance of shallow
• Weight: 24Kg
charge and discharge.
• Altitude: up to 2000m
• Working temperature range is from -10° to 50°C,
• Cycle life: > 4500, 25°C
(Charging 0~50°C; discharging -10~50°C) with

Model Nominal voltage (V) Nominal capacity (Wh) Usable capacity (Wh) Product category Catalogue number
US2000 48 2400 2200 E 98BAT2000US
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Up to 6 months without charging.

MOUNTING BRACKETS FOR PYLONTECH LITHIUM BATTERY, US2000

SERIES
144
Mounting brackets keep a few batteries in one pile. It is an essential accessorie because it improves the cooling of
the batteries and allows easy circulation of air around the batteries.
Set of 2 mounting brackets.
BATTERIES

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT:
• We do not recommend to stack batteries one on top of the other without the brackets.
• Maximum 4 batteries can be athwart stacked
• One or two batteries can be sidelong stacked

SET: 2 mounting brackets

SET catalogue number: 98BAT2000BR

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
www.elmarkholding.eu SOLAR SYSTEMS SETS

ON GRID SOLAR SYSTEMS - SET WITH

MONOCRYSTALLINE HALF CELLS SOLAR PANEL
10+0
standard
+extended 10 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Solar power systems (kW) Phase Panel QTY Product category Catalogue number
3.6 1 11 E 98SOL3600M
5 1 15 E 98SOL5000M/TB
10 3 30 E 98SOL10000M
15 3 45 E 98SOL15000M
20 3 60 E 98SOL20000M
30 3 90 E 98SOL30000M
*SET Included: Solar panels, inverter, DC power cables and DC 4P Switch 32A | Warranty: 10+0, Inverter: 5+0

HYBRID SOLAR SYSTEMS - SET WITH

MONOCRYSTALLINE HALF CELLS SOLAR PANEL
10+0
standard
+extended 10 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Solar power systems (kW) Phase Panel QTY Product category Catalogue number
5 1 15 E 98SOL5000HM
*SET Included: Solar panels, inverter, DC power cables, 1x2.4kW battery US2000 and DC 4P Switch 32A |
Warranty: 10+0, Inverter: 5+0

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

ENERGY STORAGE INVERTER SOLIS
SOLIS-RAI-3K-48ES-5G WITH BATTERY
10+0
standard
+extended 10 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
145

PYLONTECH US2000 SOLAR SYSTEMS SETS

Solar power systems (kW) Phase Panel QTY Product category Catalogue number
3 1 Not included E 98SOL3000EM
*SET Included: Inverter and 1x2.4kW battery US2000 | Warranty: 10+0, Inverter: 5+0
Compatible with any existing SOLIS single phase ON-grid-tied PV system, option to upgrade

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
SOLAR SYSTEMS SETS www.elmarkholding.eu

RECOMMENDED SOLAR PANEL STRING INSTALLATION OF EACH SET

Number of strings Number of strings Number of strings QTY of panels per QTY of panels per QTYof panels per Solar power systems
MPPT-1 MPPT-2 MPPT-3 Strings MPPT-1 Strings MPPT-2 Strings MPPT-3 (kW)
1 11 3.6
1 1 8 7 5
1 1 15 15 10
2 1 12 21 15
2 2 15 15 20
2 2 2 15 15 15 30
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

146
SOLAR SYSTEMS SETS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 GENERATORS
www.elmarkholding.eu GASOLINE GENERATORS

ELECTRICAL GASOLINE GENERATORS

EL-GF SERIES
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Generators are machines that provide electricity when power from the local grid is unavailable.Electrical
generators are used as a primary power source in areas where a local electrical grid is unavailable or difficult
to access such as mining and farming operations or even new developments and construction and to supply
backup power to facilities, businesses, or homes during power outages. Electrical generators don’t create
electricity. They convert mechanical energy into electrical power. Capturing the power of motion and turning it
into electrical energy by forcing electrons from the external source through an electrical circuit. A generator is an
electrical motor working in reverse. Once an electrical current has been established, it is directed through copper
wires to power machines, devices, or electrical systems

FEATURES:
Automatic voltage regulator (AVR): An automatic voltage regulator (AVR) is a electronic device for
automatically maintaining generator output terminal voltage at a set value under varying load and operating
temperature. It controls output by sensing the voltage Vout at a power-generating coil and comparing it to a
stable reference. The error signal is then used to adjust an average value of the field current.
Switch for electric start: no included by EL-3GF-6
Two power supply voltage: 220 and 380V AC ( all models without EL-3GF-6)
Four stroke engine: more fuel efficient as compared to 2-stroke generators. They consume the fuel on every 4th
cycle. Moreover 4 strokeengine is and more durability A 2-stroke engine works more as compared to a 4 stroke
engine for a specific time. It is evident from the fact that a 2-stroke engine produces more heat and more exhaust
in one hour as compared to a 4-stroke engine
Less sound: A 4-stroke engine produces less sound and makes less pollution. It is safe for the environment. This is
due to the fact that you do not have to add oil in the gas and hence no oil is burned during the combustion process
No Extra Oil in Fuel: There is no need to add extra oil along with the fuel in the fuel tank. Separate engine oil is
used which needs to be replaced after every 500 hours of activity
Compact design. User-frendly in operations

Model Rated Max. Fuel tank Fuel comsumption Running time Product Catalogue
power (kW) power (kW) capacity (L) (g/(kW·h)) (h) category number
EL-2.8GF-6 2.8 3 15 ≤530 10 E 45GF36
EL-5GF-2-4 5 5.5 25 ≤480 9.5 E 45GF524
EL-7GF-2-4 7 7.5 25 ≤515 5.8 E 45GF724

GENERATORS
147
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 GENERATORS
GASOLINE GENERATORS www.elmarkholding.eu

ELECTRICAL DIESEL GENERATORS EL-DF SERIES 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

A diesel generator is machinery that converts the chemical energy in diesel to electrical energy and is is used to
power electrical equipment. They can be used to supply a range of applications such as homes, schools, factories,
hospitals and other.
Diesel generators are available with and without canopy. Canopies are made of gavanized 3 mm metal sheets.
The painting is done by nano technologic electronic powder coating technic. Galvanized metal sheets are durable
against rust. On the doors of canopies are used stainless steel hinges and locks.
In canopies, high levels of sound muting type of silence are located in an isolated area to insulate heat which
included exhaust pipes and exhaust itself.

ELECTRICAL DIESEL GENERATORS EL-DF SERIES WITH CANOPY

Model Power stand Power prime Output voltage Length Width Height Product Catalogue number
by (kVA/kW) (V) (mm) (mm) (mm) category
(kVA/kW)
EL-DF15C 12/10 11/9 400/230 1350 850 1080 E 45DG15/12C
EL-DF25C 25/20 23/18 400/230 2000 950 1450 E 45DG25/20C
EL-DF55C 55/44 50/40 400/230 2400 1000 1800 E 45DG55/44C
EL-DF75C 75/60 68/55 400/230 2400 1000 1800 E 45DG75/60C
EL-DF94C 94/75 85/68 400/230 2700 1100 1800 E 45DG94/75C
EL-DF110C 110/88 100/80 400/230 3100 1100 1880 E 45DG110/88C
EL-DF150C 150/120 136/109 400/230 3100 1100 1880 E 45DG150/120C
EL-DF175C 175/140 159/127 400/230 3100 1100 1880 E 45DG175/140C

ELECTRICAL DIESEL GENERATORS EL-DF SERIES WITHOUT CANOPY

Model Power stand Power prime Output voltage Length Width Height Product Catalogue number
by (kVA/kW) (V) (mm) (mm) (mm) category
GENERATORS

(kVA/kW)
EL-DF15 12/10 11/9 400/230 1350 850 1050 E 45DG15/12
EL-DF25 25/20 23/18 400/230 1650 950 1400 E 45DG25/20
EL-DF55 55/44 50/40 400/230 2000 1000 1700 E 45DG55/44
EL-DF75 75/60 68/55 400/230 2000 1000 1800 E 45DG75/60
EL-DF94 94/75 85/68 400/230 2150 1100 1800 E 45DG94/75
EL-DF110 110/88 100/80 400/230 2500 1100 1780 E 45DG110/88
148 EL-DF150 150/120 136/109 400/230 2500 1100 1780 E 45DG150/120
EL-DF175 175/140 159/127 400/230 2500 1100 1780 E 45DG175/140
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

QUARZ TIME SWITCH WITH POWER RESERVE

ТМ 180 MINI
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The mechanic relay for time is supposed to be used for managing chains with maximum capacity of 3500W.After
the setting ,the timer executes the functions we required in 24 hours regime. The minimum period for setting is
15 minutes as it is executed within 96 pcs segments which the timing of the work and rest of the consummator is
being set.The timer is accomplished with a battery which assures the work by 70 hours after power failure.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Rated voltage: 230-240V AC 50/60Hz
• Time range: 24 hours
• Min. programmable interval: 15 minutes
• Time adjustment: manual
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(pcs) category number • Battery power reserve: 70 hours
• Time deviation: ± 1s (at 20°C)
ТМ 180 1 / 200 B 50137 • Consumption: 2.5VA
• Contact: 1NO
• Contact capacity:
• 16A/250V (COSФ=1)
• 4A/250V (COSФ=0.6)
• Electrical endurance: 10⁵ times
• Mechanical endurance: 10⁷ times
• Section of the conductor: rigid conductors up to
Dimensions (mm)
6mm²
H L D
90 18 60 MOUNTING:
• DIN-rail

QUARZ TIME SWITCH WITH POWER RESERVE

ТМ 181
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The mechanic relay for time is supposed to be used for managing chains with maximum capacity of 3500W.After

AUTOMATION
the setting ,the timer executes the functions we required in 24 hours regime. The minimum period for setting is
30 minutes as it is executed within 48 pcs segments which the timing of the work and rest of the consummator is
being set.The timer is accomplished with a battery which assures the work by 150 hours after power failure.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Rated voltage: 110-240V AC 50/60Hz
• Time range: 24 hours
• Min. programmable interval: 30 minutes
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Time adjustment: manual 149
(pcs) category number • Battery power reserve: 150 hours
• Time deviation: ± 1s (at 20°C)
ТМ 181 1 / 100 B 50138
• Consumption: 2.5VA
• Contact: 1NO
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

• Contact capacity: 16А

• Electrical endurance: 10⁵ times
• Mechanical endurance: 10⁷ times
• Section of the conductor: rigid conductors up to
6mm²
Dimensions (mm)
MOUNTING:
H L D • DIN-rail
90 53.5 65.5

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS www.elmarkholding.eu

24 HOURS PLUG-IN MECHANICAL TIMER 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Mechanical german plug-in timer with children protector. Two position switch for permament and time contol.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Min. setting time: 15 mins
• Max. setting time: 24 hours
• active load: up to 16A
• IP20
• Size (mm): 82x84x56
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(pcs) category number
EL-PMT-1 1/24/48 B 50140

PROGRAMMABLE WEEKLY TIMER 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The product according to the time set by the user, automatically turn On/Off the variety of electrical equipment.
Included LI-ion battery

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Power supply voltage: 220-250V; 50/60Hz
• Adjustment range: 1 min
• Commutating capacity:
• active load: up to 30A
• Operations: 17 switching ON/OFF per day, up to 119
AUTOMATION

ON/OFF per week

Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(pcs) category number • Operating temperature: 0 ÷ +55°C
• Size (LxWxH)mm: 60x32.5x60
EL-PWT-1 1/200 B 50139
MOUNTING:
• With bolts to the surface

150
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

WEEKLY PLUG-IN DIGITAL TIMER 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Digital german plug-in timer with coundown function and rechargeable NI-MH battery. Two outlets for
permament and time contol.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Min. setting time: 1 min
• Max. setting time: 7 days
• Program per day: 16 ON/OFF
• active load: up to 16A
• IP20
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(pcs) category number • Size (mm): 68.4x73x77.2

EL-WDT-2 1/24/48 B 50141

WEEKLY PLUG-IN DIGITAL TIMER 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Digital german plug-in timer with children protector and rechargeable NI-MH battery. Two outlets for permament
and time contol.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Min. setting time: 1 min or 1 sec
• Max. setting time: 7 days
• Program per day: 8 or 20 ON/OFF
• active load: up to 16A

AUTOMATION
• IP20
• Size (mm): 130x75x70
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(pcs) category number
EL-WDT-3 1/24/48 B 50142

151
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS www.elmarkholding.eu

PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL ONE-CHANNEL TIMER

TE 15A
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for
operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It can memorize up to eight ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF
cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the days
of the week (you can choose among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the
week); then the cycle start time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the program will
start and stop at the set times each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary, other
programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs the
first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute..

Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue TECHNICAL DATA: • Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles
(pcs) category number • Display: LCD • Operating temperature: -10°C ÷ +65C
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz • Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
TE 15A 1 / 100 B 50036
• Operations: 16 switching ON/OFF • Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC
• Minimum setting unit: 1 min • Commutating capacity:
• Time setting range: 1 min- 168 hours Ì active load: up to 16A
• Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C) • Weight: 125g
• Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days
• Power consumption: <4.5VA MOUNTING:
• Switched on indicator • DIN-rail
Dimensions (mm) • Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles

H L D
85 36 64

PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL ONE-CHANNEL

TIMER TE 15B
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for
operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting.It can memorize up to six ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF
cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the days
AUTOMATION

of the week (you can choose among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the
week); then the cycle start time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the program will
start and stop at the set times each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary, other
programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs
the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute. There is
possibility for automatic correction of the time according to the seasonal sun variations.
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(pcs) category number TECHNICAL DATA:
152 • Display: LCD
ТЕ 15 B 1 / 100 F 50101 • Automatic adjustment of the current time (time correction winter/summer)
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Operations: 6 switching ON/OFF
• Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C)
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

• Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days

• Power consumption: <5VA
• Switched on indicator
• Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles
Dimensions (mm) • Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles
• Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C
H W L
• Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
85 36 64 • Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC
• Commutating capacity:
Ì active load: up to 6A
Ì inductive load: up to 2.5
• Weight: 120g

MOUNTING:
• DIN-rail

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

STARCASE DELAY TIMER 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. Provide control of lighting circuits with automatic switch Off after pre-
set time. Two position switch for permament and time lighting contol and choise for time delay setting from 30
sec to 10 minutes. Compact 1-mode design- 17.5mm

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Adjustment range: 0.5 to 10 min
• Power consumption: <2.5VA
• Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +60°C
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Humidity: 45 – 95%RH
(pcs) category number
• Number of contacts: 1NO
• Commutating capacity:
TE 17 1/240 B 35007
• active load: up to 16A
• inductive load: up to 10 A

MOUNTING:
• DIN-rail

Dimensions (mm)

H W L1 L2 D
82 17.5 40 65 45

TIME RELAY “STAR/DELTA” TE 19 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The time relay is manufactured under the most modern methods of qualitative and reliable materials. The timer is
adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used to provide reliable and safe time hold at “star/delta” starters and it is used
for setting fixed time intervals. Programming is done through selection of the time unit (seconds or minutes) and
rate (x 0.1 or x1) by the slide switches, and then selection of a value from the timer knob (from 0 to 10). Whenever

AUTOMATION
timer circuit receives a signal, it executes the set cycle and then stops until a new signal is available. It gives
possibility for time adjustment for motor unwinding in star up to 600s and time change to delta according to the
consumer’s need.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Adjustment range for operation in star: 1 to 600
(pcs) category number seconds
• Repetition accuracy: ±5% from the whole scale 153
TE19 1 / 200 B 50102 • Adjustment accuracy: ±5% from the whole scale
• Zeroing time: <0.5s
• Power consumption: <5VA
• Electrical wear resistance: 100 000 cycles
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

• Mechanical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles

• Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C
• Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
• Commutating capacity: up to 5A
Dimensions (mm) • Indication:
Ì at operation in “star”: red indication
H W L1 L2 H1 H2
Ì at operation in “delta”: green indication
85 24 34 66 45 60 • Weight: 150g

MOUNTING:
• DIN-rail

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS www.elmarkholding.eu

TIMER TE8A – 1A, TE8A – 2A 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes
it precise, qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation of the timers without charging
up to 150 hours. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. Timer programming is done through selection of the
operational day(s) of the week, followed by selection of the start time and end time. You may choose out of ten
modes (one for each day of the week, one for the work days, one for the weekends and one for the whole week).
When setting the time, you should start first with the hours and then continue with the minutes.
ТЕ8A - 1a - Up to eight programs can be memorized. The on/off time resolution is 1 minute.
ТЕ8A - 2a - It has two operating channels, each of which can adjust four programmes for a day or a week with
minimal interval of 1 minute for switching on and off.
Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.

Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue Technical data:

(pcs) category number
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Power consumption: <5VA
ТЕ8А - 1а 1 / 75 B 50113
• Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles
ТЕ8А - 2а 1 / 75 B 50114 • Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles
• Operating temperature: -10ºC ÷ +65ºC
• Temperature of storage: up to 70C
• Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
• Commutating capacity: up to 16A
• Two outlet relays
• Li-Ion battery: 150h
• Weight: 150g
Dimensions (mm)
•
Mounting:
H H1 H2 W • DIN-rail
100 50 68 50
E L1 L2 F
36 60 74 90

IMPULSE RELAY 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
AUTOMATION

Impulse relays allow circuit remote control. They can be operated manually, remotely, from several control points,
or by impulses. Impulse relays are most frequently used for the control of lighting circuits in various public places
with multiple control points.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Control voltage: 230V
• Rated current of the power circuit: 16А
154 • Electrical endurance: 200000 cycles
• Maximum switching frequency: 5 operations/minute
• Impulse duration: 50ms

Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue CONNECTION:

PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

(pcs) category number • tunnel terminals

EPN510 8 / 160 B 50300

Dimensions (mm)
H W C D L1 L2
85 24 36 45 34 66

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

TIMER TE6B 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it
precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction
of operation is adjusted – direct or reverse. There is possibility to adjust the time range from 0.01 second to 99
hours 59 minutes, possibility for correction of the set values during operation. Indication on LCD display with high
resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Possibility for choice of operating range:
Ì from 0.01 second to 99.99 seconds
Ì from 1 second to 99.59 minutes
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue Ì from 1 minute to 99.59 hours
(pcs) category number • Error: <0.01% ±0.05s
TE6B 1 / 100 B 50104 • Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms
• Power consumption: <5VA
• Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles
• Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles
• Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C
• Temperature of storage: up to 70°C
• Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
• Commutating capacity at active load: 3A
Dimensions (mm) • Weight: 300g
D W L
8.5 45 80 MOUNTING:
• on the front panel of the board

TIMER TE48S-S 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it
precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction

AUTOMATION
of operation is adjusted – direct or reverse. It represents two separate operating channels, each of which can
operate independently with time range adjustment from 1 second to 99 minutes. Possibility for correction of the
set values during operation. First, select the time unit (seconds or minutes) and then set the time. Depending on
the timer coupling, it can be used as a cyclic timer relay, i.e. it initially counts the first time set, then counts the
second time set, then starts counting over the first time again, etc. until a stop signal is received. In another mode,
the timer can count the set time and stop until a new signal is received to count the next cycle. Indication on LCD
display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.

TECHNICAL DATA:
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz 155
(pcs) category number • Admissible variation of the input voltage: 85-110%U
• Possibility for choice of operating range:
TE48S-S 84 B 50105 Ì from 1 to 99 seconds
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

Ì from 1 minute to 99 minutes

• Error: <0.01% ±0.05s
• Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms
• Power consumption: <5VA
• Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles
• Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles
• Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C
Dimensions (mm) • Temperature of storage: up to 70°C
D E L1 L2 • Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
• Commutating capacity at load: 3A
5 44.8 74 95
• Weight: 300g
C H W
15 58 48 MOUNTING:
• on the front panel of the board

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS www.elmarkholding.eu

TIMER ТЕ 19M 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Timer is developed using modern technologies from quality and reliable materials and is adapted for mounting
on DIN rail. It is used for providing time intervals in eight time programs, which are assigned by combinations of
the keys. There is an option for it to operate in time ranges (assigned by the keys K4, K5,K6): seconds, minutes or
hours depending on the necessity of the user. Power contact up to 3A.

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS:
• Input voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Range of setting: from 0.6 sec to 100 hours
• Accuracy of setting: ± 5% from the whole scale
• Time for nullifying: <0.5 seconds
• Consumed capacity: < 5VA
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 100 000
(pcs) category number cycles
• Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 1 000 000
ТЕ 19M 1 / 200 B 50102M cycles
• Operation temperature: -10 ÷ +65°С
• Humidity: 45 - 85%RH
• Computing option: up to 5А
• Indication:
Ì on power supply: red indication
Ì on operational output relay: green indication
• Weight: 150 gr.
Dimensions (mm) • Time functions: according to the programming guide
H W H1 H2 L1 L2
MOUNTING METHOD:
85 24 45 60 34 66
• DIN rail

UNIVERSAL DIGITAL COUNTER CE2J 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The device is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting and
high counting reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied
AUTOMATION

with a digital display with black lighting digits, providing excellent visibility at different lighting. The counter is
to be mounted on the front panel of the boards. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or
deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for
changing the position of the decimal point.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Display: LCD
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Counting range: 0 - 99999
156 Documents corresponding to the • Counting speed: 30/3k cps
product: • Zeroing: outside impulse
Standard EN 61010-1 • Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years
• Power consumption: <5VA
PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C

(pcs) category number • Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
• Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active
CE2J 1 / 45 B 50111 load: up to 3A
• Weight: 250g

MOUNTING:
• on the front panel
• opening with dimensions: 45x45

Dimensions (mm)

H W C D L
68 68 65 8.5 90

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu DIGITAL COUNTERS

COMBINED DIGITAL COUNTER/TIMER CE10J 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The device is for front mounting in the board. It can be used as a counter or timer choosing a definite
combination from keys. It is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of
counting, precision at operation as a timer and high reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for
more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used
for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at
reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Display: LCD
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Counting range: 0 – 999
Documents corresponding to the • Timer range: 0.01 – 99h99min
product: • Counting speed: 30/500 cps
Standard EN 61010-1 • Zeroing: outside impulse
• Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Power consumption: <3VA
(pcs) category number • Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles
• Operating temperature: -5 ÷ +65°C
CE10J 1 / 45 B 50120 • Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
• Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active
load: up to 3A
• Weight: 120g

MOUNTING:
• on the front panel
• opening with dimensions: 45x45
Dimensions (mm)

H W C D L
68 68 65 6 90

TOTAL DIGITAL COUNTER CE15J 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

AUTOMATION
The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as an impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that
purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5
years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse
sequence counting with accumulation.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Display: LCD
• Power supply voltage: built in battery
Documents corresponding to • Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC 157
the product: EN 61010-1 • Counting accuracy: <0.002%
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Data storing battery: up to 5 years
(pcs) category number • Operating temperature: -5 ÷ +65°C
DIGITAL COUNTERS

• Humidity: 35 – 85%RH Dimensions (mm)

CE15J 1 / 100 B 50112 • Weight: 120g H W D L

MOUNTING: 86 36 45 64
• DIN-rail

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
DIGITAL COUNTERS www.elmarkholding.eu

TOTAL DIGITAL COUNTER CE15L 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as a time impulse counter with no outside power supply. For
that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for
5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for time
impulse sequence counting with accumulation. It displays the operated time.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Display: LCD
• Power supply voltage: built in battery
• Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC
Documents corresponding to • Counting accuracy: <0.002%
the product: EN 61010-1 • Battery for data storing: up to 5 years
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Operating temperature: -5 ÷ +65°C
(pcs) category number • Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
• Weight: 120g
CE15L 1 / 100 B 50115
MOUNTING:
• DIN-rail

Dimensions (mm)
H W D L

86 36 45 64

PHASE SEQUENCE INDICATOR EK - RSTB 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used for control and indication of the presence, sequence and quality
of the phases. The device indicates the following fault: lack of one or several phases; change in the sequence of the
phases; lowering of the power supplying voltage: under 10%; increasing of the power supplying voltage: over 10%;
phase asymmetry of the power supplying voltage: ±10%. In the presence of one of the conditions above a relay
starts operating in the device which breaks the controlling circuit. The time between fault indication and outlet relay
switching on can be adjusted in order to prevent unwilling stops at very short breaks. When the voltage is back to
normal limits, the device receives energy (indication lights)
AUTOMATION

according to the hysteresic values. At phase sequence fault the

device operates immediately.

TECHNICAL DATA:
Documents corresponding to • Power supply voltage: 400V; 50Hz
the product: EN 61010-1 • Possibility for operation range adjustment: 0.1 – 10 seconds
Type Packing/Box Product Catalogue • Possibility for working range adjustment: from 300 to 480 V
(pcs) category number • Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
• Mechanical wear resistance: 10 000 000 cycles
158 • Indication: green LED – indication for a change in the
EK - RSTB 1 / 200 B 50103
condition; red LED - failure
• Operating temperature: -5 ÷ +65°C
• Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
• Weight: 120g Dimensions (mm)
DIGITAL COUNTERS

• H W D1 D2 L1 L2
MOUNTING:
• DIN-rail 85 24 45 60 34 66
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

EVT5 - CONTROL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS:
Reduction of main voltage within standard range
• Galvanic separation of the power supply circuit from
the operation circuit
TECHNICAL FEATURES:
• Input voltage: 400 or 230 V
• Frequency : 50/60Hz
• Short circuit resistance: unstable
• Temperature class: В (130ºC)
• Construction: open (for installation in other products)
• Magnetic circuit: cold rolled electric furnace steel
• Coils: pure electrotechnical copper
• IP code: IP20
Documents corresponding to the
product: Standard EN 60051-1 CONNECTION:
• flexible or hard conductors of relevant section to
terminals

MOUNTING:
• Mounting in distribution boards or products
• fastening: by means of screws/bolts to the surface
• position: vertical
• ambient temperature: -20 ÷ +65ºС

Type Initial Secondary Power Dimensions Packing Product Catalogue

voltage voltage VA C D E F G d / Box category number
(V) (V) (pcs.)
EVT5 - 250VA 230 48-36 250 130 100 120 53 130 20 16 F 45242N
EVT5 - 250VA 400 24-12 250 130 100 120 53 130 20 12 F 45444
EVT5 - 500VA 400 48-24-12 500 150 113 133 53 140 20 4 F 45445
EVT5 - 500VA 230 110-48-24 500 150 125 133 53 140 20 4 F 45215
EVT5 - 500VA 400 110-48-24 500 150 125 133 53 140 20 6 F 45415
EVT5 - 1000VA 400 48-24-12 1000 170 125 150 65 155 20 2 F 45441

AUTOMATION
EVT5 - 1600VA 400 48-24-12 1600 190 125 150 65 170 20 2 F 454416

159
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
CURRENT MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS www.elmarkholding.eu

CURRENT MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS

MES - XX/X5 TYPE
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The measurement transformers find application at current measuring, current regulation, systems for current
characteristics watching, systems for reactive energy compensation, signaling, etc. They are with x/5 gear ratio as
X is the inlet range of the transformer.
• Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
TECHNICAL DATA: • Precision class: 0.5
• Maximum operating voltage: 720V; 50Hz
• Admissible deviation of the operating current: 1.2 MOUNTING:
x In • Current transformers can be DIN rail mounted;
• Inlet current: 50 – 1200A • vertically or horizontally to the power supplying rails
• Outlet current: 5A according to the opening of the transformer
Documents corresponding to
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) • Current transformers can be mounted on flat
the product: Standard EN 61010-1;
• Operating temperature: -5 ÷ +65°C surfaces by use of fixing clamps.
EN 60044-1; EN 60044-6
Type Overall dimensions (mm)
A B C D E F G
MES - 75/30 88 52 52 41 77 31 31
MES - 75/40 88 52 52 41 77 41 41
MES - 86/60 117 57 57 184 77 61 61

Type Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Packing/Box Product Catalogue

(pcs) category number
MES - 75/30 50/5 0.5 1 0.60 1 / 40 B 45050А
MES - 75/30 75/5 0.5 1.5 0.60 1 / 40 B 45075А
MES - 75/30 100/5 0.5 1.5 0.60 1 / 40 B 45103А
MES - 75/30 150/5 0.5 2.5 0.60 1 / 40 B 45153А
AUTOMATION

Type Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Packing/Box Product Catalogue

(pcs) category number
MES - 75/40 200/5 0.5 3.75 0.60 1 / 40 B 45204А
MES - 75/40 250/5 0.5 3.75 0.60 1 / 40 B 45254А
MES - 75/40 300/5 0.5 5 0.60 1 / 40 B 45304А
MES - 75/40 400/5 0.5 5 0.60 1 / 40 B 45404А
MES - 75/40 500/5 0.5 5 0.60 1 / 40 B 45504А
MES - 75/40 600/5 0.5 5 0.60 1 / 40 B 45604А
160
CURRENT MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS

Type Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Packing/Box Product Catalogue

(pcs) category number
MES - 86/60 400/5 0.5 3.75 0.60 1 / 40 B 45406А
MES - 86/60 500/5 0.5 5 0.60 1 / 40 B 45506А
MES - 86/60 600/5 0.5 10 0.60 1 / 40 B 45606А
MES - 86/60 800/5 0.5 10 0.60 1 / 40 B 45806А
MES - 86/60 1000/5 0.5 10 0.60 1 / 32 B 45906А
MES - 86/60 1200/5 0.5 10 0.60 1 / 32 B 45916А

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CURRENT MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, TYPE СР 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Current measuring transformers of duct type. Specially designed to be installed in measuring circuits without
removing cables in current measuring circuit. CP Transformers save installation time and decrease installation
costs

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:
• small size table:
• secondary coil rated current 5А
• rated voltage 720V
• frequency 50Hz
• rated load: up to 30VA
Documents corresponding to • safety coefficient: fs≤5
the product: Standard EN 60044-1 • accuracy class :0.5; 1
• secondary coil connection: cable shoe terminal

Type Overall dimensions (mm)

A B C D E F G
СР 23 20 30 51 89 111 34 47
СР 58 50 80 78 114 145 32 32
СР 88 80 80 108 144 145 32 32

Type Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Packing/Box Product Catalogue

(pcs) category number
СР 23 200/5 1 1.5 0,74 1 / 45 B 452320
СР 23 250/5 1 2.5 0,74 1 / 45 B 452325
СР 23 300/5 0,5 2.5 0,74 1 / 45 B 452330

AUTOMATION
Type Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(pcs) category number
СР 58 250/5 0,5 1,5 0,87 1 / 36 B 455825
СР 58 300/5 0,5 2,5 0,87 1 / 36 B 455830
СР 58 400/5 0,5 2,5 0,87 1 / 36 B 455840
СР 58 500/5 0,5 5 0,87 1 / 36 B 455850
СР 58 600/5 0,5 5 0,87 1 / 36 B 455860
161
CURRENT MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS

Type Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Packing/Box Product Catalogue

(pcs) category number
СР 88 400/5 0,5 1 1 / 20 B 458840
СР 88 500/5 0,5 2,5 1 1 / 20 B 458850
СР 88 600/5 0,5 5 1 1 / 20 B 458860
СР 88 750/5 0,5 2,5 1 1 / 20 B 458875
СР 88 800/5 0,5 3.75 1 1 / 20 B 458880
СР 88 1000/5 0,5 5 1 1 / 20 B 458890

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
INDUSTRIAL RELAYS www.elmarkholding.eu

INDUSTRIAL RELAYS AND BASES 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Devices intended for construction of automation and signalling boards. They are mainly used for command
transfer towards the executive mechanisms. Currents of comparatively heavy values enabling the direct control of
industrial executive mechanisms are commuted in comparatively small sizes. The contact surfaces are made from
silver-coated electrolytic copper. The entire contact system is closed within a lid of colourless fire-proof plastic
with a test-button installed to it. The base provides a safe electric connection of the conductors of the electric
installation and the relays and is used to install the relay to the DIN busbar.

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS: METHOD OF INSTALLATION:

• Supply voltage: from 12 to 230V АС, 50 Нz and from • on a DIN rail by means of a socket
12 to 110V DC
Documents corresponding to
• Acceptable deviation of the supply voltage: 85 -110%
the product: EN 60947-5-1;
Un
EN 61810
• Rated current of the sockets: 10А АС
• Electrical endurance: 1 000 000 cycles
• Isolation resistance: 500 mΩ /min (500V)
• Impulse tension resistance: 2000V, 50Нz
• Dielectric strength: 1000V АС/1 min
• Turn-out time: 25ms
• Working temperature: -5 ÷ + 65°С
• Humidity: 35 - 85% RH

Relay type Voltage of the Socket type Resistance of the Number of Packing/Box Product Catalogue
coil (V) coil ( Ω ) contacts (pcs) category number
ELM - 14FC 12 VDC ELM-RT624-B 260 NO+NC 100 / 1000 B 57141
ELM - 14FC 24 VDC ELM-RT624-B 1080 NO+NC 100 / 1000 B 57142
ELM - 14FC 48 VDC ELM-RT624-B 4260 NO+NC 100 / 1000 B 57143
AUTOMATION

Relay type Voltage of the Socket type Resistance of the Number of Packing/Box Product Catalogue
coil (V) coil ( Ω ) contacts (pcs) category number
ELM - 60.2 12 VDC ELM - 90.22 96 2NO+2NC 20 / 300 B 57601
ELM - 60.2 24 VDC ELM - 90.22 384 2NO+2NC 20 / 300 B 57602
ELM - 60.2 48 VDC ELM - 90.22 1540 2NO+2NC 20 / 300 B 57603
162 ELM - 60.2 230 VAC ELM - 90.22 7400 2NO+2NC 20 / 300 B 57605
ELM-60.2 24VAC ELM-90.22 2NO+2NC 20 / 300 B 57606
ELM - 60.13 12 VDC ELM - 90.23 96 3NO+3NC 20 / 300 B 57611
ELM - 60.13 24 VDC ELM - 90.23 384 3NO+3NC 20 / 300 B 57612
INDUSTRIAL RELAYS

ELM - 60.13 48 VDC ELM - 90.23 1540 3NO+3NC 20 / 300 B 57613

ELM - 60.13 110 VAC ELM - 90.23 1700 3NO+3NC 20 / 300 B 57614
ELM - 60.13 230 VAC ELM - 90.23 7400 3NO+3NC 20 / 300 B 57615
ELM-60.13 24VAC ELM90.23 3NO-3NC 20/300 B 57616

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu INDUSTRIAL RELAYS

Relay type Voltage of the Socket type Resistance of the Number of Packing/Box Product Catalogue
coil (V) coil ( Ω ) contacts (pcs) category number
ELM - 55.02 12 VDC ELM - RT702-B 42 2NO+2NC 50 / 500 B 57521
ELM - 55.02 24 VDC ELM - RT702-B 168 2NO+2NC 50 / 500 B 57522
ELM - 55.02 48 VDC ELM - RT702-B 675 2NO+2NC 50 / 500 B 57523
ELM - 55.02 230 VAC ELM - RT702-B 14000 2NO+2NC 50 / 500 B 57525
ELM55.02 24VAC ELM - RT702-B 2NO+2NC 50 / 500 B 57526
ELM - 55.04 12 VDC ELM-RT704-B 42 4NO+4NC 50 / 500 B 57541
ELM - 55.04 24 VDC ELM-RT704-B 168 4NO+4NC 50 / 500 B 57542
ELM - 55.04 48 VDC ELM-RT704-B 675 4NO+4NC 50 / 500 B 57543
ELM - 55.04 110 VAC ELM-RT704-B 3500 4NO+4NC 50 / 500 B 57544
ELM - 55.04 230 VAC ELM-RT704-B 14000 4NO+4NC 50 / 500 B 57545
ELM-55.04 24VAC ELM-RT704-B 4NO+4NC 50 / 500 B 57546

Socket type Dimensions (mm) Number of terminals (pcs.) Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue
category number
ELM - RT624-B 76 x 15 5 20 / 600 B 57901
ELM - RT702-B 76 x 27 11 10 / 240 B 57902
ELM - RT704-B 76 x 27 14 10 / 240 B 57912
ELM - 90.22 68 x 38 8 10 / 400 B 57904
ELM - 90.23 68 x 38 11 10 / 400 B 57905

57901 57902, 57912

AUTOMATION
57904, 57905
163
INDUSTRIAL RELAYS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
INDUSTRIAL RELAYS www.elmarkholding.eu

INDUSTRIAL SOLID STATE RELAYS (SSR) 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Industrial SSR are intended for mounting in power and control cabinets as an output switch devices with reliable
ON/OFF performance. The SSR are based on the CMOS technology. The non-contact electronic switch is optically
separated from the input signal by a photoelectric coupler. This allows use of switch currents of up to 50A despite of
the devices small overall size. Another important feature of the relay is that output load can be regulated depending
on the input signal value. The relay is mainly used to transmit control signals to actuating mechanisms since it can
work at comparatively high currents making it possible to directly control actuators. SSR have transparent plastic
covers to additionally improve their safety level. The SSR use is connected with considerable heat emissions, so
measures must be taken to dispense the excessive thermal energy in the atmosphere. This is achieved through
application of specially deigned radiators. The correct definition of radiator parameters is of critical importance. It is
Documents corresponding to made by calculating the heat generation capacity with the formula: Heat generation = active load current x 3.0 W/A.
the product: EN 60947-5-1; The heat removal surface is estimated with the help of the following graphic:
EN 61810
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: • Dielectric Strength: < 2500VAC / 1 min
• Load/output voltage: 30/400V 50 Hz or the solid state • Leakage current: <2mA
voltage regulators • Turn-on time: <10ms
• Rated output current: from 10А to 60А • Operating temperature: -5°С + 65°С
• Insulating voltage: 1000 MΩ /min (500V) • Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH
• Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz

Type Relay Type Control Voltage Output Number of Output Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(V) Voltage (V) phases Current ( А ) (pcs) category number
ZG3NC - 2 - 10B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 10 10 / 100 B 57710
ZG3NC - 2 - 20B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 20 10 / 100 B 57720
ZG3NC - 2 - 25B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 25 10 / 100 B 57725
ZG3NC - 2 - 40B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 40 10 / 100 B 57740
ZG3NC - 2 - 60B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 60 10 / 100 B 57760
ZG3NC - 3 -10B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 10 10 / 100 B 57713
ZG3NC - 3 - 20B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 20 10 / 100 B 57723
ZG3NC - 3 - 25B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 25 10 / 100 B 57735
ZG3NC - 3 - 40B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 40 10 / 100 B 57743
ZG3NC - 3 - 60B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 60 10 / 100 B 57763
AUTOMATION

Type Relay Type Control Output Number of Output Packing/Box Product Catalogue
Voltage (V) Voltage (V) phases Current (А) (pcs) category number
ZG1NC - 2 - 10D SS voltage regulator 1-10VDC 0-230VАC 1 10 10 / 100 F 57810
ZG1NC - 3 -10D SS voltage regulator 1-10VDC 0-400VАC 2 10 10 / 100 F 57813
164
INDUSTRIAL RELAYS

Type Relay Type Control Output Number of Output Packing/Box Product Catalogue
Voltage (V) Voltage (V) phases Current ( А ) (pcs) category number
ZG33 - 3 - 10В SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 3 10 1 / 30 B 57831
ZG33 - 3 - 20В SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 3 20 1 / 30 B 57832
ZG33 - 3 - 25В SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 3 25 1 / 30 B 57833
ZG 33 - 3 - 40В SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 3 40 1 / 30 B 57834

Note: The relay output must be supplied with a varistor to ensure its over-voltage protection, whenever RRS is
used to control inductive loads.
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

DIGITAL VOLTMETER/AMPEREMETER EKDP 15 A/V 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Digital device adjusted for DIN-rail mounting and offered in two types:
• amperemeter
• voltmeter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has
high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability.
There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to
measure constant current (AD,DV) and alternating current (AA,VA) quantities.

TECHNICAL DATA:
Documents corresponding to the • Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz
product: Standard EN 61010-1 • Inlet signal:
Ì operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the range is
Type Packing/ Product Catalogue adjusted from inside)
Box (pcs) category number
Ì operating as amperemeter: 5 – 2000A (the range
EKDP-15AA 1 / 100 B 50117A is adjusted from inside)
EKDP-15DA 1 / 100 B 50117D
EKDP-15AV 1 / 100 B 50116A NOTE: At current range over 5A a current
EKDP-15DV 1 / 100 B 50116D measurement transformer should be used
• Consumption: <4VA
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min)
• Operating temperature: -5 ÷ +65°C
• Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
• Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
• Display: LCD
• Weight: 150gr
Dimensions (mm)
MOUNTING:
H W L D
• DIN-rail
88 36 64 45
#K#

DIGITAL VOLTMETER/AMPEREMETER AND

FREQUENCY METER EKDP7
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Digital device adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards and offered in the following types:

AUTOMATION
• amperemeter:
EKDP7 – AA – amperemeter for alternating current
EKDP7 – DA – amperemeter for direct current
• voltmeter:
EKDP7 – AV – voltmeter for alternating current
EKDP7 – DV – voltmeter for direct current
EKDP7 – Hz – frequency meter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has
Documents corresponding to the
high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. 165
product: Standard EN 61010-1
There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to
measure direct current and alternating current quantities.
Type Packing/ Product Catalogue
Box (pcs) category number
TECHNICAL DATA:
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

EKDP7-AV 1 / 84 B 50106 • Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz

EKDP7-AA 1 / 84 B 50107 • Inlet signal:
EKDP7-DV 1 / 84 B 50108 Ì operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the range is adjusted from inside)
EKDP7-DA 1 / 84 B 50109 Ì operating as amperemeter: 5 – 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside
EKDP7-HZ 1 / 84 B 50110
NOTE: For high current range a current measurement transformer should be used for alternating current device
and a measurement shunt for direct current.
• Consumption: <5A
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min)
• Operating temperature: -5 ÷ +65°C
• Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
• Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
• Display: LCD
Dimensions (mm) • Weight: 130gr
H W H1 D L
72 72 68 6 42 MOUNTING:
• on the front panel
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES www.elmarkholding.eu

DIGITAL ROUND VOLTMETER/ AMPEREMETER AND 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FREQUENCY METER EL-ED16R

Type Range Diameter (mm) Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
Voltmeter AC 12-500V 22 10/500 B 401553
Amperemeter AC 0-100A 22 10/500 B 401554
Frequency meter AC 35-99 HZ 22 10/500 B 401555

DIGITAL SQUARE VOLTMETER/ AMPEREMETER AND 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FREQUENCY METER EL-ED16S

Type Range Diameter (mm) Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category

#N#
Voltmeter AC 12-500V 22 10/500 B 401556
Amperemeter AC 0-100A 22 10/500 B 401557
Frequency meter AC 35-99 HZ 22 10/500 B 401558
AUTOMATION

166
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

Documents corresponding to the

product: Standard IEC 62052-11; IEC
DIN RAIL MOUNTED KWH METERS 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

62053-21; IEC 62056-21

Electronic single and three phase kWh meters intended for DIN rail mounting and active energy measurement.
Meters are suitable for home and commercial applications. They perform direct measurement of the real
consumption of electric power and the results are shown on the LCD display. The system doesn’t need any
additional adjustment or calibration. The range includes single and multi-tariff models.

Type Measuring Number Meter constant Voltage Overall dimensions Packing/Box Product Catalogue
range of Tariffs (imp/kWh) (V) (mm) (pcs) category number
height / width /
depth
DDS - 1Y - 45 5A (45A) 1 1000 230 63 / 18 / 118 1 / 120 F 50214

AUTOMATION
167

Type Measuring Number Meter constant Voltage Overall dimensions Packing/Box Product Catalogue
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

range of Tariffs (imp/kWh) (V) (mm) (pcs) category number

height / width /
depth
DD4F-S01-1Y-60 5A (60A) 4 1600 230 116.5 / 76 / 65 1 / 48 F 50220

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Measuring Number Meter constant Voltage Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue
range of Tariffs (imp/kWh) (V) height / width / depth (pcs) category number
DDS - 1Y - 100 10A (100A) 1 1600 230 65 / 76 / 100 1 / 45 F 50260
AUTOMATION

Type Measuring Number Meter constant Voltage Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue
range of Tariffs (imp/kWh) (V) height / width / depth (pcs) category number
DDS - 3Y 80 20A (80A) 1 800 3x230/400 65 / 76 / 100 1 / 45 F 50380

168
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

Type Measuring Number Meter constant Voltage Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue
range of Tariffs (imp/kWh) (V) height / width / depth (pcs) category number
DTGS-S01-3Y100 10A (100A) 4 800 3X230/400 122 / 100 / 65 1 / 30 F 50400

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

Type Measuring Number Meter constant Voltage Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue
range of Tariffs (imp/kWh) (V) height / width / depth (pcs) category number
EL-45SA 5A(40A) 1 2000 230 116 /18/ 59 1/10 B 50213

Type Measuring Number Meter constant Voltage Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue
range of Tariffs (imp/kWh) (V) height / width / depth (pcs) category number
EL-100SA-U 10A(60A) 1 1600 230 100 /76/ 65 1/60 B 50216

Type Measuring range Number Meter constant Voltage Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue
of Tariffs (imp/kWh) (V) height / width / depth (pcs) category number
EL-024 3x20A(100A) 1 400 3x220/380 100 /76/ 65 1/60 B 50217

AUTOMATION
169
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES
 AUTOMATION
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES www.elmarkholding.eu

ANALOGUE (POINTER) PANEL METERS SD72 TYPE

FOR BUILD-IN
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Analogue devices adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards. Designed for frequency
measurement, capacity, alternating or direct voltage and current of the power supply grid, with overall
dimensions 72x72mm. They are manufactured on the basis of bridge measurement schemes. There is possibility
for display change for the higher scopes of measuring.
Type Type of the Precision Range Note Packing/Box Product Catalogue
measurment class (pcs) category number
system
amperemeter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-100А current transfer 100/5 1 / 100 B 654010
amperemeter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-200А current transfer 200/5 1 / 100 B 654020
Documents corresponding to the amperemeter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-400А current transfer 400/5 1 / 50 B 654040
product: amperemeter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-600А current transfer 600/5 1 / 50 B 654060
Standard EN 60051-1 current transfer
amperemeter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-1000А 1 / 50 B 654100
1000/5
current transfer
amperemeter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-1500А 1 / 50 B 654150
1500/5
voltmeter АС* MEMSI 1.5 0-500V - 1 / 50 B 50125
frequency meter** МЕ 0.5 45-65Hz - 1 / 50 B 50126
cosφ meter MEMSI 1.5 3P 400V - 1 / 50 B 50127
amperemeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-5A - 1 / 50 B 50128
amperemeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-50A outer resistor 60mV 1 / 50 B 50129
voltmeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-50V - 1 / 50 B 50130
voltmeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-100V - 1 / 20 B 50131
wattmeter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 1P240V - 1 / 25 B 50132
0-3000W 3P 3
wattmeter MEMSI 1.5 - 1 / 25 B 50133
line
0-3000W 3P 4
wattmeter MEMSI 1.5 - 1 / 25 B 50134
line
AUTOMATION

Note: MEMSI - magnetic-electrical movable steel instrument; MEMC – magnetic-electrical movable coil
* Possibility for supplying with voltage transformer X/100V for range expanding
** Possibility for voltage 110V, 230V , 400V

170
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT DEVICES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LIMIT SWITCHES

ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CSA-XXX 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The all-purpose limit switches are devices used in automatic systems as a control element. They are used for setting
of gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They
feature a vibration-resistant metal shell.
PRODUCT CONFORMITY DOCUMENTATION: • Mechanical endirance (number of cycles): 1 000 000
• Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 • Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC • Rated voltage: 230V
• Rated current: 10A active; 4A inductive • Rated current: up to 10A
• Insulating resistance: 100mΩ • IP code: IP66
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with • Cable input: cable glandPG11
active load • Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm²
• Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
Type Type of the Power of Power of Switching General Packing/ Product Catalogue
head starting release position movement Box (pcs) category number
(g) (g)

metal
CSA - 001 800 400 2.0mm 5.8mm 10 / 90 B 46А001
cylinder

cylinder
CSA - 003 with metal 800 400 2.0mm 5.8mm 10 / 90 B 46А003
roll

horizontal
CSA - 012 lever with 800 400 2.0mm 5.8mm 10 / 90 B 46А012
metal roll

AUTOMATION
adjustable
CSA - 031 lever with 400 100 22.5° 95° 10 / 80 B 46А031
metal roll
171
LIMIT SWITCHES

lever with
CSA - 021 400 100 22.5° 95° 10 / 80 B 46А021
metal roll

spring
CSA - 081 150 50 22.5° 50mm 10 / 80 B 46А081
lever

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
LIMIT SWITCHES www.elmarkholding.eu

ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES TZ-6XXX 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The all-purpose limit switches are installed on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion
machines. The miniature limit switch is mounted in an aluminum shell, resistant to vibrations, lubricants and water.
PRODUCT CONFORMITY DOCUMENTATION: • Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000
• Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 • Gearing speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5 m/s
• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC • Rated voltage: 230V
• Rated current: 15A active; 5A inductive • IP code: IP65
• Insulating resistance: 100mΩ • Cable input: cable gland PG11
• Contact resistance: 15mΩ • Section of power supply conductor: up to 1.5mm²
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with
active load

Type Type of the Power Power Switching General Packing/ Product Catalogue
head of of position movement Box (pcs) category number
starting release
(g) (g)

metal
TZ-6001 350 115 0.5mm 5.5mm 1 / 50 B 466001
cylinder

oil-resistant
TZ -6101 metal 800 240 2mm 5mm 1 / 50 B 466101
cylinder

oil-resistant
cylinder
TZ -6102 500 100 1mm 3.5mm 1 / 50 B 466102
with metal
roll
AUTOMATION

oil-resistant
horizontal
TZ -6104 640 230 5mm 6mm 1 / 50 B 466104
lever with
metal roll

172

oil-resistant
vertical
TZ -6143 640 230 5mm 6mm 1 / 50 B 466143
LIMIT SWITCHES

lever with
metal roll

TZ -6106 spring lever 150 - 20° - 1 / 50 B 466106

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LIMIT SWITCHES

UNIVERSAL LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CM-1XXX 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Limit switches of the CM series are used mainly as replacement of the limit switches of the TZ series or for setting the
movement limits of some types of equipment. The switches are supplied with screw cable terminals. They can work
at resistance loads as high as 15A, and are of single circuit type. Limit switches have high accuracy and can operate at
wide variety of speeds.

ITEMS ARE COMPLIANT WITH THE FOLLOWING • Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 5 000 000
STANDARDS: • Operating frequency: 20 electrical operations/minute
EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 • Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 1.0m/s
• Dielectric Strength: 1000V AC • Rated voltage: 230V
• Rated current: 15A active; 5A inductive • IP code: IP40
• Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at 500VDC) • Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
• Contact Resistance: 5mΩ
• Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 500 000 with non-
inductive load

Type Type of the head Power Power Switching General Packing/ Product Catalogue
of of position movement Box (pcs) category number
starting release
(g) (g)

Metal
CM -1307 350 114 0.4mm 5.5mm 1 / 480 B 468105
cylinder

Cylinder and
CM -1309 transverse 350 114 0.4mm 5.5mm 1 / 480 B 468106
metal roll

AUTOMATION
Cylinder
СМ -1308 longitudinal 350 114 0.4mm 5.5mm 1 / 480 B 468109
metal roll

173
Metal
СМ -1305 350 114 0.4mm 1.6mm 1 / 480 B 468110
cylinder LIMIT SWITCHES

Extended
CM -1703 160 22 7.1mm 1.02mm 1 / 480 B 468113
metal roll

CM -1705 Spring lever 10 3 20mm 5.6mm 1 / 480 B 468117

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
LIMIT SWITCHES www.elmarkholding.eu

ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES TZ-8XXX 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines,
conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have small dimensions and a vibration-resistant metal
shell with plastic lid, resistant to oil and water.
PRODUCT CONFORMITY DOCUMENTATION: • Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000 000
• Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 • Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC • Rated voltage: 230V
• Rated current: 5A active; 3A inductive • IP code: IP65
• Insulating resistance: 100MΩ • Cable input: cable gland PG11
• Contact Resistance: 25mΩ • Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with • Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
active load

Type Type of the Power Power Switching General Packing/Box Product Catalogue
head of of position movement (pcs) category number
starting release
(g) (g)

lever with
TZ -8104 750 100 20° 50° 10 / 100 B 468104
metal roll

adjustable
TZ -8108 lever with 750 100 20° 50° 10 / 100 B 468108
metal roll
AUTOMATION

cylinder
TZ -8112 with metal 900 150 1.5mm 4.0mm 10 / 100 B 468112
roll

metal
174 TZ -8111
cylinder
900 150 1.5mm 4.0mm 10 / 100 B 468111
LIMIT SWITCHES

TZ -8107 metal rod 750 100 20° 50° 10 / 100 B 468107

TZ -8167 spring lever 150 - 30mm - 10 / 100 B 468167

 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LIMIT SWITCHES

ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CWL-XXX 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines,
conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have aluminium shell of high mechanic strength and
resistance to oil, water and pressure.
PRODUCT CONFORMITY DOCUMENTATION: • Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000
• Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 • Gearing speed: 1mm/s to 2 m/s
• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC • Rated voltage: 230V
• Rated current: 10A active; 3A inductive • IP code: IP66
• Insulating resistance: 100mΩ • Cable input: cable gland
• Contact resistance: 15mΩ • Metal shell
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with • Vibration-resistant
active load

Type Type of the Power Power Switching General Packing/ Product Catalogue
head of of position movement Box (pcs) category number
starting release
(g) (g)

metal
CWLD 2720 910 2.0mm 6.4mm 1 / 50 B 46LD
cylinder

cylinder
CWLD2 with metal 2720 910 2.0mm 5.6mm 1 / 50 B 46LD2
roll

lever with
CWLCA2-2 1360 227 20° 50° 1 / 50 B 46LCA2-2
metal roll

AUTOMATION
adjustable
CWLCA12-2-Q lever with 2720 910 20° 50° 1 / 50 B 46LCA12-2-Q
metal roll 175
LIMIT SWITCHES

CWCA32-41 fork 1200 - 55° 90±10° 1 / 50 B 46LCA32-41

oil-
resistant
CWLNJ 150 - 28mm 90±10° 1 / 50 B 46LNJ
spring
lever

CWLCL metal rod 142 28 20° 50° 1 / 50 B 46LCL

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
LIMIT SWITCHES www.elmarkholding.eu

UNIVERSAL LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CZ93-XX 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Limit switches of the CZ 93 series are Safety Key Interlock Switches. They are used in object control systems with
high safety requirements. The limit switch body is mounted to the fixed system component, while the safety
key is mounted to the movable system component. System operation cannot start, unless a full interlocking is
achieved. Safety key interlock switches can operate at up to 10A non-inductive resistance load, 3A lamp load and
5A inductive load. They have high operating accuracy at wide variety of speeds. These limit switches are available
in two versions depending on the operating contacts number: 2NC and NO+NC
COMPLIANT WITH THE FOLLOWING STANDARDS: inductive load
EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 • Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 2 000 000
• Dielectric Strength: 2500V AC • Operating frequency: 30 electrical operations/
• Rated current: 10A active; 3A inductive minute
• Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at 500VDC) • Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5m/s
• Contact Resistance: 25mΩ • Rated voltage: 230V
• Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 50 000 with non- • IP code: IP65

Type of the contact system

Type Key type Power Power Switching General Packing/ Product Catalogue
of of position movement Box (pcs) category number
starting release
(g) (g)

10 /
CZ-93BPG01 CZ93-K1 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm B 46CZ08
100

10 /
CZ-93CPG01 CZ93-K1 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm B 46CZ09
100

10 /
AUTOMATION

CZ-93BPG02 CZ93-K2 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm B 46CZ10

100

10 /
CZ-93CPG02 CZ93-K2 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm B 46CZ11
100

10 /
CZ-93BPG03 CZ93-K3 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm B 46CZ12
100
176
10 /
CZ-93CPG03 CZ93-K3 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm B 46CZ13
100
LIMIT SWITCHES

Type Key Actuating Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue

category number
CZ 93 - K 1 Horizontal 1 / 100 B 46CZ931
CZ 93 - K 2 Vertical 1 / 100 B 46CZ932
CZ 93 - K 3 Adjustable 1 / 100 B 46CZ933

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PROXIMITY SENSOR

ALL-PURPOSE PROXIMITY SWITCH – SERIES LM XX 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Proximity induction sensors are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact
surveillance of metal elements motion. They can also be used in other machine systems applications as no contact
control sensors for level of liquids, control sensors for the speed and position of rotating chains, etc. They are
developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell
resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant.

• Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω
• Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm
• Precision of repetition: 0.01
• Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +65˚С
• Gearing speed: 5mm/s
EL-LM8 • Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
• IP code: IP 67
Type Start Power supply Type of Type of Output Packing Product Catalogue
distance voltage transition contact load / Box category number
(mm) (pcs)
EL-LM8-3002NA 2 15~30 VDC NPN NO 130 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 8-32NA
EL-LM8-3002NB 2 15~30 VDC NPN NC 130 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 8-32NB
EL-LM8-3002PA 2 15~30 VDC PNP NO 130 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 8-32PA
EL-LM8-3002PB 2 15~30 VDC PNP NC 130 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 8-32PB
EL-LM8-2002A 2 90~230VAC SCR NO 150 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 8-22A

EL-LM12-3004NA 4 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 12-34NA

EL-LM12-3004NB 4 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 12-34NB
EL-LM12-3004PA 4 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 12-34PA
EL-LM12 EL-LM12-3004PB 4 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 12-34PB
EL-LM12-2004A 4 90~230VAC SCR NO 300 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 12-24A

EL-LM18-3008NA 8 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 18-38NA

EL-LM18-3008NB 8 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 18-38NB

AUTOMATION
EL-LM18-3008PA 8 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 18-38PA
EL-LM18-3008PB 8 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 18-38PB
EL-LM18-2008A 8 90~230VAC SCR NO 300 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 18-28A

EL-LM22-3010NA 10 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 22-30NA

EL-LM22-3010NB 10 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 22-30NB
EL-LM18 EL-LM22-3010PA 10 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 22-30PA 177
EL-LM22-3010PB 10 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 22-30PB
EL-LM22-2010A 10 90~230VAC SCR NO 300 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 22-20A
PROXIMITY SENSOR

EL-LM12-4002A 2 230VAC inductive NO 100 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 12-44A

EL-LM12-4004A 4 230VAC inductive NO 300 mA 2 / 200 B 46LM 12-46A

EL-LM18-4006A 5 230VAC inductive NO 100 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 18-44A

EL-LM18-4008A 8 230VAC inductive NO 300 mA 1 / 100 B 46LM 18-48A
EL-LM22

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
CAPACITIVE SENSOR www.elmarkholding.eu

CAPACITIVE SENSORS – SERIES CM XX 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Capacitive sensors are used in machine systems and equipment for no-contact motion surveillance. They consist
of two coaxial electrodes, a condenser and RC generator. This type of sensors reacts to both metal and non-metal
objects, as the gearing distance for non-metal objects depends on their dielectric constants. They allow gearing
distance adjustment for non-magnetic conductive materials. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN
transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid
which is oil and water resistant.
• Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω
• Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 15 mm
• Precision of repetition: 0.01
EL-CM12 • Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +65˚С
• Gearing speed: 5mm/s
• Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
• IP code: IP 54
Type Start Power supply Type of Type of Output Packing Product Catalogue
distance voltage transition contact load / Box category number
(mm) (pcs)

EL-CM12-3004NA 0~4 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 12-32NA

EL-CM12-3004NB 0~4 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 12-32NB

EL-CM12-3004PA 0~4 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 12-32PA

EL-CM12-3004PB 0~4 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 12-32PB

EL-CM18
EL-CM18-3008NA 0~8 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 18-38NA

EL-CM18-3008NB 0~8 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 18-38NB

EL-CM18-3008PA 0~8 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 18-38PA

EL-CM18-3008PB 0~8 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 18-38PB

EL-CM18-2008A 0~8 90~230VAC SCR NO 300 mA 1/100 B 46CM 18-28A

EL-CM24-3012NA 8 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 24-12NA

EL-CM24-3012NB 8 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 24-12NB

AUTOMATION

EL-CM24
EL-CM24-3012PA 8 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 24-12PA

EL-CM24-3012PB 8 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100 B 46CM 24-12PB

EL-CM24-2012A 8 90~230VAC SCR NO 300 mA 1/100 B 46CM 24-12A

EL-SM12-3110NA 10 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 2/200 B 46SM 12-31NA

178 EL-SM12-3110NB 10 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 2/200 B 46SM 12-31NB

EL-SM12 EL-SM18-3110PA 10 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100 B 46SM 18-31PA

EL-SM18-3110PB 10 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100 B 46SM 18-31PB

CAPACITIVE SENSOR

EL-XM18-305PMI 5 15~30 VDC inductive NO 100 mA 1/100 B 46XM 18-35A

EL-XM18-305PMU 5 15~30 VDC inductive NC 100 mA 1/100 B 46XM 18-35B

Note: Sensor of Hall

EL-XM24-308PMI 8 15~30 VDC inductive NO 300 mA 1/100 B 46XM 24-38A

EL-XM24-308PMU 8 15~30 VDC inductive NC 300 mA 1/100 B 46XM 24-38B

EL-XM24 Note: MI - current type; MU - voltage type

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PHOTOELECTRICAL SENSOR

PHOTOELECTRICAL SENSOR 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Photoelectrical sensors of the Gxx series are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no
contact surveillance of motion of elements. They are based on the photoelectric principle of operation – inside the
sensor there is a photo signal emitter and receiver of the returned signal. There are three types of sensors: diffuse sensors,
reflector sensors and emitter-receiver sensors. These types of sensors differ in the way of returning the signal. They allow
for gearing distance adjustment. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions
EL-G12 and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant.

TECHNICAL FEATURES:
• Power supply voltage: 15~30 VDC
• Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω
• Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm
• Precision of repetition: 0.01
• Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +65˚С
• Gearing speed: 5mm/s
• Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
• IP code: IP 67
Type Start Type of Type of Type of Packing / Product Catalogue
distance transition contact sensor Box (pcs) category number
EL-G18
EL-G12-3A07NA 70 mm NPN Ø12; l=50 Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G12A071
EL-G12-3A07PA 70 mm PNP Ø12; l=50 Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G12A072
EL-G12-3C3NA 3m NPN Ø12; l=50 Truth beam 1 / 100 B 46G123C11
EL-G12-3C3PA 3m PNP Ø12; l=50 Truth beam 1 / 100 B 46G123C12

EL-G18-3A10NA 100 mm NPN Ø18; l=70 Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G18A101

EL-G18-3A10PA 100 mm PNP Ø18; l=70 Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G18A102
EL-G18-3B2NA 2m NPN Ø18; l=70 Reflector 1 / 100 B 46G183B11
EL-G30
EL-G18-3B2PA 2m PNP Ø18; l=70 Reflector 1 / 100 B 46G183B12
EL-G18-3C5NA 5m NPN Ø18; l=70 Truth beam 1 / 100 B 46G185C11
EL-G18-3C5PA 5m PNP Ø18; l=70 Truth beam 1 / 100 B 46G185C12

EL-G30-3A70NA 500 mm NPN Ø22; l=70 Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G30A101

AUTOMATION
EL-G30-3A70PA 500 mm PNP Ø22; l=70 Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G30A102
EL-G30-3B3NA 3m NPN Ø22; l=70 Reflector 1 / 100 B 46G303B11
EL-G30-3B3PA 3 m PNP Ø22; l=70 Reflector 1 / 100 B 46G303B12
EL-G30-
EL-G35 10 m NPN Ø22; l=70 Truth beam 1 / 52 B 46G305C11
3C101NA
EL-G30-3C101PA 10 m PNP Ø22; l=70 Truth beam 1 / 52 B 46G305C12
EL-G35-3A50NA 500 mm NPN NO Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G35A101
EL-G35-3A50PA 500 mm PNP NO Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G35A102
EL-G35-3B3NA 3m NPN NO Reflector 1 / 100 B 46G353B11
179
EL-G35-3B3PA 3m PNP NO Reflector 1 / 100 B 46G353B12
EL-G35-3C5NA 5m NPN NO Truth beam 1 / 50 B 46G355C11
EL-G35-3C5PA 5m PNP NO Truth beam 1 / 50 B 46G355C12
PHOTOELECTRICAL SENSOR

EL-G50-3A30NA 500 mm NPN NO Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G50A101

EL-G50-3A30PA 500 mm PNP NO Diffuse 1 / 100 B 46G50A102
EL-G50
EL-G50-3B4NA 4m NPN NO Reflector 1 / 100 B 46G503B11
EL-G50-3B4PA 4m PNP NO Reflector 1 / 100 B 46G503B12
EL-G50-3C5NA 5m NPN NO Truth beam 1 / 50 B 46G505C11
EL-G50-3C5PA 5m PNP NO Truth beam 1 / 50 B 46G505C12
EL-BZJ-211 10 mm Reflector NO Colour detector 1 / 50 B 46BZJ211
EL-BZJ-311 9mm Reflector NO Colour detector 1 / 50 B 46BZJ311
EL-BZJ-411 9mm Reflector NO Colour detector 1 / 50 B 46BZJ411

EL-BZJ

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
POWER SUPPLIES www.elmarkholding.eu

POWER SUPPLIES 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The DRP-xx-xx series of power supplies are voltage reduction and rectification units ideally suited to provide
stable power supply of systems and equipment for contact-free movement monitoring elements (such as
inductive, capacity and photo sensors, logic elements and systems, etc.). They have small overall dimensions and
can be installed on a DIN rail. The power units have metal or plastic cases resistant to vibrations and plastic oil-
and waterproof covers. They are able to provide stable output voltage at comparatively fluctuating input voltage.
Devices have built-in overload and short circuit protection, allowing short time overload of up to 130%. Power
supplies are available with various output voltages (5, 12, 15 and 24 V DC) and different output power rates.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
• Input voltage: 80 ~ 230V AC
• Over-voltage: 115 ~ 135% of the rated output voltage
• Overload: 120 ~ 120% of the rated output power
• Terminals: Input – 2 screw terminals; Output: 4 screw
terminals;
• IP code: IP44
• Power indicator
• Installation: DIN rail
• Cooling: Free air cooling convection

Type Output Voltage Output Load Tolerance Power (W) Dimensions W/H/L Packing / Product Catalogue
(V) (A) (mm) Box (pcs) category number
DR - 45 -5 5 5 ±2% 25 78 / 93 / 56 1 / 50 C 46DR455
DR - 45 - 12 12 3.5 ±1% 42 78 / 93 / 56 1 / 50 C 46DR4512
DR - 45 - 15 15 2.8 ±1% 42 78 / 93 / 56 1 / 45 C 46DR4515
DR - 45 - 24 24 2 ±1% 48 78 / 93 / 56 1 / 16 C 46DR4524

Type Output Voltage Output Load Tolerance Power (W) Dimensions W/H/L (mm) Packing / Packing / Catalogue
(V) (A) Box (pcs) Box (pcs) number
DR - 75 -12 12 6.3 ±2% 75 55.5 / 125.3 / 100 1 / 18 C 46DR7512
DR - 75 - 24 24 3.2 ±1% 75 55.5 / 125.3 / 100 1 / 18 C 46DR7524
AUTOMATION

DRP - 240 - 24 24 10 ±1% 240 125.5 / 125.3 / 100 1 / 12 C 46DR2424

180
POWER SUPPLIES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu ROTARY SWITCHES

FLOAT SWITCHES 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Float switches of the type QW-xx-xx are sealed units for direct pump control. They are intended for continuous
liquid level maintenance in pools, tanks or ponds exercised through direct control of the pumping in or out
process in the respective reservoir. They are pre-wired and depending on the chosen configuration can control
either the pumping in, or pumping out of the reservoir. They allow direct control of single phase pumps with
mounted power of 1 kW. Float switches are waterproof.
The automatic level control units of the DHC1Y-xx series are intended for mounting on pumping control
panels. They do not use any additional sensors, but conductive probes to contact the liquid. The unit sends
low (harmless) voltage signals to the probes and once a contact between a probe and liquid is established, the
unit changes its contactors’ state. Units are available in three variants with different number of control contacts
suitable for different applications. Each contact can transfer current of up to 5A, which is enough to ensure
control over the powerful pumps’ contactors or to directly control pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. The
automatic level control units can be installed on a DIN rail.

Type Number of Output Load Accuracy Operating Note Packing / Product Catalogue
probes (No. of (A) Voltage (V) Box (pcs) category number
levels)
DHC1Y - S 1 5 ±1% 230 - 100 B 46DW001
DHC1Y - SD 3 5 ±1% 230 - 100 B 46DW002
DHC1Y - T 1 5 ±1% 230 2 pumps control 100 B 46DW003

Type Number of Output Load Accuracy Operating Note Packing / Product Catalogue
QW - 70AB probes (No. of (A) Voltage (V) Box (pcs) category number
levels)
QW - M 15 - 3 2 6 ±1% 230 - 1 / 30 B 46DW004
QW - 70AB 2 4 ±1% 230 - 1 / 20 B 46DW005

AUTOMATION
QW - M 15 - 3

181
ROTARY SWITCHES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
ROTARY SWITCHES www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN
ROTARY SWITCHES LW26 SERIES 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

60947-3-1
The rotary switches LW26 series are produced for switching on/off electrical circuits with commutated current
from 20 to 160A. They are designed on the bases of the rotor-eccentric switching on which is realized through
turning of the handle to 60 or 90 degrees. The normal operation is used for commutation of two, three or four
conductor systems. There are special rotary switches that switch on under given connection schemes and are
used to control motors, electric welding machines and other consumers.

TECHNICAL DATA: Ì IP42 for the ordinary breakers mounted in a panel

• Power supply voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz Ì IP65 for the breakers offered in a box
• Insulation voltage: 690V • Cable connection: screw joining
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V • Tightening moment of the bolt: 1.33N
• Mechanical wear resistance: 3x105 commutation • Maximum section of the power supply conductors:
cycles according to the dimensions table
• Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C • Weight: according to the number of the contacts
• Humidity: 35 – 85% RH
• Commuting capacity: up to 160A according to the MOUNTING:
tables • directly to the control panel
• Plastic: UV rays wear resistance • thickness of the surface to which it is mounted: max
• IP code: 5mm

Type Front panel Joining Overall dimensions (mm) Mounting dimensions (mm)
conductor А B C L a b d1 d2
(mm²)
LW26-20 M1 panel 1x2.5 48 48 43 22 + 9.6n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5
M1 panel with
48 60 43 22 + 9.6n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5
inscription field
AUTOMATION

LW26-25 M1 panel 1x4.0 48 48 45.2 23+12.8n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5

LW26-32 M2 panel 1x6.0 64 64 58 29.2 + 12.8n 48 48 Ø10 Ø4.5
LW26-63 M2 panel 1x16 64 64 66 29.2 + 21.5n 48 48 Ø10 Ø4.5
LW26-125 M3 panel 1x35 88 88 84 35 + 26.5n 68 68 Ø13 Ø6
LW26-160 M3 panel 1x50 88 88 88 35 + 32.5n 68 68 Ø13 Ø6
* n - number of modules

182

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
ROTARY SWITCHES

LW26 - 10Q 10 2 1 / 100 B 492101

LW26 - 16Q 16 2 1 / 100 B 492161
Q10
LW26 - 20Q 20 2 1 / 100 B 492201
three-poles switching on;
LW26 - 25Q 25 2 1 / 100 B 492251
motor starting and stopping;
LW26 - 32Q 32 2 1 / 72 B 492321
voltage turning on/off to the
LW26 - 63Q 63 2 1 / 30 B 492631
consumers
LW26 - 125Q 125 2 1 / 24 B 492951
LW26 - 160Q 160 2 1 / 27 B 492961

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu ROTARY SWITCHES

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
LW26GS - 20/04 Q11 20 2 1 / 100 B 492207
LW26GS - 25/04 three-poles switching over; motor 25 2 1 / 100 B 492257
starting and stopping; voltage
LW26GS - 32/04 32 2 1 / 72 B 492327
turning on/off to the consumers;
LW26GS - 63/04 possibility for access control 63 2 1 / 30 B 492637

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category

LW26 - 20N 20 3 1 / 100 B 492202

LW26 - 25N 25 3 1 / 100 B 492252
N11
LW26 - 32N 3-position – 2 start positions and 1 32 3 1 / 64 B 492322
LW26 - 63N stop;for motor reversing 63 3 1 / 48 B 492632
LW26 - 125N 125 3 1 / 24 B 492952
LW26 - 160N 160 3 1 / 18 B 492962

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
LW26 - 25S S19 25 4 1 / 100 B 492253
LW26 - 63S 3-position – 2 start positions and 63 4 1 / 30 B 492633
LW26 - 125S 1 stop; for two speed motor control; 125 4 1 / 24 B 492953
switching over

AUTOMATION
LW26 - 160S between charging* 160 4 1 / 18 B 492963

Note: It is necessary that additional bridges be placed

at switching over between charging
183
ROTARY SWITCHES

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category

LW26 - 25 SD S21 25 4 1 / 100 B 492025

LW26 - 63 SD 3-position switching on star/delta 63 4 1 / 30 B 492063

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
ROTARY SWITCHES www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
LW26 - 32H 5881/3 H5881/3 – 85 32 3 1 / 64 B 492324
for welding transformer windings
LW26 - 63H 5881/3 63 3 1 / 48 B 492634
switching over

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
YH5/3 - 66 for voltage switching
LW26 - 20 YH5/3 20 3 1 / 72 B 492205
over

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
LH3/3 - 58 for amperemeter
AUTOMATION

LW26 - 20 LH3/3 switching on to current 20 3 1 / 100 B 492206

transformers

184
ROTARY SWITCHES

Type Scheme IP code: Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number

category
LW26 - 20-25-Q Box for LW26-20/25 IP 42 1 / 68 B 492037
LW26 - 32-Q Box for LW26-32 IP 42 1 / 30 B 492038
Adaptor for DIN-rail
LW26 - 20-25-DIN 15 / 1500 B 492039
for LW26-20/25

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu ROTARY SWITCHES

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
LW26 4.I7168/7 4.I7168/7 20 7 1 / 100 B 492028

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
LW26 4.H6518/5 4.H6518/5 25 5 1 / 100 B 492029

AUTOMATION
Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
LW30-20 LW30-20 20 3 1 / 32 B 492030
LW30-32 LW30-32 32 3 1 / 32 B 492031
LW30-40 LW30-40 40 3 1 / 32 B 492033
LW30-63 LW30-63 63 3 1 / 32 B 492034

185
ROTARY SWITCHES

* Possibility for access control

Type Scheme IP code: In (A) Levels Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
LW30-32 LW30-32 IP54 32 3 1 / 30 B 492032

* Possibility for access control

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS www.elmarkholding.eu

5
Documents corresponding to the BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS 3+2 YEAR TOTAL
standard
product: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN +extended WARRANTY

60947-5-1
These are devices used in control and indication systems, command boards and panels in industrial automation
systems. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off
executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in
all industrial fields. The devices endure short time current overload up to 10A, and normally they can commutate
thermal current up to 6A in their contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw
terminals to which operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm² can be joined.

DOCUMENTATION CORRESPONDING TO THE Ì at closing: 20N

PRODUCT: Ì at opening: 8N
• Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 • Operating temperature: -20 - +65°C
• Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
TECHNICAL DATA: • Tightening moment of the joining conductors:
• Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz 0.15Nm
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; • Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5;
• Rated current: 6A (230V AC); 0.3A (230V DC) 1x2.5mm²
• Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG
outside in the circuit MOUNTING:
• Mechanical wear resistance: 1x106 commutation • to a flat metal or plastic surface with thickness: max
cycles 4mm
• Power of mechanical compression: • opening with size: Ø 22.5mm

Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts (А) at 400V (pcs) category number
EL-EA25 NO+NC 6 black 10/500 B 401025
Button round with spring
EL-EA31 NO 6 green 10/500 B 401030
reverse
EL-EA42 NC 6 red 10/500 B 401040
AUTOMATION

Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts (А) at 400V (pcs) category number

EL-EA25 NO+NC 6 black 10/500 B 401026

Button round with spring
186 EL-EA31 NO 6 green 10/500 B 401033
reverse and silicon lid- IP44
EL-EA42 NC 6 red 10/500 B 401041
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts (А) at 400V (pcs) category number
EL-ED25 Switch with arrest NO+NC 6 black 10/500 B 401425

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

Type Description Type of Rated Colour Diameter Note Packing / Product Catalogue
contacts current (А) (mm) Box (pcs) category number
at 230V
release with
Button with head
EL-2211T 1NO+1NC 5 red 22 spinning 20/800 B 401546
“mushroom” type

Material: Stainless steel | Chromium plated brass| IP65

Type Description Type of contacts Rated Colour Diameter Packing / Product Catalogue
current (А) (mm) Box (pcs) category number
at 230V
EL-2211DZR Button round 1NO+1NC 5 red 22 20/800 B 401547
with LED indicator-
EL-2211DZG 1NO+1NC 5 green 22 20/800 B 401548
latching
Material: Stainless steel | Chromium plated brass| IP65
#N#

AUTOMATION
Type Description Type of contacts Rated current (А) Diameter (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue
at 230V Box (pcs) category number
Button round
EL-2211F 1NO+1NC 5 22 20/800 B 401549
momentary
Material: Stainless steel | Chromium plated brass| IP65 187
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Description Type of Rated Colour Diameter Note Packing / Product Catalogue
contacts current (А) (mm) Box (pcs) category number
at 230V
release with
Two position Switch
EL-22X2 1NO+1NC 5 red 22 spinning 20/800 B 401550
with arrest

Material: Stainless steel | Chromium plated brass| IP65

Type Description Type of contacts Rated Colour Diameter Packing / Product Catalogue
current (А) (mm) Box (pcs) category number
at 230V
Two position Key
EL-22Y2 1NO+1NC 5 red 22 20/800 B 401551
Switch with arrest
Three position Key
EL-22Y3 2NO+2NC 5 green 22 20/800 B 401552
Switch with arrest
Material: Stainless steel | Chromium plated brass| IP65

#N#
AUTOMATION

Type Description Voltage (V) Colour Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
AD56-22-W-230 230V AC white 10 / 500 B 401123
AD56-22-W-110 110V AC white 10 / 500 B 401111
AD56-22-W-24 24V AC/DC white 10 / 500 B 401124
AD56-22-А-110 110V AC amber 10 / 500 B 401211
AD56-22-А-24 24V AC/DC amber 10 / 500 B 401224
AD56-22-А-230 230V AC amber 10 / 500 B 401223
188 AD56-22-РG-230 230V AC green 10 / 500 B 401323
AD56-22-РG-110 110V AC green 10 / 500 B 401311
AD56-22-РG-24 LED 24V AC/DC green 10 / 500 B 401324
AD56-22-B-230 indicators 230V AC blue 10 / 500 B 401523
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

AD56-22-B-110 110V AC blue 10 / 500 B 401511

AD56-22-B-24 24V AC/DC blue 10 / 500 B 401524
AD56-22-Y-230 230V AC yellow 10 / 500 B 401723
AD56-22-Y-110 110V AC yellow 10 / 500 B 401711
AD56-22-Y-24 24V AC/DC yellow 10 / 500 B 401724
AD56-22-R-230 230V AC red 10 / 500 B 401423
AD56-22-R-110 110V AC red 10 / 500 B 401411
AD56-22-R-24 24V AC/DC red 10 / 500 B 401424

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts (А) at 400V (pcs) category number
EL 2- BA 21 NO 6 black 20 / 300 B 401021
EL 2- BA 31 NO 6 green 20 / 300 B 401031
Button round
EL 2- BA 51 NO 6 yellow 20 / 300 B 401051
with spring reverse
EL 2- BA 61 NO 6 blue 20 / 300 B 401061
EL 2- BA 42 NC 6 red 20 / 300 B 401042

Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Note Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts (А) at 400V (pcs) category number
IP=65 Provided from
EL 2- BР 31 Button round NO 6 green 20 / 300 B 401032
silicon lid
with spring
IP=65 Provided from
EL 2- BР 42 reverse NC 6 red 20 / 300 B 401043
silicon lid

AUTOMATION
Type Description Voltage Rated current Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
(V) (А) at 400V (pcs) category number
EL 2- BW3471 24V 6 red 20 / 200 B 401474
EL 2- BW3371 24V 6 green 20 / 200 B 401374
EL 2- BW3571 24V 6 yellow 20 / 200 B 401574
EL 2- BW3671 24V 6 blue 20 / 200 B 401674
EL 2- BW3471 110V 6 red 20 / 200 B 401473
EL 2- BW3371 Button round with spring 110V 6 green 20 / 200 B 401373 189
EL 2- BW3571 reverse and LED indicator 110V 6 yellow 20 / 200 B 401573
EL 2- BW3671 110V 6 blue 20 / 200 B 401673
EL 2- BW3471 230V 6 red 20 / 200 B 401471
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

EL 2- BW3371 230V 6 green 20 / 200 B 401371

EL 2- BW3571 230V 6 yellow 20 / 200 B 401571
EL 2- BW3671 230V 6 blue 20 / 200 B 401671

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Note Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts (А) at 400V (pcs) category number
EL 2- BD 21 1NO 6 black two-position 20 / 200 B 401421
Switch with arrest
EL 2- BD 33 2NО 6 black three-position 20 / 200 B 401433

Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Note Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts (А) at 400V (pcs) category number
Button with head
release with
EL2-BS 142 “mushroom” type NC 6 red 15/150 B 401142
spinning
and with key

Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Note Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts (А) at 400V (pcs) category number
Button with head
EL 2- BС 42 1NС 6 red spring reverse 15 / 150 B 401642
“mushroom” type
AUTOMATION

Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Note Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts (А) at 400V (pcs) category number
Button with head 1NС + release with
EL 2- BS 545 6 red 15 / 150 B 401545
“mushroom” type 1NO spinning
190
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

Type Description Type of contacts Rated current Note Packing / Box Product Catalogue
(А) at 400V (pcs) category number
Change-over switch two-position
EL 2- BG 21 1NO 6 20 / 200 B 401121
with switch with switch

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

Type Description Type of Rated Voltage Note Packing / Box Product Catalogue
contacts current (А) (V) (pcs) category number
at 400V
Button Green and red button +
EL 2- BW8475 1NO+1NС 6 24 AC 20 / 200 B 401844
double LED indicator
Button Green and red
EL 2-BW8475 1NO+1NC 6 230 AC 20/200 B 401845
double button+LED indicator

Type Description Type of contacts Colour Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
EL02 - BЕ101 1 1 NO green 100 / 1000 B 401001
EL02 - BЕ102 2 1 NC red 100 / 1000 B 401002

Type Description Voltage (V) Colour Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue
category number
XB2-BV75 Signal lamp 230V AC yellow 20 / 200 F 401975
XB2-BV76 Signal lamp 230V AC blue 20 / 200 F 401976
XB2-BV77 Signal lamp 230V AC colourless 20 / 200 F 401977

AUTOMATION
Type Description Voltage (V) Colour Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue
category number
XB7-EV45 Button 230V AC yellow 20 / 200 F 401004

191
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

Type Description Voltage (V) Colour Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue
category number
Button + LED
XB - BW - 3561 230V AC yellow 20 / 200 F 401561
indicator

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Description Voltage (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
EL-1035 Glim indicator lamp 220 VAC 1 C M030015
Shape and color of the indicator - oval, red | Dimensions - 10 mm x 30 mm | Base diameter: 10mm |
Case colour: red | Conductor length: 20mm

BUTTONS 2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Description Voltage (V) Rated current (A) LED colour Packing / Product Catalogue number
Box (pcs) category
Toggle Switch ON-
ASW-13 12 VDC 20 red 1 C M519114
OFF SPST
Function: ON/OF | Leads: 3 | Body dimensions: 30.5 х 13.5 x 22mm | Mounting hole diameter - 12 mm|
Toggle height - 27 mm | Operating temperature -from - 25 ºC to + 85 ºC

#K#
Type Description Voltage (V) Rated current (A) Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(pcs) category
V 144/B Switch ON-OFF 250 VAC 5 white 1 C M300001
Function: ON/OF | Leads: 3 | Body dimensions: 26.2 x 12 x 14.5 mm | Mounting hole - 29 x 11 mm |
Operating temperature - up to 105°C
AUTOMATION

192
DIN-RAIL BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

These are devices used in control and indication systems adjusted for mounting in command boards and panels
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

directly on DIN-rail. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or
off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in
all industrial fields. The devices endure short time current overload up to 20A, and normally they can commutate
current up to 10A with their contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals
to which operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm² can be joined. There are also designed buttons
combined with lamps.
Ì at closing: 20N
TECHNICAL DATA: Ì at opening: 8N
• Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz • Operating temperature: -20 - +65°C
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; • Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
• Rated current: up to 10A (230V AC) • Tightening moment of the joining conductors:
• Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG 0.15Nm
outside in the circuit • Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5;
Documents corresponding to the • Rated consumed current (for indicators and buttons 1x2.5mm²
product: Standard EN 60947-1 combined with indicators): <20mA • Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
EN 60 947-5-1 t • wear resistance (indicators): >2000h
• Mechanical wear resistance (buttons): 1x106 MOUNTING:
commutation cycles • to a DIN-rail
• Power of mechanical compression: • Altitude: up to 2000m
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

Type Description Voltage (V) Rated current Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(A) at 400V (pcs) category
ELD-RG-DIN lamp 230V <20 red/green 12 / 240 B 401559

Type Description Voltage (V) Rated current Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(A) at 400V (pcs) category
red/green/
ELD-RGB-DIN lamp 230V <20 12 / 240 B 401560
blue

Type Description Voltage (V) Rated current Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(A) at 400V (pcs) category
ELD - G - DIN lamp 230V <20 green 12 / 240 B 401500
ELD - R - DIN lamp 230V <20 red 12 / 240 B 401501
ELD - Y - DIN lamp 230V <20 yellow 12 / 240 B 401502
ELD - B - DIN lamp 230V <20 blue 12 / 240 B 401503
ELD -W - DIN lamp 230V <20 white 12 / 240 B 401504

AUTOMATION
Type Description Rated current Type of the contact Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(A) at 400V (pcs) category
ELB - BL - DIN button <10 1NO+ 2 NC black 12 / 240 F 401506
ELB - G -DIN button <10 1NO+ 2 NC green 12 / 240 F 401508
ELB - Y - DIN button <10 2NO+ 1 NC yellow 12 / 240 F 401509
ELB - Y - DIN button <10 1NO+ 2 NC yellow 12 / 240 F 401510

193
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

Type Description Voltage (V) Rated current Type of the Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
(A) at 400V contact (pcs) category number
ELBD -G - DIN button + lamp 230V <20 1NO+ 2 NC green 12 / 240 F 401515
ELBD - R - DIN button + lamp 230V <20 1NO+ 2 NC red 12 / 240 F 401517
ELBD - Y - DIN button + lamp 230V <20 1NO+ 2 NC yellow 12 / 240 F 401519

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS www.elmarkholding.eu

BUTTONS AND SWITCHES WITH BOX 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Description IP code: Overall dimensions (mm) Type of the Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
L H W contact (pcs) category number

EL1-B134 switching on 0-1 IP44 68 68 50 1 NO black 1 / 100 B 401134

Type Description IP code: Overall dimensions (mm) Type of the Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
L H W contact (pcs) category number

1 button with
EL1-B102 IP44 68 68 50 1 NO green 1 / 100 B 401102
spring return
1 button with
EL1-BP102 IP65 68 68 50 1 NO green 1 / 100 B 401132
spring return

Type Description IP code: Overall dimensions (mm) Type of the Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
L H W contact (pcs) category number

2 buttons with 1 NC 1 - red

EL1-B213 IP44 104 68 50 1 / 100 B 401213
spring return 1 NO 1 - green
2 buttons with 1 NC 1 - red
EL1-BP213 IP65 104 68 50 1 / 100 B 401233
spring return 1 NO 1 - green
AUTOMATION

Type Description IP code: Overall dimensions (mm) Type of the Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
L H W contact (pcs) category number

1 NO 1 - green
3 buttons with
EL1-B339 IP44 134 68 50 1 NC 1 - red 1 / 50 B 401339
spring return
1 NO 1 - green
1 NO 1 - green
194 EL1-BP339
3 buttons with
IP65 134 68 50 1 NC 1 - red 1 / 50 B 401349
spring return
1 NO 1 - green
BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

Type Description IP code: Overall dimensions (mm) Type of the Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
L H W contact (pcs) category number

Emergency
button with head
EL1-B174 “mushroom” IP44 68 68 50 1 NC red 1 / 100 B 401174
type Ø40.Release
through turning

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu DEVICES FOR TELPHER CONTROL

DEVICES FOR TELPHER CONTROL MBP TYPE 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in different sizes. They
are connected to the operating circuits of cranes or telphers and serve as a remote control of their movement.
They are connected directly to the operating cable of the telpher and send commands directly to the executive
mechanisms. They are designed to provide protection from dust and moisture IP65.

TECHNICAL DATA: • Commuting capacity: up to 6A

• Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz • Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
• Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles • IP code: IP65
• Operating temperature: -10 +65°C • Weight: according to the number of the contacts
• Humidity: 35 – 85% RH
• Number of contacts: according to the number of the MOUNTING:
buttons • directly to the control cable of the telpher (crane)

Type Number of Contact block and scheme Packing / Product Catalogue

buttons Emergency For the directions Box (pcs) category number

MBP-A281 2 - NO+NC 1/20 B 46281

MBP-A291 two speed 2 - NO+NC 1/20 B 46291

MBP-A2813 2+1 emergency button NO+NC 1/20 B 46283

emergency button
MBP-A2813К 2+1 NO+NC 1/20 B 46283K
with switch
MBP-A2913 two speed 2+1 emergency button NO+NC 1/20 B 46294
emergency button
МВР-А2913К two speed 2+1 NO+NC 1/20 B 46294K
with switch
MBP-A481 4 - NO+NC 1/20 B 46481

MBP-A491 two speed 4 - NO+NC 1/20 B 46491

MBP-A4813 4+1 emergency button NO+NC 1/20 B 46483

emergency button
MBP-A4813К 4+1 NO+NC 1/20 B 46483K
with switch
MBP-A4913 two speed 4+1 emergency button NO+NC 1/20 B 46493

AUTOMATION
emergency button
МВР-А4913К two speed 4+1 NO+NC 1/20 B 46493K
with switch
MBP-A681 6 - NO+NC 1/20 B 46681

MBP-A691 two speed 6 - NO+NC 1/20 B 46691

MBP-A6813 6+1 emergency button NO+NC 1/20 B 46683

emergency button
MBP-A6813K 6+1
with switch
NO+NC 1/20 B 46683K 195
MBP-A6913 two speed 6+1 emergency button NO+NC 1/20 B 46693
emergency button
МВР-А6913К two speed 6+1 NO+NC 1/20 B 46693K
DEVICES FOR TELPHER CONTROL

with switch
MBP-A881 8 - NO+NC 1/20 B 46881

MBP-A891 two speed 8 - NO+NC 1/20 B 46891

MBP-A8813 8+1 emergency button NO+NC 1/20 B 46883

emergency button
MBP-A8813K 8+1 NO+NC 1/20 B 46883K
with switch
MBP-A8913 two speed 8+1 emergency button NO+NC 1/20 B 46893
emergency button
МВР-8913К two speed 8+1 NO+NC 1/20 B 46893K
with switch

МВР-Ахххх stop button type

button type – one-speed (x81) or two-speed (x91)
number of buttons

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS www.elmarkholding.eu

WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The revolving warning lights and towers are devices intended for use as status indicators in the human-machine
control systems. They are suitable for installation on control cabinets and panels or directly on machines. They are
manufactured in different colour combinations to attract attention of operators working in a given production
sector. Warning lights and towers are widely used in almost any industrial branch. They can be mounted on
movable components or such, creating potential danger and can warn all workers for a critical situation with
their blinking light and siren. These devices are electrically connected through cables, protruding out of the lamp
casing.
• Humidity: 35 – 85% RH
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION: • Plastic cover: UV resistant polycarbonate not
• Rated voltage: 12 VAC/230VAC; 50/60 Hz; considered as being harmful to human health
• Isolation voltage: 660V; 50/60 Hz;
• Impulse voltage stability: 6000V INSTALLATION:
• Rated power: see the tables below • Warning lights are fixed to the respective machine
• Short circuit protection: 1A gG external fuse body with the studs protruding from the light plastic
• Operating Temperature: - 20°C + 65°C casing.

Type Description Voltage Rated Power Colour Packing / Product Catalogue

(VAC) (W) Box (pcs) category number
LTE1101 - R Warning light 12 10 Red 1 / 30 B 401525R
LTE1101 - G Warning light 12 10 Green 1 / 30 B 401525G
LTE1101 - Y Warning light 12 10 Yellow 1 / 30 B 401525Y
LTE1101J - R Warning light + siren 12 11 Red 1 / 30 B 401526R
LTE1101J - G Warning light + siren 12 11 Green 1 / 30 B 401526G
LTE1101J - Y Warning light + siren 12 11 Yellow 1 / 30 B 401526Y
LTE1101 - R Warning light 230 8 Red 1 / 30 B 402525R
LTE1101 - G Warning light 230 8 Green 1 / 30 B 402525G
LTE1101 - Y Warning light 230 8 Yellow 1 / 30 B 402525Y
LTE1101J - R Warning light + siren 230 9 Red 1 / 30 B 402526R
LTE1101J - G Warning light + siren 230 9 Green 1 / 30 B 402526G
LTE1101J - Y Warning light + siren 230 9 Yellow 1 / 30 B 402526Y
LTE1161 - R Warning light 12 35 Red 1/8 B 401527R
LTE1161 - G Warning light 12 35 Green 1/8 B 401527G
AUTOMATION

LTE1161 - Y Warning light 12 35 Yellow 1/8 B 401527Y

LTE1161 - R Warning light 230 28 Red 1/8 B 402527R
LTE1161 - G Warning light 230 28 Green 1/8 B 402527G
LTE1161 - Y Warning light 230 28 Yellow 1/8 B 402527Y
LTA205 - 1 Tower / flashing 12 4 1 - Red 1 / 20 B 401528
LTA205 - 2 Tower / flashing 12 8 2 - Red/Green 1 / 20 B 401529
LTA205 - 3 Tower / flashing 12 12 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20 B 401530
196 LTA205 - 3J Tower / flashing + siren 12 12
3 - Red/Yellow/Green
1 / 20 B 401531
5 - Red/Yellow/Green/
LTA205 - 5 Tower / flashing 12 18 Blue/Transparent 1 / 20 B 401532
LTA205 - 1 Tower / flashing 230 6 1 - Red 1 / 20 B 402528
2 - Red/Green 402529
WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS

LTA205 - 2 Tower / flashing 230 8 1 / 20 B

LTA205 - 3 Tower / flashing 230 10 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20 B 402530
3 - Red/Yellow/Green
LTA205 - 3J Tower / flashing + siren 230 11 1 / 20 B 402531
5 - Red/Yellow/Green/
LTA205 - 5 Tower / flashing 230 14 Blue/Transparent 1 / 20 B 402532

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 AUTOMATION
www.elmarkholding.eu WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS

Type Description Voltage (V) Rated Power Sound level (dB) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(W) (pcs) category
MS-290A metal siren 230 60 100 1 / 24 B 401533
MS-290B plastic siren 230 60 100 1 / 24 B 401541

Type Description Voltage (V) Rated Sound level (dB) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
Power (W) (pcs) category
MS-390 siren 230 160 120 1 / 10 B 401534

Type Description Voltage (V) Rated Power Sound level (dB) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(W) (pcs) category
CB-4 alarm bell 12 - 85 1 / 50 B 401535
CB-4 alarm bell 24 - 85 1 / 50 B 401536
CB-4 alarm bell 110 - 85 1 / 50 B 401537
CB-4 alarm bell 230 - 85 1 / 50 B 401538

AUTOMATION
Type Description Voltage (V) Rated Power Sound level (dB) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(W) (pcs) category
FA-01 fire alarm 230 - 120 1 / 100 B 401540
197
WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP44 www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS HT/HTN TYPE 5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2

Made of special high quality plastic with alloys against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the
mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard EN 60309 and provide reliable connection
and high protection level against electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44/67. They are
designed for surface or flush mounting, movable or fixed type.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Rated voltage: 500V
• Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted protection in the boards
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
• Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles
• IP code: IP 44/67
• Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
• Ambient temperature: -5 to +65°C
• Altitude: up to 2000m
• Plugs and sockets: 6h

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HT-013 16 1P+N+E 230 121 / 84 / 53 44 2 / 10 / 100 C 37013
HT-023 32 1P+N+E 230 138 / 92 / 63 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37023

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
INSTALLATION

A /B /C category number
HT-014 16 3P+E 400 121 / 84 / 51 44 2 / 10 / 100 C 37014
HT-024 32 3P+E 400 138 / 92 / 63 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37024
HT-034 63 3P+E 400 230 / 109 / 36 44 2 / 10 C 37034
HT-044 125 3P+E 400 295 / 124 / 50 44 2 / 10 C 37044

198
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP44

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HT-015 16 3P+N+E 400 129 / 92 / 62 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37015
HT-025 32 3P+N+E 400 149 / 97 / 70 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37025
HT-035 63 3P+N+E 400 230 / 109 / 36 44 2 / 10 C 37035
HT-045 125 3P+N+E 400 295 / 124 / 50 44 2 / 10 C 37045

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP44

MOVABLE INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS HT TYPE IP44 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number
HT-213 16 1P+N+E 230 130 / 96 44 2 / 10 / 100 C 37213
HT-223 32 1P+N+E 230 149 / 90 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37223

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number

INSTALLATION
HT-214 16 3P+E 400 131 / 96 44 2 / 10 / 100 C 37214
HT-224 32 3P+E 400 149 / 90 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37224
HT-234 63 3P+E 400 230/109 44 2 / 10 C 37234
HT-244 125 3P+E 400 290/124 44 2 / 10 C 37244

199
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP44

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number
HT-215 16 3P+N+E 400 139 / 90 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37215
HT-225 32 3P+N+E 400 154 / 100 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37225
HT-235 63 3P+N+E 400 230/100 44 2 / 10 C 37235
HT-245 125 3P+N+E 400 290/124 44 2 / 10 C 37245

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP44 www.elmarkholding.eu

FIXED INDUSTRIAL PLUGS HT TYPE IP44 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number
HT-513 16 1P+N+E 230 121/79 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37513
HT-523 32 1P+N+E 230 131/83 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37523

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number
INSTALLATION

HT 514 16 3P+E 400 121/76 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37514

HT 524 32 3P+E 400 131/83 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37524

200
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP44

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number
HT 515 16 3P+N+E 400 123/79 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37515
HT 525 32 3P+N+E 400 132/84 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37525

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP44

FIXED INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS HT TYPE IP44 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number
HT-113 16 1P+N+E 230 126 / 86 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37113
HT-123 32 1P+N+E 230 141 / 97 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37123

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number

INSTALLATION
HT-114 16 3P+E 400 132 / 91 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37114
HT-124 32 3P+E 400 141 / 96 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37124
HT-134 63 3P+E 400 193 / 122 44 2 / 10 C 37134
HT-144 125 3P+E 400 220 / 140 44 2 / 10 C 37144

201
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP44

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number
HT-115 16 3P+N+E 400 129 / 96 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37115
HT-125 32 3P+N+E 400 141 / 98 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37125
HT-135 63 3P+N+E 400 193 / 122 44 2 / 10 C 37135
HT-145 125 3P+N+E 400 220 / 140 44 2 / 10 C 37145

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP67 www.elmarkholding.eu

MOVABLE INDUSTRIAS PLUGS HTN TYPE IP67 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HTN 0131 16 1P+N+E 230 120/71/12 67 1 / 60 C 37131
HTN 0231 32 1P+N+E 230 150/93/17 67 1 / 40 C 37231

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
INSTALLATION

HTN 0141 16 3P+E 400 125/79/12 67 2 / 60 C 37141

HTN 0241 32 3P+E 400 150/93/17 67 2 / 40 C 37241
HTN 0341 63 3P+E 400 230/109/36 67 10 C 37341
HTN 0441 125 3P+E 400 230/109/36 67 10 C 37441

202
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP67

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HTN 0151 16 3P+N+E 400 133/87/12 67 2 / 60 C 37151
HTN 0251 32 3P+N+E 400 155/99.5/17 67 2 / 40 C 37251
HTN 0351 63 3P+N+E 400 230/109/36 67 10 C 37351
HTN 0451 125 3P+N+E 400 295/124/50 67 10 C 37451

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP67

MOVABLE INDUSTRIAL SOCKET HTN TYPE IP67 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number
HTN 2131 16 1P+N+E 230 131/90 67 2 / 60 C 37831
HTN 2231 32 1P+N+E 230 149/90 67 2 / 40 C 37931

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number

INSTALLATION
HTN 2141 16 3P+E 400 131/76 67 2 / 60 C 37841
HTN 2241 32 3P+E 400 149/90 67 2 / 40 C 37941
HTN 2341 63 3P+E 400 271/115 67 10 C 37942
HTN 2441 125 3P+E 400 295/137 67 6 C 37943

203
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP67

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A/C category number
HTN 2151 16 3P+N+E 400 139/90 67 2 / 60 C 37851
HTN 2251 32 3P+N+E 400 154/100 67 2 / 40 C 37951
HTN 2351 63 3P+N+E 400 240/112 67 10 C 37952
HTN 2451 125 3P+N+E 400 300/126 67 6 C 37953

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP67 www.elmarkholding.eu

FIXED INDUSTRIAL SOCKET HTN TYPE IP67 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number

HTN 1131 16 1P+N+E 230 101/150/93.5 67 2 / 40 C 37731

HTN 1231 32 1P+N+E 230 114/162/93.5 67 2 / 40 C 37631

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HTN 1141 16 3P+E 400 104/150/93.5 67 2 / 40 C 37741
INSTALLATION

HTN 1241 32 3P+E 400 116/162/93.5 67 2 / 40 C 37641

HTN 1341 63 3P+E 400 171/170/230 67 1 / 10 C 37842
HTN 1441 125 3P+E 400 171/170/230 67 1/6 C 37844

204
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS, IP67

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HTN 1151 16 3P+N+E 400 107/150/93.5 67 2 / 40 C 37751
HTN 1251 32 3P+N+E 400 116/162/93.5 67 2 / 40 C 37651
HTN 1351 63 3P+N+E 400 171/170/230 67 10 C 37852
HTN 1451 125 3P+N+E 400 171/170/230 67 6 C 37854

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS FOR FLUSH MOUNTING, IP44

INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS FOR FLUSH MOUNTING HT

TYPE IP44
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HT-413 16 1P+N+E 230 70/60/67 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37413
HT-423 32 1P+N+E 230 80/95/79 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37423

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HT-414 16 3P+E 400 75/86/75 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37414
HT-424 32 3P+E 400 80/95/79 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37424

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HT-415 16 3P+N+E 400 75/85/70 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37415
HT-425 32 3P+N+E 400 98/98/83 44 2 / 10 / 60 C 37425

INSTALLATION
Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) IP code: Packing/Box Product Catalogue
A /B /C category number
HT-105SR 16 German type 230 50/63/42 44 500 C 37105

205
INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS FOR FLUSH MOUNTING, IP44

German type socket for DIN rail mounting * Operation temperature: from -10 up to +65°С
It provides plug presence in electric boards and easy * Humidity: up to 85%RH
cabling. Mounting method:
* Supply voltage: 230V * DIN rail
* Computing option: up to 16А
Type Poles Packing / Box Product Catalogue
(pcs) category number

German type socket for DIN rail German type 5 / 100 C 37004

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
INDUSTRIAL BOARDS www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
INDUSTRIAL BOARD SYSTEM EC690 SERIES 5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard IEC60670; CEI 23-48; CEI 23-49;

EN 50102 Distribution boards 690 series can be safely used for temporary installation such as construction sites, markets,
fairs, etc. They are entirely made up of UV-resistant halogen free technopolymer on ABS- base. They are suitable
for outdoor use, thanks to the high impact resistance. The distribution boards are fit to use in different options-
movable with handle or fixed on the wall. The distribution boards are suitable with sockets with mounting flange
with screw hole center distance 60x60mm.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Material: shock resistant, halogen free technopolymer on ABS base with resistance to UV rays.
• Colour: grey RAL 7035
• IP code: IP65
• Resistance to mechanical shock: IK08-IK10(shocks up to 6-20j)
• Resistance to abnormal heat: up to 650°C( Glow Wire Test, Reference Standard IEC 695-2-1
• Installation temperature range: min-15°C, max+60°C
• DIN rail material: galvanized steel
• Pre-cuts for conduit or cable inlet of different sizes.
• Standards: IEC60670; CEI 23-48; CEI 23-49; EN 50102
• RoHS 2002/95/CE
INSTALLATION

206
INDUSTRIAL BOARDS

EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES

2 VERTICAL SOCKETS
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Number of modules IP code W H D Packing pcs/ Product Catalogue

box category number
EC69021 4 65 105 337 95 1/15 C 53EC69021

For sockets with 60x60mm hole center distance

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu INDUSTRIAL BOARDS

EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES

3 VERTICAL SOCKETS
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Number of modules IP code W H D Packing pcs/ Product Catalogue

box category number
EC69022 4 65 105 430 95 1/13 C 53EC69022

For sockets with 60x60mm hole center distance

EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES

4 SOCKETS
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Number of modules IP code W H D Packing pcs/ Product Catalogue

box category number
EC69023 8 65 200 430 95 1/10 C 53EC69023

For sockets with 60x60mm hole center distance

INSTALLATION
EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES
6 SOCKETS
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
207

Type Number of modules IP code W H D Packing pcs/ Product Catalogue

INDUSTRIAL BOARDS

box category number

EC69025 12 65 320 510 135 1 C 53EC69025

For sockets with 60x60mm hole center distance

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
INDUSTRIAL BOARDS www.elmarkholding.eu

ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES

2 VERTICAL SOCKETS, 4 MODULES
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Empty board type IP code Product Catalogue number

category
German type 1P+N+E 3P+N 3P+N+E
EC69021 1x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690212A1
EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 44 C 53EC690212A2
EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 44 C 53EC690212A3
EC69021 2x16A 44 C 53EC690212A4
EC69021 1x16A+1x32A 67 C 53EC690212B1
EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 67 C 53EC690212B2
Dimensions W x H x D: 105 x 337 x 95mm EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 67 C 53EC690212B3

ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES

3 VERTICAL SOCKETS, 4 MODULES
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Empty board type IP code Product Catalogue number

category
German type 1P+N+E 3P+N 3P+N+E
EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 44 C 53EC690223A1
EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690223A2
EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 44 C 53EC690223A3
EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690223A4
EC69022 2x16A 1x16A 44 C 53EC690223A5
EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 67 C 53EC690223B1
EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67 C 53EC690223B2
EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 67 C 53EC690223B3
INSTALLATION

EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67 C 53EC690223B4

Dimensions W x H x D: 105 x 430 x 95mm

ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES

4 SOCKETS, 8 MODULES
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

208
Empty board type IP code Product Catalogue number
category
INDUSTRIAL BOARDS

German type 1P+N+E 3P+N 3P+N+E

EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690234A1
EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 44 C 53EC690234A2
EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690234A3
EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 44 C 53EC690234A4
EC69023 2x16A 1x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690234A5
EC69023 2x16A 1x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690234A6
EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67 C 53EC690234B1
EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 67 C 53EC690234B2
EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67 C 53EC690234B3
EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 67 C 53EC690234B4
Dimensions W x H x D: 200 x 430 x 95mm

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu INDUSTRIAL BOARDS

ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES

6 SOCKETS, 12 MODULES
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Empty board type IP code Product Catalogue number

category
German type 1P+N+E 3P+N 3P+N+E
EC69025 2x16A+1x32A 2x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690256A1
EC69025 1x16A+2x32A 1x16A+2x32A 44 C 53EC690256A2
EC69025 2x16A+1x32A 2x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690256A3
EC69025 1x16A+2x32A 1x16A+2x32A 44 C 53EC690256A4
EC69025 3x16A 2x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690256A5
EC69025 2x16A 1x16A 2x16A+1x32A 44 C 53EC690256A6
EC69025 2x16A+1x32A 2x16A+1x32A 67 C 53EC690256B1
EC69025 1x16A+2x32A 1x16A+2x32A 67 C 53EC690256B2
EC69025 2x16A+1x32A 2x16A+1x32A 67 C 53EC690256B3
EC69025 1x16A+2x32A 1x16A+2x32A 67 C 53EC690256B4

Dimensions W x H x D: 320 x 510 x

135mm

SPARE FLANGE WITH SCREWS AND GASKETS

Type W H D Packing pcs/box Product category Catalogue number

EC690F1 85 74 1/10 C 53EC690F1

INSTALLATION
The flange mounted is used for closing of the factory maid openings,in case there is no switch for it at the
moment,and assures the necessary IP of the board. Another function is assuring the possibility for mounting of
great number of additional appliances within assembling the board when making a suitable opening in the flange.

209
INDUSTRIAL BOARDS

Spare flange with Limit switch Spare flange with Stop button
mounted limit switch Page 127 mounted stop button Page 133

HANDLE WITH SCREWS

Type W H D Packing pcs/box Product category Catalogue number

EC690MA 134 42 25.6 1/10 C 53EC690MA

It assures a convenience when carrying the board.

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
METAL CONSUMER UNITS www.elmarkholding.eu

METAL CONSUMER UNITS - SIGMA SERIES 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Material: High quality electro-galvanized steel sheet
• Modules: 8; 12; 16; 22
• Steel thickness: 1,0mm (8; 12 modules); 1,2mm (16; 22 modules)
• Row: single
• Rated voltage In (A): 100A
• Protected with epoxy polyester coating
• Colour of body: White RAL9003
• Colour of door: White RAL9003
• IP code: IP40
• Fire resistance: 960°C/30s
• Humidity: Max.95%
• Storage temperature: -40+75°C
• Specification: CE, ROHS, BS, EN,EIC60439-3

Modern design and aesthetic look Different variants of assembling

INSTALLATION

210
METAL CONSUMER UNITS

DIN, zero and ground terminals included Defense of the electrical parts
from direct contact
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu METAL CONSUMER UNITS

Metal consumer unit enclosures, Sigma series

Type № of ways Construction Material № of ROWS Dimensions (mm) Product Catalogue
L (mm) W (mm) H (mm) category number

Sigma 8 Steel 1 303 257 110 C 61088

Sigma 12 Steel 1 375 257 110 C 61128
Sigma 16 Steel 1 447 257 110 C 61168
Sigma 22 Steel 1 555 257 110 C 61228

Metal consumer units with 100A main switch, Sigma series

Type № of ways Construction № of Main Power Voltage Dimensions (mm) Product Catalogue
when empty Material ways Switch Supply L (mm) W (mm) H (mm) category number

Sigma 8 Steel 6 100A 240V 303 257 110 C 61088SI

Sigma 12 Steel 10 100A 240V 375 257 110 C 61128SI
Sigma 16 Steel 14 100A 240V 447 257 110 C 61168SI
Sigma 22 Steel 20 100A 240V 555 257 110 C 61228SI

Metal domestic consumer unit with 100A main switch and RCD’s, Sigma series
Type № of ways Construction № of № of RCD’s Main Dimensions (mm) Product Catalogue
when empty Material ways Supplied Switch L (mm) W (mm) H (mm) category number

2x63A
Sigma 12 Steel 6 1x100A 375 257 110 C 61128SR

INSTALLATION
30mA
2x63A
Sigma 16 Steel 10 1x100A 447 257 110 C 61168SR
30mA
2x63A
Sigma 22 Steel 16 1x100A 555 257 110 C 61228SR
30mA

211
METAL CONSUMER UNITS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
METAL CONSUMER UNITS www.elmarkholding.eu

Sigma 6-way metal consumer unit

Type № of Construction № of № of № of RCD’s Amp Amp Rating Product Catalogue
ways Material ways MCB’s Supplied Rating L (mm) H (mm) W (mm) category number
when Supplied
empty
Sigma 8 Steel 6 6 1 63A 244 230 90 C 61088S

Product Contents: 1x Enclosure,1x 63A

30mA RCD, 6xMCB’s 6kA CurveB (3x6A,
1x16A and 2x20A), busbar and cables

Sigma 6-way dual RCD’s metal consumer unit

Type № of Construction № of № of MCB’s № of RCD’s Main Amp Amp Rating Product Catalogue
ways Material ways Supplied Supplied Switch Rating L (mm) H (mm) W (mm) category number
when
empty
Sigma 12 Steel 6 6 2 1 63A 316 230 90 C 61128S

Product Contents: 1x Enclosure,1x 100A

Main Switch, 2x 63A 30mA RCD’s, 6xMCB’s
6kA CurveB (3x6A, 1x16A, 2x32A, 1x40),
busbar and cables

Sigma 10-way dual RCD’s metal consumer unit

Type № of Construction № of № of MCB’s № of RCD’s Main Amp Amp Rating Product Catalogue
ways Material ways Supplied Supplied Switch Rating L (mm) H (mm) W (mm) category number
when
empty
Sigma 16 Steel 10 10 2 1 63A 388 230 90 C 61168S

Product Contents: 1x Enclosure,1x

100A Main Switch, 2x 63A 30mA RCD’s,
INSTALLATION

10xMCB’s 6kA Curve B (3x6A, 2x16A,

4x32A, 1x40), busbar and cables

Sigma 16-way dual RCD’s metal consumer unit

Type № of Construction № of № of MCB’s № of RCD’s Main Amp Amp Rating Product Catalogue
ways Material ways Supplied Supplied Switch Rating L (mm) H (mm) W (mm) category number
when
212 empty
Sigma 22 Steel 16 12 2 1 63A 496 230 90 C 61228S

Product Contents: 1x Enclosure,1x

METAL CONSUMER UNITS

100A Main Switch, 2x 63A 30mA RCD’s,

12xMCB’s 6kA CurveB (3x6A, 1x10A, 2x16A,
4x32A, 1x40, 1x50A), busbar and cables

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

DOCUMENTS CORRESPONDING
TO THE PRODUCT:
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE
MOUNTING- DELTA SERIES
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard IEC60439-3

The metal distribution boxes have wide range of application for mounting in buildings under construction or
new communal objects, offices, shops, house facilities. Inside the box, could be mounted circuit elements for
protection in the electrical installation. They are made of high quality electro-galvanized steel sheet and provide
proper prevention from fire. They are shock-proof as well. The box is also equipped with zero and ground
terminals.
• Main switch rated current: MCB125A
TECHNICAL DATA: • Mounting type: Surface
• Material: High quality electro-galvanized steel sheet • Colour of body: grey
• Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz • IP code: IP40
• Single phase: 4; 8; 12; 16 modules • Fire resistance: 960°C/30s
• Triple phase: 4; 6; 8; 10; 12 modules • Humidity: Max.95%
• Steel thickness: 1,0mm • Storage temperature: -40+75°C
• MCB mounting design: Din-rail • Specification: CE, ROHS, BS, EN,EIC60439-3

Single phase metal distribution boxes, Delta series

Type Construction № of poles Module Dimensions (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue number
Material capacity L H W Box category

Delta 1/4 Metal 1 4 226 226 95 1/10 C 600104N

Delta 1/8 Metal 1 8 298 226 95 1/10 C 600108N
Delta 1/12 Metal 1 12 370 226 95 1/10 C 600112N
Delta 1/16 Metal 1 16 442 226 95 1/10 C 600116N

INSTALLATION
Three phase metal distribution boxes, Delta series
Type Construction № of poles Module Dimensions (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue number
Material capacity L H W Box category 213
Delta 3/4 Metal 3 4 506 350 105 1/10 C 600304N
Delta 3/6 Metal 3 6 560 350 105 1/10 C 600306N
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Delta 3/8 Metal 3 8 614 350 105 1/10 C 600308N
Delta 3/10 Metal 3 10 668 350 105 1/10 C 600310N
Delta 3/12 Metal 3 12 722 350 105 1/10 C 600312N

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS www.elmarkholding.eu

DOCUMENTS CORRESPONDING
TO THE PRODUCT:
METAL CONSUMER UNITS - ZETA SERIES 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard IEC60439-3
The metal distribution boxes have wide range of application for mounting in buildings under construction or
new communal objects, offices, shops, house facilities. Inside the box, could be mounted circuit elements for
protection in the electrical installation. They are made of high quality electro-galvanized steel sheet and provide
proper prevention from fire. They are shock-proof as well. The box is also equipped with zero and ground
terminals.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Material: High quality electro-galvanized steel sheet
• Modules: 30; 36; 45; 60; 72
• Steel thickness: 1,2mm
• Rated voltage In (A): 100A
• Mounting type: Surface
• Colour of body: White RAL7035
• Colour of door: White RAL7035
• IP code: IP40
• Fire resistance: 960°C/30s
• Humidity: Max.95%
• Storage temperature: -40+75°C
• Specification: CE, ROHS, EIC60439-3

Metal consumer unit enclosures, Zeta series

Type Construction № of ROWS № of ways Dimensions (mm) Product Catalogue number
Material L (mm) H (mm) W (mm) category
Zeta 30 Metal 2 30 428 428 110 C 55030
Zeta 36 Metal 2 36 482 428 110 C 55036
Zeta 45 Metal 3 45 428 578 110 C 55045
Zeta 60 Metal 4 60 428 728 110 C 55060
Zeta 72 Metal 4 72 482 728 110 C 55072

Zero and ground terminals included

INSTALLATION

214
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Documents corresponding to the

product:
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS JXF SERIES 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 62208;
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3 Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output conductors,
grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of single steel sheet, treated with
decorative powder coating.
TECHNICAL DATA: • Coating: powder style painting
• Rated voltage: up to 1000V • IP code: IP 65
• Maximum current: up to 1250A
MOUNTING:
• Material: steel
• vertically on flat surface
• RAL 7032

Type Thickness of Metal box dimensions (mm) Nominal working Packing / Product Catalogue
metal sheet mm) H (height) L (width) W (depth) current In (A) Box category number

JXF 25/25/15 1.0 250 250 150 80 1 C 53025

JXF 25/30/15 1.0 250 300 150 100 1 C 53026
JXF 30/25/15 1.0 300 250 150 100 1 C 53030
JXF 30/40/20 1.0 300 400 200 160 1 C 53031
JXF 40/30/20 1.0 400 300 200 160 1 C 53040
JXF 40/50/20 1.2 400 500 200 250 1 C 53041
JXF 40/40/20 1.2 400 400 200 250 1 C 53044
JXF 50/40/20 1.2 500 400 200 250 1 C 53050
JXF 40/60/20 1.2 400 600 200 250 1 C 53051
JXF 60/40/20 1.2 600 400 200 250 1 C 53060
JXF 60/60/20 1.2 600 600 200 250 1 C 53066
JXF 70/50/20 1.2 700 500 200 350 1 C 53070
JXF 80/60/25 1.5 800 600 250 400 1 C 53080
JXF 100/80/30 1.5 1000 800 300 630 1 C 53100
JXF 120/80/30 1.5 1200 800 300 630 1 C 53120
#100#

JXF 140/80/30 1.5 1400 800 300 800 1 C 53140

JXF 180/80/30 1.5 1800 800 300 1000 1 C 53188
JXF 180/100/30* 1.5 1800 1000 300 1250 1 C 53180

INSTALLATION
Note: *Metal boxes with double door

215
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
STAINLESS STEEL METAL BOARDS SXF SERIES 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3 Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output conductors,
grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of single stainless steel sheet.
The mouting plate is treated with anti-corrosion and decorative powder coating. They are used in case of special
requirements regarding the exposure of corrosion.
TECHNICAL DATA: • IP code: IP 65
• Rated voltage: up to 1000V MOUNTING:
• Maximum current: up to 800A • vertically on flat surface
• Material: stainless steel

Type Thickness of metal sheet Metal box dimensions (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue
(mm) H (height) L (width) W (depth) Box category number

SXF 25/25/15 1.0 250 250 150 1 C 54025

SXF 30/25/15 1.0 300 250 150 1 C 54030
SXF 40/30/20 1.0 400 300 200 1 C 54040
SXF 50/40/20 1.2 500 400 200 1 C 54050
SXF 60/40/20 1.2 600 400 200 1 C 54060
SXF 70/50/20 1.2 700 500 200 1 C 54070
SXF 80/60/25 1.5 800 600 250 1 C 54080
SXF 100/80/30 1.5 1000 800 300 1 C 54100
SXF 120/80/30 1.5 1200 800 300 1 C 54120
INSTALLATION

216
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Documents corresponding to the ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS WITH TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATES

product:
Standard EN 60439-1;
EN 60 439-3 The company has produced and successfully passed the type-approval procedures for the following metal and
plastic electric control boxes and boards with ELMARK automation:

• Tower Mounted Switchgear

• Low Voltage Meter Box
• Low Voltage Main Switchboard
• Distribution Switchboard
• Power Compensation System

Low Voltage Main

Low Voltage Meter Box Type TEPO Switchboard Type GRT

INSTALLATION
217

Power Compensation System

METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Tower Mounted Switchgear Type MTT Type CCU

Distribution Switchboard Type KRSH

 INSTALLATION
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE
AND FLUSH MOUNTING ATTIS SERIES, IP40
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60670-24

The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in directly on the walls with screws.
newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. TECHNICAL DATA:
They are a module box with mounted protective • Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz
devices of the given flats electrical current circuit • Door colour: Transparent
circles. They are supplied with transparent door for • Mounting type: Surface;Flush
each row opening upwards to 90°. They are made of • Modules (№): 6; 9; 12; 16; 24; 36
white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and • IP code: IP40
high temperature with IP code: IP 40. The mounted • Row: Single row for 6, 9, 12 and 16 modules
device in the box is protected from direct contact • Double rows for 16; 24 and 36 modules
to the current leading parts. They are offered with • Material: ABS for body and PC for door
DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for • Fire resistance: 360°C/30s
the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted

Plastic distribution boxes for surface mounting- ATTIS series, IP40

Type Number of Module capacity Dimensions (mm) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
rows (number of devices) L H W category

Attis 6 1 6 185 140 90 1/30 C 60025

Attis 9 1 9 220 164 90 1/20 C 60095
Attis 12 1 12 305 205 90 1/16 C 60125
Attis 16 1 16 355 220 90 1/16 C 60165
Attis 16 2 16 231 285 90 1/16 C 60175
Attis 24 2 24 313 345 96 1/8 C 60245
Attis 36 3 36 315 440 96 1/5 C 60365
INSTALLATION

Zero and ground terminals included

Plastic distribution boxes for flush mounting- ATTIS series, IP40
Type Number of Module capacity Dimensions (mm) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
rows (number of devices) L H W category
218
Attis 6 1 6 185 140 90 1/30 C 60026
Attis 9 1 9 220 164 90 1/20 C 60096
Attis 12 1 12 305 205 90 1/16 C 60126
Attis 16 1 16 355 220 90 1/16 C 60166
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES

Attis 16 2 16 231 285 90 1/16 C 60176

Attis 24 2 24 313 345 96 1/8 C 60246
Attis 36 3 36 315 440 96 1/5 C 60366

OPEN

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES

Documents corresponding to the

product:
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR
SURFACE MOUNTING MINI SERIES, IP40
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60670-24

Plastic distribution boxes for surface mounting, MINI series

Type Number of Module capacity Dimensions (mm) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
rows (number of devices) L H W category

Mini 1 1 1 40 150 65 1/120 C 60106

Mini 2 1 2 55 150 65 1/84 C 60107
Mini 4 1 4 95 150 65 1/48 C 60108

PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE AND

FLUSH MOUNTING PDB1 SERIES, IP40
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Boxes for surface mounting

Type Number of Module capacity Dimensions (mm) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
rows (number of devices) L H W category

PDB1-4 1 4 110 205 75 1 / 20 C 60040

PDB1-6 1 6 150 205 75 1 / 20 C 60060
PDB1-8 1 8 190 205 75 1 / 20 C 60080

Boxes for flush mounting

INSTALLATION
Type Number of Module capacity Dimensions (mm) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
rows (number of devices) L H W category

PDB1-4 1 4 110 205 75 1 / 20 C 60041

PDB1-6 1 6 150 205 75 1 / 20 C 60061
PDB1-8 1 8 190 205 75 1 / 20 C 60081

219
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES

Plastic distribution boxes for surface and flush mounting IP40 *

Type Number of Module capacity Mounting Dimensions (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue
rows (number of devices) type L H W Box category number

PDB1-4* 1 4 Flush 136 222 60 1/20 F 80041

PDB1-6* 1 6 Flush 170 222 60 1/20 F 80061
PDB1-36* 3 36 Flush 300 484 66 1/5 F 80361
PDB1-36* 3 36 Surface 271 462 66 1/5 F 80360

*3 year standard+0 year extended warranty

In case of insufficient quantity in stock for BOXES MINI SERIES, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days, and for PDB1 will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE
MOUNTING IP40 - BLUE SERIES
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3
The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They
are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are
supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing
plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with IP code: IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected
from direct contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal
strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Door colour: Transparent blue
• Mounting type: Surface;Flush
• Modules (№): 12; 18; 24; 28; 36
• IP code: IP40
• Row: Single row for 12 and 18 modules
• Double rows for 24; 28 and 36 modules
• Material: ABS for body and PC for door
• Fire resistance: 650°C/30s
• Ambient temperature(°C): -5 +65°C, max. 95% humidity
• Colour: White RAL 9003
• Storage temperature(°C): -40 +75°C

Boxes for surface mounting, BLUE series

Type Number of Module Dimensions (mm) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
rows capacity L H W category
(number of
devices)
Blue 12 1 12 300 204 102 1/10 C 60122
Blue 18 1 18 410 204 102 1/10 C 60182
Blue 24 2 24 300 294 109 1/5 C 60242
Blue 28 2 28 310 354 109 1/5 C 60282
Blue 36 2 36 410 294 109 1/5 C 60362
INSTALLATION

Boxes for flush mounting, BLUE series

220 Type Number of Module
rows capacity L
Dimensions (mm) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
category
H W
(number of
devices)
Blue 12 1 12 317 220 102 1/10 C 60123
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES

Blue 18 1 18 426 220 102 1/10 C 60183

Blue 24 2 24 317 310 109 1/5 C 60243
Blue 28 2 28 294 338 109 1/5 C 60283
Blue 36 2 36 426 310 109 1/5 C 60363

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES

Documents corresponding to the

product:
MOISTURE-PROOF DISTRIBUTION BOXES
FOR SURFACE MOUNTING - BETA SERIES IP55
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3 AND GAMMA SERIES IP65

The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They
are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical installation current circles. They
are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90°. They are made of white non-self-
extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature. The special design of the lids and gaskets provides
IP code: IP55; IP65. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts.
They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor
joining. For direct wall moutining with screws.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz
• Flame retardance: UL94 V-O
• IP code: IP55; IP65
• Door colour: Transparent
• Mounting type: Surface

Moisture-proof distribution boxes for surface mounting - Beta series, IP 55

Type Number Module capacity IP Dimensions (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue number
of rows (number of devices) L H W Box category

Beta 4 1 4 55 127 214 93 1 / 20 C 60100

Beta 6 1 6 55 162 214 93 1 / 20 C 60101
Beta 8 1 8 55 216 214 93 1 / 20 C 60102
Beta 12 1 12 55 270 214 93 1 / 12 C 60103
Beta 18 1 18 55 378 233 93 1/8 C 60104
Beta 24 2 24 55 340 288 93 1/8 C 60105

INSTALLATION
Moisture-proof distribution boxes for surface mounting - Gamma series, IP 65
Type Number Module capacity IP Dimensions (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue number
of rows (number of devices) H L W Box category

Gamma 4 1 4 65 210 140 100 1/30 C 60004

Gamma 8 1 8 65 210 215 100 1/20 C 60008 221
Gamma 12 1 12 65 260 300 140 1/10 C 60012
Gamma 18 1 18 65 285 410 140 1/5 C 60018
Gamma 24 2 24 65 300 415 140 1/5 C 60024
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES www.elmarkholding.eu

Documents corresponding to the

product:
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ABS- PP SERIES, IP65 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Standard EN 60439 -1
EN 60439 -5 Plastic distribution boards of various sizes. Intended for extension or distribution of cable lines. They can also be
used as meter boxes. They are resistant to chemical agents, thermal and UV rays.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: • Colour: RAL7035 grey

• Resistance: chemical agents, weak acids, alkali, oils, • Recyclable
salts, etc. • adjustable mounting plate position
• Rated Voltage: up to 690V
• Maximum Current: up to 800A MOUNTING:
• Thermal Deformation: over 240°C • Vertically on flat surface
• Operating Temperature: -35°C + 65°C
• Material: ABS
• IP code: IP65

ABS halogen free distribution boards PP series - gray door

Board Type Material Type H (mm) L (mm) W (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue number
Box category
PP 3001 ABS 300 200 130 1 C 5312030130
PP 3002 ABS 350 250 150 1 C 5312535150
PP 3004 ABS 400 300 170 1 C 5313040170
PP 3005 ABS 400 300 220 1 C 5313040220
PP 3006 ABS 500 350 190 1 C 5313550190
PP 3007 ABS 500 400 240 1 C 5314050240
PP 3008 ABS 600 400 200 1 C 5314060190

Note: Open door angle 180°

ABS halogen free distribution boards PP series- transparent door
Board Type Material Type H (mm) L (mm) W (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue number
Box category
INSTALLATION

PP 3011 ABS 300 200 130 1 C 5342030130

PP 3012 ABS 350 250 150 1 C 5342535150
PP 3014 ABS 400 300 170 1 C 5343040170
PP 3015 ABS 400 300 220 1 C 5343040220
PP 3016 ABS 500 350 190 1 C 5343550190
PP 3017 ABS 500 400 240 1 C 5344050240
PP 3018 ABS 600 400 200 1 C 5344060190
222 PP 3020 ABS 700 500 250 1 C 5345070250
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES

ABS halogen free distribution module boards PP series- transparent door

Board Type Material Type H (mm) L (mm) W (mm) Packing / Product Catalogue number
Box category
PP 3112-18modules ABS 350 250 150 1 C 5322535150
PP 3114-24modules ABS 400 300 170 1 C 5323040170
PP 3116-45modules ABS 500 350 190 1 C 5323550190
PP 3118-60modules ABS 600 400 200 1 C 5324060190

Note: Transperent door

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND ACCESSORIES

SURFACE MOUNTING POLYESTER

BOARDS EC SERIES IP65
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: • Resistance to abnormal heat (GWT)- board with blank

• Colour: grey RAL 7035. door up to 960°C - board with transparent window up to
• IP65 protection degree. 650°C.
• Material: made of halogen free reinforced fiberglass • Application voltage 1000V, suitable for photovoltaic
polyester, self-extinguishing V0 degree according to UL94. plants.
• Double insulation, shock resistance: IK10, 20j, according • Right or left reversible door with stainless steel pins – it
to EN 62262. can be opened more than 180°.
• Application temperature: minimum –25°, maximum • Plain and smooth headboards for easy opening and
+65°. conduit inlet.

Halogen free polyester boards EC series- transparent door

Type Material H (mm) L (mm) W (mm) Packing /Box Product category Catalogue number
PBTD 5001 Polyester 305 270 170 1 F 5362730170
PBTD 5002 Polyester 430 325 185 1 F 5363243185
PBTD 5004 Polyester 655 435 215 1 F 5364365215

Polyester hinger counterdoor EC

Type Material Used for type boards Packing /Box Product category Catalogue number
CD 5002 Polyester PBTD/PBBD 5002 1 F 53502CD
CD 5004 Polyester PBTD/PBBD 5004 1 F 53504CD
CD 5005 Polyester PBTD/PBBD 5005 1 F 53505CD

INSTALLATION
Blank cover module EC
Type Heigth of single/ Used for type boards Packing / Product Catalogue Catalogue
double cover (mm) Box category number number
single cover double cover
125/250 PBTD/PBBD 5002 1 F 53502S 223
Blank cover 150/300 PBTD/PBBD 5003/5004 1 F 53503S 53503D
module 150/300 PBTD/PBBD 5005 1 F 53505D
150/300 PBTD/PBBD 5006 1 F 53506D
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND ACCESSORIES

Spare brass and brackets for fixing- galvanized EC

Type Used for type boards Packing /Box Product category Catalogue number
Spare brass insert kit All type 1 kit (10 pcs) F 53512

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
NON-ISOLATED CONNECTION TUBES www.elmarkholding.eu

CONNECTION TUBES - GTY TYPE

Copper pipes with galvanic tin coating, used for joining of copper rigid or multicore conductors with different
sections. The assembling is made by mechanical pressing with crimping tool.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Material: copper alloy
• Coating: tin
• Application: general

Type Length Outer diameter Inner diameter Cable Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
L (mm) D (mm) d (mm) (mm²) category
GTY-4 20 5 3 4 1000 / 16000 C 59213
GTY-6 25 5.3 3.7 6 500 / 1500 / 12000 C 59201
GTY-10 30 6.3 4.5 10 500 / 1500 / 12000 C 59202
GTY-16 35 7.5 5.7 16 100 / 200 / 4800 C 59203
GTY-25 40 9 7.2 25 100 / 500 / 2000 C 59204
GTY-35 45 10.8 8.5 35 100 / 200 / 1600 C 59205
GTY-50 50 12.5 9.8 50 20 / 200 / 1600 C 59206
GTY-70 55 14.5 11.5 70 10 / 100 / 800 C 59207
GTY-95 60 17 13.7 95 10 / 80 / 640 C 59208
GTY-120 65 19 15 120 10 / 60 / 480 C 59209
GTY-150 70 21 16.7 150 10 / 50 / 400 C 59210
GTY-185 75 23 18.5 185 10 / 40 / 320 C 59211
GTY-240 80 26 21 240 10 / 30 / 240 C 59212

BIMETALLIC CONNECTION TUBE - GTL TYPE

INSTALLATION

Pipes made of two metals – copper and aluminum without galvanic coating. They are designed for joining copper
and aluminum conductors – rigid or multicore conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished
through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt terminals and the conductor. They are used for
protection against electrochemical corrosion got at two metals contact with different chemical properties and
conductivity at electrical current feed. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality
and long exploitation period.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Material: copper aluminum alloy
224 • Coating: none
• Application: general for joining of two types of conductors

Type d1 D1 d2 D2 l1 l2 L Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

NON-ISOLATED CONNECTION TUBES

GTL - 16 5 9 6 10 30 30 75 20 / 200 / 1200 C 59214

GTL - 25 6 10 7 12 30 33 82 20 / 400 / 1500 C 59215
GTL - 35 7 11 8.5 14 30 40 90 20 / 300 / 1000 C 59216
GTL - 50 8.5 13 9.8 16 32 42 95 20 / 800 C 59217
GTL - 70 9.5 15 11.5 18 38 50 105 10 / 600 C 59218
GTL - 95 11.5 17 13.5 21 40 50 110 10 / 500 C 59219
GTL - 120 13.5 19 15 23 42 55 112 10 / 400 C 59220
GTL - 150 15 21 17 25 44 55 118 10 / 350 C 59221
GTL - 185 17 23 18.5 27 46 60 125 10 / 300 C 59222
GTL - 240 19 26 21 30 54 60 130 10 / 200 C 59223

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS

CABLE TERMINALS NON-ISOLATED - JM TYPE

They are used for joining copper conductors - multicore conductors with different section to electrical devices
or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and
safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the
possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper alloy with galvanic tin coating. The connection
is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. Two types are
offered with standard length SC and extended base JM. They are manufactured under modern technology and
have high quality and long exploitation period.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Material: copper alloy
• Coating: tin
• Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.

Type d1 (mm) D (mm) d2 (mm) L (mm) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
JM - 2.5/6 2.2 4.5 6 24 1000 / 3000 / 24000 C 59240
JM - 4/6 3.0 4.8 6 24 1000 / 2000 / 16000 C 59241
JM - 6/6 3.8 5.5 6 24 500 / 2000 / 16000 C 59035
JM - 6/8 3.8 5.5 8 24 500 / 2000 / 16000 C 59059
JМ - 10/6 4.8 6.8 6 25.5 100 / 1500 / 12000 C 59036
JM - 10/8 4.8 6.8 8 25.5 500 / 1500 / 12000 C 59037
JM - 16/6 5.5 7.5 6 30.5 400 / 800 / 6400 C 59038
JM - 16/8 5.5 7.5 8 30.5 400 / 800 / 6400 C 59039
JM - 16/10 5.5 7.5 10 30.5 400 / 800 / 6400 C 59040
JM - 25/8 7 9 8 34 100 / 500 / 4000 C 59041
JM - 25/10 7 9 10 34 250 / 500 / 4000 C 59042
JM - 35/8 8.2 10.5 8 38 200 / 400 / 3200 C 59043
JM - 35/10 8.2 10.5 10 38 200 / 400 / 3200 C 59044
JM - 35/12 8.2 10.5 12 38 200 / 400 / 3200 C 59045
JM - 50/8 9.8 12.5 8 45 100 / 200 / 1600 C 59046
JM - 50/10 9.8 12.5 10 45 100 / 100 / 1600 C 59047
JM - 50/12 9.8 12.5 12 45 100 / 200 / 1600 C 59048

INSTALLATION
JM - 70/10 11.5 14.5 10 50 80 / 100 / 1280 C 59049
JM - 70/12 11.5 14.5 12 50 80 / 100 / 1280 C 59050
JM - 95/10 13.8 17.5 10 55.5 50 / 200 / 800 C 59051
JM - 95/12 13.8 17.5 12 55.5 50 / 200 / 800 C 59052
JM - 120/10 15.5 19.5 10 63 30 / 60 / 480 C 59053
JM - 120/12 15.5 19.5 12 63 30 / 60 / 480 C 59054
JM - 150/12 16.5 21 12 71 10 / 50 / 400 C 59055
JM - 185/12 18.8 23.5 12 78 10 / 40 / 320 C 59056 225
JM - 185/16 18.8 23.5 16 78 10 / 40 / 320 C 59057
JM - 240/16 21.3 26.5 16 92 10 / 30 / 240 C 59058
NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS www.elmarkholding.eu

BIMETALIC NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS

FOR CRIMPING DTL

They are used for joining aluminum conductors - multicore conductors with different section to electrical devices
or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and
safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the
possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper and aluminum alloys as in the aluminum billet
is made under special technology the copper terminal formed like an ear. The connection is realized through
crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor.
TECHNICAL DATA: Material: copper aluminum; Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.

Type d1 D d2 L l B Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) category number
DTL - 1 - 16 6 11 8 70 30 16 20 / 200 / 1440 C 59224
DTL - 1 - 25 7 12 8 75 34 18 20 / 180 / 1080 C 59225
DTL - 1 - 35 8.5 14 10 85 38 20.5 20 / 100 / 600 C 59226
DTL - 1 - 50 9.8 16 10 90 40 23 20 / 70 / 420 C 59227
DTL - 1 - 70 11.5 18 12 102 48 26 10 / 60 / 360 C 59228
DTL - 1 - 95 13.5 21 12 112 50 28 10 / 40 / 180 C 59229
DTL - 1 - 120 15 23 14 120 53 30 10 / 30 / 120 C 59230
DTL - 1 - 150 16.5 25 14 126 56 34 5 / 25 / 120 C 59231
DTL - 1 - 185 18.5 27 16 133 58 37 5 / 20 / 120 C 59232
DTL - 1 - 240 21 30 16 140 60 40 4 / 12 / 72 C 59233

COPPER CABLE WIRE FORK TERMINAL CONNECTOR

Type Length (mm) Colour Conductor (mm²) Packing (pcs.) Packing / Box (pcs.) Product category Catalogue number
SVS1.25-4 21.2 Red 0.5-1.0 100 10 / 240 C 59080
INSTALLATION

SVS1.25-5 21.2 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15 / 180 C 59081

SVS1.25-6 21.2 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15 / 180 C 59082
SVS 2-4 21.0 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15 / 180 C 59083
SVS 2-5 22.5 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15 / 180 C 59084
SVS 2-6 27,6 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10 / 120 C 59085
SVS 5,5-4 24.5 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5 / 60 C 59086
SVS 5,5-5 27,9 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5 / 60 C 59087
226 SVS 5,5-6 27,9 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5 / 60 C 59088
NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - CHS TYPE

Type Length (mm) Conductor (mm²) Packing / Box (pcs.) Packing / Box (pcs.) Product category Catalogue number
CHS3 18.1 0.25-1.5 100 250 C 59115
CHS4 20.1 1.5-2.5 100 200 C 59116
CHS5 25.5 4.0-6.0 100 200 C 59117
CHS6 27.3 8.0 100 100 C 59118

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS

ISOLATED CABLE JOINTS

Metal pipes with outside PVC insulation. They are used for joining/extending multicore conductors with section
up to 6mm². It increases the connection stability against vibrations and decreases the possibility for short circuit.
The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor.
The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections.

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Material: copper alloy
• Coating: polyvinylchloride
• Application: general for joining of copper conductors

Type Length (mm) Colour Conductor (mm²) Packing (pcs.) Packing / Box (pcs.) Product category Catalogue number
PVT 1.25 16 red 0.5-1.0 100 15 / 300 C 59015
BV 1.25 25 red 0.5-1.0 100 10 / 120 C 59001
PVT 2 16 blue 1.5-2.5 100 15 / 300 C 59034
BV 2 25 blue 1.5-2.5 100 10 / 60 C 59002
PVT 5.5 20 yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5 / 60 C 59014
BV 5.5 25 yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5 / 60 C 59003

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - MDD/FDD TYPES

They represent a cable terminal made of brass alloy with galvanic tin coating and insulated with
polyvinylchloride. They are used as non-insulated terminals, as the insulated part protects the cores from bending
and breaking in the joining point and at the same time it protects the staff from direct contact to the current
- carrying parts. They are used for conductors with section up to 6 mm. The connection is realized through
crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and cable. The different insulation colour corresponds
to different conductor sections. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and

INSTALLATION
long exploitation period.
All insulated cable terminals are being offered in 100 pcs. packing

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Material: copper alloy
• Coating: polyvinylchloride
• Application: general for joining copper conductors
• Ambient temperature: -10 to +75°C
227
Type Shape Colour Conductor Shoe Packing Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(mm²) width (pcs.) (pcs.) category
MDD 1.25 - 187 male red 0.5-1.0 187 100 10 / 240 C 59012
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS

MDD 1.25 - 250 male red 0.5-1.0 250 100 10 / 240 C 59009
MDD 2 - 187 male blue 1.5-2.5 187 100 10 / 240 C 59013
MDD 2 - 250 male blue 1.5-2.5 250 100 10 / 180 C 59011
MDD 5.5 - 250 male yellow 4.0-6.0 250 100 10 / 120 C 59010
FDD 1.25 - 187 female red 0.5-1.0 187 100 20 / 240 C 59008
FDD 1.25 - 187 female red 0.5-1.0 250 100 15 / 180 C 59006
FDD 2 - 187 female blue 1.5-2.5 187 100 20 / 240 C 59007
FDD 2 - 250 female blue 1.5-2.5 250 100 10 / 180 C 59004
FDD 5.5 - 250 female yellow 4.0-6.0 250 100 10 / 120 C 59005

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS www.elmarkholding.eu

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - E TYPE

Type Colour Terminal length Conductor Packing Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm²) (pcs.) (pcs.) category
Е0508 white 8 0.5 100 50 / 600 C 59023
Е7508 blue 8 0.75 100 50 / 600 C 59024
Е1008 red 8 1.0 100 50 / 600 C 59025
Е1510 black 10 1.5 100 30 / 360 C 59026
Е2512 grey 12 2.5 100 30 / 300 C 59027
Е4012 orange 12 4.0 100 20 / 240 C 59028
Е6018 green 18 6.0 100 5 / 120 C 59029
Е10-18 dark green 18 10 100 8 / 96 C 59030
Е16-18 milky yellow 18 16 100 6 / 60 C 59031
Е25-16 black 16 25 100 5 / 36 C 59032
Е35-25 grey-yellow 25 35 100 2 / 24 C 59033

TWIN ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS- TE TYPE

Type Colour Terminal length Conductor Packing Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm²) (pcs.) (pcs.) category
TE0508 white 8 2x0.5 100 50 / 600 C 59023TE
TE7508 Blue 8 2x0.75 100 50 / 600 C 59024TE
TE1008 Red 8 2x1.0 100 50 / 600 C 59025TE
TE1508 black 8 2x1.5 100 30 / 360 C 59026TE
TE2510 grey 10 2x2.5 100 30 / 300 C 59027TE
TE4010 orange 10 2x4.0 100 20 / 240 C 59028TE
INSTALLATION

TE6014 green 14 2x6.0 100 5 / 120 C 59029TE

TE10-14 dark green 14 2x10.0 100 8 / 96 C 59030TE
TE16-14 milky yellow 14 2x16.0 100 6 / 60 C 59031TE

228

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - PTV TYPE

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS

Type Shape Colour Conductor (mm²) Shoe Packing Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
width (pcs.) (pcs.) category
PTV 1.25 - 10 male red 0.25-1.0 1.9 100 20 / 240 C 59101
PTV 1.25 - 12 male red 0.25-1.0 1.9 100 20 / 240 C 59102
PTV 2 - 10 male blue 1.5-2.5 1.9 100 20 / 240 C 59103
PTV 2 - 12 male blue 1.5-2.5 1.9 100 15 / 180 C 59104
PTV 5.5 - 13 male yellow 4.0-6.0 2.9 100 8 / 96 C 59105

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - RVL TYPE

Type Size of the Colour Conductor Packing Packing / Product Catalogue number
opening (mm) (mm²) (pcs.) Box (pcs.) category
RVL 1.25-4 4 red 0.5-1.0 100 20 / 240 C 59021
RVL 1.25-5 5 red 0.5-1.0 100 15 / 180 C 59022
RVL 2-4 4 blue 1.5-2.5 100 15 / 180 C 59018
RVL 2-5 5 blue 1.5-2.5 100 10 / 120 C 59019
RVL 5.5-4 4 yellow 4.0-6.0 100 8 / 96 C 59020
RV 5.5-5 5 yellow 4.0-6.0 100 8 / 96 C 59016
RV 5.5-6 6 yellow 4.0-6.0 100 8 / 96 C 59017

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - PBDD TYPE

Type Shape Colour Conductor Shoe Packing Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(mm²) width (pcs.) (pcs.) category
PBDD 1.25 - 250 male red 0.25-1.0 6.3 100 5 / 60 C 59106
PBDD 2 - 250 male blue 1.5-2.5 6.3 100 5 / 60 C 59107
PBDD 5.5 - 250 male yellow 4.0-6.0 6.3 100 5 / 60 C 59108

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - MPD TYPE

INSTALLATION
Type Shape Colour Conductor (mm²) Shoe Packing Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
width (pcs.) (pcs.) category
MPD 1.25 - 156 male red 0.25-1.0 6.3 100 10 / 240 C 59109
MPD 2 - 195 male blue 1.5-2.5 6.3 100 10 / 120 C 59110
MPD 5.5 - 195 male yellow 4.0-6.0 6.3 100 10 / 120 C 59111

229

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - MDFN/FDFNY ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS

Type Shape Colour Conductor (mm²) Shoe Packing Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
width (pcs.) (pcs.) category
MDFN 1.0 - 250 male red 0.25-1.0 4 100 5 / 60 C 59112
MDFN 2 - 250 male blue 1.5-2.5 4 100 5 / 60 C 59113
MDFN 5 - 250 male yellow 4.0-6.0 5 100 4 / 48 C 59114
FDFNY 1.0 - 250 female red 0.25-1.0 4 100 10 / 60 C 59242
FDFNY 2 - 250 female blue 1.5-2.5 4 100 10 / 60 C 59243
FDFNY 5 - 250 female yellow 4.0-6.0 5 100 10 / 60 C 59244

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING www.elmarkholding.eu

PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2

Cable trunkings are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in office and residential
buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems and allow quick adaptation if
necessary to rearrange the interior. Fast and simple installation. In combination with a wide range of accessories,
building irregularities are quickly overcome. Non- flammable material, easy to cut and paint.

Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 12x12 2m white 100 C 5621212
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 15X10 2m white 100 C 5621510
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 16X16 2m white 100 C 5621616
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 20X10 2m white 100 C 5622010
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 25X16 2m white 80 C 5622516
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 30Х16 2m white 70 C 5623016
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 25X25 2m white 50 C 5622525
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 40X16 2m white 50 C 5624016
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 40X25 2m white 50 C 5624025
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 40X40 2m white 40 C 5624040
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 60X40 2m white 30 C 5626040
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 60X60 2m white 32 C 5626060
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 80X40 2m white 18 C 5628040
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 80X60 2m white 24 C 5628060
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 100X40 2m white 16 C 56210040
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 100X60 2m white 16 C 56210060

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS FRAMES

FOR CABLE TRUNKING
INSTALLATION

Cable trunking frames are decorative solution for installation of switches and sockets on places where their
normal mounting is not possible. The assembly set includes subframe and main white frame. Universal sizes,
suitable for mounting of switches and sockets from different manufacturers. Single, double and triple frames are
offered.

Type Used for cable trunking Colour Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

230 SINGLE FRAME 100X40/100X60 White 20 C 562100441

DOUBLE FRAME 100X40/100X60 White 14 C 562100442
TRIPLE FRAME 100X40/100X60 White 5 C 562100443
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

OUTSIDE CORNER

Type Used for cable trunking Colour Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
OUTSIDE CORNER 12x12 white 50 C 56212121
OUTSIDE CORNER 15X10 white 50 C 56215101
OUTSIDE CORNER 16X16 white 50 C 56216161
OUTSIDE CORNER 25X16 white 30 C 56225161
OUTSIDE CORNER 30Х16 white 48 C 56230161
OUTSIDE CORNER 25X25 white 30 C 56225251
OUTSIDE CORNER 40X16 white 30 C 56240161
OUTSIDE CORNER 40X25 white 30 C 56240251
OUTSIDE CORNER 40X40 white 30 C 56240401
OUTSIDE CORNER 60X40 white 10 C 56260401
OUTSIDE CORNER 60X60 white 10 C 56260601
OUTSIDE CORNER 80X40 white 8 C 56280401
OUTSIDE CORNER 80X60 white 8 C 56280601
OUTSIDE CORNER 100X40 white 6 C 562100401
OUTSIDE CORNER 100X60 white 6 C 562100601

INSIDE CORNER

Type Used for cable trunking Colour Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
INSIDE CORNER 12x12 white 50 C 56212122
INSIDE CORNER 15X10 white 50 C 56215102
INSIDE CORNER 16X16 white 50 C 56216162
INSIDE CORNER 25X16 white 30 C 56225162
INTSIDE CORNER 30Х16 white 35 C 56230162

INSTALLATION
INSIDE CORNER 25X25 white 30 C 56225252
INSIDE CORNER 40X16 white 30 C 56240162
INSIDE CORNER 40X25 white 30 C 56240252
INSIDE CORNER 40X40 white 30 C 56240402
INSIDE CORNER 60X40 white 10 C 56260402
INSIDE CORNER 60X60 white 10 C 56260602
INSIDE CORNER 80X40 white 8 C 56280402
INSIDE CORNER 80X60 white 8 C 56280602
INSIDE CORNER 100X40 white 6 C 562100402
231
INSIDE CORNER 100X60 white 6 C 562100602
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING www.elmarkholding.eu

T- CORNER

Type Used for cable trunking Colour Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
T- corner 12x12 white 50 C 56212123
T- corner 15X10 white 50 C 56215103
T- corner 16X16 white 50 C 56216163
T- corner 25X16 white 20 C 56225163
T-corner 30X16 white 40 C 56230163
T- corner 25X25 white 20 C 56225253
T- corner 40X16 white 30 C 56240163
T- corner 40X25 white 30 C 56240253
T- corner 40X40 white 30 C 56240403
T- corner 60X40 white 16 C 56260403
T- corner 60X60 white 16 C 56260603
T- corner 80X40 white 8 C 56280403
T- corner 80X60 white 8 C 56280603
T- corner 100X40 white 8 C 562100403
T- corner 100X60 white 8 C 562100603

L- CORNER

Type Used for cable trunking Colour Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
L- corner 12x12 white 50 C 56212124
L- corner 15X10 white 50 C 56215104
L- corner 16X16 white 50 C 56216164
INSTALLATION

L- corner 25X16 white 30 C 56225164

L-corner 30X16 white 50 C 56230164
L- corner 25X25 white 30 C 56225254
L- corner 40X16 white 30 C 56240164
L- corner 40X25 white 30 C 56240254
L- corner 40X40 white 30 C 56240404
L- corner 60X40 white 16 C 56260404
L- corner 60X60 white 16 C 56260604
232 L- corner 80X40 white 12 C 56280404
L- corner 80X60 white 12 C 56280604
L- corner 100X40 white 8 C 562100404
L- corner 100X60 white 8 C 562100604
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

CONNECTOR

Type Used for cable trunking Colour Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Connector 12x12 white 50 C 56212125
Connector 15X10 white 50 C 56215105
Connector 16X16 white 50 C 56216165
Connector 25X16 white 30 C 56225165
Connector 30X16 white 100 C 56230165
Connector 25X25 white 30 C 56225255
Connector 40X16 white 30 C 56240165
Connector 40X25 white 30 C 56240255
Connector 40X40 white 30 C 56240405
Connector 60X40 white 25 C 56260405
Connector 60X60 white 25 C 56260605
Connector 80X40 white 50 C 56280405
Connector 80X60 white 50 C 56280605
Connector 100X40 white 50 C 562100405
Connector 100X60 white 30 C 562100605

END CAP

Type Used for cable trunking Colour Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
End cap 12x12 white 50 C 56212126
End cap 15X10 white 50 C 56215106
End cap 16X16 white 50 C 56216166
End cap 25X16 white 50 C 56225166
End cap 30X16 white 100 C 56230166

INSTALLATION
End cap 25X25 white 50 C 56225256
End cap 40X16 white 30 C 56240166
End cap 40X25 white 30 C 56240256
End cap 40X40 white 30 C 56240406
End cap 60X40 white 50 C 56260406
End cap 60X60 white 50 C 56260606
End cap 80X40 white 60 C 56280406
End cap 80X60 white 60 C 56280606
End cap 100X40 white 50 C 562100406
233
End cap 100X60 white 50 C 562100606
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

SEPARATOR

Type Length (m) Used for cable trunking Colour Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
SEPARATOR 40 2 100x40 white 40 C 56261111
SEPARATOR 60 2 100x60 white 40 C 56261112

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING www.elmarkholding.eu

PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING SELF-ADHESIVE

Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing Product Catalogue number

m/pcs category
12x12 2m white 250/125 C 5621212A
15x10 2m white 250/125 C 5621510A
16х16 2m white 250/125 C 5621616A
20х10 2m white 200/100 C 5622010A
Plastic cable trunking self- 25x16 2m white 100/50 C 5622516A
adhesive 30X16 2m white 140/70 C 5623016A
25х25 2m white 100/50 C 5622525A
40x16 2m white 50/25 C 5624016A
40x25 2m white 80/40 C 5624025A
40x40 2m white 80/40 C 5624040A

PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - DARK WALNUT

Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing Product Catalogue number

m/pcs category
12x12 2m dark walnut 250/125 C 5621212DW
15x10 2m dark walnut 250/125 C 5621510DW
16x16 2m dark walnut 250/125 C 5621616DW
Plastic cable trunking dark walnut
25x16 2m dark walnut 150/75 C 5622516DW
25x25 2m dark walnut 100/50 C 5622525DW
40x25 2m dark walnut 80/40 C 5624025DW
INSTALLATION

PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - LIGHT BEECH

234
Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing Product Catalogue number
m/pcs category
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

12x12 2m light beech 250/125 C 5621212LB

15x10 2m light beech 250/125 C 5621510LB
16x16 2m light beech 250/125 C 5621616LB
Plastic cable trunking light beech
25x16 2m light beech 150/75 C 5622516LB
25x25 2m light beech 100/50 C 5622525LB
40x25 2m light beech 80/40 C 5624025LB

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - PEAR

Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing Product Catalogue number

m/pcs category
12x12 2m pear 250/125 C 5621212P
15x10 2m pear 250/125 C 5621510P
16x16 2m pear 250/125 C 5621616P
Plastic cable trunking pear
25x16 2m pear 150/75 C 5622516P
25x25 2m pear 100/50 C 5622525P
40x25 2m pear 80/40 C 5624025P

SLOTTED PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2

Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
25x25 2m grey 196 C 5622525S
25x40 2m grey 64 C 5622540S
40x40 2m grey 64 C 5624040S
Slotted plastic cable 40x60 2m grey 60 C 5624060S
trunking CT2 60x40 2m grey 60 C 5626040S
60x60 2m grey 48 C 5626060S
80x60 2m grey 40 C 5628060S
100x60 2m grey 32 C 56210060S

INSTALLATION
235
FLOOR TYPE PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
75x20 2m grey 40 C 5627520F
90x20 2m grey 20 C 5629020F
Floor type plastic cable
60x15 2m white 60 C 5626015F/WH
trunking CT2
75x20 2m white 40 C 5627520F/WH
90x20 2m white 20 C 5629020F/WH

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING www.elmarkholding.eu

AIR CONDITIONING TRUNKING

Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing Product Catalogue number

m/pcs category
PLASTIC TRUNKING 75x60 2 White 15/30 C 5627560

AIR CONDITIONING TRUNKING ACCESSORIES

Type Used for Colour Packing pcs Product category Catalogue number
56275608 56275608 cable
trunking
OUTSIDE CORNER 75x60 White 24 C 56275601
INSIDE CORNER 75x60 White 24 C 56275602
L- CORNER 75x60 White 18 C 56275604
CONNECTOR 75x60 White 40 C 56275605
INSTALLATION

56275607 56275607 INTERNAL CAP 75x60 White 30 C 56275606

EXTERNAL CAP 75x60 White 18 C 56275607
WALL PENETRATION 75x60 White C 56275608
CABLE HOLDER 75x60 White C 56275609

56275602 56275602
236
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING

56275601 56275601

56275606 56275606

56275604 56275605

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

CORNER TRUNKING

Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing Product Catalogue number

m/pcs category
Plastic cable trunking 23X23 2 White 60/120 C 5622323

CORNER TRUNKING ACCESSORIES

Type Used for cable Colour Packing pcs Product Catalogue number
trunking category
T- corner 23X23 White 60 C 56223233
L- corner 23X23 White 60 C 56223234
Connector 23X23 White 100 C 56223235
End cap 23X23 White 100 C 56223236

KITCHEN COUNTER CORNER CABLE TRUNKIN

#K#

Type Size Length (m) Colour Packing pcs Product Catalogue number
category
PLASTIC TRUNKING 25 2 White 30 C 56225K

INSTALLATION
237
FLEXIBLE DOUBLECOAT CORRUGATED PIPE

TECHNICAL DATA: Minimum bending radius: 350 mm;

CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Material- HDPE; Temperature assembly resistance: -5 - +60 °C;

Compresion resistance- 450 N/ 5 cm; Halogen free
Colour- red

Type Inner Diameter Ф Outer Diameter Ф Packing (m) Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) category number
Flexible doublecoat corrugated pipe 52 63 25 C M006017

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS www.elmarkholding.eu

SELF-EXTINGUISHING PLIABLE CONDUITS EC

TECHNICAL DATA:
Material- technopolymer on PVC base, Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94;
Compresion resistance- 320N; Standard- EN 61386-1; EN61386-22; RAL- 7035

Type Inner Diameter Ф Outer Diameter Ф Packing Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (m) category number
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits 10,7 16 100 C 500M16
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits 14,1 20 100 C 500M20
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits 18,2 25 50 C 500M25
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits 24,3 32 25 C 500M32
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits 32,3 40 25 C 500M40
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits with draw tape 10,7 16 100 C 500N16
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits with draw tape 14,1 20 100 C 500N20
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits with draw tape 18,2 25 50 C 500N25
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits with draw tape 24,3 32 25 C 500N32
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits with draw tape 32,3 40 25 C 500N40

SPIRAL FLEXIBLE PVC CONDUITS- UV RAYS

RESISTANT EC

TECHNICAL DATA:
Material (spiral+cover)- shock resistance technopolymer on PVC base; Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94;
Compresion resistance- 320N; Instalation temperature: -15/+70°C; Operating temperature: -5/+65°C; Type: UV
rays resistance

Type Inner Diameter Ф Outer Diameter Ф Packing (m) Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) category
INSTALLATION

12 16,2 30 C 500UV12
14 18,2 30 C 500UV14
16 20,2 30 C 500UV16
UV flexible pvc conduit
20 24,2 30 C 500UV20
25 29,6 30 C 500UV25
32 37,2 30 C 500UV32

238

SPIRAL FOR CABLES

CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Type Colour Internal diameter External diameter Coil length Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (m) category
Spiral 6x8mm transparent 6 8 25 C 500SP6T
Spiral 6x8mm black 6 8 25 C 500SP6B
Spiral 10x12mm transparent 10 12 25 C 500SP10T
Spiral 10x12mm black 10 12 25 C 500SP10B
Spiral 14x16mm transparent 14 16 20 C 500SP14T
Spiral 14x16mm black 14 16 20 C 500SP14B

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

NYLON CABLE DRAW TAPE EC

Type Diameter Length (m) Colour Packing (pcs) Product Catalogue number
Ф (mm) category
3 5 Transparent 1/340 C 500305
Nylon cable draw tape
3 15 Transparent 1/120 C 500315

PVC INSULATED STEEL SPIRALS

TECHNICAL DATA:
Material - Galvanized steel, helically wound, flexible steel conduit with PVC coating
PVC-resistance against corrosion
Colour- black
Operating temperature: -5/+65

Type Inner Diameter Ф Outer Diameter Ф Packing (m) Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) category
11 15,2 50 C 500P11
14 18,4 50 C 500P14
16 20,4 50 C 500P16
PVC insulated steel spirals
18 22,4 50 C 500P18
26 30,4 25 C 500P26
37 42,4 25 C 500P37

INSTALLATION
PVC SELF-EXTIGUISHING RIGID INSULATING
CONDUIT EC

Rigid insulating conduit are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in office
and residential buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems. Fast and simple
installation. In combination with a wide range of accessories, building irregularities are quickly overcome. Non-
flammable material, easy to cut and paint. 239
TECHNICAL DATA:
Material - shock resistance technopolymer on rigid PVC base
Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Compresion resistance- 320N

Standard- EN 61386-1; EN 61386-21

Type External Length (m) Colour IP code Packing (pcs) Product Catalogue number
diameter Ø category
(mm)
16 3 GREY 40 34 C 50016
20 3 GREY 40 34 C 50020
Plastic cable conduit,
25 3 GREY 40 20 C 50025
with sleeve
32 3 GREY 40 10 C 50032
40 3 GREY 40 10 C 50040

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS www.elmarkholding.eu

ACCESSORIES FOR PVC SELF-EXTIGUISHING RIGID

INSULATING CONDUITS AND FLEXIBLE SPIRAL
CONDUITS, IP 65 EC

TECHNICAL DATA:
Material- shock resistant technopolymer on PVC base
Self-extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
Glow wire test: up to 960°C
O-ring to compensate the conduit tolerances
Standard- EN 61386-1; EN61386-21
RAL- 7035

Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
conduit ф (mm) category
16 65 GREY 50/200 C 500FB16
20 65 GREY 50/200 C 500FB20
PVC bend flexible
25 65 GREY 35/140 C 500FB25
32 65 GREY 20/80 C 500FB32

Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
conduit ф (mm) category
16 65 GREY 100/1000 C 500BB16
INSTALLATION

20 65 GREY 50/600 C 500BB20

PVC bend 90° 25 65 GREY 25/300 C 500BB25
32 65 GREY 100 C 500BB32
40 65 GREY 100 C 500BB40

240
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
conduit ф (mm) category
16 65 GREY 10/350 C 500CM16
20 65 GREY 10/350 C 500CM20
Conduit-conduit PVC joint 25 65 GREY 10/200 C 500CM25
32 65 GREY 10/100 C 500CM32
40 65 GREY 5/80 C 500CM40

Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
conduit ф (mm) category
16 65 GREY 10/350 C 500CB16
20 65 GREY 10/350 C 500CB20
Conduit-box PVC joint 25 65 GREY 10/200 C 500CB25
32 65 GREY 10/100 C 500CB32
40 65 GREY 5/80 C 500CB40

Type Conduit Flexible spiral IP code Colour Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
diameter diameter (pcs) category
(mm) (mm)
16 12 65 GREY 10/350 C 500DD16
20 16 65 GREY 10/350 C 500DD20
PVC rigid conduit - flexible spiral

INSTALLATION
25 20 65 GREY 10/200 C 500DD25
conduits joint
32 25 65 GREY 10/100 C 500DD32
40 32 65 GREY 5/100 C 500DD40

241
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS www.elmarkholding.eu

ACCESSORIES FOR PVC SELF-EXTIGUISHING RIGID

INSULATING CONDUITS AND FLEXIBLE SPIRAL
CONDUITS, IP 40 EC

TECHNICAL DATA:
Material- shock resistant technopolymer on PVC base
Self-extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
Glow wire test: up to 960°C
Standard- EN 61386-1; EN61386-21
RAL- 7035

Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
conduit ф (mm) category
16 44 GREY 50/200 C 500FK16
20 44 GREY 50/200 C 500FK20
PVC bend flexible
25 44 GREY 35/140 C 500FK25
32 44 GREY 20/80 C 500FK32

Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
conduit ф (mm) category
16 40 GREY 100/1000 C 500BK16
20 40 GREY 50/600 C 500BK20
PVC bend 90° 25 40 GREY 25/300 C 500BK25
32 40 GREY 100 C 500BK32
40 40 GREY 100 C 500BK40
INSTALLATION

Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
conduit ф (mm) category
16 40 GREY 100/400 C 500SK16
20 40 GREY 100/300 C 500SK20
Plastic bend small 90°
25 40 GREY 100/200 C 500SK25
242 32 40 GREY 50/150 C 500SK32
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
conduit ф (mm) category
16 40 GREY 100/300 C 500T16
20 40 GREY 100/200 C 500T20
PVC T-joint
25 40 GREY 50/100 C 500T25
32 40 GREY 50/100 C 500T32

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
conduit ф (mm) category
16 40 GREY 100/1200 C 500C16
20 40 GREY 100/800 C 500C20
PVC coupling 25 40 GREY 50/500 C 500C25
32 40 GREY 25/250 C 500C32
40 40 GREY 25/150 C 500C40

Type Used for cable conduit ф (mm) Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
16 GREY 100/1500 C 500CC16
20 GREY 100/1000 C 500CC20
PVC conduit clips 25 GREY 100/1000 C 500CC25
32 GREY 50/800 C 500CC32
40 GREY 50/400 C 500CC40

Type Used for cable conduit ф (mm) Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
16 GREY 100/1000 C 500CS16
PVC conduit clips with plug and 20 GREY 100/1000 C 500CS20
steel screw 25 GREY 100/800 C 500CS25
32 GREY 50/400 C 500CS32

INSTALLATION
Type Used for cable conduit ф (mm) Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
16 GREY 100/1000 C 500CО16
20 GREY 100/1000 C 500CО20
PVC collar conduit clips
25 GREY 100/800 C 500CО25 243
32 GREY 50/500 C 500CО32
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Type Length (mm) Colour Packing Product category Catalogue number

PVC modular fixing guide for clips 200 GREY 400 C 500BC

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS www.elmarkholding.eu

METAL CABLE TRAYS AND ACCESSORIES

The universal cable support systems are used for construction of cable link in closed production premises for
direct mounting on even vertical surfaces. They are perforated metal grates and accessories with standard lengths
and sizes. They allow quick construction of cable systems with many angles and derivations.
Type Size (mm) Tickness Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY 40x50 0,8 2500 1 C 56050825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY 40x100 0,8 2500 1 C 56100825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY 40x150 0,8 2500 1 C 56150825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY 40x200 0,8 2500 1 C 56200825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY 40x300 0,8 2500 1 C 56300825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY 60x100 0,8 2500 1 C 56100826U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY 60x200 0,8 2500 1 C 56200826U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY 60x300 0,8 2500 1 C 56300826U

Type Size (mm) Tickness Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
CT1 CABLE TRAY COVER 10x50 0,8 2500 1 C 56050825C
CT1 CABLE TRAY COVER 10x100 0,8 2500 1 C 56100825C
CT1 CABLE TRAY COVER 10x150 0,8 2500 1 C 56150825C
CT1 CABLE TRAY COVER 10x200 0,8 2500 1 C 56200825C
CT1 CABLE TRAY COVER 10x300 0,8 2500 1 C 56300825C
INSTALLATION

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
CT1 COUPLER FOR TRAYS WITH THE SAME SIZE 40 250 1 C 56250C

244
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Type Tickness Length (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
CT1 HANGING SUPPORT 1,5 100 1 C 56100HSW
CT1 HANGING SUPPORT 1,5 150 1 C 56150HSW
CT1 HANGING SUPPORT 1,5 200 1 C 56200HSW
CT1 HANGING SUPPORT 1,5 300 1 C 56300HSW

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Type Tickness Length (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
ANGLE 90D 1.5 100X100 1 C 5690100
ANGLE 90D 1.5 150Х150 1 C 5690150
ANGLE 90D 1.5 200Х200 1 C 5690200
ANGLE 90D 1.5 300Х300 1 C 5690300

Type Metric bolt Length (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

diameters (pcs) category
ANGLE COVER 90D 1.5 100x100 1 C 5690100C
ANGLE COVER 90D 1.5 150x150 1 C 5690150C
ANGLE COVER 90D 1.5 200x200 1 C 5690200C
ANGLE COVER 90D 1.5 300x300 1 C 5690300C

Type Tickness Usage Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number

category

INSTALLATION
CT1 HOLDER 1,5 for cable trays from 50-200mm 1 C 56200HOL
CT1 HOLDER 1,5 for cable trays 300mm 1 C 56300HOL

245
CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Type Thread Length (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category
THREADED HANGING ROD M6 1000 4.8 100 C M517079
THREADED HANGING ROD M8 1000 4.8 50 C M517080
THREADED HANGING ROD M10 1000 4.8 40 C M517078

Application: Suitable for fixing skirting, stud battens to wall and long runs of shelf support

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
LIGHTNING PROTECTION www.elmarkholding.eu

AIR-TERMINATION ROD

Suitable for wind loads according to Eurocode 1: DIN EN 50164 - 2. Last metre is tapered from Ø 16 mm to Ø 10
mm, material: AlMgSi. Matches stand system FangFix. Material: Aluminium
Model Length Diameter Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (pcs) category
101 VL2000 2000 10/16 1/10 G ME014066
101 VL2500 2500 10/16 1/10 G ME014071
101 VL3000 3000 10/16 1/10 G ME014063
101 VL3500 3500 10/16 1/10 G ME014069

STAND FOR AIR-TERMINATION ROD, FANGFIX SYSTEM

System consists of FangFix stone with base and clamp. FangFix clamp made of VA. Lightning current tested
with 100 kA (10/350). 16 kg stone with high level of stability. Quick and easy mounting of interception rod using
anchors. Concrete, frost-resistant. The FangFix stone can be stacked

Model Length Diameter Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

(mm) (mm) (pcs) category
F-FIX-16 373 84/119 1 G M014102

PROFILE EARTHING ROD WITH CONNECTION LUG

INSTALLATION

Cross-profile 50 x 50 x 3 mm. With connecting strap. Hot-dip galvanized. 1 through hole with diameter 13 mm.
2 through holes with diameter 11 mm. For the construction of earthing systems e.g. antenna or earthing of
building site distribution boards. Material: Steel

Model Length Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

(mm)
213 1500 DIN 1500 1 G M014007

246
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

EARTHING ROD WITH STRIP

Cold galvanized: have been coated in zinc to make them corrosion resistant. Material: Steel

Model Rog Strip Rog Strip Rog Strip Product Catalogue number
length length thickness thickness width width category
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
50/50/5 1500 1500 5 3 50 30 G M014048
60/60/6 1500 1500 6 3 60 40 G M014012

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LIGHTNING PROTECTION

COPPER-BONDED EARTHING ROD, THREADED

It guarantees trouble-free removal of energy up to 50 years since the copper layer does not allow corrosion.
Can be extended to the desired length with brass couplers. 99.9% pure electrolytic copper coating 300µm
Rods have a high steel Q 235 core and tip that provide superior strength when driving
Copper coating will not crack when bent or tear when driven

Model Length (mm) Diameter (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
EL-ER17 1500 17.2 1/10 G ME014011

COUPLERS FOR THREADED RODS

To connection two or many threaded copper-bonded ground rods

Model Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

EL-CTR 68 1 G ME014012

DRIVING STUD FOR COPPER-BONDED THREADED RODS

INSTALLATION
Material: Tempered steel.
Depending on the hardness of the soil, usually 1pc. enough for an object.

Model Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

EL-DS 58 1 G ME014013

247
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

CONNECTORS EARTHING ROD TO STRIP / CONDUCTOR

Material: stainless steel 304

Conductor size: 50mm² stranded
Strip size: 40x4mm max

Model Length (mm) Width (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
EL-1204 65 65 1/45 G ME014014

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
LIGHTNING PROTECTION www.elmarkholding.eu

HOT-DIP GALVANIZED STRIP FOR EARTH

Continuosly hot dip galvanized Earthing strip, DD11

Zinc coating: 500g/m2 =80mk
For lightning protection, earthing systems and ring equipotential bonding
Material: Steel

Model Length (mm) Thickness (mm) Width mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
EL-EP 30x3 48.6 3 30 1 G ME301089
EL-EP 40x4 39.6 4 40 1 G ME301090

COLD GALVANIZED STRIP FOR EARTH

Coated in zinc to make them corrosion resistant

Material: Steel

Model Length (mm) Thickness (mm) Width (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
40/4 6 4 40 1 G M014008

ALUMINIUM ROUND CONDUCTOR

Conductor material: AlMgSi

EL-LP 8 - without isolation
INSTALLATION

EL-LP 11- with not flammable halogen free isolation

Model Length Diameter Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

(mm) (mm)
EL-LP 8 140 8 1/140 G ME301092
EL-LP 11 100 11 1/100 G ME301096

248
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

CABLE HOLDER FOR FLAT ROOFS

Fixing the wire on flat roofs

Plastic stabilized PE against UV radiation with inserted concrete block

Model Length Width Height Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (mm)
EL- RCH 144 92 66 1 G ME301082

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LIGHTNING PROTECTION

EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING BAR

Equipotential busbar for equipotential bonding to DIN VDE 0100-410/-540 and DIN 62561-15.
Material of bar: Ms. Material of clamps: St galvanized
Connection options: 7 single or multi-wire cables 25mm2 or fine-wire cables to 16 mm2 (max. D- 7 mm)
1 D8-12mm
1 up to 30x5 / D8-12mm

Model Length Width Height Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (mm)
EL-EBR 182 52 42 1 G ME301084

VARIABLE EARTHING CONNECTOR FOR ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS

Aluminium- AlCu4MgSi(A)
Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 and 11mm. Type of fastening screw: Hexagonal bolt

Model Length Width Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

(mm) (mm)
EL-V 38 40 1 G ME301088

SCREWLESS CABLE BRACKET FOR EARTHING CONDUCTORS

INSTALLATION
Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 mm & 11 mm

Model Length Width Height Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (mm)
EL-VA 24.2 22 33.4 1/50 G ME301006

249
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

ATTACING CLAMP

Attaching the round conductors to metal parts of the premises

Model Length Width Height Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (mm)
EL-AC 78 40 36 1/100 G ME014070

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
LIGHTNING PROTECTION www.elmarkholding.eu

ROOF GUTTER CLAMP

Suitable for all bulge and bead thicknesses

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 and 11mm
Material: Steel

Model Length Width Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

(mm) (mm)
EL-RGC 50 45 1/100 G ME301008

CROSSBAR FOR EARTHING CONDUCTOR

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 and 11mm. Hot-dip galvanized

Material: Steel

Model Length Width Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

(mm) (mm)
156 K8-10 ST 43 20 1/100 G M301083

ROD HOLDER
INSTALLATION

For interception and earth entry rods 101 VL. Installed with crossbar and hexagonal bolts M6 x 16.
With female thread M8 or through hole with D- 7 mm
Material: Die-cast zinc, Galvanized

Model Length Width Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

(mm) (mm)
113 Z-16 56 20 1/10 G M014014

250
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

BRIDGE CONNECTOR FOR ROD HOLDER

For fitting round conductors with D 8 and 10 mm to earthing rods or flat strip 30x3.5. Including 2 hexagonal bolts
M8 x 20 high-grade stainless steel (V2A). Conforms to the requirements according to VDE 0185-305 (IEC 62305)
Material: Steel, Hot-dip Galvanized

Model Length Width Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

(mm) (mm)
226 8-10 70 30 1/20 G M014054

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LIGHTNING PROTECTION

EARTH CONNECTION TERMINAL FOR CONDUCTOR TO STRIP

For round conductor and flat strips. Suitable for cable 50 mm² and strips with width 40 mm.
With 2 hexagonal bolts M6 x 20 mm
Material: Steel, Hot-dip galvanized

Model Length (mm) Width (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
937 50 60 25 1/10 G M031239

CROSS-CONNECTORS FOR STRIPS AND CONDUCTORS

Material: stainless steel 304

Conductor size: 50mm² stranded
Strip size: 40x4mm max

Model Length (mm) Width (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
EL-1203 65 65 1/45 G ME301087

SPACER CLIP FOR STRIPS

Suitable for strips with width 40 mm

INSTALLATION
With thread M6 and 2 hexagonal bolts M6 x 16 (F)
Hot-dip galvanized
Material: Steel

Model Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
831 40 M6 65 14 14 1/10 G M301059

251
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

BRIDGE CONNECTOR FOR ROD HOLDER

With 1 attaching hole with D- 11 mm

With 2 x 4 mounting hole with D- 5.2 mm
With 2 x 2 mounting hole with D- 6.9 mm
Material: Aluminium

Model Length (mm) Width (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
288 DIN 170 30 1/20 G M014017

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES www.elmarkholding.eu

INSPECTION DOOR

Lightweight design for flush-mounted separation points

Claw length approx. 80 mm
Strip galvanized
Material: Steel

Model Length Width Height Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (mm)
5800 VZ 180 13.5 230 1 G M500684

FLUSH MOUNTING JUNCTION BOX EC350 SERIES

TECHNICAL DATA:
Rated voltage: up to 1000V
Box material: Shock resistant technopolymer
Screw material: Anticorrosive galvanized steel
For quick and easy cables or conduits inlet- Side are pre-cutting

#N#
By the separator it is possible to divide the box into separate sections for different circuits
IP code: IP40
INSTALLATION

Type Description Box dimensions (mm) Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
L H W category

EC350C4 Junction box 152 100 70 1/80 C 1927410

EC350C6 Junction box 196 152 70 1/40 C 1927411
EC350C7 Junction box 294 152 70 1/28 C 1927412
252 EC350C8 Junction box 392 152 70 1/20 C 1927413
EC3500S Separator 10/100 C 1927415
WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu DISTRIBUTION BOXES

CONSOLE BOX FOR PLASTERBOARD

Type Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Single 240 C 19274
Double 120 C 19275
Triple 60 C 19276

UNIVERSAL CONSOLE BOX-FLUSH MOUNTING

Type d (mm) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Console box- Ф65 65 300 C 1927302

CONSOLE BOX MULTI

INSTALLATION
Type d (mm) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Console box multi- Ø65 65 250 C 1927301

253
DISTRIBUTION BOXES

CONSOLE FOR BRICK AND CONCRETE ITALIAN TYPE

Type Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Triple Console box for brick and concrete 10/300 C 24203
Quadruple Console box for brick and concrete 10/200 C 71304
Sixfold Console box for brick and concrete 10/200 C 68206

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days and for ITALIAN TYPE will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
DISTRIBUTION BOXES www.elmarkholding.eu

CONSOLE BOX FOR PLASTERBOARD ITALIAN TYPE

Type Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Triple Console box for plasterboard 160 C 24205
Quadruple Console box for plasterboard 150 C 24206

CONSOLE BOX FOR PLASTERBOARD ITALIAN TYPE

Type Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Sixfold Console box for plasterboard 10/160 C 26636

DISTRIBUTION BOXES-SQUARE TYPE

Type Size Packing (pcs) Product Catalogue number

INSTALLATION

L W H category

80/80/50 80 80 50 100 C 1927402

100/100/50 without screws 100 100 50 40 C 1927400

254
DISTRIBUTION BOXES

DB FOR PLASTERBOARD-SQUARE TYPE

Type Size Packing (pcs) Product Catalogue number

L W H category

Distribution Box 80/80/45 80 80 45 100 C 1927405

Distribution Box 100/100/45 100 100 45 100 C 1927404

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days and for ITALIAN TYPE will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu DISTRIBUTION BOXES

DB FOR PLASTERBOARD-ROUND TYPE

Type d (mm) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Distribution Box Ф65 65 240 C 1927403
Distribution Box Ф70 70 200 C 1927407
Distribution Box Ф80 80 100 C 1927409

DISTRIBUTION BOXES - ROUND TYPE

Type d (mm) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Distribution Box Ф70 70 300 C 1927406
Distribution Box Ф80 80 200 C 1927408

CAP WITH FASTENING CLIPS

INSTALLATION
Type Suitable for holes with a diameter (mm) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Cap with clips 60-90 1/200 C 19277

255
DISTRIBUTION BOXES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days and for ITALIAN TYPE will be 45 days.
 INSTALLATION
WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES www.elmarkholding.eu

WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP44

Plastic junction boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension or tapping at
cable installations laying. Made of ABS material with openings for input - output conductors, with rubber gasket
to provide the corresponding IP code. Resistant to chemical, thermal and UV rays. Direct wall mounting with
screws.
Documentation corresponding to the product:
Standard: EN 60670-1

TECHNICAL DATA:
* Rated voltage: up to 1000V
* Material: ABS
* IP code: IP 44

Box type Box dimensions (mm) Gasket dimensions IP code Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(mm) category
D L H W d C
WB50/50 50 - - 50 22.5 17 44 320 C 8070
WB80/50 80 - - 50 22.5 17 44 240 C 8071
WB85/85/50 - 85 85 50 22.5 18.5 44 200 C 8072
INSTALLATION

WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP65

256 Box type Box dimensions (mm) Hole/pcs IP code Packing / Product Catalogue number
L H W d Box category

WBG 100/100/70 100 100 70 27 7 65 100 C 8001

WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES

WBG 150/110/70 150 110 70 27 10 65 60 C 8002

WBG 150/150/70 150 150 70 27 7 65 60 C 8003
WBG 200/100/70 200 100 70 27 8 65 50 C 8004
WBG 200/155/80 200 155 80 35 10 65 30 C 8005
WBG 200/200/80 200 200 80 35 12 65 30 C 8006
WBG 255/200/80 255 200 80 35 12 65 30 C 8007
WBG 300/250/120 300 250 120 35 12 65 20 C 8008
WBG 400/350/120 400 350 120 35 16 65 5 C 8009

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES

WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP66 WITH TRANSPARENT COVER

Box type Box dimensions (mm) IP code Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
L H W category

WBT 65/95/55 65 95 55 66 200 C 8010

WBT 100/100/50 100 100 50 66 150 C 8011
WBT 80/110/70 80 110 70 66 100 C 8012
WBT 80/130/85 80 130 85 66 100 C 8013
WBT 80/180/70 80 180 70 66 86 C 8014
WBT 80/250/85 80 250 85 66 60 C 8015
WBT 125/125/75 125 125 75 66 48 C 8016
WBT 125/125/100 125 125 100 66 36 C 8022
WBT 125/175/100 125 175 100 66 40 C 8017
WBT 150/200/100 150 200 100 66 24 C 8018
WBT 150/250/130 150 250 130 66 18 C 8019
WBT 200/200/130 200 200 130 66 27 C 8020
WBT 280/190/130 280 190 130 66 18 C 8021

JUNCTION BOXES B SERIES, IP54

Model Box dimensions (mm) Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
#K#

L H W category

B8 80 80 45 Grey 100 C 8030

B10 100 100 45 Grey 100 C 8031

INSTALLATION
THERMOPLASTIC CABLE JUNCTION BOX, A SERIES, IP54
257
Model Box dimensions (mm) Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
L H W category WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES

A6 80 43 34 Grey 10/100 G M008128

A8 75 75 36 Grey 10/150 G M008129
A11 85 85 40 Grey 10/80 G M008106
A14 100 100 38 Grey 10/100 G M008107
A18 125 100 38 Grey 10/80 G M008091

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES www.elmarkholding.eu

THERMOPLASTIC CABLE JUNCTION BOXES, T SERIES WITH PLUG-IN

SEAL, IP66
Model Box dimensions (mm) Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
L H W category

T25 (round) 80 80 51 Grey 5/125 G M008140

T40 90 90 52 Grey 5/80 G M008127
T60 114 114 57 Grey 6/60 G M008125
T100 150 116 67 Grey 1/40 G M008123
T160 190 150 77 Grey 1/20 G M008058
T250 240 190 95 Grey 1/8 G M008118
T350 285 201 120 Grey 1/5 G M008141

THERMOPLASTIC CABLE JUNCTION BOXES, T OE SERIES, ENCLOSED,

IP66
Model Box dimensions (mm) Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
L H W category

T60 OE 114 114 57 Grey 6/60 G M008105

T100 OE 150 116 67 Grey 1/40 G M008055
T160 OE 190 150 77 Grey 1/20 G M008124
T250 OE 240 190 95 Grey 1/8 G M008142
T350 OE 285 201 120 Grey 1/5 G M008143
INSTALLATION

JUNCTION BOX WITH PERFORATION MEMBRANE B 9/T, IP67

Model Box dimensions (mm) Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
258 L H W category

B 9/T 110 110 50 Grey 5/40 G M008144

WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu RAILS

SUPPLY BUSBAR

FUNCTIONS:
• enables the supply of a group of conductors
• provides simultaneous supply
• conducting section – electrotechnical copper
• insulation of the conducting section

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Rated operating voltage: 230/400V
• Isolating voltage: 500V
• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°С/3sec.
• Rated current (phase): 63/100A

CONNECTING:
• to the joining terminal of the breaker

Type Length Poles In with one point In with two points Packing / Box Product Catalogue
(copper busbar) (m) (number) of power supply of power supply (pcs) category number
1P 63 1 54 63А 90А 20 / 100 C 14163
1P 100 1 54 100A 120A 20 / 100 C 14190
2P 63 1 28 63A 90A 10 / 50 C 14263
3P 63 1 18 63А 90А 6 / 30 C 14363
3P 100 1 18 100A 120A 5 / 50 C 14390
DP 1N 1 56 63A 90A 10 / 50 C 14463
C100 1P 1 - 125A 150A 20 / 100 C 14190T
C100 2P 1 - 125A 150A 10 / 50 C 14290T
C100 3P 1 - 125A 159A 5 / 20 C 14390T
U 1P 63 1 54 63A 90A 20 / 100 C 14163U
U 2P 63 1 28 63A 90A 10 / 50 C 14263U
U 3P 63 1 18 63A 90A 6 / 30 C 14363U
U 4P 63 1 13 63A 90A 5 / 20 C 14463U

INSTALLATION
MOUNTING (DIN) RAIL
259
FUNCTIONS:
• serves for mounting breakers, residual current devices, contactors and other elements
• provides a firm fixation of the elements
RAILS

TECHNICAL DATA:
• brass alloy with galvanic cover
• factory drilled mounting openings
• length up to 1m

CONNECTING:
• with bolts or other fixing elements to the mounting surface

Length (m) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

1m 20 / 100 C 14001

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
TERMINALS www.elmarkholding.eu

ZERO TERMINALS

SP 031
Rail type L H W M Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category
SP 029-4 82.9 21.5 12 5x10 10 / 500 C 14204
SP 029-6 100.9 21.5 12 5x10 10 / 800 C 14206
SP 029-8 118.9 21.5 12 5x10 20 / 300 C 14208
SP 029-10 136.9 21.5 12 5x10 20 / 300 C 14210
SP 029-12 182.4 21.5 12 5x10 20 / 250 C 14212
SP 029 SP 031-4 59.5 31.5 12.4 5x10 5 / 400 C 14304
SP 031-6 76.5 31.5 12.4 5x10 5 / 400 C 14306
SP 031-8 93 31.5 12.4 5x10 5 / 400 C 14308
SP 031-10 111 31.5 12.4 5x10 5 / 400 C 14310
SP 031-12 128 31.5 12.4 5x10 5 / 300 C 14312

ZERO RAILS

They represent a brass rail with rectangular section with factory made openings for the conductors and bolts for
clamping of the conductor. They are offered in types with insulated and non-insulated rail. They are used in the
electrical distribution boxes for zeroing and earthing.

TECHNICAL DATA: • Colour: gray/blue

• Material: brass for the current leading elements • Application: general
• Insulation material: plastic • Ambient temperature: -40 to +65°C

Rail Length Height Width Ø D (mm) Bolt Number of Packing / Product Catalogue
type L (mm) H (mm) W (mm) terminals Box (pcs) category number
INSTALLATION

BRASS 1000 7.8 6 5 M4 54 100 C 14002

ZERO
250 - - 5 M4 16 200 C 14012
insulated

260

TERMINAL BLOCKS TBH TYPE

TERMINALS

Type Pieces In (А) Un (V) Colour Section of the Packing / Box Product Catalogue
in a strip conductor (mm²) (pcs) category number
TBH 3A 12 3 660 semitransparent tо 1.5 10 / 1000 C 31003
TBH 6A 12 6 660 semitransparent tо 4 10 / 1000 C 31006
TBH 10A 12 10 660 semitransparent tо 6 10 / 500 C 31010
TBH 15A 12 15 660 white tо 6 10 / 500 C 31015
TBH 20A 12 20 660 white tо 10 10 / 400 C 31020

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu TERMINALS

FIXED TERMINAL BLOCKS - LTU2 UK SERIES

Fixed terminal blocks with universal application into electrical distribution boxes. For DIN-rail mounting. Variety
of sizes for optimum using of available space by selection of appropriate terminals for the corresponding
conductors. Made of non-flammable insulation polymeric material.

Type Section of the conductor Size of the terminal In Un Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
(mm²) (mm) (А) (V) (pcs) category number
single-core multicore L H W
LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 grey 50 / 3000 C 31033
LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 red 50 / 3000 C 31032
LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 black 50 / 3000 C 31031
LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 blue 50 / 3000 C 31035

Type Section of the Size of the In (А) Un (V) Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
conductor (mm²) terminal (mm) (pcs) category number
single-core multicore L H W
LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 grey 50 / 2000 C 31053
LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 red 50 / 2000 C 31052
LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 black 50 / 2000 C 31051
LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 blue 50 / 2000 C 31055

INSTALLATION
Type Section of the Size of the In (А) Un (V) Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
conductor (mm²) terminal (mm) (pcs) category number
single-core multicore L H W
LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 grey 50 / 1000 C 31063
LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 red 50 / 1000 C 31062
LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 black 50 / 1000 C 31061
LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 blue 50 / 1000 C 31065 261
TERMINALS

Type Section of the Size of the terminal In (А) Un (V) Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
conductor (mm²) (mm) (pcs) category number
single-core multicore L H W
LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 grey 50 / 1000 C 31103
LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 red 50 / 1000 C 31102
LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 black 50 / 1000 C 31101
LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 blue 50 / 1000 C 31105

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
TERMINALS www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Section of the conductor Size of the terminal In Un Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
(mm²) (mm) (А) (V) (pcs) category number
single-core multicore L H W
LTU2UIK 16 2.5-25 4-16 42.5 47 12.2 101 800 grey 30 / 1200 C 31163
LTU2UIK 35 10-35 10-35 55 62 15.2 125 800 grey 20 / 400 C 31353

FIXED TERMINAL BLOCKS - JD SERIES

Two-sided insulated fixed terminal blocks designed to connect groundes conductors. Made of non-flammable
insulation polymeric material.

Type Section of the conductor Size of the terminal In Un Colour Packing / Box Product Catalogue
(mm²) (mm) (А) (V) (pcs) category number
single-core multicore L H W
5JD 0.2-4 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 34 800 yellow-green 50 / 1000 C 31054
6JD 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 37 800 yellow-green 50 / 1000 C 31064
10JD 0.5-10 0.5-6 42.5 47 8.2 61 800 yellow-green 50 / 1000 C 31104
16JD 2.5-25 2.5-16 42.5 47 12.2 108 800 yellow-green 50 / 600 C 31164
35JD 2.5-35 2.5-35 42.5 47 15 135 800 yellow-green 20 / 400 C 31354
INSTALLATION

MARKING TAGS - ZB TYPE

Accessories for marking and separation of different electrical circuits, different voltages and fixing of elements for
DIN-rail mounting.

Type Pieces in a strip Colour Size Packing / Box Product Catalogue number
(mm) (pcs) category

262 ZB6 20 white 6 100 / 1200 C 31906

ZB8 10 white 8 100 / 1200 C 31908
TERMINALS

END COVER

Type Colour Thickness (mm) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
EC grey 8 200 / 6000 C 31901

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu TERMINALS

UNIVERSAL END FIXED PIECES E/UK TYPE

Type Colour Thickness (mm) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
E/UK grey 5 200 / 2400 C 31902

DOUBLE DECK TERMINAL BLOKS

Type Section of the conductor Rated Rated Colour Dimmensions Packing Product Catalogue
(mm²) current voltage (mm) (pcs.) category number
single-core multicore (А) (V) L H W
DDTB4/5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 32 500 baige 59.9 54 6 50/1000 C 31056D
DDTB4/5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 32 500 grey 59.9 54 6 50/1000 C 31053D
End cover for DDTB4/5N grey 54 43.5 1.5 200/6000 C 31901D

INSULATING MOUNTING TERMINAL - TB25

INSTALLATION
FUNCTIONS: • Fabric isolated with plastic cover
• provides a firm joining of rigid or flexible conductors • Appropriate for joining to copper or aluminum cables
up to 35mm² to power supply busbar • Rated voltage: 230V
• provides a firm joining of the power supply conductor • Rated current: up to 63A
to the breaker • Isolating voltage: ≥500V
• provides enough contact surface of the conductor • IP code: IP>20
• Brass alloy with galvanic cover • Section of power supply conductor: up to 35mm²

Type Section of the conductor (mm²) Rated current Packing / Box Product category Catalogue 263
In (A) (pcs) number
TB 25 2.5 to 35 63 20 / 2000 C 31025 TERMINALS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
TERMINALS www.elmarkholding.eu

UNIPOLAR DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BLOCKS

FOR COPPER AND ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Housing material: PA Nylon
• Terminal material: tin plated brass
• Grade of flame retardant: UL94v-0
• Mounting: DIN rail or screw fixing
Type Current (A) Quantity cross sections mm² Dimmensions Packing Product Catalogue
(mm) (pcs.) category number
L H W
PPDTB80 80A 1x 6-16 mm² 30 69 49 C 319080
4x 2.5-6 mm²
2x 2.5-16 mm²
PPDTB125 125A 1x 10-35 mm² 29 77 46 C 319125
6x 2.5-16 mm²
PPDTB160 160A 1x 10-70 mm² 29 77 46 C 319160
6x 2.5-16 mm²
PPDTB250 255A 1x 35-120 mm² 47 96 50 C 319250
8x 2.5-16 mm²
4x 2.5-10 mm²
PPDTB400 400A 1x 95-185 mm² 47 96 50 C 319400
8x 2.5-16 mm²
4x 2.5-10 mm²

TERMINAL BLOCKS TBF TYPE

INSTALLATION

Type Pieces in a Section of the conductor Rated Rated Dimmensions Product Catalogue
terminal (mm²) current voltage (mm) category number
(A) (V L H W

two terminal block 2 4 mm² 32 400 12.4 14.5 20.5 C 31021

three terminal block 3 4 mm² 32 400 17.0 14.5 20.5 C 31022
five terminal block 5 4 mm² 32 400 26.6 14.5 20.5 C 31023

264
TERMINALS

FAST LIGHTING CABLE CONNECTOR

Type Pieces in a Section of the conductor Rated Rated Dimmensions (mm) Product Catalogue
terminal (mm²) current voltage L H W category number
(A) (V
lighting connector 3 1.0-2.5 mm²/0.5-2.5 mm² 25 400 C 31024

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu TERMINALS

QUICK CONNECTION TEMINAL BLOCK

Type Pieces in a Section of the conductor Rated Rated Dimmensions (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
terminal (mm²) current voltage L W H (pcs.) category number
(A) (V
2P- 2 in/ 2 out 4 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 25.5 14.4 1/100 C 31026
3P- 3 in/ 3 out 6 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 30.5 14.4 1/70 C 31027
5P- 5 in/ 5 out 10 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 40.5 14.4 1/50 C 31028

QUICK CONNECTION TEMINAL BLOCK

Type Pieces in a Section of the conductor Rated Rated Dimmensions (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
terminal (mm²) current voltage L W H (pcs.) category number
(A) (V
2P- 2 in/ 4 out 6 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 25.9 14.55 1/50 C 31029
2P- 2 in/ 6 out 8 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 35.9 14.55 1/50 C 31030

QUICK CONNECTION TEMINAL BLOCK

INSTALLATION
Type Pieces in a Section of the conductor Rated Rated Dimmensions (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
terminal (mm²) current voltage L W H (pcs.) category number
(A) (V
3P- 3 in/ 6 out 9 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 35.9 14.6 1/50 C 31034
3P- 3 in/ 9 out 12 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 48.5 14.6 1/50 C 31036

265
TERMINALS

MODULE TERMINAL BLOCK FOR QUICK CABLE CONNECTION

Type Pieces in a Section of the conductor Rated Rated Dimmensions (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
terminal (mm²) current voltage L W H (pcs.) category number
(A) (V
1P- 1 in/ 1 out 2 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 39.3 8.5 14.5 1/100 C 31037
 INSTALLATION
CONSUMMATIVE www.elmarkholding.eu

CABLE GLANDS PG TYPE

Plastic pipes supplied with the corresponding gaskets • Material: polyethylene (PE)
and nuts. Designed to provide necessary IP code on the • Colour: gray
points where conductors pass through the walls of the • Application: general
electric distribution boxes. All cable gland elements are • Ambient temperature: -40 to +65°C
made of high quality plastic (PE) and rubber. • IP code: IP 68
TECHNICAL DATA:
Type Overlapping T (mm) B (mm) d (mm) D (mm) L1 (mm) L2 (mm) Packing / Box Product Catalogue
Standard: EN 60 423; 48580-81 field (pcs) category number
PG-7 3.5-6.8 16.3 18 12 6.6 10 22 100 / 4000 C 500070
PG-9 5-8 18.9 21.7 15.5 8.5 10 25 100 / 4000 C 500090
PG-11 6-10 21.7 23.5 18.5 10.4 8.5 29 100 / 3000 C 500110
PG-13.5 7-12 23.6 26.5 20 13 10 29 100 / 2000 C 500135
PG-16 8-14 26.5 29.3 21.5 14 9 29 100 / 2000 C 500160
PG-19 9-17 29 32 23 17 12 29 100 / 2000 C 500190
PG-21 10-18 32.3 35.6 28 19 12 35 100 / 1000 C 500210
PG-25 15-22 32.6 32.6 29.8 24 13 31 100 / 1000 C 500250
PG-29 16-24 41.1 45.4 36 26 12.5 40 50 / 500 C 500290
PG-36 18-28 52 58 46 31.5 12.5 45 50 / 350 C 500360
PG-42 26-36 57.4 61.9 51 37.6 17.5 47 20 / 200 C 500420
PG-48 32-39 65.2 70.7 58 43 21 50 20 / 200 C 500480

#K#
CABLE CONNECTOR

The cable connectors are hopeful way for assembling both cables. The high-temperature and water resistant
stability assure to the connector assure a high degree of security even in extreme conditions.
INSTALLATION

Type Section of the Length Ф Cable glands IP code Packing / Box Product Catalogue
conductor (mm²) (mm) (mm) type (pcs) category number
CABLE CONNECTOR 11 2x0,5-2,5 78,3 26,2 PG11 68 50 C 31072
CABLE CONNECTOR 16 5x1,5- 2,5 115 26,5 PG16 67 50 C 59245
CABLE CONNECTOR 21 5x4-6 124 33,5 PG21 67 50 C 59246

266
CONSUMMATIVE

WATERPROOF TERMINAL BOX

Type Section of the conductor Rated current Voltage (V) Material Product Catalogue
(mm²) (A) category number
TERMINAL BOX IP44 0.5-4.0 6 450 Polycarbonate C 31071
TERMINAL BOX IP65 0.5-2.5 10 450 Polycarbonate C 31070

Terminal box IP65

Terminal box IP44

 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CONSUMMATIVE

SUPPORT INSULATOR FOR LOW VOLTAGE

Support insulators are used in control and distribution TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:

cabinets mounting when bars isolation is required. • Rated voltage: 1000V
Provides reliable insulation of live parts. • Insulating voltage: 5000 V
• Ambient temperature : -40 to +65°C
Type Impulse Strength Fasting Bolt Dimmensions (mm) Packing (pcs.) Product Catalogue
voltage kV strength H W a ø category number

SM 25 6 500 6 6 25 30 13 23 10 / 600 C 31725

SM 30 8 550 8 8 30 32 10 27 10 / 500 C 31730
SM 35 10 600 10 8 35 32 10 28 10 / 400 C 31735
SM 40 12 650 12 8 40 40 10 33 10 / 240 C 31740
SM 51 15 1000 20 8 51 50 12 28 10 / 240 C 31751
SM 76 25 1500 40 10 76 45 16 34 10 / 120 C 31776

CABLE FIXING CLIPS

Support insulators are used in control and distribution TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:

cabinets mounting when bars isolation is required. • Rated voltage: 1000V
Provides reliable insulation of live parts. • Insulating voltage: 5000 V
• Ambient temperature : -40 to +65°C
Type Diameter Ø (mm) Packing (pcs) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
CHR-4 4 100 100/500 C 500004
CHR-5 5 100 100/ 500 C 500005
CHR-6 6 100 100/ 300 C 500006
CHR-7 7 100 100/ 300 C 500007
CHR-8 8 100 100/ 250 C 500008

INSTALLATION
CHR-9 9 100 100/ 200 C 500009
CHR-10 10 100 100/ 200 C 500010
CHR-12 12 100 100/ 100 C 500012
CHR-14 14 100 100/ 50 C 500014
CHR-16 16 100 100/ 50 C 500016

267
CONSUMMATIVE

PVC INSULATING TAPE

Colour Thickness (mm) Width Length Packing / Box Product category Catalogue number
(mm) (m) (pcs)
Black 0.15 19 9,14 10 / 200 C 51007
Blue 0.15 19 9,14 10 / 200 C 51009
Red 0.15 19 18,28 10 / 200 C 51002
White 0.15 19 18,28 10 / 200 C 51005
Blue 0.15 19 18,28 10 / 200 C 51006
 INSTALLATION
CONSUMMATIVE www.elmarkholding.eu

PVC INSULATING TAPE

Soft, flexible with good adhesiveness and flame retardant. Working temperature: 0-80°C. Electrical strength: 40kV/mm

Colour Thickness (mm) Width Length Packing / Box Product category Catalogue number
(mm) (m) (pcs)
Black 0.15 19 10 1/300 C 51011
White 0.15 19 10 1/300 C 51012
Blue 0.15 19 10 1/300 C 51013
Red 0.15 19 10 1/300 C 51014
Yellow / Green 0.15 19 10 1/300 C 51015
Black 0.15 19 20 1/200 C 51021
White 0.15 19 20 1/200 C 51022
Blue 0.15 19 20 1/200 C 51023
Red 0.15 19 20 1/200 C 51024
Yellow / Green 0.15 19 20 1/200 C 51025

PVC INSULATING TAPE 3M TEMFLEX 1500

Colour Thickness Width Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) category
Black 0.15 19 20 10/100 G M151016
INSTALLATION

268
CONSUMMATIVE

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CONSUMMATIVE

BLACK SELF - AMALGAMATING

HIGH VOLTAGE TAPE BISHOP 963

69kV | Waterproof | UV-Resistant| Moisture, corrosion and chemical resistance

Colour Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Black 19 9 1 G M051004

ALUMINIUM TAPE

Ideal for temporary exhaust pipe repair heating, ventilation - electrics and electronics insulation and construction
industries

Colour Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Aluminium 50 10 1 G M499469
#N#

DUCT TAPE

INSTALLATION
Ideal for temporary exhaust pipe repair heating, ventilation - electrics and electronics insulation and construction
industries

Colour Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Grey 50 25 1 C 51055
Black 50 25 1 G M499153

269
CONSUMMATIVE

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
CONSUMMATIVE www.elmarkholding.eu

MASKING TAPE

Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
25 50 1 G M516400
50 50 1 G M516401

DOUBLE SIDED MOUNTING TAPE

Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
25 5 1 G M516402
50 25 1 G M516403

HAZARD TAPE

Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
50 100 1 G M500179

#N#
INSTALLATION

HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES WITH GLUE GL TYPE

Type colour Diameter before shrinking Wall thikness Shrinkage Packing Product Catalogue
(mm) (mm) ratio (pcs; m) category number
GL black D2.4 (≥2.4) 0.7±0.15 3:1 200 C 3010024GL
GL black D3.2 (3.5±0.3) 0.9±0.15 3:1 200 C 3010032GL
270 GL black D4.8 (5.2±0.3) 1.0±0.15 3:1 100 C 3010048GL
GL black D6.4 (6.8±0.4) 1.2±0.15 3:1 100 C 3010064GL
GL black D7.9 (8.4±0.4) 1.3±0.15 3:1 100 C 3010079GL
GL black D9.5 (9.9±0.4) 1.4±0.15 3:1 1,22 C 3010095GL
CONSUMMATIVE

GL black D12.7 (13.2±0.5) 1.6±0.20 3:1 1,22 C 3010127GL

GL black D15.0 (15.6±0.5) 1.8±0.20 3:1 1,22 C 3010150GL
GL black D19.1 (19.6±0.5) 2.0±0.20 3:1 1,22 C 3010191GL
GL black D25.4 (25.4±0.8) 2.1±0.20 3:1 1,22 C 3010254GL
GL black D30.0 (≥30) 2.2±0.20 3:1 1,22 C 3010300GL
GL black D39 (≥40) 2.4±0.20 3:1 1,22 C 3010390GL
GL black D50 (≥50) 2.7±0.25 3:1 1,22 C 3010500GL
GL black D64 (≥60) 3.0±0.25 3:1 1,22 C 3010640GL

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days, and for Glue GL will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES

HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES ZDG TYPE

Thin-wall heat shrinkage tubes are used for insulation the net structure, they resume the initial pipe diameter
of cable connection, at conductors repair to protect the and take the form of the cable, pressing it and not
cable head from corrosion, for protection of the cable allowing the moisture to get under the pipe.
insulation from water and moisture, for restoring the
cable insulation integrity, etc. It is a plastic thin wall pipe TECHNICAL DATA:
which at temperature higher than 120°C shrinks its initial • Material: triple cross - linked polyolefin
diameter to a certain degree. The material has high • Colours: blue, black, red, yellow, yellow-green, green,
temperature and UV rays wear resistance. The material white
represents the so called permanently netted plastic. • Shrinkage ratio: min 2 : 1
This material is obtained as the plastic billet is processed • Ambient temperature: -40 to + 100°C
with the help of high energy electron rays so that • Shrinkage temperature: min 120°C
inner molecular bonds between adjacent molecules • Condition of the material during fire exposure: slight
are formed. After that the pipe is heated to the boiling burning
point, the pipe inflates, so do the inner molecular bonds. • The material does not emit hazardous substances
Standard: EN 60 684 Then the pipe is sharply refrigerated and the molecules • Insulation resistance: 1х 10 12 Ω/cm
stay in the condition of inflated bonds for indefinite long • Application: general
time. Heating the pipe repeatedly (after being mounted • Insulating voltage 1000 V
to the given cable) the crystals melt again but due to
Type D1 (mm) D2 (mm) S (mm) Packing / Box (m) Product category Catalogue number *
ZDG 1 0.5 0.04 200 / 4000 C 301001X
ZDG 1.5 0.75 0.04 200 / 4000 C 301115X
ZDG 2 1.0 0.05 200 / 4000 C 301002X
ZDG 3 1.5 0.05 200 / 2000 C 301003X
ZDG 4 2.0 0.08 100 / 1700 C 301004X
ZDG 5 2.5 0.08 100 / 1200 C 301005X
ZDG 6 3.0 0.08 100 / 1000 C 301006X
ZDG 7 3.5 0.08 100 / 1000 C 301007X
ZDG 8 4.0 0.08 100 / 1500 C 301008X
ZDG 9 4.5 0.08 100 / 1500 C 301009X
ZDG 10 5.0 0.08 100 / 1500 C 301010X
ZDG 11 5.5 0.08 100 / 1500 C 301011X
ZDG 12 6.0 0.08
 100 / 1200 C 301012X
ZDG 13 6.5 0.08 100 / 1200 C 301013X

INSTALLATION
ZDG 14 7.0 0.08 100 / 1200 C 301014X
ZDG 15 7.5 0.08 100 / 1200 C 301015X
ZDG 16 8.0 0.08 100 / 1200 C 301016X
ZDG 18 9.0 0.08 50 / 600 C 301018X
ZDG 20 10 0.08 50 / 500 C 301020X
ZDG 22 11 0.08
 50 / 500 C 301022X
ZDG 25 12.5 0.08 25 / 600 C 301025X
ZDG 28 14 0.08 25 / 300 C 301028X
ZDG 30 15 0.08 25 / 300 C 301030X
271
ZDG 35 17.5 0.08 25 / 300 C 301035X
ZDG 40 20 0.08 25 / 250 C 301040X
ZDG 50 25 0.08 25 / 200 C 301050X
HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES

ZDG 60 30 0.08 25 / 300 C 301060X

ZDG 70 35 0.08 25 / 250 C 301070X
ZDG 80 40 0.08 25 / 100 C 301080X
ZDG 90 45 0.08 25 / 150 C 301090X
ZDG 100 50 0.08 25 / 100 C 301100X
ZDG 120 60 0.08 25 / 200 C 301120X
ZDG 150 75 0.08 25 / 100 C 301150X

Note: * At orders after the catalogue number of the corresponding diameter a letter showing the colour must be
added: B – blue; R – red; K - black; G - green; Y – yellow;

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
CONSUMMATIVE www.elmarkholding.eu

CABLE TAGS – SETS

Type Section (mm) Number in a Packing / Box Product Catalogue Type Section (mm) Number in a Packing / Box Product Catalogue
roller (pcs) category number roller (pcs) category number
EC-0-0 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318000 EC-1-0 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318010
EC-0-1 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318001 EC-1-1 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318011
EC-0-2 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318002 EC-1-2 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318012
EC-0-3 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318003 EC-1-3 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318013
EC-0-4 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318004 EC-1-4 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318014
EC-0-5 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318005 EC-1-5 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318015
EC-0-6 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318006 EC-1-6 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318016
EC-0-7 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318007 EC-1-7 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318017
EC-0-8 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318008 EC-1-8 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318018
EC-0-9 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 318009 EC-1-9 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 318019
EC-0-a 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800A EC-1-a 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801A
EC-0-b 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800B EC-1-b 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801B
EC-0-R 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800R EC-1-R 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801R
EC-0-S 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800S EC-1-S 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801S
EC-0-T 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800T EC-1-T 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801T
EC-0-N 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800N EC-1-N 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801N
EC-0-P 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800P EC-1-P 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801P
EC-0-Е 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800E EC-1-Е 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801E
EC-0-А 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800A EC-1-А 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801A
EC-0-B 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800B EC-1-B 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801B
EC-0-C 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800C EC-1-C 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801C
EC-0-Q 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 C 31800Q EC-1-Q 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 C 31801Q

Type Section (mm) Number in a Packing / Box Product Catalogue Type Section (mm) Number in a Packing / Box Product Catalogue
roller (pcs) category number roller (pcs) category number
INSTALLATION

EC-2-0 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318020 EC-3-0 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318030
EC-2-1 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318021 EC-3-1 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318031
EC-2-2 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318022 EC-3-2 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318032
EC-2-3 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318023 EC-3-3 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318033
EC-2-4 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318024 EC-3-4 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318034
EC-2-5 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318025 EC-3-5 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318035
EC-2-6 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318026 EC-3-6 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318036
EC-2-7 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318027 EC-3-7 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318037
272 EC-2-8 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318028 EC-3-8 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318038
EC-2-9 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 318029 EC-3-9 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 318039
EC-2-a 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802A EC-3-a 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803A
EC-2-b 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802B EC-3-b 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803B
CONSUMMATIVE

EC-2-R 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802R EC-3-R 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803R
EC-2-S 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802S EC-3-S 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803S
EC-2-T 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802T EC-3-T 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803T
EC-2-N 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802N EC-3-N 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803N
EC-2-P 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802P EC-3-P 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803P
EC-2-Е 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802E EC-3-Е 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803E
EC-2-А 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802A EC-3-А 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803A
EC-2-B 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802B EC-3-B 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803B
EC-2-C 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802C EC-3-C 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803C
EC-2-Q 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 C 31802Q EC-3-Q 5 - 7.2 250 150 C 31803Q

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLE TIE ACCESSORIES

CABLE TIE HOLDER

Type colour Bore a b D W1 W2 L Packing Product Catalogue

diameter (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category number
(mm)
МТ-8 black ф8 9,7 6,3 9,9 12,7 12,6 43 100 C 500046
МТ-8 white ф8 9,7 6,3 9,9 12,7 12,6 43 100 C 500047

CABLE TIE MOUNTS-ADHESIVE

Type colour Dimmensions Packing Product Catalogue number

(mm) (pcs.) category
L W H T
#K#

МТ-25 white 25 25 7,5 6,2 100 C 500041

МТ-25 black 25 25 7,5 6,2 100 C 500042
МТ-30 white 30 30 8,7 6,4 100 C 500043
МТ-30 black 30 30 8,7 6,4 100 C 500039

INSTALLATION
CABLE TIE BASES FIXED WITH SCREWS 273

Type Color a b L d D Packing Product Catalogue

CABLE TIE ACCESSORIES
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category number
CTH-2C white 22 16,5 9 5,8 9,5 100 C 500048
CTH-2C black 22 16,5 9 5,8 9,5 100 C 500038

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days, and for CTH-2C will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
CABLE TIE ACCESSORIES www.elmarkholding.eu

CABLE TIES - WHITE

Type Length Colour Width Packing Packing / Box Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) category number
Cable ties 100 white 2.5 100 10 / 800 C 500100
Cable ties 150 white 2.5 100 10 / 500 C 500152
Cable ties 160 white 2.5 100 10 / 500 C 500162
Cable ties 200 white 2.5 100 10 / 400 C 500202
Cable ties 250 white 3.5 100 10 / 250 C 500253
Cable ties 280 white 3.5 100 10 / 200 C 500283
Cable ties 300 white 3.5 100 10 / 200 C 500303
Cable ties 300 white 4.8 100 10 / 120 C 500304
Cable ties 370 white 3.5 100 10 / 120 C 500373
Cable ties 380 white 4.8 100 10 / 100 C 500384
Cable ties 450 white 4.8 100 10 / 70 C 500454
Cable ties 500 white 7.9 100 5 / 40 C 500507

CABLE TIES - BLACK

Type Length Colour Width Packing Packing / Box Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) category number
Cable ties 150 black 2.5 100 10 / 500 C 500151
Cable ties 160 black 2.5 100 10 / 500 C 500161
Cable ties 250 black 3.5 100 10 / 250 C 500251
Cable ties 280 black 3.5 100 10 / 200 C 500281
Cable ties 300 black 3.5 100 10 / 200 C 500301
INSTALLATION

Cable ties 500 black 7.9 100 40 C 500501

274 CABLE HOLDER WITH TIE

Type Color a b c d Packing Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category number
CABLE TIE ACCESSORIES

cable holder with tie black 27 14 140 0,5 20 C 500444

cable holder with tie grey 27 14 140 0,5 20 C 500445

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days, and for CABLE HOLDER will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLE TIE ACCESSORIES

WALL PLUG WITH CABLE TIE

Type Color Bore diameter Tie Length Packing Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (pcs) category number
wall plug with cable tie black Ø6 95 50 C 500427
wall plug with cable tie black Ø8 95 50 C 500425

WIRE GRIP BAND FOR FLAT CABLE

Type Color Bore diameter width of the head Packing Product Catalogue
(mm) (pcs) category number
wire grip band for flat cable 1 white 6-7 18 50 C 500432
wire grip band for flat cable 2 white 6-7 12 50 C 500434
wire grip band for flat cable 3 white 6-7 10 50 C 500436
Wire grip band 1 is Suitable for flat cables with section- 2x1.0; 2x1.5mm²
Wire grip band 2 is Suitable for flat cables with section- 2x2.5; 3x1.0
Wire grip band 3 is Suitable for flat cables with section- 2x4; 2x6; 3x1.5; 3x2.5mm²

WIRE GRIP BAND FOR ROUND CABLE

Type Color Bore diameter width of the head Packing Product Catalogue
(mm) (pcs) category number

INSTALLATION
wire grip band for round cable 4 white 6-7 6 50 C 500438
wire grip band for round cable 5 white 6-7 8 50 C 500440
wire grip band for round cable 6 white 6-7 10 50 C 500439
wire grip band for round cable 7 white 6-7 14 50 C 500441
wire grip band for round cable 8 white 8-9 20 50 C 500442
Wire grip band 4 is Suitable for round cables with section- 2x1.0; 2x1.5; 3x1.0; 3x2.5mm²; RG6
Wire grip band 5 is Suitable for round cables with section- 2x0.5; 2x0.75; UTP; FTP
Wire grip band 6 is Suitable for round cables with section- 2x2.5; 3x1.5; 4x1
Wire grip band 7 is Suitable for round cables with section- 3x6; 4x4; 5x2.5 275
Wire grip band 8 is Suitable for round cables with diameter D20mm
CABLE TIE ACCESSORIES

HARDENED STEEL NAILS, SIKO

Model Length Diameter Packing/Box Product category Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (pcs) number
Siko 16 16 2 100/2000 G M499108
Siko 30 30 2 100/1000 G M499489

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
LAMP HOLDERS www.elmarkholding.eu

LAMP HOLDER

Type Lamp Material Dimmensions (mm) Packing Product Catalogue

Diameter Width Height d (pcs.) category number

Lamp holder GU10 ceramic 27 20 16 3.4 100 C 99292

Length of the cable: 140 mm

LAMP HOLDER

Type Lamp Material Dimmensions (mm) Packing Product Catalogue

Diameter Width Height d (pcs.) category number

G 4 / G 5.3 /
Lamp holder ceramic 16 11 10 3.4 200 C 99293
GY 6.35

Length of the cable: 90 mm

CERAMIC LAMP HOLDER

Type Lamp Material Dimmensions (mm) Packing Product Catalogue

INSTALLATION

Length Diameter Width d (pcs.) category number

Lamp holder E 14 ceramic 44 33 20 4,3 40/400 C 99296

Lamp holder E 27 ceramic 48 41 20 4,3 40/400 C 99294
Lamp holder with
E 27 ceramic 48 41 20 4,3 16/320 C 99295
support
Lamp holder E 40 ceramic 72 56 23 4,3 100 C 99298

276
LAMP HOLDERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu LAMP HOLDERS

HANGING LAMP HOLDER

Type Lamp Material Dimmensions (mm) Section of power Product Catalogue

Diameter Length supply conductors category number

Screw E27 bakelite 38.5 55 0.5-2.5mm² C 99196

HANGING LAMP HOLDER

Type Lamp Material Dimmensions (mm) Section of power Product Catalogue

Diameter Length supply conductors category number

Screw E27 bakelite 38.5 55 0.5-2.5mm² C 99197

HANGING LAMP HOLDER

Type Lamp Material Dimmensions (mm) Section of power Product Catalogue

Diameter Length supply conductors category number

Screwless E14 plastic 44 56,3 0.5-2.5mm² C 99194

INSTALLATION
HANGING LAMP HOLDER
277
Type Lamp Material Dimmensions (mm) Section of power Product Catalogue
Diameter Length supply conductors category number
LAMP HOLDERS

Screwless E27 plastic 55 62,5 0.5-2.5mm² C 99195

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
LAMP HOLDERS www.elmarkholding.eu

LAMP BASES

Type Lamp Material Rated Diameter Length Section of power Product Catalogue
current (mm) (mm) supply conductors category number
Oblique E27 plastic 4A 78 38 0.5-2.5mm² C 99200
Straight E27 plastic 4A 63 40 0.5-2.5mm² C 99199

TWIN SOCKET LAMP HOLDER

Type Lamp Material Rated Diameter Length Section of power Product Catalogue
current (mm) (mm) supply conductors category number
E27-2xE27 E27 Iron + PBT 4A 76 74 0.5-2.5mm² C 99198

#K#
LAMP HOLDER ADAPTORS TO E27

Type Voltage Rated current Used for Convert to lamp Material Packing Product Catalogue
(A) holder socket (pcs.) category number
INSTALLATION

E40/E27 250V 4A E40 E27 iron/plastic 15/500 C 192168

G24/E27 250V 4A G24-4 pin E27 PBT+ copper 25/300 C 192169

Ambient temperature: 85°C

278
LAMP HOLDERS

INTERMEDIATE SWITCH

Type Voltage Rated current (A) Colour Packing Product Catalogue

(pcs.) category number
IS-RW 250V 6 red & white 1 G M300018
IS-B 250V 6 black 1 G M300002

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days, and for Intermediate switches will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu SENSORS

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST02A 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Detection Rated load Detection Colour Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
range distance body Length Width Height (pcs.) category number

LED - 200W
ST02A 160° max.9m white 80 54 59.9 100 C 99DS100
IL-500W

Time-Delay: 10sec ± 3sec to 7min ± 2min (adjustable); Ambient light: <3-2000lux (adjustable); Detection motion
speed: 0.6 - 1.5m/s; Two wire line; Installation height: 1 - 1.8m

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST42 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Detection Rated load Detection Colour Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
range distance body Length d1 d2 (pcs.) category number

LED - 300W
ST42 360° max.6m white 75,6 76 100 50 C 99DS104
IL - 1200W

Time-Delay: 10sec ± 3sec to 7min ± 2min (adjustable); Ambient light: <3 - 2000lux (adjustable); Detection motion
speed: 0.6 - 1.5m/s; Installation height: 2.2 - 4m

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST41 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Detection Rated load Detection Colour Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue

INSTALLATION
range distance body Length d1 d2 (pcs.) category number

LED - 300W
ST41 360° max.6m white 75,6 61,5 76 50 C 99DS103
IL - 1200W

Time-Delay: 10sec ± 3sec to 7min ± 2min (adjustable); Ambient light: <3 - 2000lux (adjustable); Detection motion
speed: 0.6 - 1.5m/s; Installation height: 2.2 - 4m

279

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST40 3+0

3
SENSORS

YEAR TOTAL
standard WARRANTY
+extended

Type Detection Rated load Detection Colour Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
range distance body Length d1 d2 (pcs.) category number

LED - 800W
ST40 360° max.6m white 50 50 35 50 C 99DS402
IL - 1200W

Time-Delay: 10sec ± 3sec to 7min ± 2min (adjustable); Ambient light: <3 - 2000lux (adjustable); Detection motion
speed: 0.6 - 1.5m/s; Installation height: 2.2 - 4m

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
SENSORS www.elmarkholding.eu

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST11 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Detection Rated load Detection Colour Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
range distance body Length Width Height (pcs.) category number

LED - 500W
ST11 180° max.12m white 80 55 65 50 C 99DS403
IL - 800W

Time-Delay: 10sec ± 3sec to 7min ± 2min (adjustable); Ambient light: <3 - 2000lux (adjustable); Detection motion
speed: 0.6 - 1.5m/s; Installation height: 2.2 - 4m

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST07 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Detection Rated load Detection Colour Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
range distance body Height Diameter (pcs.) category number

LED - 300W
ST07 380° max.6m white 58 115 50 C 99DS101
IL - 1200W
LED - 300W
ST07 380° max.6m black 58 115 50 C 99DS102
IL - 1200W

Time-Delay: 10sec ± 3sec to 7min ± 2min (adjustable); Ambient light: <3 - 2000lux (adjustable); Detection motion
speed: 0.6 - 1.5m/s ; Installation height: 2.2 - 4m

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST24 3+0

3
INSTALLATION

YEAR TOTAL
standard WARRANTY
+extended

Type Detection Rated load Detection Colour Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
range distance body Length Width Height (pcs.) category number

LED - 200W
ST24 120°/360º max.6m white 55.8 34 24.6 100 C 99DS109
IL - 800W
Time Delay: 5s, 30s, 1min, 3min, 5min, 8min(choice); Ambient Light: 10LUX/2000LUX (choice)
280 Detection Distance: 3m/6m(choice) (<24oC); Detection motion speed: 0.6 - 1.5m/s
SENSORS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu SENSORS

MICROWAVE SENSOR ST701F 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Detection range Rated load Colour body Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
Length Width Height (pcs.) category number

LED - 200W
ST701F 180°/360º white 58 40.5 25.5 100 C 99DS400
IL - 500W
Time Delay: 10sec ± 3sec to 12min ± 1min (adjustable); Ambient Light: <3 - 2000LUX (adjustable)
HF System: 5.8GHz CW radar,ISM band; Detection Distance: Wall: 5 - 15m (adjustable); Ceilling: 2 - 8m(radius),
adjustable; Installation Height: Wall:1.5 - 3.5m; Ceiling: 2 - 10m

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST15 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Detection Rated load Detection Colour Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
range distance body Length Width Height (pcs.) category number
LED - 300W
ST15 180° max.12m white 80 117,2 31,5 50 C 99DS108
IL - 1200W
Time-Delay: 10sec ± 3sec to 7min ± 2min (adjustable); Ambient light: <3 - 2000lux (adjustable)
Detection motion speed: 0.6 - 1.5m/s; Installation height: 2.2 - 4m IP65

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST10A 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

INSTALLATION
Type Detection Rated load Detection Colour Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
range distance body Length Width Height (pcs.) category number
LED - 300W
ST10A 180° 5-12m white 87,4 120 144 50 C 99DS107
IL - 1200W
Time-Delay: 10sec ± 3sec to 7min ± 2min (adjustable); Ambient light: <3 - 2000lux (adjustable)
Detection motion speed: 0.6 - 1.5m/s; Installation height: 2.2 - 4m IP44

281
SENSORS

INFRARED MOTION SENSOR ST05CA 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Rated load Time-Delay Ambient Light Height Diameter Product Catalogue
(mm) (mm) category number
LED - 300W, IL -
ST05CA 10s to 15min <3 - 2000LUX 24.9 102 C 99DS110
800W
Detection Distance: max 6m.

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
SENSORS www.elmarkholding.eu

LIGHT-CONTROL SENSOR ST300, IP44 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Rated current Colour body Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
Length Height (pcs.) category number

ST300 10A white 35 108,6 50 C 99DS404

Ambient light: 3-500 lux (adjustable) IP44; Timer Built-in from 1-9 hours

LIGHT-CONTROL SENSOR ST306, IP44 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Rated current Colour body Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
Length Height (pcs.) category number

ST306 6A black/white 100 200 50 C 99DS405

Ambient light: <5 - 15lux (adjustable) IP44

LIGHT-CONTROL SENSOR ST303, IP44 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Rated current Colour body Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
INSTALLATION

Height Diameter (pcs.) category number

ST303 25A white 70,5 78,3 50 C 99DS300

Ambient light: <5 - 50lux (adjustable) IP44

282

LIGHT-CONTROL SENSOR ST302, IP44 3+0

3 YEAR TOTAL
SENSORS

standard WARRANTY
+extended

Type Rated current Colour body Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
Height Diameter (pcs.) category number

ST302 10A white 76,7 63 100 C 99DS301

Ambient light: <5 - 50lux (adjustable) IP44

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu SENSORS

LIGHT-CONTROL SENSOR ST308, IP65 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Rated current Colour body Size (mm) Packing Product Catalogue
Length Width Height (pcs.) category number

ST308 20A white 35 66 90 100 C 99DS302

Ambient light: <2 - 100lux (adjustable) IP65

TOUCHING SENSOR ST125 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Rated load Length Width Height Diameter Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) category number
LED - 200W, IL -
ST125 89.7 40.2 16.8 - C 99DS115
500W

ON-OFF MOVING HAND SENSOR ST122 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

INSTALLATION
Type Rated current Size (mm) Product category Catalogue
Length Width Height number

ST122 500W 78.2 35.5 20 C 99DS122

283
SENSORS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
CABLE REELS www.elmarkholding.eu

CABLE REEL WITH THERMAL

PROTECTION - MAK - 2A
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 10 4 E 47911

CABLE REEL WITH THERMAL

PROTECTION - MAK - 3
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 20 4 E 47921

CABLE REEL WITH THERMAL

PROTECTION - MAK - 4
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2
25 2 E 47927
H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 40 1 E 47940
H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 50 2 E 47950
INSTALLATION

CABLE REEL - HJR TYPE, IP 44

3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

284
Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HJR - 10AP H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm 2
25 2 E 47960
CABLE REELS

HJR - 10P H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm2 50 1 E 47959

EMPTY CABLE REEL 029A

3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Suitable for cable type Outlets Product category Catalogue number

H05VV-F 3G1.5mm2- max 40m / 3G1.0mm2- max 50m 4 socket 16A/230V E 47910
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MULTIPLUGS

EXTENSION CORDS 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Cable colour Product category Catalogue number
Extension cord H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 10 orange E 47333
Extension cord H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 15 orange E 47334

Rated current: 16A, Voltage: 230VAC

MULTIPLUGS 3 HOLES WITH KEY 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
3 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/40 E 47332

MULTIPLUGS 4 HOLES WITH KEY 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
4 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/40 E 47432

INSTALLATION
MULTIPLUGS 6 HOLES WITH KEY 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
285
6 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/25 E 47632
MULTIPLUGS

MULTIPLUGS 8 HOLES WITH KEY 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
8 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/25 E 47732

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
MULTIPLUGS www.elmarkholding.eu

MULTIPLUG - HX-3N TYPE 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm 2
1.5m 40 E 47031
HX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 5 / 40 E 47080
HX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 5 / 40 E 47081
Max.3500W,16/250~

MULTIPLUG - HX-4N TYPE 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 50 E 47041
HX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 30 E 47082
HX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 25 E 47083
Max.3500W,16/250~

MULTIPLUG - HX-6N TYPE 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
INSTALLATION

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 50 E 47061
HX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 40 E 47063
HX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 40 E 47065
Max.3500W,16/250~

286
MULTIPLUGS

MULTIPLUG - ODL, IP44 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
ODL - PYX - 2E H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm 2
1.5m 40 F 47802

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MULTIPLUGS

MULTIPLUG WITH KEY

HKX-3N TYPE
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HKX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 5 / 40 E 47131
HKX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 5 / 30 E 47133
HKX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 5 / 25 E 47135
Max.3500W,16/250~

MULTIPLUG WITH KEY

HKX-4N TYPE
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HKX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 5 / 40 E 47142
HKX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 5 / 30 E 47143
HKX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 5 / 25 E 47145
Max.3500W,16/250~

MULTIPLUG WITH KEY 3+0

3

INSTALLATION
YEAR TOTAL
HKX-6N TYPE standard
+extended WARRANTY

Type Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
HKX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 5 / 40 E 47162
HKX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 5 / 30 E 47163
HKX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 5 / 25 E 47165
Max.3500W,16/250~ 287
MULTIPLUGS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
MULTIPLUGS www.elmarkholding.eu

THREE WAY CLIP MULTIPLUG 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Colour Material Product category Catalogue number
H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m White & Grey PP+ABS C 47003

POWER CABLES

Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Cable colour Product category Catalogue number
H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 white E 47001

ADAPTERS

Type Colour Rated Rated power Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
INSTALLATION

current in (A) in (W)

Adapter double White 16 3500 50 C 192213
Adapter double Graphite 16 3500 50 C 192212
Adapter double with key White 16 3500 50 C 192211
Adapter double with key Graphite 16 3500 50 C 192210
Adapter triple White 16 3500 40 C 192209
Adapter triple Graphite 16 3500 40 C 192208
Adapter triple with key White 16 3500 40 C 192207
288 Adapter triple with key Graphite 16 3500 40 C 192206
MULTIPLUGS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MULTIPLUGS

MULTISOCKET

Type Colour Rated current Rated power Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
in (A) in (W)
Multisocket double black 16 3500 60 C 192216
Multisocket double white 16 3500 60 C 192217
Multisocket triple black 16 3500 60 C 192218
Multisocket triple white 16 3500 60 C 192219

RUBBER MULTISOCKET

Type Colour Rated current Rated power Packing (pcs) Product Catalogue number
in (A) in (W) category
Multisocket triple White 16 3500 20 C 192120/WH
Multisocket triple Black 16 3500 20 C 192120/BL

RUBBER SCHUKO SOCKETS

INSTALLATION
Type Colour Rated current In (A) Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Socket White 16 Rubber 25 C 192119/WH
Socket Black 16 Rubber 25 C 192119/BL

289
MULTIPLUGS

RUBBER SCHUKO SOCKETS WITH COVER IP44

Type Colour Rated current In (A) Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Socket Black 16 Rubber 1/30/150 C 192122/BL

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days and for 192122/BL will be 90 days.
 INSTALLATION
MULTIPLUGS www.elmarkholding.eu

RUBBER SCHUKO PLUG

Type Rated current In (A) Colour Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Plug 16 White Rubber 25 C 192118/WH
Plug 16 Black Rubber 25 C 192118/BL
Plug 16 Red Rubber 25 C 192118/R

ANGLE BAKELITE SCHUKO PLUG

Type Rated current In (A) Colour Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Plug 16 White Bakelite 20/100 C 192117/WH
Plug 16 Black Bakelite 20/100 C 192117/BL

PLUG BAKELITE

Type Rated current In (A) Colour Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
INSTALLATION

Plug 16 white bakelite 80 C 19211102

Plug 16 black bakelite 80 C 19211101

290

TWO PIN PLUG

MULTIPLUGS

Type Rated current In (A) Colour Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Plug 6 White PP 100 C 192116/WH

Plug 6 Black PP 100 C 192116/BL

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days
 INSTALLATION
www.elmarkholding.eu MULTIPLUGS

TWO PIN PLUG WITH EXTRACTION RING

Type Rated current In (A) Colour Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Plug 10 White PC 1/500 C 192115/WH

Plug 10 Black PC 1/500 C 192115/BL

TWO POLE SOCKET WITH HOOK

Type Rated current In (A) Colour Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Socket 10 Black PC 1/500 C 192123/BL

Socket 10 White PC 1/500 C 192123/WH

BRITISH PLUG

INSTALLATION
Type Rated current In (A) Colour Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

British plug 13 white PMMA 1/20 C 192114

291
MULTIPLUGS

FOOT SWITCH

Type Rated current In (A) Colour Material Packing (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Switch 10 White PC 1/100 C 192124/WH

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
OUTSIDE POWER CABLES
 CABLES
www.elmarkholding.eu OUTSIDE POWER CABLES

Standards:
DIN VDE 0293-308 - Colour coded acc
NYY 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

DIN VDE 0276 part 603 or HD 186

Power cable, Cu-conductor, PVC-insulation, PVC-sheathing
DIN VDE 0295 - Wire class acc

NYY; PP00; PP00; PP00; NYY; NYY; CYY; NYY; NYY

Power cable for construction of underground distribution grids and installations of industrial and public projects,
where mechanical damages are not to be expected. Suitable for transmission and distribution of electric power at
nominal voltage u0/u 0,6/1 kV.

TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION::

• Power cable acc. to DIN VDE 0276 part 603 • Solid or stranded Cu wires cl. 1 or cl. 2 acc. to DIN VDE 0295
• Ambient temperature • Insulation: PVC compound
• fixed installation: -30°C to +50°C • Inner sheath: filling compound
• Temperature of laying: min. -5°C • Outer sheath: PVC compound
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Outer sheath colour: black
• Short circuit temperature: +160°C • re - round solid
• (short circuit duration up to 5 sec.) • rm - round multi-core
• Nominal voltage Uo/U- 0.6/1 kV • sm - sector multi-core
• Test voltage: AC-4 kV/50 Hz • se - sector solid conductor

Cross section Wires Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) shape (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
2x1,5 re black 12,2 28 192 100 E 833019
2x2,5 re black 12,9 46 229 100 E 833020
2x4 re black 14,9 75 315 100 E 833021
2x6 re black 15,9 112 382 100 E 833022
2x10 re black 17,5 188 509 1 E 833023
2х16 re black 19,4 298 676 1 E 833024
#K#

Cross section Wires Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) shape (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category

CABLES
3x1,5 re black 12,1 43 201 100 E 833030
3x2,5 re black 12,9 70 247 100 E 833031
3x4 re black 15 112 350 100 E 833032
3x6 re black 16,1 168 435 100 E 833034
3x10 re black 18 282 606 1 E 833036
3х16 re black 20,1 447 828 1 E 833038 293
OUTSIDE POWER CABLES

Cross section Wires Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) shape (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
4x1,5 re black 12,9 57 232 100 E 833060
4x2,5 re black 13,8 93 289 100 E 833061
4x4 re black 16,2 149 419 100 E 833062
4x6 re black 17,4 223 525 100 E 833063
4x10 re black 19,5 376 741 1 E 833064
4х16 re black 21,8 595 1024 1 E 833065

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 CABLES
OUTSIDE POWER CABLES www.elmarkholding.eu

Cross section Wires Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) shape (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
5x1,5 re black 13,7 71 272 100 E 833077
5x2,5 re black 14,8 116 341 100 E 833078
5x4 re black 17,4 187 494 100 E 833079
5x6 re black 19 279 635 100 E 833080
5х10 re black 21,6 470 911 1 E 833081
5х16 re black 24,1 744 1262 1 E 833082

Standards:
BDS 904-84 - according to construction
CBT-C 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

IEC60332-1- according to flame

POWER CABLE WITH SOLID OR STRANDED CU WIRES, PVC INSULATION AND SHEATHING
retardant

СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с

A cable with solid or stranded CU wires, resistant to the sun radiance and atmospheric influences. It is suitable for
spread and transfer of electrical energy if it is installed steady outside or in indoor spaces -cable trunking, electrical
cable conduit, cable trays, directly into tunnels, earthworks, pits and etc.

TECHNICAL DATA: • Outer steath material-filling sheath and PVC

• Nominal voltage Uo- 0.6kV compaund
• Nominal voltage U- 1kV • Conductor construction- solid or stranded CU wires,
• Ambient temperature- from -30°C to +50°C class 1 or class 2
• Max. oprating temperature- +70C° • re - round solid
• Temperature of laying- ≥-5°C • rm - round multi-core
• Conductor material- Copper (Cu) • sm - sector multi-core
• Conductors insulation - PVC compaund • se - sector solid conductor

Cross section Wires Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) shape (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
CABLES

2X1 re black 9.5 20 100 100 E 817020

2X1.5 re black 10.0 28 120 100 E 817021
2X2.5 re black 10.6 46 150 100 E 817022
2X4 re black 12.5 73 210 100 E 817023
2X6 re black 13.3 110 260 100 E 817024
294 2X10 re black 15.2 182 370 1 E 817025
2Х16 rm black 18 305 560 1 E 817026
OUTSIDE POWER CABLES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 CABLES
www.elmarkholding.eu OUTSIDE POWER CABLES

Cross section Wires Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) shape (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
3X1 re black 9.7 28 120 100 E 817036
3X1.5 re black 10.2 42 140 100 E 817037
3X2.5 re black 11.0 69 180 100 E 817039
3X4 re black 13.0 110 260 100 E 817041
3X6 re black 14.0 165 340 100 E 817043
3X10 re black 16.0 275 480 1 E 817045
3Х16 rm black 19.5 450 695 1 E 817047

Cross section Wires Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) shape (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
3Х4+2.5 re/re black 13,4 132 293 100 E 817042
3Х6+4 re/re black 14,4 202 380 100 E 817044
3Х10+6 re/re black 16,7 330 545 1 E 817046
3Х16+10 rm/re black 20,2 540 870 1 E 817048

Cross section Wires Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) shape (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
4X1 re black 10.4 37 140 100 E 817067
4X1.5 re black 11.0 55 165 100 E 817068
4X2.5 re black 11.9 91 215 100 E 817069
4X4 re black 14.1 146 315 100 E 817070

CABLES
4X6 re black 15.4 220 410 100 E 817071
4X10 re black 17.4 365 595 1 E 817072
4X16 rm black 20.6 585 950 1 E 817073

295
OUTSIDE POWER CABLES

Cross section Wires Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) shape (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
5X1 re black 11.2 45 160 100 E 817083
5X1.5 re black 11.8 69 195 100 E 817084
5X2.5 re black 12.8 114 260 100 E 817085
5X4 re black 15.5 182 380 100 E 817086
5X6 re black 16.8 275 500 100 E 817087
5х10 re black 19,2 455 735 1 E 817088
5х16 re black 23,2 745 1150 1 E 817089

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
INSIDE POWER CABLES
 CABLES
www.elmarkholding.eu INSIDE POWER CABLES

Standards:
Flat conductor acc. to BDS IEC 60227-5
H03VH-H 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 6 acc. to IEC 60228

Flat conductor, flexible Cu-wires, PVC-insullation

ШВПЛ-А; PL; H03VH-H; P/L; H03VH-H; H03VH-H; H03VH-H; RVV; H03VH-H

Designed for connection of electrical appliances to the electrical grid, for connection of mobile users, devices and
appliances.

TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION:

• Ambient temperature: -40°C to+50°C • Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 6 acc. to IEC 60228
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Flat conductor acc. to BDS IEC 60227-5
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 300/300 V • Insulation: PVC compound
• Test voltage: 2000 V • Insulation colour: white or black-red

Cross section Colour Thickness Width Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue
(n x mm²) (mm) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category number
2x0,50 white or black-red 6,0 3,0 9 25 100 E 820001
2x0,75 white or black-red 6,4 3,2 14 30 100 E 820002
2x1 white or black-red 6,8 3,4 19,2 31 100 E 820017
2x1,50 white or black-red 7,6 4,0 28,8 38 100 E 820018

Standards:
Conductor acc. to HD 21,5 S3
H03VV-F 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to IEC 60228

Conductor with flexible Cu-wires, PVC insulation and sheath

ШВПЛ-Б; PP/L; PP/L; PP/L; H03VV-F; H03VV-F; MYYUP; H03VV-F; H03VV-F

Conductor with parallel or stranded in a bundle insulated cores, de­signed for connection of electrical appliances
to the electrical grid, for connection of mobile users, devices and appliances.

CABLES
TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION:
• Variant of the conductor: H03VVH2-F - flat type • Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to IEC 60228
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • Insulation: PVC compound
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Sheafing: PVC compound
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 300/300 V • Outer sheath colour: white
• Test voltage: 2000 V
297
Type Cross section Colour Thickness Width Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue
(flat) (n x mm²) (mm) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category number
H03VVH2-F 2x0,5 white 6,0 3,6 10,0 30 100 E 820004
INSIDE POWER CABLES

H03VVH2-F 2x0,75 white 6,4 3,9 14,5 39 100 E 820006

Type Cross section Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(round) (n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
H03VV-F 2X0,5 white 9.5 100 25 100 E 820003
H03VV-F 3X0.5 white 10.0 120 30 100 E 820007

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 CABLES
INSIDE POWER CABLES www.elmarkholding.eu

Standards:
Flexible cable acc. to HD 21.5 S3, DIN
H05VV-F 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

VDE 0281 part 5

Conductor with flexible Cu-wires, PVC insulation and sheath
Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE
0295, IEC 60228
Colour coding: acc. to DIN VDE 0293-308
ШВПС; PP/J; PP/J; PP/J; H05VV-F; H05VV-F; MYYM; H05VV-F; H05VV-F

Conductor with parallel or stranded in a bundle insulated cores, de­signed for connection of electrical appliances
to the electric grid, for connection of mobile users, devices and appliances.

TECHNICAL DATA: • Test voltage: 2000 V

• Variant of the conductor: H05VVH2-F - flat type • CONSTRUCTION:
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE 0295, IEC 60228
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Insulation/outer sheath: PVC compound;
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 300/500 V • Outer sheath colour: white

Cross section Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
2 x 0,75 white 7,6 14,0 62 100 E 821001
2x1 white 8,0 19,5 71 100 E 821002
2 x 1,5 white 9,0 28,0 94 100 E 821003
2 x 2,5 white 11,0 47,0 114 100 E 821004
2X4 white 12,0 75,0 197 100 E 821005

Cross section Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
3 x 0,75 white 8,0 21,5 74 100 E 821008
3x1 white 8,4 29,0 85 100 E 821009
3 x 1,5 white 9,8 42,0 120 100 E 821010
3 x 2,5 white 12,0 70,0 182 100 E 821011
3x4 white 13,0 114,0 252 100 E 821012
CABLES

Cross section Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
4 x 0,75 white 8,6 29,0 92 100 E 821016
4x1 white 9,4 38,5 109 100 E 821017
298 4 x 1,5 white 11,0 56,0 151 100 E 821018
4 x 2,5 white 13,0 93,5 225 100 E 821019
4x4 white 14,0 151,0 315 100 E 821020
INSIDE POWER CABLES

Cross section Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
5 x 0,75 white 9,6 36,0 115 100 E 821024
5x1 white 10,0 48,0 132 100 E 821025
5 x 1,5 white 12,0 70,0 188 100 E 821026
5 x 2,5 white 14,0 117,0 280 100 E 821027
5X4 white 15,5 189,0 395 100 E 821028

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS
 CABLES
INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS www.elmarkholding.eu

Standards:
Conductor acc. to HD 21.3 S3, DIN VDE
H05V-U, H07V-U 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

0281 part 3
Conductor, Cu-wires, PVC-insulation
Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to DIN VDE
0295, IEC 60228

ПВ-А1; P; P; P; H05V-U, H07V-U; H05V-U, H07V-U (CY); H05V-U, H07V-U (FY);

H05V-U, H07V-U; H05V-U, H07V-U

For fixed installation in lighting networks, electric power installations, wiring of electrical switchboards, machines
and equipment.

TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION:

• Ambient temperature: -30°C to+50°C • Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to DIN VDE 0295, IEC 60228
• Temperature of laying: min. -5°C • Insulation: PVC compound
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Insulation colour:
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: - yellow-green: available cross sections from 0.5 to 10
- H05V-U 300/500 V (mm²)
- H07V-U 450/750 V - white: available cross sections from 0.5 to 4 (mm²)
• Test voltage: - black: available cross sections from 0.5 to 10 (mm²)
- H05V-U 2000 V - blue: available cross sections from 0.5 to 10 (mm²)
- H07V-U 2500 V - brown: available cross sections from 0.5 to 10 (mm²)
- red: available cross sections from 0.5 to 10 (mm²)

Type Cross section Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
H05V-U 0,5 2,4 4,5 9 100 E 822001
H05V-U 0,75 2,6 7,0 12 100 E 822002
H05V-U 1 2,8 9,0 15 100 E 822003

Note: At orders of the desires colour, must be added after the catalogue number:
BL – blue; R – red; B - black; W- white; YG- yellow green; BR- brown
CABLES

Type Cross section Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
H07V-U 1,5 3,3 13,5 21 100 E 822004
H07V-U 2,5 3,9 22,0 33 100 E 822005
300 H07V-U 4 4,4 35,0 48 100 E 822006
H07V-U 6 4,6 52,5 68 100 E 822007
H07V-U 10 6,4 87,5 113 100 E 822008
INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS

Note: At orders of the desires colour, must be added after the catalogue number:
BL – blue; R – red; B - black; W- white; YG- yellow green; BR- brown

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 CABLES
www.elmarkholding.eu INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS

Standards:
PVC conductor acc. to HD 21.3 S3, DIN
H05V-K, H07V-K 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

VDE 0281 part 3

Conductor, Cu-wires, PVC-isulation
Flexible Cu wires cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE
0295, IEC 60228

ПВ-А2; PF; P/F; P/F; H05V-K, H07V-K; H05V-K, H07V-K (CYA); MYF;

H05V-K, H07V-K; H05V-K, H07V-K

For fixed installation wiring of electrical switchboards, machines and

equipment, where small bending radius is required.

TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION:

• Ambient temperature: -30°C to+50°C • Flexible Cu wires cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE 0295, IEC 60228
• Temperature of laying: min. -5°C • Insulation: PVC compound
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Insulation colour:
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: - yellow-green: available cross sections from 0.5 to 25
- H05V-K 300/500 V (mm²)
- H07V-K 450/750 V - white: available cross sections from 0.5 to 4 (mm²)
• Test voltage: - black: available cross sections from 0.5 to 25 (mm²)
- H05V-K 2000 V - blue: available cross sections from 0.5 to 25 (mm²)
- H07V-K 2500 V - brown: available cross sections from 0.5 to 10(mm²)
- red: available cross sections from 0.5 to 25 (mm²)

Type Cross section Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
H05V-K 0,5 2,6 5,0 10 100 E 823002
H05V-K 0,75 2,8 7,0 13 100 E 823003
H05V-K 1 3,0 9,5 16 100 E 823004

Note: At orders of the desires colour, must be added after the catalogue number:
BL – blue; R – red; B - black; W- white; YG- yellow green; BR- brown

CABLES
Type Cross section Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
H07V-K 1,5 3,5 14,0 23 100 E 823005
H07V-K 2,5 4,2 23,0 36 100 E 823006
H07V-K 4 4,8 36,5 52 100 E 823007 301
H07V-K 6 6,3 57,0 74 100 E 823008
H07V-K 10 7,6 96,0 131 100 E 823009
H07V-K 16 8,8 151,0 195 100 E 823010
INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS

H07V-K 25 11,0 235,0 300 100 E 823011

Note: At orders of the desires colour, must be added after the catalogue number:
BL – blue; R – red; B - black; W- white; YG- yellow green; BR- brown

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 CABLES
INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS www.elmarkholding.eu

Standards:
Flat conductor acc. to BDS 4305-90
NYIFY-O/J 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to BDS 904-84

Flat installation conductor, Cu-wires, PVC-insulation, PVC-sheath

ПВВ-МБ1; PG; PP/R; PP/R; NYIFY-O/J; NYIFY-O/J; NYIFY-O/J; NYIFY-O/J; NYFAZ

Installation conductor with parallel Cu-wires for fixed installation in lighting

networks and electric power installations.

TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION:

• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to BDS 904-84
• Temperature of laying: min. -5°C • Insulation: PVC compound
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Sheath: PVC compound
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 220/380 V • Outer sheath colour: white
• Test voltage: 2000 V

Cross section Colour Conductor Conductor Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) Thickness (mm) Width (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
2x1 white 3,70 10,30 17,9 55 100 E 834001
2x1,5 white 4,10 11,20 26,6 65 100 E 834002
2 x 2,5 white 5,00 12,90 44,3 97 100 E 834003
2x4 white 5,60 14,20 70,6 135 100 E 834004
2x6 white 6,50 16,00 104,4 190 100 E 834005

Cross section Colour Conductor Conductor Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue number
(n x mm²) Thickness (mm) Width (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category
3x1 white 3,70 14,00 26,8 73 100 E 834007
3x1,5 white 4,10 15,30 39,8 95 100 E 834008
3x2,5 white 5,00 16,90 66,4 142 100 E 834009
3x4 white 5,60 19,80 104,2 200 100 E 834010
CABLES

3x6 white 6,50 22,50 156,5 280 100 E 834011

302
INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 CABLES
www.elmarkholding.eu INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS

Standards:
DIN VDE 0295; IEC 60228- according
NYM 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

to construction DIN VDE 0250-204-

Multi-core conductor with Cu wires and PVC insulation
according to multi-core conductors
IEC60332-1- according to flame
retardant
NYM; PGP; PGP; PP-Y; PGP; NYM; NYM; NYM; NYM; NYM

For fixed instalations in , or on under plasterboard, in lighting networks in dry places. Can be used and in damp
or wet rooms, in wall and concrete, in switchboards and mashines. Is suitable for outdoor use if cable is protected
against direct sunshine.

TECHNICAL DATA: • Conductor material- Copper (Cu)

• Nominal voltage: Uo- 300V; U- 500V • Conductors insulation - PVC compaund
• Ambient temperature- from -20°C to +50°C • Outer steath material-filling sheath and PVC compaund
• Max. oprating temperature- +70C° • Conductor construction- solid CU wires, class 1 and
• Instalation temperature- ≥-5°C class 2 for cross section above 10mm²

Cross section Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category number
2X1.5 grey 9.8 29 120 100 E 832008
2X2.5 grey 11.0 48 160 100 E 832009
2X4 grey 12.5 76 220 100 E 832010

Cross section Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category number
3X1.5 grey 10.5 43 136 100 E 832016
3X2.5 grey 11.5 72 190 100 E 832017
3X4 grey 13.0 115 260 100 E 832018

CABLES
303
INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
CABLES WITH RUBBER INSULATION
 CABLES
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLES WITH RUBBER INSULATION

Standards:
DIN VDE 0295; IEC 60228- according to
H05RR-F 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

construction
Rubber flexible cable
DIN VDE 0293-308 and HD 186-
according to colour coating
DIN VDE 0482-332-1-2; IEC60332-1-
according to flame retardant ШКПЛ; GG/J; GG/J; GG/J; H05RR-F; H05RR-F; MCCM; H05RR-F; H05RR-F

For connection of electrical appliances and consumers with low and middle mechanical stress to Alternating
Current (AC). It has wide use in household, office, for cable reels, for connecting of mobile consumers and etc.

TECHNICAL DATA: • Conductor material: Copper (Cu) wires, class 5

• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 300V/500V • Conductors insulation: Rubber EPR
• Ambient temperature: from -30°C to +60°C • Outer steath material: Rubber EPR

Cross section Type Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category number
2X1 H05RR-F black 6.1 - 8.0 19.0 71.0 100 E 814002
2X1.5 H05RR-F black 7.6 - 9.8 29.0 99.0 100 E 814003
2X2.5 H05RR-F black 9.0 - 11.6 48.0 148.0 100 E 814004

Cross section Type Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category number
3X1 H05RR-F black 6.5 - 8.5 29.0 88.0 100 E 814007
3X1.5 H05RR-F black 8.0 - 10.4 43.0 125.0 100 E 814008
3X2.5 H05RR-F black 9.6 - 12.4 72.0 175.0 100 E 814009
3X4 H05RR-F black 11.3 - 14.5 115.0 246.0 100 E 814010

Cross section Type Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category number

CABLES
4X1 H05RR-F black 9.0 - 11.6 58.0 165.0 100 E 814012
4X1.5 H05RR-F black 9.0 - 11.6 58.0 165.0 100 E 814013
4X2.5 H05RR-F black 10.7 - 13.8 96.0 225.0 100 E 814014
4X4 H05RR-F black 12.7 - 16.2 154.0 315.0 100 E 814015
4X6 H05RR-F black 14.2 - 18.1 231.0 440.0 100 E 814017
305
CABLES WITH RUBBER INSULATION

Cross section Type Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing Product Catalogue
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) category number
5X1.5 H05RR-F black 9.8 - 12.7 72.0 185.0 100 E 814020
5X2.5 H05RR-F black 11.9 - 15.3 120.0 275.0 100 E 814021
5x4 H05RR-F black 15,6-19,9 187 475 100 E 814022
5x6 H05RR-F black 17,5-22,2 288 635 100 E 814023

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
COMMUNICATION CABLES
 CABLES
www.elmarkholding.eu COMMUNICATION CABLES

Construction:
CCA-wires - 4x2x0.24
UTP 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

CU-wires - 4x2x0.24
LAN cable, stranded in pairs, cat. 5e

UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP CAT5E

Cable, stranded by pairs, used for transmission of digital signals with high speed of transmission. Suitable for setting
computer systems for data transmission, measuring and control systems with proper resistance to electromagnetic
influences.

TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION:

• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • 879002 - CCA-wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm, acc. to IEC
• Temperature of laying: min. 0°C 60228
• Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ω ± 15 Ω • 879017 - CU wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm, acc. to IEC
• Loop resisistance: ≤ 192 0/ km 60228
• Unbalance of loop resistance: ≤ 3% • Insulation: PE compound
• Insulation resistance: ≥ 150 MΩ x km • Cable bundle: 4 stranded pairs
• Operating capacity: ≤ 55,8 nF/km • Outer sheath: PVC compound or LSOH compound
• Cable diameter: 5 mm • Outer sheath colour: for PVC-grey
• Cable weight: 27 kg/km

Colour Material Сategory Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation

Product
4 10 16 62,5 100 125 Packing Catalogue number
category
(m)
Attenuation - db/100 m 4,1 6,5 8,2 17 22 24,9
grey CCA Cat. 5e 305 E 879002
Attenuation (Next) - db 56,3 50,3 47,3 38,4 35,3 33,9
grey CU Cat. 5e Attenuation (Next) - db 56,3 50,3 47,3 38,4 35,3 33,9 305 E 879017
Insulation colour of stranded pairs - core a / core b:
- white with blue ring / blue
- white with orange ring / orange
- white with green ring /green
- white with brown ring / brown

Construction:
CCA-wires - 4x2x0.24
FTP 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

LAN cable, stranded in pairs, with screen, cat. 5e

CABLES
FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP CAT5E

Cable, stranded in pairs, with screen of laminated foil, used for transmission of digital signals with high speed of
transmission. FTP cable is suitable for setting computer systems for data transmission, measuring and control
systems and for transmission of high-frequency analogue sygnals in automatic and industrial TV networks . High
resistance to electromagnetic influences.
307
TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION:
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • 879001- CCA-wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm, acc. to IEC
• Temperature of laying: min. 0°C 60228
• Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ω ± 15 Ω • Insulation: PE compound
COMMUNICATION CABLES

• Loop resisistance: ≤ 192 0/ km • Cable bundle: 4 stranded pairs

• Unbalance of loop resistance: ≤ 3% • PETP foil
• Insulation resistance: ≥ 150 MΩ x km • Drain tinned Cu-wire
• Operating capacity: ≤ 55,8 nF/km • Screen: laminated AI foil
• Cable diameter: 6 mm • Outer sheath: PVC compound or LSOH compound
• Cable weight: 31 kg/km • Outer sheath colour tor PVC-grey

Material Сategory Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Product

4 10 16 62,5 100 125 Packing (m) category Catalogue number
CCA Cat. 5e Attenuation - db/100 m 4,1 6,5 8,2 17 22 24,9 305 E 879001

Insulation colour of stranded pairs - core a / core b:

- white with blue ring / blue
- white with orange ring / orange
- white with green ring /green
- white with brown ring / brown
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90
30 days.
 CABLES
COMMUNICATION CABLES www.elmarkholding.eu

Construction:
CCA-wires - 4x2x0.24
STP 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

LAN cable, stranded in pairs, with screen on each pair, cat. 6

STP; STP; STP; STP; STP; STP; STP; STP; STP CAT6

Cable, stranded in pairs, with screen of laminated foil on each pair, used for transmission of digital signals with high
speed of transmission, with spectrum of the frequency being used up to 300 MHz for cat. 6. The cable is suitable for
setting computer systems for data transmission, measuring and control systems and for transmission of high-frequency
analogue sygnals in automatic and industrial TV networks and is with high resistance to electromagnetic influences.

TECHNICAL DATA: • Cable weight 42 kg/km

• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C
• Temperature of laying: min. 0°C CONSTRUCTION:
• Characteristic Impedance: • CCA-wires - 24 AWG; 0,57 mm acc. to IEC 60228
- 100 Ω ± 15 Ω up to 100 MHz • Insulation: PE compound
- 100 Ω ± (15 +0,05(f-100)) above 100 МНz • Screen: laminated AI foil on each pair
• Loop resisistance: ≤ 170 Ω / km • Cable bundle: 4 stranded screened pairs
• Unbalance of loop resistance: ≤ 3% • Outer sheath: PVC compound or LSOH compound
• Insulation resistance: ≥ 150 MΩ x km • Outer sheath colour: for PVC-grey, for LSOH - orange
• Operating capacity: ≤ 50 nF/km
• Cable diameter: 7 mm

Colour Сategory Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Product

4 10 16 62,5 100 200 300 Packing (m) category Catalogue number
Attenuation - db/100 m 3,8 6 7,6 15,5 19,9 29,5 35
grey Cat. 6 305 E 879012
Attenuation (Next) - db 65,3 59,3 56,2 47,4 44,3 39,8 38
Insulation colour of stranded pairs - core a / core b:
- white with blue ring / blue
- white with orange ring / orange
- white with green ring /green
- white with brown ring / brown

Construction:
CCA-wires - 4x2x0.24
S-FTP 5+2
standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

LAN cable, stranded in pairs, with duble-screen, cat. 5

S-FTP; S-FTP; S-FTP; S-FTP; S-FTP; S-FTP; S/FTP; s-FTP; SFTP CAT5
CABLES

Cable, stranded in pairs, with screen of laminated foil, with braid of tinned copper wires used for transmisson of digital
signals with high speed of transmission, with spectrum of the frequency being used up to 100 MHz for cat. 5. The cable is
suitable for setting computer systems for data transmisson, measuring and control systems and for transmisson of high-
fiequency analogue sygnals in automatic and industrial TV networks. High resistance to electromagnetic influences.

308 TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION:

• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • CCA-wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm acc. to IEC 60228
• Temperature of laying: min. 0°C • Insulation: PE compound
• Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ω ± 15 Ω • Cable bundle: 4 stranded pairs
COMMUNICATION CABLES

• Loop resisistance: ≤ 192 0/ km • PETP foil

• Unbalance of loop resistance: ≤ 3% • Screen: laminated AI foil
• Insulation resistance: ≥ 150 MΩ x km • Braiding of tinned Cu-wires
• Operating capacity: ≤ 55,8 nF/km • Outer sheath: PVC compound or LSOH compound
• Cable diameter: 6,9 mm • Outer sheath colour: for PVC - grey

Colour Сategory Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Product

4 10 16 62,5 100 125 Packing (m) category Catalogue number
Attenuation - db/100 m 4,3 6,6 8,2 17,1 22
grey Cat. 5 305 E 879011
Attenuation (Next) - db 53 47 44 35 32
Insulation colour of stranded pairs - core a / core b:
- white with blue ring / blue
- white with orange ring / orange
- white with green ring /green
- white with brown ring / brown

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90
30 days.
 CABLES
www.elmarkholding.eu COMMUNICATION CABLES

COAXIAL CABLE RG6 / 96 5+2

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Coaxial cable, suitable for connection of TV aerials to TV receivers.

RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6; RG6; RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6

Suitable for high frequency equipment, measuring and control equipment and appliances, for setting up local
computer networks, and data systems, for connection of TV aerials to TV receivers

TECHNICAL DATA: • diameter and cable material: 6.9 mm PVC;

• model - RG6 / 96; • wave impedance: 75 ± 5 Ohm;
• material and structure of the core cable: CCS 1.02 mm; • operating temperature: from -30 ° C to +70 ° C;
• type of insulation: PE 4.60 mm; • damping ratio: at 100 MHz 0.0637 dB / m.
• external conductor (screen): 96 Al foil;

Colour Description Insulation Ø mm Outer Ø mm Wave Max. capacity Attenuation at Packing Product Catalogue
resistance pF/m 200 MHZ max. (m) category number
Ω dB/100m
white RG6/96 PE 4,70 8,40 PVC 75 ±3 68 12 100 E 856001

COAXIAL CABLE RG59 / + 2X0.5MM2 5+2

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Coaxial cable, suitable for video surveilance systems.

RG59+2x0.5; RG59+2x0.5; RG59; R59; RG59+2x0.5; RG59(CCTV)+2X0.5; RG59;

RG59; RG59+2x0.5

CABLES
TECHNICAL DATA: Electrical cable:
• Coaxial cable: RG-59 • Inner conductor: 2  x 0.5 m CU wires
• Inner conductor: Ø 0.59 mm - CCS wire • Power wires resistance: 4 Ω / 100 m
• Dielectric: Ø 3.7 mm PE full • Outer coating: Ø 5 mm
• Braid: Stranded wire Cu, Indoor coverage area : 90 %
• Impedance: 75 Ω
• Outer coating: Al foil + Al braiding
309
• Cable attenuation at 100m section:
• - 10.9 dB @ 100 MHz
• - 15.2 dB @ 200 MHz
COMMUNICATION CABLES

• - 23.2 dB @ 450 MHz
• - 32.6 dB @ 800 MHz
• - 36.6 dB @ 1000 MHz

Colour Description Insulation Ø Outer Ø mm Wave Max. capacity Attenuation at Packing Product Catalogue
mm resistance pF/m 200 MHZ max. (m) category number
Ω dB/100m
white RG59/U+2x0.5 PE 3,66 8/5mm 75 ±3 53.4 12.4 100 E 856004

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90
30 days.
 CABLES
COMMUNICATION CABLES www.elmarkholding.eu

ALARM CABLE 5+2

standard
+extended 7 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Unshelles alarm cable

Алармен кабел; Alarmni kabel; Alarmni kabel; Alarmni kabl; Alarmni kabel;

Poplašný kábel; Cablu de alarmă; Riasztó kábel; Kαλώδιο συναγερμού

Suitable for the connection of detectors, sensors, infra-red as well as micro wave or mixed technology systems to
the switch board.

TECHNICAL DATA: CONSTRUCTION:

• Ambient temperature: -20°C to +60°C • Conductor: CCA
• Operating voltage: 300V RMS max • Insulation: PVC
• Capacitance between conductors: 1KHz - 33pF/ft • Insulation colors: red, blue, yellow, black, green, white
Nom. • Shield: without
• Capacitance between conductors to shield: 1KHz - • Rip cord: syntetic fibers
60pF/ft Nom. • Drain wire: no
• Damping ratio: at 100 MHz 0.0637 dB / m.

Cross section Cable type Colour Outer diameter Packing Product category Catalogue number
(n x mm²) (mm) (m)

6x0.22 CCA white 4.2 100 E 879016

CABLES

310
COMMUNICATION CABLES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90
30 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu ELECTRICAL PROFESSIONAL CORDED LINE

PROFESSIONAL DRILL EL-D10 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

10mm metal chuck: to tighten and hold bits steady

Forward and reverse: ability for easy adjustment according to tasks

Model Power No-load speed Chuck size Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) (r/min) (mm) (m) carton category
EL-D10 500 4300 0.6- 6.5 2 1 D 59510

IMPACT DRILL EL-D14 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Handle: soft grip handle

Switch: lockable
Speed: variable
Gear housing: aluminium
#N#

Model Power No-load speed Chuck size Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) (r/min) (mm) (m) carton category
EL-D14 600 0-3000 13 2 1 D 59514

TOOLS
PROFESSIONAL IMPACT
DRILL EL-D11
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
311

Impact and drill: two modes transformed

HAND TOOLS

13mm metal chuck: to tighten and hold bits steady

Auxiliary handle: is convienient for operation at any angle
Variable large trigger: switch and 360° swivel side handle for added comfort speed
Lock-on button: for comfortable operation
Aluminium: diecast gear case

Model Power No-load speed Chuck size Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) (r/min) (mm) (m) carton category
EL-D11 910 0-2800 13 2 1 D 59511

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
ELECTRICAL PROFESSIONAL CORDED LINE www.elmarkholding.eu

PROFESSIONAL TWO SPEED

IMPACT DRILL EL-D12
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Dual-mode selector: easily converts from rotation-only to hammer-drill mode

13mm metal chuck: to tighten and hold bits steady
Auxiliary handle: is convienient for operation at any angle
Variable large trigger: switch and 360° swivel side handle for added comfort speed
Lock-on button: for comfortable operation
Forward and reverse: ability for easy adjustment according to tasks
2- speed: transmission provides maximum torgue in setting one and maximum speed in setting two

Model Power No-load speed Chuck size Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) (r/min) (mm) (m) carton category
0-1200/
EL-D12 1050 13 2 1 D 59512
0-3200

PROFESSIONAL LIGHT
ROTARY HAMMER EL-RH13
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Four functions: easily converts triem

Auxiliary handle: is convienient for operation at any angle
Variable large trigger: switch and 360° swivel side handle for added comfort speed
Lock-on button: for comfortable operation

Model Power Single stroke No-load speed Impact rate Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) power (J) (r/min) (b/min) (m) carton category
EL-RH13 800 3.2 0-1400 0-5700 2 1 D 59513
TOOLS

312 PROFESSIONAL ANGLE

GRINDER EL-AG01
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
HAND TOOLS

Compact grid design: for comfort & control

Cast metal gear case: increased josite durability and tool longevity
Spindle lock: for fast and easy wheel changes whit a single wrench
Epoxy-coated field windings: provides protection against abrasive dust
Soft grid side handle: allows greater and comfortable control in multiple positions. Compact and slim handle for
easy operation. Auxiliary handle with rubber coated, can be set in two positions

Model Power Diameter of No-load speed Theard size Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) wheel (mm) (r/min) (m) carton category
EL-AG01 900 125 11 000 M14 2 1 D 59501

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu ELECTRICAL PROFESSIONAL CORDED LINE

ANGLE GRINDER EL-AG04 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Compact and slim body: for easy operation

Dust proof: motor and switch

Model Power Diameter of No-load speed Theard size Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) wheel (mm) (r/min) (m) carton category
EL-AG04 750 125 11 000 M14 2 1 D 59504

PROFESSIONAL ANGLE
GRINDER EL-AG02
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Compact grid design: for comfort & control

Cast metal gear case: increased josite durability and tool longevity
Spindle lock: for fast and easy wheel changes whit a single wrench
Epoxy-coated field windings: provides protection against abrasive dust
Soft grid side handle: allows greater and comfortable control in multiple positions. Compact and slim handle for
easy operation. Auxiliary handle with rubber coated, can be set in two positions
#N#

Model Power Diameter of No-load speed Theard size Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) wheel (mm) (r/min) (m) carton category
EL-AG02 2000 180 6500 M14 2 1 D 59502

TOOLS
PROFESSIONAL ANGLE
GRINDER EL-AG03
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
313

Compact grid design: for comfort & control

HAND TOOLS

Cast metal gear case: increased josite durability and tool longevity
Spindle lock: for fast and easy wheel changes whit a single wrench
Epoxy-coated field windings: provides protection against abrasive dust
Soft grid side handle: allows greater and comfortable control in multiple positions. Compact and slim handle for
easy operation. Auxiliary handle with rubber coated, can be set in two positions

Model Power Diameter of No-load speed Theard size Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) wheel (mm) (r/min) (m) carton category
EL-AG03 2400 230 6500 M14 2 1 D 59503

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
ELECTRICAL PROFESSIONAL CORDED LINE www.elmarkholding.eu

PROFESSIONAL MULTI TOOL

EL-MT40
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Quick blade: changing system can fit widely-used blades

Oscilation angle: 4 degree
Powerful motor: for improved durability and strainghter cuts
Variable speed: for optimal performace and control in a variety of materials

Model Power No-load speed (r/min) Oscilation angle Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) (mm) (m) carton category
EL-MT40 280 11000-21000 M14 2 1 D 59540

PROFESSIONAL JIG SAW

EL-JS20
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Model Power No-load speed (r/min) Stroke distance Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) (mm) (m) carton category
EL-JS20 710 1500-3100 23 2 1 D 59520

#N#
TOOLS

314
HAND TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu ELECTRICAL CORDLESS LINE

PROFESSIONAL CORDED
HEAT GUN EL-HG30
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Dual fan speed celector delivers high and low fan speed settings
Integrated hands free support stand allow the gun to sit upright for hands free use
1800Watt motor delivers hight heat and multiple fan setting

Model Power Temperature Air flow Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) (C°) (L/M) (m) carton category
EL-HG30 1800 50/400/550 250/250/500 2 1 D 59530

HEAT GUN NOZZLE FOR EL-HG30

Recommended for Packing (pcs) / carton Product ategory Catalogue number

EL-HG30 1 D 59532
#N#

CORDED HEAT GUN EL-HG31

3

TOOLS
3+0 YEAR TOTAL
WITH HEAT GUN NOZZLE standard
+extended WARRANTY

Protection: against over-heat

Settings: two steps airflow 315
Model Power Temperature Switch position Cable length Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(W) (C°) (m) carton category
HAND TOOLS

EL-HG31 2000 350 0-I-II 2 1 D 59531

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
ELECTRICAL CORDLESS LINE www.elmarkholding.eu

12V CORDLESS DRIL EL-CD53

WITH BATTERY & CHARGER, SET
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Battery capacity: 12V/2A

Charger: 400mA
Drill gear box: two speed
Compact design: with soft grip handle
LED light: Integrated

Model Voltage No-load speed Max. Torque Chuck size Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(V) (r/min) torque settings (mm) carton category
(N.m)
EL-CD53 12 0-400/0-1500 30 19+1 10 1 D 59553

20V DRILL DRIVER EL-CD50 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

High performance 4-pole motor

PCB inside: to protect the motor from over-loading
Belt clip: for easy carring
Soft grip: to reduce fatigue
Battery: Not Included. Suitable with battery with catalogue numbers 59560 and 59561

Model Voltage No-load speed Max. Torque Chuck size Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(V) (r/min) torque settings (mm) carton category
(N.m)
EL-CD50 20 0-400/0-1500 30 21+1 10 1 D 59550
TOOLS

316
20V TWO SPEED IMPACT DRILL
EL-CD51
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
HAND TOOLS

All metal/ 2 speed transmision: for a wide renge of drilling and driving applications
High performance 4-pole motor
PCB inside: to protect the motor from over-loading
Belt clip: for easy carring
Soft grip: to reduce fatigue
Battery: Not Included. Suitable with battery with catalogue numbers 59560 and 59561

Model Voltage No-load speed Max. Torque Impact rate Chuck size Packing Product Catalogue number
(V) (r/min) torque settings (B/min) (mm) (pcs) / category
(N.m) carton
EL-CD51 20 0-450/0-1700 50 21+1+1 0-6400/24000 13- all metal 1 D 59551
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu ELECTRICAL CORDLESS LINE

20V ANGLE GRINDER EL-CAD52 5+0

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

High performance motor

PCB inside: to protect the motor from over-loading
Soft grip: to reduce fatigue
Battery: Not Included. Suitable with battery with catalogue numbers 59560 and 59561

Model Voltage No-load speed Diameter of Thread size Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(V) (r/min) wheel carton category
EL-CAD52 20 7000 115 14 1 D 59552

20V LITHIUM BATTERIES 2+1

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Water protection barrier: routes water away from the electronics and out of the battery pack
Smart electronics: Protect from abuse. Optimum tool performance
Temp control frame: Extend run-time anf life by minimizing heat. Operates below -18°C/ 0°F
Fully explosed cell carrier and rubber overmold: prevents pack failure from vibration or drops

Model Voltage Type Capacity Charge time Cells Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
(V) (Ah) (h) (pcs) carton category
EL-B60 20VDC Li-ion 2 1 5 1 D 59560
EL-B61 20VDC Li-ion 4 2 10 1 D 59561

TOOLS
FAST BATTERY CHARGER 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

317
Features:
Diagnostics with LED
Short circuit protection
HAND TOOLS

Over heating protection

Over charging protection

Model Rated Voltage Input Voltage Packing (pcs) / carton Product Catalogue number
(V) (V) category
EL-CH62 20VDC 100-240VAC 1 D 59562

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES www.elmarkholding.eu

DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ890G 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С

• DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V • Diodes control: yes
• AC voltage : 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V • Buzzer: yes
• DC current: 2 / 20 / 200 / 10A • Transistor test: yes
• AC current: 200m / 10A • Auto power: yes
• Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20MΩ • Dimensions: 170 х 87 х 33mm
• Capacitors: 2η / 20η / 200η / 2μ / 20μ • Weight: 326 g
• Frequency: 20kHz • Battery: 1x9V

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

ЕМ890G 1/40 C 519890

DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ850L 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Transistor test: yes

• DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V • Data hold: yes
• AC voltage : 200 / 600 V • Back light function: yes
• DC current: 200μ / 2 / 20 / 200 / 10A • Dimensions: 135х 67 х 33mm
• Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2MΩ • Weight: 147 g
• Diodes control: yes • Battery: 1x9V

#N#
• Buzzer: yes

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

ЕМ850L 1/40 C 519850
TOOLS

318 DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ83B 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Buzzer: yes

• DC voltage: 200m/2000m/ 20 / 200 / 400 V • Battery test (9V): yes
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

• AC voltage : 200 / 400 V • Dimensions: 102х 60 х 24mm

• DC current: 2000μ / 20m / 200mA • Weight: 60 g
• Resistance: 200 / 2000 / 20K / 200K / 2000KΩ • Battery: 12V
• Diodes control: yes

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

ЕМ83B 1/100 C 519083

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ5510 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features
automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits
with the size of 3 ¾ . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to
electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off.

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С

• DC voltage: 0.4 / 4 / 40 / 400 / 600 V • Humidity: 30% to 95%
• AC voltage : 4 / 40 / 400 / 600V • Illumination: 4000 Lux / 40000 Lux
• DC current: 400μ / 4000μ / 40m / 400m / 10A • Noise level: 35 to 100dB
• AC current: 400μ / 4000μ / 40m / 400m / 10A • Circuit control: yes
• Resistance: 400 / 4K / 40K / 400K / 4M / 40MΩ • Diodes control: yes
• Capacitors: 4η / 40η / 400η / 4μ / 40μ / 100μF • Weight: 310 g (including battery)
• Frequency: 10 / 100 / 1k / 10k / 100k / 200kHz • Battery: 1x9V
• Loading cycles: from 0.1% to 99.9% • Dimensions: 83 х 162 х 47mm

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

ЕМ5510 1/10 C 5195510

DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ420C 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features
automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4
digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and
resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off.

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V

• DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V • Circuit control: yes
• AC voltage : 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V • Diodes control: yes
• DC current: 200μ / 2000μ / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A • Weight: 200 g (including battery)

TOOLS
• AC current: 00μ / 2000μ / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A • battery: 3x1.5 V
• Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20MΩ • dimensions: 75 х 158 х 35mm
• Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

ЕМ420C 1/10 C 519420
319
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES www.elmarkholding.eu

DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ3055 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital device for measuring of all electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD
display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 3 ½ . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital
conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences.

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V

• DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V • Transistor test: Vce≈3V , Ib≈10μF
• AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V • Circuit control: yes
• DC current: 2m / 20m / 200m / 10A • Diodes control: yes
• AC current: 200m / 10A • Weight: 495 g (including battery)
• Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200MΩ • battery: 1x9V
• Capacity: 2000p / 20η / 200η / 20μF • dimensions: 97 х 200 х 48mm
• Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

EM3055 1/10 C 5193055

DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ3058 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital device for measuring of temperature and all electric values. It features manual range adjustment,
manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 ¾ . It is
of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. It has an automatic switch off.

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Loading cycles: 0.1% to 99.9%

• DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V • Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С
• AC voltage: 200 m / 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V • Logical level: High > 2.0 V; Low < 0.8 V
TOOLS

• DC current: 20μ / 200 μ / 2m / 200m / 10A • Circuit control: yes

• AC current: 20μ / 200μ / 2m / 200m / 2 / 10A • Diodes control: yes
• Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200MΩ • Weight: 495 g (including battery)
• Capacitors: 2η / 20η / 200η / 2μ / 20μF • battery: 1x9V
• Frequency: 20kHz to 2000kHz • dimensions: 97 х 200 х 47 mm

320
Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
EM3058 1/10 C 5193058
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ31 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital device for measuring of electric values. TECHNICAL FEATURES:

It features automatic range adjustment, manual value • DC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V
selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured • AC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V
value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high • DC current: 240μ / 2400μ / 24m / 240m / 10A
accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision • AC current: 240μ / 2400μ / 24m / 240m / 10A
in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic • Resistance: 400Ω - 40MΩ
interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low • Capacity: 51.2ηF to 51.2μF
battery indication. • Frequency: 50 / 500 / 5000 / 50k / 50MHz
• Circuit control: yes
• Diodes control: yes
• Weight: 137 g (including battery)
• battery: 9V
• dimensions: 70 х 126 х 28mm

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

EM31 1/10 C 519031

DIGITAL MULTIMETER / PEN ЕМ3215 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital device for measuring of electric values TECHNICAL FEATURES:

in the form of a pen. It features automatic range • DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V
adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD • AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V
display, data retain function, automatic reset, polarity • DC current: 20m to 200mA
selection, range overload indication. It is of high • AC current: 20m to 200mA
accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision • Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20MΩ
in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic • Logical level: High > 2.3V; Low < 0.8 V

TOOLS
interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low • Circuit control: yes
battery indication and a torch. • Diodes control: yes
• Weight: 182 g (including battery)
• battery: 1x9V
• dimensions: 57 х 230 х 30mm

321
Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
EM3215 1/10 C 5193215 DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES www.elmarkholding.eu

DIGITAL CLAMP METER EM202 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value
selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3½ mm. It is of high accuracy
of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an
automatic switch off.

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Circuit control: yes

• DC voltage: 1000 V • Diodes control: yes
• AC voltage: 750V • Weight: 400 g (including battery)
• AC current: 20 / 200 / 1000A • battery: 1x9V
• Resistance: 200 kΩ • dimensions: 99 х 250 х 43mm
• Temperature: -40° up to 1400°С

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

EM202 1/10 C 519202

DIGITAL CLAMP METER EM204 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value
selection. It has an LCD display, low battery indication, overload protection. It is of high accuracy of analogue-
digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic
switch off.

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Frequency: 2 kHz

• DC voltage: 1000 V • Circuit control: yes
• AC voltage: 750V • Weight: 400 g (including battery)
• DC current: 200 / 1000A • battery: 1x9V
TOOLS

• AC current: 200 / 1000A • dimensions: 99 х 258 х 43mm

• Resistance: 200 kΩ

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

EM204 1/10 C 519204
322
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

DIGITAL CLAMP METER EM266 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD
display and retain function option, low battery indication and overload protection.

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Circuit control: yes

• DC voltage: 1000 V • Diodes control: yes
• AC voltage: 750V • Weight: 310 g (including battery)
• AC current: 200 / 1000A • battery: 1x9V
• Resistance: 200 / 20 kΩ • dimensions: 69 х 229 х 38mm

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

EM266 1/10 C 519266

INFRARED TEMPERATURE METER EM520A 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

This is a digital device for measuring of temperature.The temperature is measured with no contact. It has a laser
counter for precision measuring, suitable large LCD display, battery low indication and overload protection.

TECHNICAL FEATURES: • Precision: ±2° C or 2% in reading

• Temperature: -20° up to 320°С / -4° to 608 °F • battery: 1x9V
• Distance to point size: 6:1 • dimensions: 90 х 155 х 45mm

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

EM520A 1/5 C 519520

TOOLS
INDUSTRIAL REPAIR KIT ETK06A 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
323
A finely packaged repair kit containing four elements in a metal briefcase, sealed with special plastic foam and
struts for each instrument. DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

THE KIT INCLUDES:

• Digital multimeter EM420
• Digital clamp-on ammeter EM465
• Phase meter GK7
• Infrared temperature meter EM520A

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

ETK06A 1/6 F 51906A

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES www.elmarkholding.eu

VOLTAGE TESTER 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

The voltage tester screwdriver is used for detecting the presence of electrical voltage. Existence of voltage is
shown via lighting signal indicator located in the handle of the screwdriver. It can detect voltage in the range
from 100V to 250V. The screwdriver has a flat tip.

TECHNICAL FEATURES:
• Length-3.5*140mm
• Voltage range 100-250V~
• GS, CE certifycates

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

DN-8203 1/480 C 519203

VOLTAGE TESTER 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL FEATURES:
• Length-3.5*190mm
• Voltage range 100-500V~
• ABS+PC

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

EL-1805 1/40/600 C 519205
TOOLS

NON-CONTACT VOLTAGE AC DETECTOR 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

324
FUNCTION: TECHNICAL FEATURES:
• AC voltage detection • Voltage range: from 50 to 1000V/AC
• Indicate AC null line and live line • Handle meterial: ABS
• Auto power off in 5 minutes • Metal: carbon steel
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

• Buzzer: sound beeps when is detected AC voltage • Light: LED

• Green light: by power ON • Blade diameter: 3mm
• RED light: by live parts detection. Higher flashing • Length – 140mm
frequency indicates stronger electric field
Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
GK8 1/20 C 519GK8

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

PHASE METER GK7 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

A device indicating phase availability in the system. No contact phase indicator featuring sound and light
indication of phase availability.

TECHNICAL FEATURES:
• Voltage range: from 50 to 1000V
• Frequency range: from 50 Hz to 500 Hz
• dimensions: length – 62mm

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

GK7 60 C 519GK7

MULTIFUNCTIONAL VOLTAGE TESTER 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: TECHNICAL FEATURES:

• AC voltage testing • Voltage range: from 12 to 220V/AC
• Line break testing • Handle meterial: ABS
• Earth checking • Metal: carbon steel
• Light: LED
• Blade diameter: 4mm
• Length – 190mm
Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
EL-8736 1/20 C 519207

TOOLS
VOLTAGE TESTER 2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
325
TECHNICAL FEATURES:
• Length-2.0*185mm
• Voltage range 6-380V
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSOIRES

• ABS

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

EL-EN08 1/10/200 C 519206

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

CUTTER 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Cutter 760 1 C 598245

MULTI-PURPOSE WIRING TOOL 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Ergonomic molded anti-slip grid handle

Crimp insulated and non insulated cable terminals

Type Size (mm) Cable size section Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Wiring tool 200 0.75-6.0mm 6/36 C 598030

AUTOMATIC WIRE STRIPPER 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Wire is automatically gripped and stripped with the same motion

Adjustable dial
Comfort grip handle
TOOLS

Type Size (mm) Cable size section Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Wire Stripper 168 1.0-3.2mm 6/36 C 598032

326
HAND TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu MECHANICAL TOOLS

INSTRUMENT FOR MANUAL CRIMPING

OF CONDUCTORS HD – 005 TYPE
2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: TECHNICAL DATA:

• Crimping of naked cable terminals • Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to
10mm²
• Form of the crimping head: hexahedral²
• Weight of the instrument: 0.49kg
• Length of the instrument: 220mm
• Packing: blister

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

HD – 005 20 C 59308

INSTRUMENT FOR MANUAL CRIMPING

OF CONDUCTORS G – 301H TYPE
2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: TECHNICAL DATA:

• Crimping of isolated cable terminals • Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to
6mm²
• Form of the crimping head: hexahedral
• Weight of the instrument: 0.49kg
• Length of the instrument: 220mm
• Packing: blister

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

G – 301H 20 C 59307

TOOLS
CRIMPING PLIERS SN – 003 TYPE 2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

327
FUNCTIONS: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Crimping of naked cable terminals and joining • Possibility for crimping of cable conductors from 6
bushes to 16mm²
• Form of the crimping head: hexahedral
MECHANICAL TOOLS

• Weight of the instrument: 0.39kg

• Length of the instrument: 190mm
• Packing: blister

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

SN – 003 10 / 20 C 59309

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
MECHANICAL TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

MECHANICAL CABLE CUTTING PLIERS CC – 325 TYPE 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Cutting power: 15T

• Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors • Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
• Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core • Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
• Weight of the instrument: 0.58kg
TECHNICAL DATA: • Length of the instrument: 260mm
• Maximum section of the cable: • Packing: blister
Ì for aluminum conductors up to 150mm²
Ì for copper conductors up to 150mm²

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

CC – 325 5 / 10 C 59305

MECHANICAL CABLE CUTTING PLIERS CC – 400 TYPE 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Cutting power: 15T

• Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors • Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
• Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core • Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
• Weight of the instrument: 1.25kg
TECHNICAL DATA: • Length of the instrument: 360mm
• Maximum section of the cable: • Packing: blister
Ì - for aluminum conductors up to 400mm²
Ì - for copper conductors up to 350mm²

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

CC – 400 5 C 59304
TOOLS

328 MECHANICAL CABLE CUTTING PLIERS HS – 250 TYPE 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Weight of the instrument: 1.43kg

• Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors • Length of the instrument: 540mm
MECHANICAL TOOLS

• Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core • Packing: blister

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Maximum section of the cable:
Ì for aluminum conductors up to 240mm²
Ì for copper conductors up to 185mm²
Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
HS – 250 10 C 59306

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HYDRAULIC TOOLS

HYDRAULIC CRIMPING PLIERS HT - 300 TYPE 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm²

• Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with • Section of the crimping conductors:
cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Ì AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm²
Ì Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm²
TECHNICAL DATA: • Element pressing power: 60kN
• Crimping head turning at 360° which facilitates the • Width of the element: 17mm
crimping of static conductors • Weight of the instrument: 3.3 kg
• Device for automatic following of the effort at • Length: 460mm
crimping completion • Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15)
• Form of the crimping element: hexahedral • Metal box for the instrument
• Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, • A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

HT - 300 2 C 59300

HYDRAULIC CRIMPING PLIERS KYQ-300B TYPE 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Section of the crimping conductors:

• Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with Ì AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm²
cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Ì Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm²
• Element pressing power: 100kN
TECHNICAL DATA: • Width of the element: 22mm
• Device for automatic following of the effort at • Weight of the instrument: 6.8 kg
crimping completion • Length: 500mm
• Form of the crimping element: hexahedral • Used hydraulic oil: #23 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 23)
• Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, • Metal box for the instrument
120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm² • A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

KYQ-300B 2 C 59302

TOOLS
329
HYDRAULIC TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
HYDRAULIC TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

HYDRAULIC CRIMPING PLIERS YQK-300 TYPE 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Section of the crimping conductors:

• Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with Ì AI conductors - from 10 to 300 mm²
cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Ì Cu conductors – from 10 to 240 mm²
• Element pressing power: 100kN
TECHNICAL DATA: • Width of the element: 22mm
• Form of the crimping element: hexahedral • Weight of the instrument: 6.3 kg
• Size of the crimping element: 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, • Length: 500mm
95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm² • Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15)
• Metal box for the instrument
• A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

YQK-300 4 C 59301

HYDRAULIC CRIMPING PLIERS YQK – 50 TYPE 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Section of the crimping conductors:

Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with Ì AI conductors - from 4 to 50mm²
cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Ì Cu conductors – from 4 to 50 mm²
• Element pressing power: 8T
TECHNICAL DATA: • Width of the element: 10mm
• Form of the crimping element: hexahedral • Weight of the instrument: 2.8 kg
• Size of the crimping element: 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50 • Length: 310mm
mm² • Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15)
• Metal box for the instrument
TOOLS

• A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

YQK – 50 5 C 59303
330
HYDRAULIC TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HYDRAULIC TOOLS

HYDRAULIC PUNCHING PLIERS WK - 8 TYPE 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Element pressing power: 80kN

• Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge • Thickness of the element: 25mm
up to 3mm without rotary motion • Weight of the instrument: 3.5 kg
• Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15)
TECHNICAL DATA: • Metal box for the instrument
• Piercing head turning at 360° • A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
• Form of the cutting element: round • Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands
• Size of the cutting element: Ø 22.5, 28.3, 34.6, 43.2, – Ø16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display
49.6, 61.5mm devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally);
• Piercing capacity: Catalogue number 54002
Ì sheet metal 3mm – openings up to Ø 30mm
Ì sheet metal 2mm – openings up to Ø 60mm

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

WK - 8 2 C 54000
Additional set 2 C 54002

HYDRAULIC PUNCHING PRESS SYK – 15 TYPE 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTIONS: • Piercing capacity:

• Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge Ì sheet metal 3mm – openings up to Ø 60.8mm
up to 3mm without rotary motion Ì sheet metal 2mm – openings up to Ø 115.5mm
Ì square opening up to 110x110mm
TECHNICAL DATA: • Element pressing power: 15T
• Protracting piercing head supplied with a hose for • Thickness of the element: 25mm

TOOLS
the hydraulic oil that gives possibility for piercing • Weight of the instrument: 11.5 kg
openings everywhere on the metal surface • Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15)
• Form of the cutting element: • Metal box for the instrument
Ì round • A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
Ì square • Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands
• Size of the cutting element: – Ø16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display
Ì square: 32x32mm devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); 331
Ì round openings: Ø 22.5, 28.3, 34.6, 43.2, 49.6, Catalogue number 54002
61.5mm HYDRAULIC TOOLS

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

SYK – 15 2 C 54001
Additional set 2 C 54002

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

1000V
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

VDE INSULATED COMBINED PLIERS

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
COMBINED PLIERS 1000V 200 6 / 36 C 598001

CrV

1000V
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

VDE INSULATED LONG NOSE PLIERS

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
LONG NOSE PLIERS 1000V 200 6 / 36 C 598002

CrV

1000V
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

VDE INSULATED DIAGONAL PLIERS

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
CUTTING PLIERS 1000V 160 6 / 36 C 598003
TOOLS

CUTTING PLIERS 1000V 180 6 / 36 C 598013

CrV
332

3+2
5
HAND TOOLS

1000V standard
+extended
YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

VDE INSULATED WIRE STRIPPER

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
WIRE STRIPPER 1000V 160 6 / 36 C 598004

CrV

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

1000V
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

VDE INSULATED GROOVE JOINT PLIERS

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
GROOVE JOINT PLIERS 1000V 250 6/36 C 598005

CrV

1000V
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

VDE INSULATED SCREWDRIVER- SLOTTED

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
SCREWDRIVER- SLOTTED 2.5X50 6/36 C 598006
SCREWDRIVER- SLOTTED 3.5X75 6/36 C 598007
SCREWDRIVER- SLOTTED 4X100 6/36 C 598008
SCREWDRIVER- SLOTTED 5.5X150 6/36 C 598009

CrV

1000V
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

VDE INSULATED SCREWDRIVER- PH

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
SCREWDRIVER PH0X75 6/36 C 598010

TOOLS
SCREWDRIVER PH1X100 6/36 C 598011
SCREWDRIVER PH2X125 6/36 C 598012

333
CrV
HAND TOOLS

VDE CABLE CUTTING PLIERS, 1000V 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
VDE Cable Cutting Pliers 180 1 / 6 / 60 F 599200180

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

MINI COMBINED PLIERS

Chrome-vanadium steel for longer life and durability
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Bi-material comfort grip handle

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Mini combined pliers 115 6/36 C 598040

CrV

MINI DIAGONAL PLIERS

Chrome-vanadium steel for longer life and durability
3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Bi-material comfort grip handle

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Mini diagonal pliers 115 6/36 C 598042

CrV

BENT NOSE MINI PLIERS 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
TOOLS

Bent Nose Mini Pliers 115 1 / 12 / 120 F 592400115

334
HAND TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

COMBINED PLIERS 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Chrome-vanadium steel for longer life and durability

Bi-material comfort grip handle
Heat treated, fully polished

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Combined pliers 160 6/36 C 598043
Combined pliers 180 6/36 C 598044

CrV

DIAGONAL PLIERS 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Chrome-vanadium steel for longer life and durability

Bi-material comfort grip handle
Heat treated, fully polished

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Diagonal pliers 160 6/36 C 598046

CrV

TOOLS
LONG NOSE PLIERS 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Chrome-vanadium steel for longer life and durability 335

Bi-material comfort grip handle
Heat treated, fully polished HAND TOOLS

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Long nose pliers 160 6/36 C 598047

CrV

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

MAGNETIC SCREWDRIVER- SLOTTED

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Screwdriver 6x38 6/36 C 598070
Screwdriver 3x75 6/36 C 598071
Screwdriver 3x100 6/36 C 598072
Screwdriver 4x100 6/36 C 598073

CrV

3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

MAGNETIC SCREWDRIVER- PH

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Screwdriver PH2x38 6/36 C 598080

CrV

3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

MAGNETIC SCREWDRIVER- PZ
TOOLS

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Screwdriver PZ2x38 6/36 C 598089

336 CrV
HAND TOOLS

MAGNETIC BIT HOLDER 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

Bit holder 6/36 C 598096

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

SIDE CUTTING PLIERS 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Side Cutting Pliers 180 1 / 6 / 36 F 592200180

CUTTING PLIERS, HEAVY DUTY 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Cutting Pliers, Heavy Duty 180 1 / 6 / 36 F 592201180

TOOLS
337
HAND TOOLS
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

SCREWDRIVER SLOTTED 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Screwdriver 4 150 1 / 12 / 120 F 593140150
Screwdriver 5 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593150100
Screwdriver 5 150 1 / 12 / 120 F 593150150
Screwdriver 6 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593160100
Screwdriver 6 150 1 / 12 / 120 F 593160150
Screwdriver 8 150 1 / 6 / 60 F 593180150

SCREWDRIVER PH 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Screwdriver PH0 75 1 / 12 / 120 F 593200075
Screwdriver PH0 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593200100
Screwdriver PH0 150 1 / 12 / 120 F 593200150
Screwdriver PH1 75 1 / 12 / 120 F 593201075
Screwdriver PH1 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593201100
Screwdriver PH1 150 1 / 12 / 120 F 593201150
Screwdriver PH2 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593202100
Screwdriver PH2 150 1 / 12 / 120 F 593202150
Screwdriver PH3 150 1 / 6 / 60 F 593203150

SCREWDRIVER PZ 3+2
standard
5 YEAR TOTAL
TOOLS

+extended WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Screwdriver PZ0 75 1 / 12 / 120 F 593300075
Screwdriver PZ1 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593301100
338 Screwdriver PZ2 150 1 / 12 / 120 F 593302150
Screwdriver PZ3 150 1 / 6 / 60 F 593303150
HAND TOOLS
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

SCREWDRIVER T 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Screwdriver Т5 75 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400005
Screwdriver Т6 75 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400006
Screwdriver Т7 75 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400007
Screwdriver Т8 75 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400008
Screwdriver Т9 75 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400009
Screwdriver Т10 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400010
Screwdriver Т15 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400015
Screwdriver Т20 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400020
Screwdriver Т25 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400025
Screwdriver Т27 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400027
Screwdriver Т30 100 1 / 12 / 120 F 593400030
Screwdriver Т40 150 1 / 6 / 60 F 593400040

SLOTTED BIT 1/4 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
hanging card carton category
Slotted bit 4,0 25 2 125 / 500 F 594104025
Slotted bit 4,5 25 2 125 / 500 F 594104525
Slotted bit 5,5 25 2 125 / 500 F 594105525
Slotted bit 6,0 25 2 125 / 500 F 594106025
Slotted bit 6,5 25 2 125 / 500 F 594106525
Slotted bit 8,0 25 2 125 / 500 F 594108025
Slotted bit 9,0 25 2 125 / 500 F 594109025

TOOLS
SLOTTED BIT 1/4 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
339
Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
hanging card carton category
Slotted bit 4,0 50 2 125 / 500 F 594114050
HAND TOOLS

Slotted bit 4,5 50 2 125 / 500 F 594114550

Slotted bit 5,5 50 2 125 / 500 F 594115550
Slotted bit 6,0 50 2 125 / 500 F 594116050
Slotted bit 6,5 50 2 125 / 500 F 594116550
Slotted bit 8,0 50 2 125 / 500 F 594118050
Slotted bit 9,0 50 2 125 / 500 F 594119050
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

PH BIT 1/4 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
hanging card carton category
PH bit PH0 25 2 125 / 500 F 594200025
PH bit PH1 25 2 125 / 500 F 594200125
PH bit PH3 25 2 125 / 500 F 594200325
PH bit PH3 50 2 125 / 500 F 594210350
PH bit PH4 50 2 125 / 500 F 594210450

PZ BIT1/4 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
hanging card carton category
PZ bit PZ0 25 2 125 / 500 F 594300025
PZ bit PZ1 25 2 125 / 500 F 594300125
PZ bit PZ3 25 2 125 / 500 F 594300325
PZ bit PZ1 50 2 125 / 500 F 594310150
PZ bit PZ3 50 2 125 / 500 F 594310350
PZ bit PZ4 50 2 125 / 500 F 594310450

#K#
TORX BIT 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
hanging card carton category
TOOLS

TORX bit T4 25 2 125 / 500 F 594400425

TORX bit T5 25 2 125 / 500 F 594400525
TORX bit T6 25 2 125 / 500 F 594400625
TORX bit T7 25 2 125 / 500 F 594400725
340 TORX bit T8 25 2 125 / 500 F 594400825
TORX bit T9 25 2 125 / 500 F 594400925
TORX bit T10 25 2 125 / 500 F 594401025
TORX bit T15 25 2 125 / 500 F 594401525
HAND TOOLS

TORX bit T20 25 2 125 / 500 F 594402025

TORX bit T25 25 2 125 / 500 F 594402525
TORX bit T27 25 2 125 / 500 F 594402725
TORX bit T30 25 2 125 / 500 F 594403025
TORX bit T40 25 2 125 / 500 F 594404025
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

TORX BIT 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / Packing (pcs) / Product Catalogue number
hanging card carton category
TORX bit T10 50 2 125 / 500 F 594411050
TORX bit T15 50 2 125 / 500 F 594411550
TORX bit T25 50 2 125 / 500 F 594412550
TORX bit T27 50 2 125 / 500 F 594412750
TORX bit T40 50 2 125 / 500 F 594414050

RACHET HANDLE 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Rachet handle 3/8” 1 / 6 / 36 F 595100038
#K#

TOOLS
HEXAGON SOCKET 1/4 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
341
1/4” socket 4mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300040
1/4” socket 4.5mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300045
HAND TOOLS

1/4” socket 5mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300050

1/4” socket 5.5mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300055
1/4” socket 6mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300060
1/4” socket 7mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300070
1/4” socket 8mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300080
1/4” socket 9mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300090
1/4” socket 10mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300100
1/4” socket 11mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300110
1/4” socket 12mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300120
1/4” socket 13mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300130
1/4” socket 14mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595300140
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

HEXAGON SOCKET 3/8 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
3/8" socket 6mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595400006
3/8" socket 7mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595400007
3/8" socket 8mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595400008
3/8" socket 9mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595400009
3/8" socket 10mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595400010
3/8" socket 11mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595400011
3/8" socket 12mm 1 / 14 / 280 F 595400012
3/8" socket 13mm 1 / 12 / 240 F 595400013
3/8" socket 14mm 1 / 12 / 240 F 595400014
3/8" socket 15mm 1 / 12 / 240 F 595400015
3/8" socket 16mm 1 / 12 / 240 F 595400016
3/8" socket 17mm 1 / 12 / 240 F 595400017
3/8" socket 18mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595400018
3/8" socket 19mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595400019
3/8" socket 20mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595400020
3/8" socket 21mm 1 / 8 / 160 F 595400021

HEXAGON SOCKET 1/2 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
1/2" socket 10mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595500010
1/2" socket 11mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595500011
1/2" socket 12mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595500012
1/2" socket 13mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595500013
1/2" socket 14mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595500014
TOOLS

1/2" socket 15mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595500015

1/2" socket 16mm 1 / 10 / 200 F 595500016
1/2" socket 17mm 1 / 8 / 160 F 595500017
1/2" socket 18mm 1 / 8 / 160 F 595500018
1/2" socket 19mm 1 / 8 / 160 F 595500019
342 1/2" socket 20mm 1 / 8 / 160 F 595500020
1/2" socket 21mm 1 / 8 / 160 F 595500021
1/2" socket 22mm 1 / 8 / 160 F 595500022
1/2" socket 23mm 1 / 6 / 120 F 595500023
HAND TOOLS

1/2" socket 24mm 1 / 6 / 120 F 595500024

1/2" socket 27mm 1 / 5 / 100 F 595500027
1/2" socket 30mm 1 / 4 / 80 F 595500030
1/2" socket 32mm 1 / 4 / 80 F 595500032
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

COMBINATION SPANNER 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Offset ring end Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Combination Spanner 9 6,5 150 1 / 12 / 300 F 596200009
Combination Spanner 11 7,5 150 1 / 12 / 300 F 596200011
Combination Spanner 15 9,5 150 1 / 12 / 180 F 596200015
Combination Spanner 16 10,0 150 1 / 12 / 180 F 596200016
Combination Spanner 18 11,0 150 1 / 12 / 120 F 596200018
Combination Spanner 20 12,0 150 1 / 6 / 120 F 596200020
Combination Spanner 21 12,3 150 1 / 6 / 90 F 596200021
Combination Spanner 22 12,5 150 1 / 6 / 90 F 596200022
Combination Spanner 23 12,8 150 1 / 6 / 90 F 596200023
Combination Spanner 24 13,0 150 1 / 6 / 60 F 596200024
Combination Spanner 27 14,5 150 1 / 6 / 60 F 596200027

DOUBLE OPEN SPANNER 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Double Open Spanner 6x7 120 1 / 12 / 300 F 596300067
Double Open Spanner 8x9 140 1 / 12 / 300 F 596300089
Double Open Spanner 14x15 185 1 / 12 / 240 F 596301415
Double Open Spanner 16x17 200 1 / 12 / 180 F 596301617
Double Open Spanner 18x19 220 1 / 12 / 180 F 596301819
Double Open Spanner 20x22 235 1 / 6 / 120 F 596302022
Double Open Spanner 21x23 245 1 / 6 / 60 F 596302123
Double Open Spanner 25x28 270 1 / 6 / 48 F 596302528
Double Open Spanner 30x32 295 1 / 6 / 48 F 596303032

TOOLS
343
DOUBLE OFFSET RING SPANNER 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Length (mm) Offset ring end Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
HAND TOOLS

Double Offset Ring Spanner 6x7 165 750 1 / 12 / 240 F 596400067

Double Offset Ring Spanner 8x9 180 750 1 / 12 / 240 F 596400089
Double Offset Ring Spanner 14x15 235 750 1 / 6 / 150 F 596401415
Double Offset Ring Spanner 16x17 250 750 1 / 6 / 150 F 596401617
Double Offset Ring Spanner 18x19 265 750 1 / 6 / 120 F 596401819
Double Offset Ring Spanner 20x22 285 750 1 / 6 / 60 F 596402022
Double Offset Ring Spanner 21x23 305 750 1 / 6 / 60 F 596402123
Double Offset Ring Spanner 24x27 325 750 1 / 6 / 60 F 596402427
Double Offset Ring Spanner 25x28 340 750 1 / 6 / 30 F 596402528
Double Offset Ring Spanner 30x32 375 750 1 / 6 / 30 F 596403032
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

PLASTIC LEVEL 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Durable acrylic vials read plumb, level, 45°

Top read window for convenience
Rubber end caps for shock-resistant
Highly visible vials with magnetic base

Type Length (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Level 228.6 6/36 C 598243

SAW 3+2
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Saw 400 1 / 6 / 60 F 597200400
TOOLS

344
HAND TOOLS
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

6PC PRECISION SCREWDRIVER SET

Slotted size: 1.4mm, 2.0mm, 2.4mm, 3.0mm

PH size: PH0, PH1
Carbon steel blade with black finish
With chrome plated handle

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

Screwdriver set 6/36 C 598094

15-IN-1 MULTI-PURPOSE PLIERS 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Precision punched
Machined surface
Stainless steel components
Compact folding design
deal selection for general purpose use

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

Multi pliers 4/24 C 598210

ALLIGATORS CLIPS SETS

Type Rated current Colour Length (mm) Packing / Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
category

TOOLS
F 275 max 5A red/ black 50 50 G M500060
F 279 max 80A red/ black 80 50 G M500059
L 150 max 200A red/ black 150 2 G M411012

345
HAND TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

CUTTER KNIFE 9MM

Handle material: Plastic PP

Blade material: Steel
Blade size: 83x9x0.4mm;
Color: Yellow
Packaging: Blister card

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

Cutter knife 1/135/1080 C 597300009

CUTTER KNIFE 18MM

Handle material: Plastic PP

Blade material: Steel
Blade size: 100x18x0.5mm;
Color: Blue
Packaging: Blister card

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

E-7229 Cutter knife 1/50/400 C 597300021

#N#
CUTTER KNIFE 18MM

Handle material: Plastic PP+TPR

TOOLS

Blade material: SK5

Blade size: 100x18x0.5mm;
Color: Red
Packaging: Blister card

346 Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

E-82087 Cutter knife 1/36/288 C 597300019
HAND TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

FOLDABLE KNIFE 18MM

Handle material: Plastic PP+TPR

Blade material: SK5(1+5pcs)
Blade size: 60x19x0.5mm;
Color: Yellow
Packaging: Blister card

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

E7002 Foldable knife 1/12/240 C 597300022

ALUMINIUM AUTO-LOCK KNIFE

Handle material: Aluminum Alloy

Blade material: SK5
Blade size: 60x19x0.5mm;
Color: Silver
Packaging: Blister card

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

E-522 Auto- lock knife 1/36/288 C 597300020
#N#

ALUMINUM FIXED BLADE UTILITY KNIFE

Razor-sharp tempered SK5 blade

TOOLS
Aluminum alloy housing
Fixed blade for more cutting power
3PC blades included

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

Aluminium utility knife 6/36 C 598201 347
HAND TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

KNIFE SPARE BLADES

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Knife spare blades 9 10 / 40 / 600 C 597310009
Knife spare blades 18 1/20/400 C 597310018

HAMMER WITH HARDWOOD HANDLE

Drop forged carbon steel

Fully heat treated & polished head

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

Hammer 300gr 6/36 C 598230
Hammer 500gr 6/36 C 598231

#N#
5PC DIAMOND NEEDLE FILE SET

Fine diamond grit

TOOLS

Perfect for machinists, gunsmiths, jewelers and hobbyists

Size: 3x140mm, 150 grit
Dipped grip handle

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

348 Needle file 6/24 C 598232

HAND TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

3-IN-1 STAPLE GUN SET 3+2

standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

1PC staple gun

500PC 8x1.2x11.3mm staples
500PC 12mm staples
500PC 14mm nails
1PC handy storage case

Type Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number

Staple gun 6 C 598246

MAGNETIC TAPE MEASURE E-240 SERIES

Type Tape sizes (m/mm) Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
E-240/319 Tape measure 3x19 1/10/200 C 598247
E-240/519 Tape measure 5x19 1/10/200 C 598248
E-240/525 Tape measure 5x25 1/10/100 C 598249
#K#

CHROME PLATING TAPE MEASURE

Type Tape Length Packing (pcs) / carton Product category Catalogue number
Tape measure 5m 4/24 C 598241

TOOLS
349
HAND TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

Metal
CUTTING DISC FOR METAL

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm)

D1 - Inner disc diameter (mm)
D2 - Disc width (mm)

Ø (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

115 22.2 1.0 10/400 C M516300
115 22.2 1.6 10/400 C M516301
125 22.2 1.0 10/400 C M516302
125 22.2 1.6 1/400 C M516303
125 22.2 3.2 5/200 C M516211
180 22.2 3.2 5/100 C M516212
230 22.2 3.2 5/100 C M516213

Metal Inox
CUTTING DISC METAL A60T INOX

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm)

#N#
D1 - Inner disc diameter (mm)
D2 - Disc width (mm)

Ø (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

115 22.2 1.0 25/400 C M516304
125 22.2 1.0 25/400 C M516305
TOOLS

Metal
350
GRINDING DISC
HAND TOOLS

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm)

D1 - Inner disc diameter (mm)
D2 - Disc width (mm)

Ø (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

115 22.2 6 25/200 C M516219
125 22.2 6 25/100 C M516220
180 22.2 6 25/100 C M516307
230 22.2 6 25/50 C M516308

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

Metal
TWIST KNOT WIRE WHEEL BRUSH FOR ANGLE GRINDERS

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm)

D1 - Inner disc diameter (mm)

Ø (mm) D1 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

100 22.2 1/100 C M516050
150 22.2 1/40 C M516068

Stone
CUTTING DISC STONE

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm)

D1 - Inner disc diameter (mm)
D2 - Disc width (mm)

Ø (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

115 22.2 3.2 5/400 C M516216
125 22.2 3.2 25/200 C M516306
#N#

180 22.2 3.2 5/100 C M516217

230 22.2 3.2 5/100 C M516218

TOOLS
Concrete Bricks Faience
DIAMOND CUTTING DISC WET

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm)

D1 - Inner disc diameter (mm)
351

Ø (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

115 22.2 7 10/100 C M516309
HAND TOOLS

125 22.2 7 10/100 C M516310

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

Concrete Bricks Faience

DIAMOND CUTTING DISC TURBO

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm); D1 - Inner disc diameter (mm); D2 - Disc width (mm)

Ø (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

115 22.2 7 10/100 C M516311
125 22.2 7 10/100 C M516312

Metal Wood Stone

FLAP DISC

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm); D1 - Inner disc diameter (mm)

Ø (mm) D1 (mm) Grit Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

125 22.2 A-60 50/100 C M516169
125 22.2 A-80 50/100 C M516313
125 22.2 A-120 50/100 C M516171

#N#
Metal
TWIST KNOT WIRE CUP BRUSH FOR ANGLE GRINDERS
TOOLS

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm)

Ø (mm) Nut size Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

100 M14x2 1/60 C M516256

352
HAND TOOLS

Metal
DRILL TWIST KNOT WIRE CUP BRUSH WITH SHANK

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm); Ø S - Shank size (mm)

Ø (mm) Ø S (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

75 6 30/120 C M516314

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

Wood
HOLE CUTTERS SET

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm)

7 pcs SET

Ø (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

26-63 10/60 C M516013

Concrete
CORE CUTTERS FOR DRILL

Ø - Outer disc diameter (mm)

Ø (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

65 5/20 C M516148
85 4/20 C M516315
#N#

ARBOR & PILOT DRILL SDS PLUS FOR CORE CUTTERS

Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

TOOLS
170 4/20 C M516147

353

Wood
HAND TOOLS

BRAD POINT DRILL FOR WOOD

Ø - Drill bit diameter (mm)

5 pcs SET

Ø (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

4; 5; 6; 8; 10 5/100 C M516370

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

Metal
DRILL BITS FOR METAL

Ø - Drill bit diameter (mm)

L1- Total length (mm)
L1- Working length (mm)
DIN 338
HSS 4241

Ø (mm) L1 (mm) L2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

1.0 34 12 2/150/300 C M516316
1.5 40 18 2/150/300 C M516317
2.0 49 24 2/150/300 C M516318
2.5 57 30 2/150/300 C M516319
3.0 61 33 2/150/300 C M516320
3.2 65 36 2/150/300 C M516321
3.5 70 39 2/150/300 C M516322
4.0 75 43 2/150/300 C M516323
4.2 75 43 1/150/300 C M516324
4.5 80 47 1/150/300 C M516325
5.0 86 52 1/150/300 C M516326
6.0 93 57 1/150/300 C M516327
6.5 101 63 1/90/180 C M516328
7.0 109 69 1/90/180 C M516329
8.0 117 75 1/90/180 C M516330
10.0 133 87 1/60/120 C M516331

#N#
12.0 151 101 1/10/50 C M516332

Concrete
TOOLS

MASONRY DRILL BITS

Ø - Drill bit diameter (mm)

L1- Total length (mm)
354 L1- Working length (mm)
DIN 8039
U-type flute
HAND TOOLS

Ø (mm) L1 (mm) L2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

3.0 60 30 150/300 C M516340
4.0 75 40 150/300 C M516341
5.0 85 50 150/300 C M516342
6.0 100 60 150/300 C M516343
8.0 120 80 90/180 C M516344
10.0 150 90 60/120 C M516345

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu HAND TOOLS

Concrete
CROSS HEAD DRILLS SDS-PLUS

Ø - Drill bit diameter (mm)

L1- Total length (mm)
L1- Working length (mm)
DIN 8035

Ø (mm) L1 (mm) L2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

6.0 110 30 10/200 C M516350
6.0 160 40 10/200 C M516351
6.0 210 50 10/200 C M516352
6.5 260 200 10/200 C M516353
8.0 110 50 10/200 C M516354
8.0 160 100 10/200 C M516355
8.0 210 150 10/200 C M516356
8.0 350 300 10/100 C M516357
10.0 160 100 10/200 C M516358
10.0 260 200 10/200 C M516359
10.0 450 400 10/50 C M516360
12.0 210 150 10/200 C M516361
12.0 450 400 10/50 C M516362
#N#

SOLDERING GUN 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

With LED light

Power (W) Temperature range Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

TOOLS
100 600°C 1/24 C M516375

355
HAND TOOLS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
HAND TOOLS www.elmarkholding.eu

TIN ABSORBTION PUMP

Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

1/150 C M516380

SOLDER WIRE

Solder Alloy External Melting temp. Weigh Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
diameter (mm)
Sn-60%; PB-40% 1 180°C 200g 20/120 C M516072

ROSIN

It serves to degrease the soldering parts and the soldering tip of the soldering iron | Facilitates the flow of solder |
Increases efficiency of the soldering process

#N#
Weight (gr) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
50 1 G M500632
TOOLS

HOT MELT GLUE GUN 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Power (W) Temperature range Silicone pipe Heating time Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
diameter

356 100 18-200°C 11mm 4-5min 6/24 C M516385

HAND TOOLS

GLUE STICKS SET FOR GLUE GUNS

10 pcs SET

Ø (mm) Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

11 200 10 C M516386

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu SAFETY ACCESSORIES

KNITTED WORK GLOVES PLOVER

Seamless knitted gloves white polyester/cotton elastic cuff, palm and fingers with PVC dots.

Model Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

PLOVER white/blue 10/100 G M081001

WORK GLOVES SPARROW

Gaude white polyester, nitrile dipped.

Model Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

SPARROW white/red 10/100 G M081014

WORK GLOVES AUK

#N#

Seamless knit, nylon/cotton, white colour

Model Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

AUK white 10/100 G M081015

TOOLS
COWSPLIT LEATHER GLOVES WITH LINING

Cow split leather gloves with lining, cotton back, reinforced at the palm area 357
Model Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
GULL EVO white/yellow 10/100 G M081102
SAFETY ACCESSORIES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
SAFETY ACCESSORIES www.elmarkholding.eu

GLASSES WITH WIDE LENS UNIVET 520 VS160

Glasses with wide lens, compatible to prescription spectacle. With side vents. They can be sterilized. Entirely made
of polycarbonate, without metal fragments. Suitable to a wide range of applications.

Model Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

UNIVET 520 white 10/100 G M081000

IMPACT RESISTANT GLASSES

Impact resistant glasses, especially designed for industrial work. PVC frame with polycarbonate lenses against acid
splashes and dust, with indirect ventilation Adjustable elastic headband for extra comfort. Suitable for prolong
use, without causing distortion or fatigue. Suitable for prolong use, without causing distortion or fatigue.

Model Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

2203-00 white 10/100 G M081091

#N#
VENTILATED HELMET, KANTON

Helmet, ventilated with srew. BODY MATERIAL: HDPE, with 6 air vents (High-density polythеne) HEADBAND
MATERIAL: textile MOUNTING HEADBAND: six points WEIGHT: 360 g
TOOLS

Model Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

KANTON blue 1 G M081036

358
SAFETY ACCESSORIES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu TOOL BOXES

PLASTIC ORGANIZER WITH DIVIDERS 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Section Colour Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
8 Red 165 140 35 1 G M16654432
8 Black 303 180 50 1 G M16654434
12 Red 265 155 40 1 G M16654433

PLASTIC ORGANIZER WITH DIVIDERS 2+0

standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Section Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
3x11 315 140 210 1 G M16654400

PLASTIC TOOL BOX WITH ORGANIZER 2+0

standard
2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
#N#

+extended

Model Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
13" 320 160 130 1 G M16654420
16" 400 200 175 1 G M16654421
19" 480 255 230 1 G M16654422
22" 555 295 265 1 G M16654423

TOOLS
359
TOOL BOXES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
BATTERIES www.elmarkholding.eu

BATTERIES

Reference Type Serie Voltage Diameter Height Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
IEC (V) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category
LR03 AAA High energy 1.5 10.5 44.5 1/4 G M070125
LR03 AAA Max tech 1.5 10.5 44.5 1/4 G M070261
LR6 AA High energy 1.5 14.5 50.5 1/4 G M070117
LR6 AA Max tech 1.5 14.5 50.5 1/4 G M070257

BATTERIES

Reference Type Serie Voltage Diameter Height Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
IEC (V) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category
LR1 Professional electronic 1.5 12 30.2 1/1 G M070284
LR14 C Long Life 1.5 26.2 50 1/2 G M070087
M070284 LR20 D Long Life 1.5 34.2 61.5 1/2 G M070113
3R12 4.5V Super Life 4.5 67 1/1 G M070057
LR22 9V Long Life 9 48.5 1/1 G M070110

M070110 M070057

BATTERIES

Reference Type Serie Voltage Diameter Height Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
IEC (V) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category
TOOLS

8LR932 A23 GA Professional electronic 12 10.3 8.5 1/1 G M070236

V27A A27 GA Professional electronic 12 7.7 28.2 1/1 G M070132

M070236

360
BATTERIES

BATTERIES

Reference Type Serie Voltage Diameter Height Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
IEC (V) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category
DL2016 CR2016 Professional electronic 3 20 1.6 1/1 G M070011
DL2025 CR2025 Professional electronic 3 20 2.5 1/1 G M070220
DL2032 CR2032 Professional electronic 3 20 3.2 1/1 G M070221
LR44 V 13 GA Professional electronic 1.5 11.6 5.4 1/1 G M070259

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu WORKS & HOBY LIGHTS

ALUMINIUM LIGHT BAR 1+0

standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA: • Battery Type: 3xAAA

• LED 3Watt COB • Light Mode: On/Off
• Material: Aluminium • Other: With Two Magnets & Velcro Strip
• Size: 159x32x18mm
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Е-4116 Light Bar Silver 1/100 C 100166

WORK LIGHT WITH ROTARY BASE 1+0

standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA: • Battery Type: 3xAAA

• LED 3Watt COB • Light Mode: On/Off
• Lumens: 200lm • Other: With Two Strong Magnet on Swivel Holder |
• Material: Plastic With 360° Rotary Dividual Pocket Clip and 360° Swivel
• Size: 130x68x39mm Holder
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Е-5542 Work Light Green 1/100 C 100169/G
#N#

Е-5542 Work Light Yellow 1/100 C 100169/Y

TOOLS
PIVOT WORK LIGHT WITH MAGNETIC BASE 1+0
standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
361
TECHNICAL DATA: • Battery Type: 3xAA
• LED 3Watt COB • Light Mode: On/Off
• Lumens: 240lm • Other: With 360° Rotary Pivot Base | With strong
WORKS & HOBY LIGHTS

• Material: Rubber Coated magnet on bottom

• Size: 87x55x95mm
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Е-5503 Pivot Work Light Black 1/50 C 100167

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
BATTERIES www.elmarkholding.eu

ALUMINIUM WORK LIGHT 1+0

standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA: • Size: 162x25x15mm

• LED 3Watt COB • Battery Type: 3xAAA
• Lumens: 200lm • Light Mode: On/Off
• Material: Aluminium • Other: With Strong Magnet in Swivel Hook
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Е-5545 Work Light Black 1/100 C 100168

ZOOM FLASHLIGHT 1+0

standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA: • Battery Type: 3xAAA

• LED 1Watt • Light Mode: On/Off
• Material: Rubber Coated • Other: Handstrap; Telescopic (ZOOM)
• Size: 115x34mm
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Е-6605 Flashlight Black 1/100 C 100172

#N#
TOOLS

ZOOM FLASHLIGHT 1+0

standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA: • Battery Type: 3xAAA

362 • LED Type: CREE XPE • Light Mode: High/Low/Strobe/Off
• Lumens: 200lm • Light Distance: Zoom in-250Meters / Zoom Out-
• Material: Aluminium 100Meters
• Size: 150x33mm • Other: Handstrap
BATTERIES

Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Е-1171 Flashlight Black 1/50 C 100173

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
www.elmarkholding.eu BATTERIES

HANDY SPOT FLASHLIGHT RECHARGEABLE 1+0

standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA: • Battery Type: Rechargeable battery

• 7LED • Light Mode: On/Off
• Material: Plastic • Other: Direct Charge
• Size: 150x70x70mm
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Е-6630 Flashlight Black & Yellow 1/50 C 100174

MINI KEY LIGHT 1+0

standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA: • Battery Type: 2xCR2032)

• LED 1.5W COB • Light Mode: High/Low/Flash/Off
• Material: Plastic • Other: Strong Back Magnet; Colourful Carabiner
• Size: 71x34x21mm
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Е-5903 Flashlight Blue 1/100 C 100176/B
#N#

Е-5903 Flashlight Black 1/100 C 100176/BL

TOOLS
BULB SHAPE PULL LIGHT 1+0
standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

363
TECHNICAL DATA: • Size: 55x55x160mm
• LED 1W • Battery Type: 3xAAA
• Material: Plastic • Light Mode: On/Off
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
BATTERIES

Е-6621 Pull Light Blue 1/100 C 100175/B

Е-6621 Pull Light Black 1/100 C 100175/BL
Е-6621 Pull Light Pink 1/100 C 100175/P
Е-6621 Pull Light Red 1/100 C 100175/R

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 TOOLS
BATTERIES www.elmarkholding.eu

HEADLAMP 1+0
standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA: • Size: 60x42x34mm

• LED 3W COB • Battery Type: 3xAAA
• Lumens: 200lm • Light Mode: High/Low/Strobe/Off
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Е-3645 Headlamp Black 1/100 C 100170

ZOOM HEADLAMP 1+0

standard
+extended 1 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA: • Battery Type: 4xAA

• 1xXML T6 + 2xCREE XPE • Light Mode: 1xT6 On/ 2 Sides XPE On/ All On/ All
• Lumens: 1200lm Strobe/ OFF
• Size: 59x43mm
Model Description Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Е-3396 Zoom Headlamp Black 1/50 C 100171

#N#
TOOLS

364
BATTERIES

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu SCREWS

TWINFAST THREAD SCREWS FOR DRYWALLS

• For fixings of drywall panels of standard density

• Needle S point: it drills directly metals up to 0.8 mm thick.
• 60° tapping thread.
• Coverings: Phosphated. This covering enables the adherence of the filler putty to the head of the screw.

Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Recess Point Thread Packing/ Product Catalogue number
diameter (mm) Box (pcs) category
(mm)
Plasterboard & metal 3.5 25 PH2 needle twinfast 1000 G M317172
Plasterboard & metal 3.5 35 PH2 needle twinfast 1000 G M317173
Plasterboard & metal 3.5 45 PH2 needle twinfast 1000 G M317174

Application: Fixing of plasterboards or isolation panels to metallic profiles of 0.8 mm maximum thickness.

COARSE THREAD SCREWS FOR DRYWALLS

• S needle point: it allows penetrating in soft materials and in metallic materials up to 0.8 mm thickness.
• Covering: phosphated
• Coarse thread: it allows a faster installation.
#N#

Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Recess Point Thread Packing/ Product Catalogue number
diameter (mm) Box (pcs) category
(mm)
Plasterboard 3.5 25 PH2 needle coarse 1000 G M317259

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

Plasterboard 3.5 35 PH2 needle coarse 1000 G M317169
Plasterboard 3.5 45 PH2 needle coarse 1000 G M317170

Applications: with double pitch thread, for the proper fixing of plasterboards together or plasterboards to wood.

365
SELFDRILLING SCREWS FOR DRYWALLS

• Selfdrilling point and tapping thread: for use in metallic materials without pilot hole, up to 3 mm thick.
SCREWS

• Covering: phosphated

Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Recess Point Thread Packing/ Product Catalogue number
diameter (mm) Box (pcs) category
(mm)
Plasterboard & metal 3.5 25 PH2 selfdrilling tapping 1000 G M317300
Plasterboard & metal 3.5 35 PH2 selfdrilling tapping 1000 G M317301
Plasterboard & metal 3.5 45 PH2 selfdrilling tapping 1000 G M317302

“Application: fixing of plaster boards or isolation panels to metallic profiles of 0.8 - 3.0 mm thickness.”

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
SCREWS www.elmarkholding.eu

SELF DRILLING SCREW WITH TRUSS WASHER HEAD

• Selfdrilling point and tapping thread: for use in metallic materials without pilot hole
• Covering: Zn

Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Recess Point Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
diameter (mm)
(mm)
Metal 4.2 13 PH2 selfdrilling 1000 G M317134
Metal 4.2 16 PH2 selfdrilling 1000 G M317135
Metal 4.2 19 PH2 selfdrilling 1000 G M317231
Metal 4.2 25 PH2 selfdrilling 1000 G M317303

Application: for metal

DRYWALL SCREW WITH WAFER HEAD

AND TWINFAST THREAD

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: phosphated

Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Recess Point Thread Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
diameter (mm) (pcs) category

#N#
(mm)
Metal 4.2 13 PH2 needle twinfast 1000 G M317230
Metal 4.2 16 PH2 needle twinfast 1000 G M317241
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

Metal 4.2 19 PH2 needle twinfast 1000 G M317313

Metal 4.2 25 PH2 needle twinfast 1000 G M317314

Application: For laminated and metal profiles

366 CONCRETE SCREW FOR DIRECT MOUNTING

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn
SCREWS

Outer thread diameter (mm) Length (mm) Recess Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
(pcs) category
7.5 72 TX30 100 G M317136
7.5 92 TX30 100 G M317137
7.5 112 TX30 100 G M317206
7.5 132 TX30 100 G M317139

Application: Suitable for installation of PVC and wooden frames, door frames to concrete or solid brick

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu SCREWS

CHIPBOARD (WOOD) SCREW

• Fully threaded
• Covering: Zn

Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Recess Point Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
diameter (mm) category
(mm)
Wood & Chipboard 3.5 16 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317001
Wood & Chipboard 3.5 20 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317003
Wood & Chipboard 3.5 25 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317004
Wood & Chipboard 3.5 30 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317005
Wood & Chipboard 3.5 35 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317006
Wood & Chipboard 3.5 40 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317007
Wood & Chipboard 4.0 20 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317012
Wood & Chipboard 4.0 25 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317013
Wood & Chipboard 4.0 30 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317015
Wood & Chipboard 4.0 35 PZ2 needle 500 G M317014
Wood & Chipboard 4.0 40 PZ2 needle 500 G M317016
Wood & Chipboard 4.0 50 PZ2 needle 500 G M317209
Wood & Chipboard 4.0 60 PZ2 needle 500 G M317210
Wood & Chipboard 4.5 25 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317304
Wood & Chipboard 4.5 30 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317020
Wood & Chipboard 4.5 35 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317021
Wood & Chipboard 4.5 40 PZ2 needle 500 G M317305
Wood & Chipboard 4.5 50 PZ2 needle 500 G M317022
Wood & Chipboard 4.5 60 PZ2 needle 500 G M317023
Wood & Chipboard 5.0 30 PZ2 needle 1000 G M317028
#N#

Wood & Chipboard 5.0 40 PZ2 needle 500 G M317030

Wood & Chipboard 5.0 50 PZ2 needle 500 G M317032
Wood & Chipboard 5.0 60 PZ2 needle 250 G M317033

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

Wood & Chipboard 5.0 70 PZ2 needle 250 G M317048
Wood & Chipboard 5.0 80 PZ2 needle 250 G M317034
Wood & Chipboard 6.0 50 PZ3 needle 250 G M317242
Wood & Chipboard 6.0 60 PZ3 needle 250 G M317040
Wood & Chipboard 6.0 70 PZ3 needle 250 G M317041
Wood & Chipboard 6.0 80 PZ3 needle 250 G M317042

367
SCREWS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
SCREWS www.elmarkholding.eu

SELF DRILLING SCREW WITH HEXAGON

HEAD AND EPDM WASHER

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn

Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Point Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
diameter (mm) (mm) category
Metal 4.8 19 selfdrilling 1000 G M317306
Metal 4.8 25 selfdrilling 500 G M317243
Metal 4.8 32 selfdrilling 500 G M317126
Metal 5.5 25 selfdrilling 500 G M317127
Metal 5.5 32 selfdrilling 500 G M317307
Metal 5.5 38 selfdrilling 500 G M317308
Metal 5.5 50 selfdrilling 500 G M317309
Metal 6.3 25 selfdrilling 500 G M317130
Metal 6.3 32 selfdrilling 500 G M317310
Metal 6.3 38 selfdrilling 500 G M317131
Metal 6.3 50 selfdrilling 250 G M317311
Metal 6.3 60 selfdrilling 250 G M317312

Application: Sheet metal to steel construction

#N#
HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS FULLY THREADED
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn

Thread Length (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number

category
M6 16 5.6 500 G M317064
M6 20 5.6 500 G M317065
M6 25 5.6 500 G M317066
M6 30 5.6 500 G M317067
368 M8 20 5.6 200 G M317073
M8 25 5.6 200 G M317074
M8 30 5.6 200 G M317075
M8 40 5.6 200 G M317076
SCREWS

M10 30 5.6 200 G M317080

M10 40 5.6 100 G M317081
M10 50 5.6 100 G M317082

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu BOLTS & NUTS

CARRIAGE BOLT

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn

Thread Length (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number

category
M6 20 5.6 500 G M317315
M6 30 5.6 500 G M317316
M6 40 5.6 200 G M317317
M6 50 5.6 200 G M317318
M6 60 5.6 200 G M317319
M6 70 5.6 200 G M317320
M6 80 5.6 200 G M317321
M8 30 5.6 200 G M317322
M8 40 5.6 200 G M317323
M8 50 5.6 200 G M317324
M8 60 5.6 200 G M317325
M8 70 5.6 200 G M317326
M8 80 5.6 200 G M317327

HEXAGON NUT
#N#

• Material: Carbon steel

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

• Covering: Zn

Thread Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

M6 1000 G M317152
M8 1000 G M317153
M10 1000 G M317154

369
LOCK NUT BOLTS & NUTS

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn

Thread Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

M6 1000 G M317145
M8 500 G M317146
M10 500 G M317147

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
WASHERS www.elmarkholding.eu

FLAT WASHER

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn
Thread Diameter 1 (mm) Diameter 2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M6 6.4 12 1000 G M517076
M8 8.4 16 1000 G M317216
M10 10.5 20 1000 G M317217

LARGE FLAT WASHER

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn
Thread Diameter 1 (mm) Diameter 2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M6 6.4 18 2500 G M317236
M8 8.4 24 500 G M517203
M10 10.5 30 250 G M317328

#N#
SPRING-LOCK WASHER
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn
Thread Diameter 1 (mm) Diameter 2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M6 6.1 11.8 1000 G M317162
M8 8.1 14.8 1000 G M317163
M10 10.2 18.1 1000 G M317164

370

EPDM WASHER
WASHERS

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn
For screw with diameter Diameter 1 (mm) Diameter 2 (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
(mm)
4.8 5.3 16 500 G M317329
4.8 5.3 19 500 G M317330
5.5 5.8 16 500 G M317331
5.5 5.8 19 500 G M317332

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu ANCHORS

DROP IN ANCHOR

• Material: Galvanized steel

• Covering: Zn

Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M6 25 8 100 G M517233
M8 30 10 100 G M517234
M10 40 12 50 G M517235

Application: For fixing in concrete and hard materials

SLEEVE ANCHOR

• Material: Galvanized steel

• Covering: Zn

Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M6 45 8 6.8 100 G M517207
M6 60 8 6.8 100 G M517208
M8 60 10 6.8 100 G M517209
M8 80 10 6.8 100 G M517210
#N#

M10 70 12 6.8 50 G M517211

M10 100 12 6.8 25 G M517212

Application: For fixing in concrete and solid materials

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

HEX NUT ANCHOR

• Material: Galvanized steel

• Covering: Zn
371
Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M6 45 8 6.8 100 G M517213
M8 60 10 6.8 100 G M517214
ANCHORS

M8 80 10 6.8 50 G M517215
M10 70 12 6.8 50 G M517216
M10 100 12 6.8 25 G M517217

Application: For fixing in concrete and solid materials

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
WASHERS www.elmarkholding.eu

THROUGH BOLT ANCHOR

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn

Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M8 60 10 6.8 100 G M517360
M8 80 10 6.8 70 G M517361
M10 100 12 6.8 50 G M517362
M10 120 12 6.8 45 G M517228
M10 160 12 6.8 25 G M517363
M12 100 14 6.8 35 G M517364
M12 120 14 6.8 30 G M517365
M12 140 14 6.8 50 G M517232

Application: Non-cracked concrete and hard materials. Attaching structural steel, facade, hand rails, racks,
elevators, etc.

EYE ANCHOR BOLT

• Material: Galvanized steel

• Covering: Zn

#N#
Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M6 45 8 6.8 100 G M517218
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

M8 60 10 6.8 50 G M517219
M10 70 12 6.8 25 G M517220

Application: For fixing in concrete and solid materials

HOOK ANCHOR BOLT

372
• Material: Galvanized steel
• Covering: Zn
WASHERS

Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M6 45 8 6.8 100 G M517221
M8 60 10 6.8 50 G M517222
M10 70 12 6.8 25 G M517223

Application: For fixing in concrete and solid materials

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu PLUGS

FISCHER ULTRACUT FBS II US

APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS

• Pipeline routes • Concrete C20/25 to C50/60, cracked and non-
• Suspension for individual pipes cracked
• Suspended mounting rails • Prestressed hollow concrete ceilings C30/37 to
• Prestressed concrete hollow core ceilings C50/60 for the multiple use of non-load bearing
• Cable trays systems
• Ventilation ducts • ETA- approval
• Perforated tapes

Model Drill hole Min. drill hole depth Screew length ls Packing/Box Product Catalogue
diameter d0 for through fixings (mm) (pcs) category number
(mm) h2 (mm)
FBS II 6 x 40/5 US 6 50 40 100 G MF500460
FBS II 6 x 60/5 US 6 70 60 100 G MF500461
FBS II 8 x 80 30/15 US TX 8 90 10x80 50 G MF500462

FISCHER ULTRACUT WITH INTERNAL THREAD

APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS

• Pipeline routes • Concrete C20/25 to C50/60, cracked and non-cracked
• Suspension for individual pipes • Prestressed hollow concrete ceilings C30/37 to
#N#

• Suspended mounting rails C50/60 for the multiple use of non-load bearing
• Prestressed concrete hollow core ceilings systems
• Ventilation ducts • ETA- approval

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

Model Drill hole Min. drill hole depth Screew length ls Packing/Box Product Catalogue
diameter d0 for through fixings (mm) (pcs) category number
(mm) h2 (mm)
FBS II 6 x 35 M8/M10 I 6 45 35 100 G MF500463
FBS II 6 x 55 M8/M10 I 6 65 55 100 G MF500464

373

UNIVERSAL NYLON WALL PLUGS PLUGS

• Material: Nylon PA6 • Halogen free

Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
6 30 200 G M517065
6 50 100 G M517298
8 40 200 G M517066
8 60 100 G M517067
10 50 100 G M517064
10 70 50 G M517062
Application: Suitable for general light duty fittings

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
PLUGS www.elmarkholding.eu

FISCHER EXPANSION PLUG WITH RIM

APPLICATIONS • Hollow blocks made from lightweight concrete

• Lighting, Motion detectors • Cavity floor slabs made from bricks and concrete
• Skirting • Perforated sand-lime brick
• Letter boxes • Solid sand-lime brick
• Trellis • Natural stone with dense structure
• Aerated concrete
BUILDING MATERIALS • Solid panel made from gypsum
• Concrete • Solid brick made from lightweight concrete
• Vertically perforated brick

Model Anchor Drill hole Min. drill hole Wood and Packing/Box Product Catalogue
length diameter depth h1 chipboard screws (pcs) category number
l (mm) d0 (mm) (mm) ds (mm)
SX 6 x 30 30 6 40 4-5 100 G MF500467
SX 6 x 50 50 6 50 4-5 100 G MF500468
SX 8 x 40 40 8 50 5x60 50 G MF500469
SX 8 x 65 65 8 75 4.5-6 50 G MF500470
SX 10 x 50 50 10 70 6-8 50 G MF500471
SX 10 x 80 80 10 95 6-8 25 G MF500472
SX 12 x 60 60 12 80 8-10 25 G MF500473
SX 14 x 70 70 14 90 10-12 25 G MF500474

#N#
FISCHER FRAME FIXING
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS

• Fasade, ceiling and roof substructures made of wood • Vertically perforated brick
and metal • Aerated concrete
• TV consoles • Hollow blocks made from lightweight concrete
• Kitchen hanging cabinets • Perforated sand-lime brick
• Wardrobes • Thermal insulation blocks
• Squared timbers • Solid block made from lightweight and normal
• Windows weight concrete
• Gates and doors • Solid brick
• Beams • Solid sand-lime brick
• Concrete ≥C12/15
374 • Natural stone with dense structure
• Solid panel made from gypsum

Model Anchor Drill hole Min. drill hole Screws Min.screw Packing/Box Product Catalogue
length diameter depth for through diameter ds length (pcs) category number
PLUGS

l (mm) d0 (mm) fixing h2 (mm) (mm) ls (mm)

SXRL 8 x 60 60 8 70 5.5-6 65 100 G MF500475
SXRL 8 x 80 80 8 90 5.5-6 85 100 G MF500476
SXRL 8 x 100 100 8 110 5.5-6 105 100 G MF500477
SXRL 8 x 120 120 8 130 5.5-6 125 100 G MF500478

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu PLUGS

FISCHER DUOPOWER

APPLICATIONS • Aerated concrete

• Skirting • Vertically perforated brick
• Cable ducts • Perforated sand-lime brick
• Pictures and Decorations • Plasterboard
• Soap dishes, Toilet paper holder • Gypsum plasterboard and gypsum fibreboards
• Shower curtain rails • Hollow blocks made from lightweight concrete
• Letter boxes • Cavity floor slabs made from bricks and concrete or
• Lighting, Motion detectors similar
• Signs, House numbers • Natural stone
BUILDING MATERIALS • Chipboard
• Concrete • Solid panel made from gypsum
• Solid brick and solid sand-lime brick • Solid brick made from lightweight concrete

Model Anchor Drill hole Min. drill hole Wood and Packing/Box Product Catalogue
length diameter depth h1 chipboard screws (pcs) category number
l (mm) d0 (mm) (mm) ds (mm)
DUOPOWER 5 x 25 25 5 35 3-4 100 G MF500479
DUOPOWER 6 x 30 30 6 40 4-5 100 G MF500480
DUOPOWER 6 x 50 50 6 60 4-5 100 G MF500481
DUOPOWER 8 x 40 40 8 50 4.5-6 100 G MF500482
DUOPOWER 8 x 65 65 8 75 4.5-6 50 G MF500483
DUOPOWER 10 x 50 50 10 60 6-8 50 G MF500484
DUOPOWER 10 x 80 80 10 90 6-8 25 G MF500485
DUOPOWER 12 x 60 60 12 70 8-10 25 G MF500486
DUOPOWER 14 x 70 70 14 80 10-12 20 G MF500487
#N#

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

375
PLUGS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
PLUGS www.elmarkholding.eu

FISCHER DUOTEC

APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS

• Kitchen hanging cabinets • Gypsum plasterboard
• Living room cabinets • Gypsum fibreboard
• Shelves • Wooden panels, such as OSB boards, chipboard, MDF
• Wardrobes sheets
• Handrails • Steel plates
• Pictures • Plastic boards
• Mirrors • Hollow blocks made from concrete
• Lamps
• Heavy hanging baskets

Model Anchor Drill hole Min. drill hole Wood and Packing/Box Product Catalogue
length diameter depth h1 chipboard screws (pcs) category number
l (mm) d0 (mm) (mm) ds (mm)
DUOTEC 10 50 10 12-55 4.5-5 50 G MF500488

PLASTERBOARD PLUGS

• Material: polyethylene
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

Drill diameter (mm) Wall thickness (mm) Screw size (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
10 10 4.3x40 25 G M517273
10 17 4.3x50 25 G M517274

376
WALL PLUG FOR PLASTERBOARD

Type Color Bore diameter a b Packing Product Catalogue

PLUGS

(mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category number

wall plug for plasterboard grey 6-7 30 19 25 G 500443

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu PLUGS

FISCHER PLASTERBOARD METAL PLUGS GKM

APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS

• Pictures • Gypsum fibreboard
• Lighting • Gypsum plasterboard
• Electrical installations
• Fitting accessories

Model Anchor length Min. thickness to first Screw ds x ls Packing/Box Product Catalogue
l (mm) supporting layer t (mm) (mm) (pcs) category number
GKM 31 35 4-5 100 G MF500443

FISCHER INSULATION FIXING

APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS

• Fasade construction (ETICS) • Non-plastered, pressure-resistant insulating boards
• Insulating construction • Plastered, pressure-resistant insulating boards
• Electric construction
• Refrigerated and climate construction

Model Anchor Min. bolt Max. bolt Wood and Packing/Box Product Catalogue
length penetration penetration chipboard screws (pcs) category number
l (mm) (mm) screw (mm) ds (mm)
FID 50 50 50 40 4-5 50 G MF500455
FID 90 90 90 80 6 25 G MF500456

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

FISCHER METAL CAVITY FIXING HM
WITH METRIC SCREW

APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS

• Pictures • Gypsum plasterboard and gypsum fibreboards
377
• Lighting • Cavity floor slabs
• Light shelves • Light building boards made of wood wool
• Towel rails • Chipboard
PLUGS

• Mirror cabinets • Plywood boards

• Curtain rails
• Sub-structures

Model Anchor Drill hole Panel Min. drill hole Packing/Box Product Catalogue
length diameter thickness depth (pcs) category number
l (mm) d0 (mm) dp (mm) h1 (mm)
HM 4x32 S 32 8 3-13 40 50 G MF500457
HM 6x52 S 52 12 7-21 58 50 G MF500458

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
FIXINGS www.elmarkholding.eu

FRAME FIXINGS PLUGS WITH SCREWS

• Material: PLUG-Nylon PA6; SCREW- Zink-plated steel

• Halogen free
Plug diameter (mm) Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
8 80 100 G M317340
8 100 100 G M317341
8 120 50 G M317342
10 80 50 G M317343
10 100 50 G M317344
10 120 50 G M317345
10 140 50 G M317346

Application: Suitable for heavy ribbing ensures a tight hold in aerated blocks

NYLON HAMMERFIX

• Material: PLUG-Nylon PA6; SCREW- Zink-plated steel

• Halogen free

Plug diameter (mm) Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

#N#
6 40 200 G M517180
6 50 200 G M517281
6 60 200 G M517282
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

6 80 200 G M517283
8 60 100 G M517074
8 80 100 G M517284
8 100 100 G M517285
8 120 100 G M517286

Application: Suitable for fixing skirting, stud battens to wall and long runs of shelf support

378

FISCHER ANGLE SCREW SET

FIXINGS

• SET: 2 pcs
Model Plug size (mm) Screw size (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
WDL 14L/95 14 8.8/95 2/50 G MF500465
WDL 14L/120 14 8.8/120 2/50 G MF500466

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu FIXINGS

RIGHT ANGLE SCREW SET

• Material: PLUG-Nylon PA6; SCREW- Zink-plated steel

• SET: 2 pcs

Plug size (mm) Screw size (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
12x60 10x75 1 G M517156

Application: Suitable for heavy ribbing ensures a tight hold in aerated blocks

HOOK SCREW WITH PLUG

• Material: PLUG-Nylon PA6; SCREW- Zink-plated steel

Plug size (mm) Screw size (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
6x30 4x35 100 G M517289
8x40 5x42 100 G M517318

FISCHER SPRING TOGGLE

APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

• Pictures • Gypsum plasterboard and gypsum fibreboards
• Lighting • Cavity floor slabs made from bricks and concrete
• Chipboard
• Plywood

Model Anchor Drill hole Panel Thread Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
length diameter thickness Ø x length (pcs) category
l (mm) d0 (mm) dp (mm) (mm)
KDH 4 95 14 35 M4x70 25 G MF500459

379
FIXINGS

THREADED HANGING ROD

• Material: Carbon steel

• Covering: Zn
Thread Length (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
M6 1000 4.8 100 G M517079
M8 1000 4.8 50 G M517080
M10 1000 4.8 40 G M517078

Application: Suitable for fixing skirting, stud battens to wall and long runs of shelf support

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
FIXINGS www.elmarkholding.eu

PERFORATED STEEL STRAP WITH PE PLASTIC JACKETING

APPLICATIONS
For securing, supporting and strapping of cable, trunking and ducting
Use for joist strutting, window frame and sill fixing, fencing repairs and construction, hanging ductwork

Model Width Thickness Hole diameter Length Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (mm) (m) (pcs) category
5055 L PE I 14 13 3 5.2 10 1 G M318155

PERFORATED STEEL STRAP IN UNCOLING BOX

APPLICATIONS
For securing, supporting and strapping of cable, trunking and ducting
Use for joist strutting, window frame and sill fixing, fencing repairs and construction, hanging ductwork

Model Width Thickness Hole diameter Length Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (mm) (m) (pcs) category
5055 LI12 FS 12 1 5.2 10 1 G M318154
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

380
FIXINGS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu FIXINGS

FISCHER FIS AB 300 T

APPLICATIONS
• High-performance hybrid mortar for high loads in almost all building materials.
• Fixing pressure-free fastening enables small edge and axis distances
• Injection cartridges can be processed without special extrusion devices
• incl. 2 static mixers.
• Injection cartridges that are not fully squeezed out can be reused by changing the static mixer.
• When fixing in solid building materials, the drill hole must be cleaned thoroughly.
• The use of a hollow drill makes conventional drilling cleaning unnecessary.

Model Processing time Curing time Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

(pcs) category
FIS AB 300 T approx. 5 min at 20 °C approx. 60 min at 20 ° C 1 G MF500489

FISCHER INJECTION ANCHOR SLEEVE PLASTIC

APPLICATIONS • Perforated sand-lime brick

• Anchorings in perforated brick masonry with • Solid sand-lime brick
injection mortars • Solid brick
• Hollow pumice slabs
BUILDING MATERIALS • Slabs made of hollow brick and other perforated
• Vertically perforated brick brick
• Hollow blocks made from lightweight concrete • Solid pumice and other solid building materials
• Hollow blocks made from concrete • ETA-approval

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

Model Drill hole Min. drill hole Effect. anchorage Fill quantity per Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
diameter depth depth hef (mm) sleeve (pcs) category
d0 (mm) h1 (mm) (scale unit)
FIS H 12X50 K 12 60 50 5 50 G MF500490
FIS H 12X85 K 12 95 85 10 50 G MF500491
FIS H 16X130 K 16 140 110 15 20 G MF500492
FIS H 20X85 K 20 95 85 15 20 G MF500493

381
FIXINGS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
FIXINGS www.elmarkholding.eu

FISCHER INTUMESCENT ACOUSTIC MASTIC FIAM 310 ML

FISCHER FiAM is a one part water based acrylic emulsion that can provide up to 5 hours fire resistance when used
in construction joints and services in both vertical and horizontal applications. When exposed to fire, it reacts to
form a highly insulative char that slows down heat transfer, and provides a barrier to fire seal. Formulated to be
halogen and solvent free the FiAM exhibits excellent slump characteristics and has been designed to maintain the
sound reduction index of a structure.

TOP FEATURES: • Linear joints: flexible and rigid construction elements

• Up to 5 hours fire resistance. • Joints between FCPS coated panel system
• Movement capability ± 25 %.
• Halogen and solvent free. BUILDING MATERIALS:
• Low VOC. • Flexible wall constructions
• Water based. • Rigid floor and wall constructions
• Masonry
APPLICATIONS: • Concrete
• Metallic pipes: 6” (159 mm) • Timber
• Cable trays: 18” x 2” (450 x 50 mm) • Steel
• Cable bunches: 3” (80 mm) • FCPS System

Model Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

FiAM310 1/25 G MF500494

FISCHER INTUMESCENT GRAPHITE MASTIC FIGM 310 ML

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

FISCHER Intumescent Graphite Mastic FiGM is a one part water based flexible acrylic emulsion containing a
high pressure intumescent graphite which is used to seal service penetrations in both vertical and horizontal
applications. Tested to both BS 476 & BS EN1366-3 /4 the fischer FiGM is also ETA approved and CE Marked for a
wide range of applications such as, non metallic pipes, metallic and insulated pipes, MLC pipes, cables and cable
bunches and can also used in combination with the fischer FCPS Coated Panel System.

TOP FEATURES: • Insulated service: 6“ (159 mm)

• Low VOC. • Construction joints: 1“ (25 mm)
• Halogen and solvent free. • Mixed services
• Excellent slump characteristics.
382 • Excellent acoustic properties. BUILDING MATERIALS:
• Concrete
APPLICATIONS: • Masonry
• Metallic pipes: 6” (159 mm) • Steel
FIXINGS

• Non-metallic pipes: 5” (125 mm) • Timber

• Cable bunches: 1” (21 mm)

Model Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

FiGM310 1/25 G MF500495

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu FIXINGS

PENOSIL GENERAL SILICONE, GOLD SERIES

TOP FEATURES: APPLICATIONS:

• Good adhesive properties. • Indoor and outdoor applications.
• Excellent processing and smoothing properties. • Sanitary applications.
• Suitable for slightly alkaline, acidic and metal • Installation and sealing of windows and doors.
surfaces. • Sealing of ventilation systems.
• Does not cause colour changes on marble or other • Not suitable for aquariums.
natural stone surfaces.
• Does not cause corrosion on metal.
• After curing very good temperature resistance
(between -60 °C and +200 °C).
• Does not lose volume during the curing process.
• Permanent elasticity.
• Mould, UV, moisture and weather resistant
• Cartrige: 310ml

Type Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

General silicone, 310ml Transparent 1/12 G M033128

PENOSIL UNIVERSAL SILICONE, STANDARD SERIES

TOP FEATURES: APPLICATIONS:

• Insulates and seals. • Insulation and sealing of connections in indoor and
• Non-sagging, does not spread in the joint. outdoor works.

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

• Excellent processing and smoothing properties. • General construction and repair works.
• Touch-dries quickly. • Moist and dry rooms.
• Adheres well to wood, glass, ceramic tiles, many • All finishing, insulation, glassing works.
plastics, and most paints. • Insulation of window and door frames and light box
• Elastic. displays.
• UV and weather proof.
• Cartrige: 280ml

Type Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Universal silicone, 280ml Transparent 1/12 G M033129
Universal silicone, 280ml White 1/12 G M033130 383
FIXINGS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
FIXINGS www.elmarkholding.eu

PENOSIL SANITARY SILICONE, STANDARD SERIES

TOP FEATURES: APPLICATIONS:

• Excellent processing and smoothing properties. • Insulation and sealing of connections during indoor
• Contains fungicides. works.
• Mould, UV, moisture and weather resistant. • Insulation and sealing of washbasin, bath, shower,
• Touch-dries quickly. swimming pool connections.
• Non-sagging, does not spread in the joint. • Insulation of water supply, drainage and PVC-pipes.
• Adheres well to glass, glazed surfaces, ceramic tiles, • Glazing works.
many plastics, metals, and most paints.
• Elastic.
• Long storage time.
• Cartrige: 280ml

Type Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Sanitary silicone, 280ml Transparent 1/12 G M033131
Sanitary silicone, 280ml White 1/12 G M033132

PENOSIL BITUM SEALANT, PREMIUM SERIES

TOP FEATURES: APPLICATIONS:

• Touch-dries quickly. • Insulation of roof and chimney joints.
• Immediately rain and ice resistant. • Insulation of joints between bituminous plates or
• Suitable on bituminous materials, alkali and metals. rolls.
• Usable on damp surfaces. • Repairing small leakages and open cracks on flat
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

• Melting temperature over 100 °C. roofs.

• Will not become brittle in cold. • Patching up joint leakages between metal sheets.
• Can also be used in vertical joints.
• Dissolved acid, alkali, emission and weather resistant.
• High tensile strength
• Cartrige: 310ml

Type Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Bitum sealant, 310ml Black 1/12 G M033133

384
FIXINGS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu FIXINGS

PENOSIL ACRYLIC SEALANT, STANDARD SERIES

TOP FEATURES: APPLICATIONS:

• Comfortable use. • Filling of wall cracks and joints.
• Low odour level. • Filling the joints between window frames and walls.
• Forms a plastic connection. • Filling of joints between plasterboards and filling of
• Non-sagging, does not spread in the joint. screw holes.
• Paintable. • Correction of surface defects before painting.
• Good adherence on most building materials.
• Moisture resistant 5 hours after application.
• High UV-level.
• Cartrige: 280ml

Type Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Acrylic sealant, 280ml White 1/12 G M033134

PENOSIL FOAM, STANDARD SERIES

TOP FEATURES: APPLICATIONS:

• Good filling properties. • Filling of holes and gaps, insulation of joints
• Good foam for interior and exterior works under • Installation and insulation of construction structures
normal conditions. • Insulation and fixation of pipes
• Good adherence on various building materials. • Thermo and sound insulation
• Usable with the delivered straw applicator.
• Easy to use.

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

• The new and narrower straw ensures better foam
structure and higher output.
• The new trigger is suitable for temporary air-tight
sealing of the straw during work pauses.

Type Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Foam, 750ml 1/12 G M033135
Foam, 300ml + gloves 1/12 G M033136
Gun foam, 750ml 1/12 G M033137

385
FIXINGS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
FIXINGS www.elmarkholding.eu

PENOSIL FOAM CLEANER, PREMIUM SERIES

TOP FEATURES: APPLICATIONS:

• Efficiently cleans uncured construction foam from • Cleaning of foam gun after use both inside and
foam gun, clothes, adjacent surfaces. outside.
• Suitable for immediate cleaning of a foam gun from • Cleaning of clothes and tools from uncured
inside after use. construction foam.
• Cleaning of window frames, window sills, doors,
jambs, etc. From uncured construction foam during
work.

Type Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Foam cleaner, 500ml 1/12 G M033138

PENOSIL FOAM GUN 306

APPLICATIONS:
• The budget version of the gun known brand PENOSIL for use with professional foam.

Type Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

Foam gun 306 economical 1 G M033139
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

386
FIXINGS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLE FIXINGS ACCESSORIES

CABLE TIE HOLDER

Type colour Bore a b D W1 W2 L Packing Product Catalogue

diameter (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category number
(mm)
МТ-8 black ф8 9,7 6,3 9,9 12,7 12,6 43 100 C 500046
МТ-8 white ф8 9,7 6,3 9,9 12,7 12,6 43 100 C 500047

CABLE TIE MOUNTS-ADHESIVE

Type colour Dimmensions Packing Product Catalogue number

(mm) (pcs.) category
L W H T
МТ-25 white 25 25 7,5 6,2 100 C 500041
МТ-25 black 25 25 7,5 6,2 100 C 500042
МТ-30 white 30 30 8,7 6,4 100 C 500043

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

МТ-30 black 30 30 8,7 6,4 100 C 500039

387
CABLE TIE BASES FIXED WITH SCREWS 2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Type Color a b L d D Packing Product Catalogue

CABLE FIXINGS ACCESSORIES
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category number
CTH-2C white 22 16,5 9 5,8 9,5 100 C 500048
CTH-2C black 22 16,5 9 5,8 9,5 100 C 500038

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days, and for CTH-2C will be 90 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
CABLE FIXINGS ACCESSORIES www.elmarkholding.eu

CABLE TIES - WHITE

Type Length (mm) Colour Width (mm) Packing (pcs) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Cable ties 100 white 2.5 100 10 / 800 C 500100
Cable ties 150 white 2.5 100 10 / 500 C 500152
Cable ties 160 white 2.5 100 10 / 500 C 500162
Cable ties 200 white 2.5 100 10 / 400 C 500202
Cable ties 250 white 3.5 100 10 / 250 C 500253
Cable ties 280 white 3.5 100 10 / 200 C 500283
Cable ties 300 white 3.5 100 10 / 200 C 500303
Cable ties 300 white 4.8 100 10 / 120 C 500304
Cable ties 370 white 3.5 100 10 / 120 C 500373
Cable ties 380 white 4.8 100 10 / 100 C 500384
Cable ties 450 white 4.8 100 10 / 70 C 500454
Cable ties 500 white 7.9 100 5 / 40 C 500507

CABLE TIES - BLACK

Type Length (mm) Colour Width (mm) Packing (pcs) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Cable ties 150 black 2.5 100 10 / 500 C 500151
Cable ties 160 black 2.5 100 10 / 500 C 500161
Cable ties 250 black 3.5 100 10 / 250 C 500251
Cable ties 280 black 3.5 100 10 / 200 C 500281
Cable ties 300 black 3.5 100 10 / 200 C 500301
Cable ties 500 black 7.9 100 40 C 500501
FIXINGS & FASTENERS

CABLE HOLDER WITH TIE

Type Color a b c d Packing Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) category number
388 cable holder with tie black 27 14 140 0,5 20 C 500444
CABLE FIXINGS ACCESSORIES

WALL PLUG WITH CABLE TIE

Type Color Bore diameter Tie Length Packing Product Catalogue

(mm) (mm) (pcs) category number
wall plug with cable tie black Ø6 95 50 C 500427
wall plug with cable tie black Ø8 95 50 C 500425

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days, and for Cable Ties will be 90 days.
 FIXINGS & FASTENERS
www.elmarkholding.eu CABLE FIXINGS ACCESSORIES

WIRE GRIP BAND FOR FLAT CABLE

Type Color Bore diameter width of the head Packing Product Catalogue
(mm) (pcs) category number
wire grip band for flat cable 1 white 6-7 18 50 C 500432
wire grip band for flat cable 2 white 6-7 12 50 C 500434
wire grip band for flat cable 3 white 6-7 10 50 C 500436
Wire grip band 1 is Suitable for flat cables with section- 2x1.0; 2x1.5mm²
Wire grip band 2 is Suitable for flat cables with section- 2x2.5; 3x1.0
Wire grip band 3 is Suitable for flat cables with section- 2x4; 2x6; 3x1.5; 3x2.5mm²

WIRE GRIP BAND FOR ROUND CABLE

Type Color Bore diameter width of the head Packing Product Catalogue
(mm) (pcs) category number
wire grip band for round cable 4 white 6-7 6 50 C 500438
wire grip band for round cable 5 white 6-7 8 50 C 500440
wire grip band for round cable 6 white 6-7 10 50 C 500439
wire grip band for round cable 7 white 6-7 14 50 C 500441
wire grip band for round cable 8 white 8-9 20 50 C 500442
Wire grip band 4 is Suitable for round cables with section- 2x1.0; 2x1.5; 3x1.0; 3x2.5mm²; RG6
Wire grip band 5 is Suitable for round cables with section- 2x0.5; 2x0.75; UTP; FTP
Wire grip band 6 is Suitable for round cables with section- 2x2.5; 3x1.5; 4x1
Wire grip band 7 is Suitable for round cables with section- 3x6; 4x4; 5x2.5
Wire grip band 8 is Suitable for round cables with diameter D20mm

FIXINGS & FASTENERS

CABLE FIXING CLIPS

Support insulators are used in control and distribution TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:

cabinets mounting when bars isolation is required. • Rated voltage: 1000V
Provides reliable insulation of live parts. • Insulating voltage: 5000 V 389
• Ambient temperature : -40 to +65°C
Type Diameter Ø (mm) Packing (pcs) Packing / Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
CHR-4 4 100 500 C 500004
CABLE FIXINGS ACCESSORIES

CHR-5 5 100 500 C 500005

CHR-6 6 100 300 C 500006
CHR-7 7 100 300 C 500007
CHR-8 8 100 250 C 500008
CHR-9 9 100 200 C 500009
CHR-10 10 100 200 C 500010
CHR-12 12 100 100 C 500012
CHR-14 14 100 50 C 500014
CHR-16 16 100 50 C 500016

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days, and for cable fixing clips will be 90 days.
 VENTILATION
DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS www.elmarkholding.eu

ELMARK AF SERIES EASY MOUNTING 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Axial fans, for exhaust ventilation

AREAS OF APPLICATION DESIGN:

Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces • Easy mounting system
• Very slim front panel
OPTIONS: • Plastic housing and impeller
• V-Valve: Back flow preventing. Fan is equipped with • Modern design and aesthetic look
a valve
• VT- Timer + Valve: Adjustable operating time from 3
to 15 minutes. Fan is equipped with a valve.
• VH- Higro-Timer + Valve: Humidistat detects humidity
starting from 40% to 90%, includes adjustable
• timer from 3 minutes to 15 minutes. Fan is equipped
with a valve.
• Compatible with 100 and 120 mm PVC or flexible air
ducts
MOTOR:
• Equipped with thermal cut out protection
• Low power consumption
• High materials quality and high efficiency
• Ambient temperature max 130°C
• IP-X4
• Insulation class B

Overal dimensions (mm)

Model ØА B C D
AF-V100 98 140 98 10
AF-V120 118 170 100 13
VENTILATION

Model Diameter Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum Sound Packing/ Product Catalogue
(mm) (W) air capacity pressure Box (pcs) category number
(m3/h) level db(A)
AF-V100 with valve 100 220-240 15 2500 98 41 12 D 500120
AF-VT100 with valve+timer 100 220-240 15 2500 98 41 12 D 500122
AF-VH100 with valve+hygro-timer 100 220-240 15 2500 98 41 12 D 500124
390 AF-V120 with valve 120 220-240 20 2450 190 43 12 D 500121
AF-VT120 with valve+timer 120 220-240 20 2450 190 43 12 D 500123
AF-VH120 with valve+hygro-timer 120 220-240 20 2450 190 43 12 D 500125
DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 VENTILATION
www.elmarkholding.eu DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS

ELMARK ALS SILENT SERIES 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Axial fans, for exhaust ventilation

ALS-V100
AREAS OF APPLICATION
Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces

OPTIONS:
• V-Valve: Back flow preventing. Fan is equipped with
a valve
• Compatible with 100 and 120 mm PVC or flexible air
ducts

MOTOR:
• Equipped with thermal cut out protection
• Low power consumption ALS-V120
• High materials quality and high efficiency
• IP-X4
• Insulation class B

DESIGN:
• Easy mounting system
• Very slim front panel
• Plastic housing and impeller
• Modern design and aesthetic look

Overal dimensions (mm)

Model ØА B C D
ALS-V100 98 140 98 10
ALS-V120 118 170 100 13

VENTILATION
Model Diameter Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum Sound Packing/ Product Catalogue
(mm) (W) air capacity pressure Box (pcs) category number
(m3/h) level db(A)
ALS-V100 with valve WHITE 100 220-240 15 2500 98 37 12 D 500140
ALS-V100 with valve SILVER 100 220-240 15 2500 98 37 12 D 500141
ALS-V120 with valve WHITE 120 220-240 20 2450 190 39 12 D 500142
ALS-V120 with valve SILVER 120 220-240 20 2450 190 39 12 D 500143 391
DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 VENTILATION
DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS www.elmarkholding.eu

ELMARK AS SERIES 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Axial fans, for exhaust ventilation

AREAS OF APPLICATION: DESIGN:

Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces • Very slim front panel
• Plastic housing and impeller
OPTIONS: • Modern design and aesthetic look
• V-Valve: Back flow preventing. Fan is equipped with
a valve
• Compatible with 100 mm PVC or flexible air ducts

MOTOR:
• Equipped with thermal cut out protection
• Low power consumption
• High materials quality and high efficiency
• IP-X4
• Insulation class B

Overal dimensions (mm)

Model ØА B C D

AS-V100 98 140 75 10

Model Diameter Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Sound pressure Packing Product Catalogue
(mm) (W) capacity (m3/h) level db(A) category number
AS-V100 with valve 100 220-240 15 2500 98 41 12 D 500119
VENTILATION

ELMARK APB10 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

AREAS OF APPLICATION MOTOR:

Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces • Low power consumption
392 • High materials quality and high efficiency
OPTIONS: • IP-X4
• Back flow preventing- fan is equipped with a valve • Insulation class B
• Equipped with PVC ring for stable fixing of the fan
DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS

towards the mounted surface - hollow walls, suspended DESIGN:

ceilings, furniture flat surfaces, glassings and etc. • Plastic housing and impeller
• Fan comes with a power cable supply • Modern design and aesthetic look
• Compatible with 110 mm PVC or flexible air ducts

Model Diameter Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Sound pressure Packing/ Product Catalogue
(mm) (W) capacity (m3/h) level db(A) Box (pcs) category number
APB10- 110V with valve 110 220-240 15 2500 100 41 30 F 500020

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 VENTILATION
www.elmarkholding.eu DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS

ELMARK AN SERIES 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Axial fans, for exhaust ventilation.

AREAS OF APPLICATION
Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces

OPTIONS:
• Back flow preventing- fan is equipped with a valve
• Compatible with 100 and 120 mm PVC or flexible air
ducts

• MOTOR:
• Equipped with thermal cut out protection
• Low power consumption
• High materials quality and high efficiency
• IP-X4
• Insulation class B

DESIGN:
• Short back tube
• Plastic housing and impeller
• Modern design and aesthetic look

Overal dimensions (mm)

Model ØА B C D
AN-V100 98 153 45 37
AN-V120 118 180 50 37

Model Diameter Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Sound pressure Packing/ Product Catalogue

VENTILATION
(mm) (W) capacity (m3/h) level db(A) Box (pcs) category number

AN-V100 with valve 100 220-240 15 2500 98 41 9 D 500115

AN-V120 with valve 120 220-240 20 2450 190 43 12 D 500116

393
DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 VENTILATION
DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS www.elmarkholding.eu

ELMARK AC SERIES 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Axial inline fans, for exhaust and supply ventilation. DESIGN:

• Plastic housing and impeller
AREAS OF APPLICATION: • Modern design and aesthetic look
Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces, Supply • Designed for ventilation where you want to stop
ventilation spreading humidity and unpleasure smells.

OPTIONS:
• Compatible with 100 and 120 mm PVC or flexible air
ducts
• Possibility to mounting in in the ventilation systems

MOTOR:
• Equipped with thermal cut out protection
• Low power consumption
• High materials quality and high efficiency
• Do not use in rooms where the temperature is above
40°C
• IP-X4
• Insulation class B

Overal dimensions (mm)

Model ØА ØB C
AC-100 60 97 92
AC-120 65 118 96

Model Diameter Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Sound pressure Packing/ Product Catalogue number
(mm) (W) capacity (m3/h) level db(A) Box (pcs) category
AC-100 100 220-240 15 2500 98 41 12 D 500117
AC-120 120 220-240 20 2450 190 43 12 D 500118
VENTILATION

394
RETRO DESK FAN 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

AREAS OF APPLICATION:
Domestic - ideal for any rooms or office
DOMESTIC AXIAL FANS

TOP FEATURES:
• 2 speed settings- gives gentle and quiet air flow
• Aluminium blades for optimizing airflow volume

Model Size (mm) Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(W) capacity (m3/h) (pcs) category number
RDF2 290x130x330 220-240 28 1250 1200 1/6 D 500147

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 VENTILATION
www.elmarkholding.eu INDUSTRIAL FANS

INDUSTRIAL FANS 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

For a continuous or periodical ventilation of medium large agricultural, industrial buildings, park lots, warehouses
and other places where it is needed great volumes of air to be moved as well as other non-explosive gases, not
containing glue substances

ELMARK PAS SERIES

3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Industrial fans, for exhaust ventilation

MOUNTING:
on a window, wall, roof, suspending ceiling, inside walls.

Overal dimensions (mm)

Model ØА B C D E
PAS- 200 220 257 3 70 53
PAS- 250 270 313 8 70 60
PAS- 300 320 350 10 86 80

Model Diameter (mm) Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Sound pressure Packing/ Product Catalogue
(W) capacity (m3/h) level db(A) Box (pcs) category number
PAS- 200 200 220-240 36 1300 410 51 1 D 500126
PAS- 250 250 220-240 60 1300 800 53 1 D 500127
PAS- 300 300 220-240 110 1300 1400 58 1 D 500128

VENTILATION
ELMARK IAS SERIES
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Industrial wall fans, for exhaust ventilation

MOUNTING:
on the, wall.

395

Overal dimensions (mm)

INDUSTRIAL FANS

Model ØА B C D E
IAS- 200 220 264 11 18 127
IAS- 250 270 314 11 18 147
IAS- 300 320 364 11 18 155

Model Diameter (mm) Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Sound pressure Packing/ Product Catalogue
(W) capacity (m3/h) level db(A) Box (pcs) category number
IAS- 200 200 220-240 36 1300 410 53 1 D 500129
IAS- 250 250 220-240 60 1300 800 56 1 D 500130
IAS- 300 300 220-240 110 1300 1400 60 1 D 500131

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 VENTILATION
INDUSTRIAL FANS www.elmarkholding.eu

ELMARK TAS SERIES 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Industrial inline fans, for exhaust ventilation

MOUNTING:
on a walls, ceilings, suspending ceilings.
Possibility to mounting in in the ventilation systems

Overal dimensions (mm)

Model ØА B C D E
TAS- 200 220 264 11 18 127
TAS- 250 270 314 11 18 147
TAS- 300 320 364 11 18 155

Model Diameter (mm) Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Sound pressure Packing/ Product Catalogue
(W) capacity (m3/h) level db(A) Box (pcs) category number
TAS- 200 200 220-240 36 1300 410 55 1 D 500132
TAS- 250 250 220-240 60 1300 800 57 1 D 500133
TAS- 300 300 220-240 110 1300 1400 62 1 D 500134

ALUMINIUM EXHAUST GRILLS

Material Colour Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Product Catalogue

(pcs) category number
Aluminium grey 200/200 8 D 500136
VENTILATION

Aluminium grey 250/250 4 D 500137

Aluminium grey 300/300 4 D 500138
Aluminium grey 350/350 5 D 500139

396
INDUSTRIAL FANS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 VENTILATION
www.elmarkholding.eu INDUSTRIAL FANS

ULTRA-QUIET 3 IN 1 INDUSTRIAL FAN 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

AREAS OF APPLICATION:
Home or work use as standing fan, floor fan or wall mount fan

TOP FEATURES:
• Low noise
• 3 speed settings
• 90° oscillating for great air flow
• Aluminium blades for optimizing airflow volume

Model Size (mm) Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(W) capacity (m3/h) (pcs) category number
UQIF3 500x500x1350 220-240 65 1250 2800 1 D 500144

HIGH POWER INDUSTRIAL WALL FAN 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

AREAS OF APPLICATION:
Residential, commercial, or industrial - ideal for gyms, workshop, offices, restaurant, warehouses and etc.

TOP FEATURES:
• 3 speed settings
• 90° oscillating for great air flow
• Aluminium blades for optimizing airflow volume

Model Size (mm) Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(W) capacity (m3/h) (pcs) category number
HPIWF3 700x41x750 220-240 180 1000 8800 1 D 500145

VENTILATION
HIGH POWER INDUSTRIAL STANDING FAN 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
397
AREAS OF APPLICATION:
Residential, commercial, or industrial- ideal for gyms, workshop , offices,restaurant, warehouses and etc. INDUSTRIAL FANS

TOP FEATURES:
• 3 speed settings
• 90° oscillating for great air flow
• Aluminium blades for optimizing airflow volume

Model Size (mm) Voltage (V) Power r.p.m. Maximum air Packing/Box Product Catalogue
(W) capacity (m3/h) (pcs) category number
HPISF3 700x490x1650 220-240 180 1000 8800 1 D 500146

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 VENTILATION
ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS www.elmarkholding.eu

AIR CONDUIT ALUMINUM

Material: Aluminium 99,5%. For ventilaton and clima systems

Diameter (mm) Full length (m) Thickness (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
100 1,5m 0,1 66 D 500201
100 3m 0,1 42 D 500101
120 1,5m 0,1 45 D 500203
120 3m 0,1 30 D 500103

AIR CONDUIT TEXOFLEX

The tube is completed from multilayer aluminum, laminated with polyester, and forced with reinforcement
additionally. The material is light and flexible, which helps for its easy use in round or oval connections in the
aspiration and ventilation systems. Toxic gases are not being insulated in case of a fire. The product is certified in
B1 category - fireproof material.

Diameter (mm) Full length (m) Thickness (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
100 1,5m 0,1 12 D 500204
120 1,5m 0,1 12 D 500205
100 3m 0,1 12 D 500104

#K#
120 3m 0,1 12 D 500105
VENTILATION

AIR CONDUIT PLASTIC

Connection diameter (mm) Length (m) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
100 1 Plastic 1 G M522023
398
ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS

AIR CONDUIT PLASTIC

Width (mm) Height (mm) Length (m) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
110 55 1 Plastic 1 G M522039

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 VENTILATION
www.elmarkholding.eu ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS

FLAT DUCT BRACKET

Width (mm) Height (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
110 55 Plastic 1 G M522032

FLAT DUCT CONNECTOR

Width (mm) Height (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
110 55 Plastic 1 G M522029

FLAT DUCT CONNECTOR WITH DAMPER

Width (mm) Height (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
#N#

110 55 Plastic 1 G M522030

VENTILATION
PVC WALL CONNECTOR

Section of PVC duct Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
110x55 Plastic 1 G M522033
399
ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS

HORIZONTAL 90° BEND FOR FLAT DUCTS

Width (mm) Height (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
110 55 Plastic 1 G M522015

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 VENTILATION
ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS www.elmarkholding.eu

VERTICAL 90° BEND FOR FLAT DUCTS

Width (mm) Height (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
110 55 Plastic 1 G M522016

T-JOINT FOR FLAT DUCTS

Width (mm) Height (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
110 55 Plastic 1 G M522020

T-JOINT FOR FLAT & ROUND DUCTS

Width Height Connection diameter of Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

#N#
(mm) (mm) round duct (mm)
110 55 100 Plastic 1 G M522017
VENTILATION

END GRILLE FOR FLAT DUCS

Width (mm) Height (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

400 110 60 Plastic 1 G M522019

ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS

90° CONNECTING BEND FOR FLAT & ROUND DUCTS

Width (mm) Height (mm) Connection diameter (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
110 55 100 Plastic 1 G M522018

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 VENTILATION
www.elmarkholding.eu ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS

ROUND TO FLAT CONNECTOR

Width (mm) Height (mm) Connection diameter (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
110 55 100 Plastic 1 G M522014

CONNECTOR WITH BACKDRAFT DAMPER

AND WALL PLATE FOR ROUND DUCTS

Length Width Height Connection diameter (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
(mm) (mm) (mm) category
150 62 134 100 Plastic 1 G M522115

90° CONNECTING BEND FOR ROUND DUCTS

Connection diameter (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
#N#

100 Plastic 1 G M522013

VENTILATION
T-JOINT FOR ROUND DUCTS

Connection diameter (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
100 Plastic 1 G M522012 401
ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS

CONNECTOR WITH BACKDRAFT DAMPER FOR ROUND DUCTS

Connection diameter (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
100 Plastic 1 G M522010

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 VENTILATION
ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS www.elmarkholding.eu

UNIVERSAL REDUCTOR PVC Ø100- Ø150

Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

12 D 500109

FRONT MASK WITH SHUTTER ADJUSTABLE

Diameter (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

100 / 120 20 D 500108

VENTILATION GRILL PVC

For fan with Diameter (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
100 30 D 500111
125 30 D 500112
VENTILATION

RING

For fan with Diameter (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
100 100 D 500106
120 100 D 500107
402
ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS

VENTILATION ANEMOSTAT PVC

For fan with Diameter (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
100 10 D 500113
125 10 D 500114

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 45 days.
 VENTILATION
www.elmarkholding.eu ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS

AIR CONDUIT METAL CLAMPS

Connection diameter (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
90-110 Metal 1 G M522036
110-130 Metal 1 G M522089

METAL FAN GRILLS

Connection diameter (mm) Width (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
125 125 Metal 1 G M522049T
150 150 Metal 1 G M522050T
200 200 Metal 1 G M522139

FAN GRILLS WITH BACKDRAFT DAMPER

#N#

Length (mm) Width (mm) Material Connection diameter Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
(mm)
154 154 ABS 100 1 G M522034
186 186 ABS 125 1 G M522078

VENTILATION
REVISION OPENING PVC 403

Length (mm) Height (mm) Material Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
ACCESSORIES FOR DOMESTIC FANS

150 150 Plastic 1 G M522001T

150 200 Plastic 1 G M522002T
200 200 Plastic 1 G M522003T
200 250 Plastic 1 G M522004T
200 300 Plastic 1 G M522005T
200 400 Plastic 1 G M522006T
250 300 Plastic 1 G M522007T
300 300 Plastic 1 G M522008T
300 400 Plastic 1 G M522009T

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
www.elmarkholding.eu TANK WATER HEATERS

TANK WATER HEATERS, BILIGHT VERTICAL SERIES

The appliances is intended to supply hot water to household sites equipped with a piping system working at
pressure below 6 bar (0,6 Mpa). Abundant selection of vertical and horizontal models that easily fits in narrow
and limited spaces. A distinctive feature of all BiLight electric water heaters is the two-colour indication, which
visualises the two operating modes: red light for Heating Mode and blue light for Ready-to-use Mode.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Copper heating element Water heaters with rated power 3000W and M030426
• BiLight indication: red light for heating mode and are available for BG market.
blue light for ready to use mode 2000W: Available for RO; RS; CR & SI markets.
• Piston effect: ensuring up to 15% more hot water.The
nozzle slows down the mixing of the incoming cold SUPPORT:
water and the water already heated in the appliance Warranty and service support is possible only in the
through leveling the pressures in the mixing area countries where the products are offered.
• On/Off switch
• Anti-freeze function
• Eco position of the thermoregulator for cost efficient
and prolonged operation
• No thermal bridge
• Stainless steel pipe
• Plasma welding
• Energy class C

Model Rated Volume Mounting Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) type (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)
#N#

GCV 504420 B11 TSR 2000 50 vertical 440 595 467 G C M030426

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GCV 80 44 30 B11 TSR 3000 82 vertical 440 845 467 G C M030114
GCV 100 44 30 B11 TSR 3000 100 vertical 440 985 467 G C M030402
GCV 804420 B11 TSR 2000 82 vertical 440 845 467 G C M030415
GCV 1004420 B11 TSR 2000 100 vertical 440 985 467 G C M030416
GCV 1204430 B11 TSRC 3000 120 vertical 440 1150 467 G C M030440
GCV 1504430 B11 TSRC 3000 142 vertical 440 1315 467 G C M030441
GCV 1204420 B11 TSRC 2000 120 vertical 440 1150 467 G C M030442
GCV 1504420 B11 TSRC 2000 142 vertical 440 1315 467 G C M030443

405
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
TANK WATER HEATERS www.elmarkholding.eu

TANK WATER HEATERS, BILIGHT SLIM SERIES

The appliances is intended to supply hot water to household sites equipped with a piping system working at
pressure below 6 bar (0,6 Mpa). Abundant selection of vertical and horizontal models that easily fits in narrow
and limited spaces. A distinctive feature of all BiLight electric water heaters is the two-colour indication, which
visualises the two operating modes: red light for Heating Mode and blue light for Ready-to-use Mode.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Slim diameter of only 38 cm 50L: Available for BG; RO; RS; CR & SI markets.
• Thick insulation of 34 mm 80L: Available for BG market.
• Copper heating element
• BiLight indication: red light for heating mode and SUPPORT:
blue light for ready to use mode Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Piston effect: ensuring up to 15% more hot water. countries where the products are offered.
The nozzle slows down the mixing of the incoming
cold water and the water already heated in the
appliance through leveling the pressures in the mixing
area
• On/Off switch
• Anti-freeze function
• Eco position of the thermoregulator for cost efficient
and prolonged operation
• No thermal bridge
• Stainless steel pipe
• Plasma welding

Model Rated Volume Mounting Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) type (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GCV 50 38 20 B11 TSR 2000 50 vertical 386 803 412 G C M030167

GCV 80 38 30 B11 TSR 3000 80 vertical 386 1205 412 G C M030300

406
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
www.elmarkholding.eu TANK WATER HEATERS

TANK WATER HEATERS, BILIGHT SERIES WITH HEAT EXCHANGER

The electric water heaters of the BiLight range with inbuilt heat exchanger /serpentine/ are a product solution for
utilization of alternative sources of heat energy such as solar thermal collectors, gas-burning and solid fuel boilers.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Inbuilt heat exchanger (serpentine) 2000W: Available for RO; RS; CR & SI markets.
• Insutech - an in-house TESY technology for highly 3000W: Available for BG market.
efficient insulation and extremely low heat losses
• Copper heating element SUPPORT:
• BiLight indication: red light for heating mode and Warranty and service support is possible only in the
blue light for ready to use mode countries where the products are offered.
• Piston effect: ensuring up to 15% more hot water.
The nozzle slows down the mixing of the incoming
cold water and the water already heated in the
appliance through leveling the pressures in the mixing
area
• On/Off switch
• Anti-freeze function
• Eco position of the thermoregulator for cost efficient
and prolonged operation
• No thermal bridge
• Stainless steel pipe
• Plasma welding
• Energy class C

Model Rated Volume Mounting type Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GCV6S 804430 B11 TSRP 3000 79 right serpentine 440 845 467 G C M030435
GCV6L 804430 B11 TSRP 3000 79 left serpentine 440 845 467 G C M030436
GCVS 804420 B11 TSR 2000 79 right serpentine 440 845 467 G C M030437
GCVL 804420 B11 TSR 2000 79 left serpentine 440 845 467 G C M030438

407
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
TANK WATER HEATERS www.elmarkholding.eu

TANK WATER HEATERS, BILIGHT HORIZONTAL SERIES

The appliances is intended to supply hot water to household sites equipped with a piping system working at
pressure below 6 bar (0,6 Mpa). Abundant selection of vertical and horizontal models that easily fits in narrow
and limited spaces. A distinctive feature of all BiLight electric water heaters is the two-colour indication, which
visualises the two operating modes: red light for Heating Mode and blue light for Ready-to-use Mode.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Copper heating element 3000W/ 80L: Available for BG market.
• BiLight indication: red light for heating mode and 2000W/50L: Available for BG; RO; RS; CR & SI markets.
blue light for ready to use mode
• Piston effect: ensuring up to 15% more hot water. SUPPORT:
The nozzle slows down the mixing of the incoming Warranty and service support is possible only in the
cold water and the water already heated in the countries where the products are offered.
appliance through leveling the pressures in the mixing
area
• On/Off switch
• Anti-freeze function
• Eco position of the thermoregulator for cost efficient
and prolonged operation
• No thermal bridge
• Stainless steel pipe
• Plasma welding

Model Rated Volume Mounting type Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)

GCH 503520 B12 TSR 2000 50 horizontal right 803 353 380 G C M030427
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GCHL 503520 B12 TSR 2000 50 horizontal left 803 353 380 G C M030428
GCH 80 44 30 B12 TSR 3000 82 horizontal right 855 440 467 G C M030139
GCHL 80 44 30 B12 TSR 3000 82 horizontal left 855 440 467 G C M030131

408
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
www.elmarkholding.eu TANK WATER HEATERS

TANK WATER HEATERS, BILIGHT HORIZONTAL FLOOR SERIES

Specially designed for floor assembly, the electric water heaters of the Bilight Floor series were developed to meet
special architectural requirements.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Horizontal assembly on the floor Available for EL markets
• Copper heating element
• BiLight indication: red light for heating mode and SUPPORT:
blue light for ready to use mode Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Piston effect: ensuring up to 15% more hot water. countries where the products are offered.
The nozzle slows down the mixing of the incoming
cold water and the water already heated in the
appliance through leveling the pressures in the mixing
area
• On/Off switch
• Anti-freeze function
• Eco position of the thermoregulator for cost efficient
and prolonged operation
• No thermal bridge
• Stainless steel pipe
• Plasma welding

Model Rated Volume Mounting type Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)

GCHF 604440 B12 R 4000 50 horizontal floor 440 675 467 G C M030411
GCHF 804440 B12 R 4000 82 horizontal floor 440 885 467 G C M030412

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GCHF 1004440 B12 R 4000 100 horizontal floor 440 955 467 G C M030413

409
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
TANK WATER HEATERS www.elmarkholding.eu

TANK WATER HEATERS, ANTICALC SERIES

The water heaters in the Anticalc series have been developed for long-term and reliable operation in households
supplied with hard, highly mineralised and/or chemically aggressive water. The enlarged area of the dual heating
element, housed in an enamelled steel enclosers with a smooth surface, substantially slows down and limits the
process of limescale deposit. The appliances in the family work noiselessly and are easy to service, as they do not
require preliminary draining of the water tank.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Dual dry heating element Water heaters with catalogue numbers M030406;
• Protection against limescale M030407; M030408 are available only for BG market.
• Noiseless operation Water heaters with catalogue numbers M030417;
• Easy maintenance M030418; M030419 are available for RS, RO, CR & SI
• Two power settings markets.
• External regulator
• Cost efficient operation SUPPORT:
• Precise capillary thermostat Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Extented product life countries where the products are offered
• Energy class C

Model Rated Volume Mounting Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) type (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)

GCV 803824D B14 TSR 2400 80 vertical 386 1220 412 G C M030406
GCV 804424D B14 TSR 2400 82 vertical 440 858 468 G C M030407
GCV 1004424D B14 TSR 2400 100 vertical 440 998 468 G C M030408
GCV 803824D B14 TBR 2400 80 vertical 386 1220 412 G C M030417
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GCV 804424D B14 TBR 2400 82 vertical 440 858 468 G C M030418
GCV 1004424D B14 TBR 2400 100 vertical 440 998 468 G C M030419

410
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
www.elmarkholding.eu TANK WATER HEATERS

TANK WATER HEATERS, BELLISLIMO SERIES

BelliSlimo is a fusion of intelligent high-tech advantages and an exclusive Italian design rendering flat and slim
silhouette, attainting a space-saving compact size, which ensures easy installation according to various needs.
BelliSlimo is reversible and appears both as a horizontal and a vertical piece of art for everyone’s taste and space.
It raises the bar as it implements next-generation technology and delivers ultimate comfort by combining user-
friendly electronic panel and all distinctive TESY advanced innovations. The ECO Smart mode grants an optimum
operation with a low energy consumption, achieving the highest possible Energy Class B in its range.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Work-on-demand mode: BelliSlimo calculates the Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
time required for your water to heat up just in time.
• Energy class B: The highest energy class in its SUPPORT:
category. Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Reversible: Can be installed vertically or horizontally. countries where the products are offered
• Eco smart mode: Self-learning and self management
• Double tank: Two water tanks with separate copper
heating elements.
• Quick first shower
• Vacation mode: to reduce water heater’s and energy
consumption activity.
• Boost function
• Reverse counter: Counts down until the water heater
reaches the desired temperature.
• Copper heating element
• Energy class B

Model Rated Volume Mounting type Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

power (L) (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)

GCR 502722 E31 EC 2200 40 vertical/horizontal 490 704 280 G B M030425

GCR 80 27 22 E31 EC 2200 65 vertical/horizontal 490 1057 280 G B M030409
GCR 100 27 22 E31 EC 2200 80 vertical/horizontal 490 1287 280 G B M030410

411
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
TANK WATER HEATERS www.elmarkholding.eu

TANK WATER HEATERS, BELLISLIMO CLOUD

BelliSlimo Cloud is the latest addition to the TESY Cloud family of products connectable to the Internet. It features
intuitive programming and monitoring by means of the TESY Could app for iOS and Android.

FEATURES: CONTROL VIA INTERNET:

• Energy class B: The highest energy class in its • Easy installation and connection of the water heater
category. to the TESY Cloud app
• Reversible: Can be installed vertically or horizontally. • Real-time monitoring and control of the water heater
• Eco smart mode: Self-learning and self management anytime, anywhere
• Quick first shower • Energy consumption monitoring through the energy
• Vacation mode: to reduce water heater’s and energy calculator
consumption activity.
• Reverse counter: Counts down until the water heater MARKETS:
reaches the desired temperature. Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
• Copper dry heating element
SUPPORT:
Warranty and service support is possible only in the
countries where the products are offered
Model Rated Volume Mounting type Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)

GCR 502722 E31 ECW 2200 40 vertical/horizontal 490 709 280 G B M030424
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

412
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
www.elmarkholding.eu TANK WATER HEATERS

TANK WATER HEATER, MODECO CERAMIC

“Next-generation electric water heaters, combining modern design and eco-friendly smart technology. The
32 mm highly efficient PU insulation guarantees low thermal losses, meeting the highest requirements of the
European markets. Equipped with a ceramic heating element, providing reliable
protection against aggressive water.”

FEATURES:
• Ceramic heating element MARKETS:
• Limescale protection Available for BG; RO; RS & EL Markets.
• Noiless operation
• Quick first shower SUPPORT:
• Easy maintenance without draining Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Two power settings countries where the products are offered
• BiLight indication: red light for heating mode anf
blue light for ready to use mode
• Piston effect: ensuring up to 15% more hot water.The
nozzle slows down the mixing of the incoming cold
water and the water already heated in the appliance
through leveling the pressures in the mixing area
• No thermal bridge
• Stainless steel pipe
• Plasma welding
• Energy class B: The highest energy class in its
category.

Model Rated power Volume Mounting Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
(W) (L) type (mm) (mm) (mm) category class

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GCV 50 47 16D C21 TS2R 800/1600 50 vertical 470 590 496 G B M030429
GCV 80 47 24D C21 TS2R 1200/2400 82 vertical 470 845 496 G B M030302

413
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
TANK WATER HEATERS www.elmarkholding.eu

Smartphone TANK WATER HEATER, MODECO CLOUD

Control

“Next-generation electric water heaters, combining modern design and eco-friendly smart technology. The
32 mm highly efficient PU insulation guarantees low thermal losses, meeting the highest requirements of the
European markets. Providing the comfort to monitor and control your EWH via Internet anytime, anywhere”

FEATURES:
• Control via internet: Easy installation and connection nozzle slows down the mixing of the incoming cold
of the water heater to the TESY Cloud app. Real-time water and the water already heated in the appliance
monitoring and control of the water heater anytime, through leveling the pressures in the mixing area
anywhere. Energy consumption monitoring through • No thermal bridge
the energy calculator. • Stainless steel pipe
• Self-learning ECO SMART MODE for additional • Plasma welding
comfort and lower thermal losses. • Vacation mode
• Touch-control panel and LCD display with crystal • Boost function
clear visualisation. • Energy class B: The highest energy class in its
• Ceramic heating element category.
• Limescale protection
• Noiless operation MARKETS:
• Quick first shower Available for BG; RO; RS; & EL Markets.
• Easy maintenance
• Two power settings SUPPORT:
• BiLight indication: red light for heating mode anf Warranty and service support is possible only in the
blue light for ready to use mode countries where the products are offered
• Piston effect: ensuring up to 15% more hot water.The

Model Rated power Volume Mounting Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
(W) (L) type (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GCV 80 47 24D C21 ECW 1200/2400 82 vertical 470 845 496 G B M030307

TANK WATER HEATER, ELPROM

Water heater that offers you good work and quality an affordable price. The Elprom series has a powerful heater
414 for fast water heating, an external temperature regulator, an external moisture-insulated electric switch and a light
indicator indicating the operating mode.

MARKETS:
TANK WATER HEATERS

Available for BG market.

SUPPORT:
Warranty and service support is possible only in the countries where the products are offered.

Model Rated power Volume Mounting Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
(W) (L) type (mm) (mm) (mm) category class

GCV 804420 D03 TSR 2000 80 vertical 440 790 468 G C M030434

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
www.elmarkholding.eu INSTANTANEOUS & TANK WATER HEATERS

TANK WATER HEATERS, SIMPATECO SERIES

The appliances is intended to supply hot water to household sites equipped with a piping system working at
pressure below 6 bar (0,6 Mpa)

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Copper heating element Available only for BG market.
• Light indication: red light for heating mode anf blue
light for ready to use mode SUPPORT:
• Eco position of the thermoregulator for cost efficient Warranty and service support is possible only in
and prolonged operation BULGARIA
• Stainless steel pipe
• Energy class C

Model Rated Volume Mounting Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) type (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)

CTV 503820 B11 TSR 2000 50 vertical 386 803 386 G C M030403
CTV 803830 B11 TSR 3000 80 vertical 386 1205 412 G C M030404
CTV 804430 B11 TSR 3000 82 vertical 440 845 467 G C M030405
#N#

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS, INSTALINE SERIES

The appliance is an electric domestic water heater with instantaneous effect (constant flow heater). It is used for
supplying hot water in domestic and office environment - kitchens, bathrooms, supporting office premises, etc.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Elegant design and compact size Available for: BG; RO; RS; CR, SI & EL markets.
• Ultra fast reaching of the desired temperature 415
• In-built stabilization of the water temperature SUPPORT:
• Overheating protection Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Light indicator countries where the products are offered.
INSTANTANEOUS & TANK WATER HEATERS

• 360°easy installation
• Energy class A
Model Rated power Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
(W) (mm) (mm) (mm) category

IWH 35 X02 KI 3500 130 200 76 G M030400

IWH 50 X02 KI 5000 130 200 76 G M030401
IWH 70 X02 BA H 7000 130 200 76 G M030439

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
TANK WATER HEATERS www.elmarkholding.eu

TANK WATER HEATERS, COMPACT FLAT SERIES

Low-volume and compact in size. The water heaters of the Compact series are suitable for installation at small
and narrow spaces close to the point of use of hot household water. Depending on the room interior and the
existing utilities, such appliances can be installed under or above the flow regulating mixing tap. The developed
low-volume electric water heaters have storage capacity of 6 litres.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Water tank with glass-ceramic coating and anode Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
protector
• Highly efficient heat insulation SUPPORT:
• Convenient thermoregulator Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Flat shape countries where the products are offered
• Saves space
• Above and under the sink installation
• Range 6 l

Model Rated Volume Mounting type Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)

GCA 0615 M01 RC 1500 5.3 above sinks 265 365 160 G A M030105
GCU 0615 M01 RC 1500 5.3 under sinks 265 365 160 G B M030088
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

416
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
www.elmarkholding.eu TANK WATER HEATERS

TANK WATER HEATERS, COMPACT SERIES

The water heaters of the Compact family are suitable for installation in small and narrow spaces close to the point
of use of hot water. Depending on the room interior and the existing utilities, such appliances can be installed
under or above a sink or mixing tap.
The flat base of the 10 l and 15 l models for under-the-point-of-use installation allows direct on-floor or in-
cupboard placement, which avoids wall drilling.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Elegant compact design 2000W: Available for BG market;
• Saves space 1500W: Available for RO; RS, CR, SI & EL market.
• Convenient push-push thermoregulator for smooth
water temperature setting SUPPORT:
• Red light indication for heating mode Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Blue light indication for ready-to-use mode countries where the products are offered
• Above and under the sink installation
• Energy class B
• Energy class A (Cat. Number M030102)

Model Rated Volume Mounting type Width Height Depth Product Energy Catalogue number
power (L) (mm) (mm) (mm) category class
(W)

GCA 1020 L52 RC 2000 10 above sinks 377 399 247 G A M030102
GCA 15 20 L52 RC 2000 15 above sinks 377 399 304 G A M030019
GCU 1020 L52 RC 2000 10 under sinks 377 399 247 G B M030134
GCU 15 20 L52 RC 2000 15 under sinks 377 399 304 G B M030104
GCA 1015 L52 RC 1500 10 above sinks 377 399 247 G A M030420

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GCA 1515 L52 RC 1500 15 above sinks 377 399 304 G A M030421
GCU 1015 L52 RC 1500 10 under sinks 377 399 247 G B M030422
GCU 1515 L52 RC 1500 15 under sinks 377 399 304 G B M030423

417
TANK WATER HEATERS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
HEATING APPLIANCES
 HEATING APPLIANCES
www.elmarkholding.eu ELECTRICAL

OIL-FILLED RADIATORS, CB SERIES

Oil-filled radiators are considered to be one of the most efficient household electric heating appliances

FEATURES: increases its lifecycle.

• The radiator’s heating surface is enlarged up to 40% • Convenient cable reel
• Three power settings • Built-in 500 W fan heater (for models E01 V)
• Convection and radiant heating effect
• Light indicator MARKETS:
• Adjustable thermoregulator Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
• Anti-frost protection
• Overheating protection SUPPORT:
• Tip-over protection Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Fast heating and Silent operation countries where the products are offered
• Heating element protected from pet’s fur, which
Model Rated power Num. of Heating area Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
(W) fins (mm) (mm) (mm) category

CB 2009 E01 R 800/1200/2000 9 16-24m² 290 650 430 G M048100

CB 2512 E01 V 1000/1500/3000 12 24-32m² 290 650 550 G M048101

FLOOR-STANDING ELECTRIC PANEL CONVECTORS WITH

HEATING APPLIANCES
MECHANICAL TERMOREGULATOR, HEATECO SERIES

Electric panel convectors ensure faster room heating and lower electricity costs.

FEATURES: • Casters not included: Four pices set. Cat number:

• Optimal convection M048109
• Adjustable thermoregulator
• Bathroom usage option- IP 24 protection MARKETS: 419
• Anti-frost protection Available for BG; RO; RS; CR & SI Markets.
• Tip-over protection
• Overheating protection SUPPORT:
• Switch with protection cap Warranty and service support is possible only in the
ELECTRICAL

• Robust metal construction countries where the products are offered

• Floor standing
Model Rated power Heating area Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
(W) (mm) (mm) (mm) category

CN 03 200 MIS F + legs 2000 16-24m² 90 450 830 G M048102

CN 03 300 MIS F + legs 3000 24-32m² 90 450 1180 G M048103

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 HEATING APPLIANCES
ELECTRICAL www.elmarkholding.eu

WALL MOUNTED ELECTRIC PANEL CONVECTORS WITH ELECTRONIC

TERMOREGULATOR, HEATECO SERIES

Electric panel convectors ensure faster room heating and lower electricity costs.

FEATURES: temperature
• Optimal convection - up to 25% faster room heating • Robust metal construction
• Precise thermoregulator with an accuracy of 0.1° C
• Electronic thermoregulator 10-30° C ACCESSORIES:
• Тhermostat calibration to achieve the desired • Are available separately: allow you to use your
comfort: temperature correction ±4° С product as a floor-standing convector.
• Weekly programmer 24/7 with 30-minute step • Legs: Two pices set. Cat number: M048108
• Adaptive start with On/Off option - provides optimal • Casters: Four pices set. Cat number: M048109
comfort and saves energy
• Bathroom installation option: IP 24 MARKETS:
• Delayed start function- 96 hours Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
• Anti-frost protection, fixed on 5° C, with On/Off
option SUPPORT:
• Keyboard lock Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Overheating protection countries where the products are offered
• LED display indicating desired and actual room
Model Rated power Heating area Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
(W) (mm) (mm) (mm) category

CN 03 200 EIS W 2000 16-24m² 90 450 830 G M048104

CN 03 250 EIS W 2500 20-28m² 90 450 1000 G M048105
CN 03 300 EIS W 3000 24-32m² 90 450 1180 G M048057
HEATING APPLIANCES

420
ELECTRICAL

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 HEATING APPLIANCES
www.elmarkholding.eu ELECTRICAL

FLOOR-STANDING ELECTRIC PANEL CONVECTORS,

CN 214 ZF

Floor-standing fan heater with resistive wire

FEATURES: • Noise level: 45.4 dB(A)

• Three power settings: 800 W/1200 W/2000 W • Floor standing
• Adjustable thermoregulator
• Light indicator MARKETS:
• Heating element - resistive wire Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
• Anti-frost protection
• Overheating protection SUPPORT:
• Power cord: 1.7 m Warranty and service support is possible only in the
countries where the products are offered

Model Rated power Heating area Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
(W) (mm) (mm) (mm) category

CN 214 ZF 800/1200/2000 16-24m² 180 430 600 G M048065

FLOOR-STANDING FAN HEATER HL 213 V

HEATING APPLIANCES
Floor-standing fan heater with resistive wire

FEATURES: • Noise level: 45.9 dB(A)

• Two power settings: 1000 W/2000 W • Floor standing
• Classic design
• Compact and lightweight MARKETS:
• Adjustable thermoregulator Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
• Light indicator 421
• Summer ventilation SUPPORT:
• Heating element - resistive wire Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Anti-frost protection countries where the products are offered
• Overheating protection
ELECTRICAL

• Power cord: 1.5 m

Model Rated power Heating area Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
(W) (mm) (mm) (mm) category

HL 213 V 1000/2000 13-16m² 120 227 245 G M048069

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 HEATING APPLIANCES
ELECTRICAL www.elmarkholding.eu

FLOOR-STANDING FAN HEATER HL 830 V PTC

Floor-standing fan heater with PTC heating element

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Tree power settings: 1000 W/2000 W/3000 W Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
• Metal safety grid
• Adjustable thermoregulator SUPPORT:
• Summer ventilation Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Heating element - PTC countries where the products are offered
• Overheating protection
• Noise level: 54.9 dB (А)
• Floor standing

Model Rated power Heating area Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
(W) (mm) (mm) (mm) category

HL 830 V PTC 1000/2000/3000 24-32m² 253 238 238 G M048110

BATHROOM HEATER, HL 246 VB W

HEATING APPLIANCES

Wall-mounted panel heater.

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Two power settings: 1000 W/2000 W Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
• LCD display
• Soft-touch key control SUPPORT:
• Electronic thermoregulator: 10-35°C Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Weekly programmer 24/7 countries where the products are offered
422 • Open window/door function
• Wall-mounted, designed for bathroom usage
• Anti-frost protection
• Overheating protection
• Heating element - resistive wire
ELECTRICAL

• IP24
• Noise level: 51.6 dB(A)

Model Rated power Heating Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
(W) area (mm) (mm) (mm) category

HL 246 VB W 1000/2000 14-18m² 385 165 380 G M048111

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 HEATING APPLIANCES
www.elmarkholding.eu ELECTRICAL

BATHROOM HEATER, HL 243 VB W

Wall-mounted panel heater.

FEATURES: • Overheating protection

• Two power settings: 1000 W/2000 W • Heating element - resistive wire
• Rotatable towel rack • IP24
• Electronic thermoregulator: 5-35° C • Noise level: 50.3 dB(A)
• Weekly programmer 24/7
• Six fixed programs: 5 factory pre-set programs and 1 MARKETS:
custom program Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
• Timer function to switch off
• LCD display and soft-touch key control SUPPORT:
• Open window/door function Warranty and service support is possible only in the
• Wall-mounted, designed for bathroom usage countries where the products are offered
• Anti-frost protection

Model Rated power Heating area Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
(W) (mm) (mm) (mm) category

HL 243 VB W 1000/2000 14-18m² 340 130 400 G M048068

BATHROOM QUARTZ HEATER, QH 04 120

HEATING APPLIANCES
Wall-mounted glass panel heater

FEATURES: MARKETS:
• Two power settings: 600 W/1200 W Available for BG; RO; RS; CR; SI & EL Markets.
• Two quartz heating elements
• Pull-cord switch with power setting display SUPPORT:
• 45° C tilt option for adjustment of the heat Warranty and service support is possible only in the
distribution angle
countries where the products are offered
423
• Wall-mounted, designed for bathroom usage
• IP24

Model Rated power Heating Width Height Depth Product Catalogue number
ELECTRICAL

(W) area (mm) (mm) (mm) category

QH 04 120 600/1200 8-10m² 570 105 120 G M048095

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
SMART HOME CONTROL
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu SMART HOME CONTROL

IP20 ONE CHANNEL RECHARGEABLE

LED PANEL REMOTE
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:

• To control single color LED lamp • Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
• Removeable and stick easily • Standby time: 6 months
• With on/off state and touch operation indication • Built-in rechargeable Li-Battery
• Can remote control multiple controllers or lamps • Working temperature: -30°C~55°C
• High precision touch chip with high sensitive & high • Product size: L86×W86×H13.5mm
stability touch control
Full info for the products, instructions,
can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu

Output signal Li-battery capacity Working current Standby current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

RF(2.4G) 200mAh <20mA < 30μA 1/200 F 99TOUCHUSB1

IP20 FOUR CHANNEL RECHARGEABLE

LED PANEL REMOTE
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

SMART HOME
FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• To control LED one-four colors • Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
• Removeable and stick easily • Standby time: 6 months
• With on/off state and touch operation indication • Built-in rechargeable Li-Battery
• Can remote control multiple controllers or lamps • Working temperature: -30°C~55°C
• High precision touch chip with high sensitive & high • Product size: L86×W86×H13.5mm
stability touch control
Full info for the products, instructions,
can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu 425
SMART HOME CONTROL

Output signal Li-battery capacity Working current Standby current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

RF(2.4G) 200mAh <20mA < 30μA 1/200 F 99TOUCHUSB4

 SMART HOME
SMART HOME CONTROL www.elmarkholding.eu

IP20 ONE CHANNEL FOUR ZONES REMOTE 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:

• To control single color LED lamp • Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
• Removeable and stick easily • Standby time: 6 months
• With on/off state and touch operation indication • Built-in rechargeable Li-Battery
T21,
T22,
T24,
T25
• Can remote control multiple controllers or lamps Wall Mounted Touch
• Working Panel
temperature: -30°C~55°C
• High precision touch chip with high sensitive & high • Product size: L86×W86×H13.5mm
Key function
stability touch control
Full info for the products, instructions,
T21 Single color panel can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu

Power
Turn on/off all zone light.
Zone Power
Brightness slide.

Zone Scene Scene Scene Scene

Short press recall scene. Long press 2s to save the current state into 1/2/3.

Zone Scene Zone Zone Zone Zone

Short press turn on zone light and select zone simultaneously, long press 2s turn off zone light.
Zone Scene
4 zone control seperately or synchronously, each zone could control multiple receivers.

T21,
T22,
T24,
T25 Wall Mounted Touch Panel

Output signal Battery capacity Working current Standby current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
Key function
T22 Dual color panel2xAAA
RF(2.4G) <20mA < 20μA 1/200 D 99TOUCHB1

T21 Single color panel

Power
Turn on/off all zone light.
Zone Power
Color temperature / Brightness slide.
Switch between color temperature / brightness slide
Zone Switch
Switch
Power
Turn on/off all zone light.
Zone Power
Scene Scene
Short press
Brightness recall scene. Long press 2s to save the current state into 1/2.
slide.
Zone Scene

Zone Scene Zone

Scene
Zone
Scene
Zone
Scene
Zone Short press recall scene. Long press 2s to save the current state into 1/2/3.
Zone Scene Short press turn on zone light and select zone simultaneously, long press 2s turn off zone light.
Zone Scene
4 zone control seperately or synchronously, each zone could control multiple receivers.
Zone Zone Zone Zone

Short press turn on zone light and select zone simultaneously, long press 2s turn off zone light.
Zone Scene
4 zone control seperately or synchronously, each zone could control multiple receivers.

#N#
T24 RGBW panel

FOUR CHANNEL FOUR ZONES REMOTE 3+0

3
T22 Dual color panel
IP20 Zone Power
Power
Turn on/off all zone light.
Color slide.
standard
+extended
YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
Short press play 10 built-in mode, long press run mode-cycle.
Mode
Power
Turn on/off all zone light.
Adjust
Colordynamic mode
/ speed or static
slide.color brightness,10 levels.
FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
SMART HOME

Zone Mode

Zone Power Brt/Speed temperature Brightness

W Short press turn on/off W channel, long press adjust W channel brightness.
• To control one-four colours Switch between color temperature / brightness slide
Zone
Zone
Brt/Speed
Switch
White
Switch
• ireless control (remote distance): 30m
Short press recall scene. Long press 2s to save the current state into 1/2.
• Removeable and
W
stick
Shorteasily • tandby
press 2s turntime:
off zone 6 months
Zone Zone Zone Zone
Scene Scene
Zone

Zone
White
Scene
press turn on zone light and select zone simultaneously, long light.
• With on/off state and touch operation indication
Zone Zone Zone Zone
• uilt-in rechargeable Li-Battery
4 zone control seperately or synchronously, each zone could control multiple receivers.
Short press turn on zone light and select zone simultaneously, long press 2s turn off zone light.
• Can remote control multiple
4 zone controlcontrollers or lamps each zone could • orking
multiple temperature: -30°C~55°C
Zone Scene

seperately or synchronously, control receivers.

• High precision touch chip with high sensitive & high • roduct size: L86×W86×H13.5mm
stability touch control
Full info for the products, instructions,
T24 RGBW panel can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu
426 User Manual Ver 1.0.2 www.iskydance.com Page 3

Power
Turn on/off all zone light.
Color slide.
Zone Power

Short press play 10 built-in mode, long press run mode-cycle.

Mode

Zone Mode
Adjust dynamic mode speed or static color brightness,10 levels.
SMART HOME CONTROL

Brt/Speed

W Short press turn on/off W channel, long press adjust W channel brightness.
White
Zone Brt/Speed

W
Zone Zone Zone Zone

Zone White
Short press turn on zone light and select zone simultaneously, long press 2s turn off zone light.
4 zone control seperately or synchronously, each zone could control multiple receivers.

Output signal Battery capacity Working current Standby current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

RF(2.4G) 2xAAA <20mA < 20μA 1/200 D 99TOUCHB4

User Manual Ver 1.0.2 www.iskydance.com Page 3

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu SMART HOME CONTROL

TOUCH AC TRIAC RF DIMMER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control IP20 FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Control is done by installed IOS or Android application • Adopt 2.4GHz wireless technology
• To dim and switch single color dimmable LED • Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
lamps,traditional incandescent and halogen lights • Input voltage: 100-240VAC
• Ultra sensitive high strength glass touch panel with • Output voltage: 100-240VAC
touch brightness slide in the middle and backlighting • Working temperature: -30°C~55°C
• Triac and Mosfet dimmable • Product size: L86×W86×H50mm
• Workt with direct connected dimmable light
• Great compatibility with a variety of dimming remoter Download Skydance Application from Android market
• Leading edge dimming or trailing edge dimming set or Apple store.
by dip switch
• Minimum brightness set by dip switch Full info for the products, instructions,
• Change brightness, support push,long push operation can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu

Input voltage Output voltage Output current Output power Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

100- 240VAC 100- 240VAC 1Channel x 1.2A 100- 240VAC-288W 1/200 D 99TOUCH1

SMART HOME
RF AC TRIAC ROTARY DIMMER 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control IP20 FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Control is done by installed IOS or Android application • Adopt 2.4GHz wireless technology
• To dim and switch single color dimmable LED • Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
lamps,traditional incandescent and halogen lights • Input voltage: 100-240VAC
• Ultra sensitive high strength glass touch panel with • Output voltage: 100-240VAC 427
touch brightness slide in the middle and backlighting • Working temperature: -30°C~55°C
• Triac and Mosfet dimmable • Product size: L86×W86×H50mm
• Workt with direct connected dimmable light
SMART HOME CONTROL

• Great compatibility with a variety of dimming remoter Download Skydance Application from Android market
• Leading edge dimming or trailing edge dimming set or Apple store.
by dip switch
• Minimum brightness set by dip switch Full info for the products, instructions,
• Rotate knob to change brightness, support push,long can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu
push operation

Input voltage Output voltage Output current Output power Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

100- 240VAC 100- 240VAC 1Channel x 1.2A 100- 240VAC-288W 1/200 D 99DIMMERR

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
SMART HOME CONTROL www.elmarkholding.eu

IP20 SINGLE ZONE RF REMOTE CONTROLLER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: • Standby time: 6 months

• Match with single color dimming • CR2032 button battery power supply
receiver- 99RECEIVER1 • Product size: L107×W58.5×H9mm
• Operate with LED indicator light
• Can match one or more receiver Full info for the products, instructions,
can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu
TECHNICAL DATA:
• Working volatage: 3VDC
• Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
Output signal Working voltage Working Standby Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
current current category

RF(2.4GHz) 3VDC(CR2032) <20mA <10μA 1/150 D 99REMOTE1

IP20 SINGLE ZONE RF RGBW REMOTE CONTROLLER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:

• Match with one channel and four channel dimming • Working volatage: 3VDC
receivers- 99RECEIVER1 and 99RECEIVER4 • Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
• Suitable to single color, dual color, RGB, RGBW or • Standby time: 6 months
RGB+CCT LED controller • Battery: 2 x AAA
• Operate with LED indicator light • Product size: L107×W58.5×H9mm
• Can match one or more receiver
Full info for the products, instructions,
can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu
Output signal Working voltage Working Standby Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
current current category

RF(2.4GHz) 3VDC(CR2032) <20mA <10μA 1/150 D 99RGBREMOTE1

SMART HOME

428 IP20 FOUR ZONE RF RGBW REMOTE CONTROLLER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:

• Match with one channel and four channel dimming • Working volatage: 3VDC
receivers- 99RECEIVER1 and 99RECEIVER4 • Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
SMART HOME CONTROL

• Four way control • Standby time: 6 months

• Suitable to single color, dual color, RGB, RGBW or • Battery: 2 x AAA
RGB+CCT LED controller • Product size: L122×W53×H17.5mm
• Operate with LED indicator light
• Can match one or more receiver Full info for the products, instructions,
can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu
Output signal Working voltage Working Standby Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
current current category

RF(2.4GHz) 3VDC(CR2032) <20mA <10μA 1/150 D 99RGBREMOTE4

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu SMART HOME CONTROL

FOUR CHANNEL CONSTANT VOLTAGE RECEIVER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Four channel 2.4GHz RF wireless LED lighting • Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
IP20 dimming reciever • Dimming range: 0-100%
• Work as ON/OFF switch and RGBW controler with • Product size: L97×W33×H18mm
RGBW remoter
• Can also be used for RGB, RGBW, 2 x dual colour, 4 x
single color LED strips
• Full compatibility with a variety of single color, dual
color and RGB/RGBW remoters
• Through jump, strobe, gradual change style, fine
adjust color, realize thousands of powerful editing effect
• 32 change mode optional
• Changing mode or loop mode can be stored to 8
scenes, or timming run
• Control is done by remote control, dimmer switch
and/or installed IOS or Android application
• For more power control it can be equiped with
amplifier

Input voltage Output current Output power Output power Packing/Box (pcs) Product Catalogue number
(12V) (24V) category

12-24 VDC 4Channel 4 x 3A 0 - 144W 0 - 288W 1/100 D 99RGBWF4

#K#

WIFI RELAY CONTROLLER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: Download Skydance Application from Android market

SMART HOME
• Convert WiFi to RF signal or Apple store.
IP20 • It used to carry 1-16 constant voltage receiver with
different channel number Full info for the products, instructions,
• WiFi-Relay controller control up to 16 zones lamp with can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu
any light type
• Can not control lamp directly

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Input voltage: 5-24VDC
• Wireless control (remote distance): 30m 429
• Product size: D72×H18mm
Dimmer
Smartphone WiFi Relay
SMART HOME CONTROL

Lighting control

Remote
Receiver
controller

Input voltage Output current Output power Output power Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
(12V) (24V)

5-24 VDC - - - 1/100 D 99RWIFI

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
SMART HOME CONTROL www.elmarkholding.eu

ONE CHANNEL LED DIMMING RECEIVER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control IP20 FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• One channel 2.4GHz RF wireless LED lighting • Input voltage: 5-36VDC
dimming receiver • Output power: 5VDC: 0-40W; 12VDC: 0-96W;
• Work as ON/OFF switch and dimming 24VDC: 0-192W; 36VDC: 0-288W
• Control is done by remote control, dimmer switch • Dimming range: 0-100%
and/or installed IOS or Android application • Product size: L97×W33×H18mm
• For more power control it can be equiped with
amplifier

Input voltage Output current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

5-36 VDC 1Channel x 8A 1/150 D 99RECEIVER1

FOUR CHANNEL LED DIMMING RECEIVER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control IP20 FUNCTION: • When control RGB/RGBW lamp, built in 30 change
• Four channel 2.4GHz RF wireless LED lighting mode optional
dimming receiver • For more power control it can be equiped with
• Control is done by remote control, dimmer switch amplifier
SMART HOME

and/or installed IOS or Android application

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Work as ON/OFF switch and RGBW controler with
• Input voltage: 12-36VDC
RGBW remoter, create colorful static or dynamic effect
• Output power: 12VDC: 0-240W; 24VDC: 0-480W;
• Can also be used for RGB, RGBW, 2 x dual colour, 4 x
36VDC: 0-720W
single color LED strips
• Dimming range: 0-100%
• Full compatibility with a variety of single color, dual
• Product size: L97×W33×H18mm
color and RGB/RGBW remoters

430
SMART HOME CONTROL

Input voltage Output current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

12-36VDC 4Channel 4 x 5A 1/150 D 99RECEIVER4

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu SMART HOME CONTROL

IP20 ONE CHANNEL POWER REPEATER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:

• It’s used along with 99RECEIVER1, in case we want to • Input voltage: 5-36VDC
increase the output power, for the contol of several light • Output power: 5VDC: 40W; 12V: 96W; 24V: 192W;
sources 36V: 288W
• It can be used unlimited number of amplifiers, • Output current: 1x8A
connected in parallel or • Product size: L97×W33×H18mm
• successively without reflecting the sincronization of
the control itself Full info for the products, instructions,
can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu

Input voltage Output current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

5-36 VDC 1Channel x 8A 1/200 D 99REPEATER1

IP20 FOUR CHANNEL POWER REPEATER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:

SMART HOME
• It’s used along with 99RECEIVER4, in case we want to • Input voltage: 12-36VDC
increase the output power, for the contol of several light • Output power: 12V: 240W; 24V: 480W; 36V: 720W
sources • Output current: 1x8A
• It can be used unlimited number of amplifiers, • Product size: L175×W45×H27mm
connected in parallel or
• successively without reflecting the sincronization of Full info for the products, instructions,
the control itself can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu

431
SMART HOME CONTROL

Input voltage Output current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

12-36VDC 4Channel 4 x 5A 1/200 D 99REPEATER4

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
SMART HOME CONTROL www.elmarkholding.eu

AC TRIAC RF DIMMER 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control IP20 FUNCTION: by dip switch
• AC phase cut RF dimmer • Minimum brightness set by dip switch
• Control is done by installed IOS or Android application
TECHNICAL DATA:
• Control is done by remote control
• Wireless control (remote distance): 30m
• To dim and switch single color dimmable LED lamps,
• Output voltage: 100-240VAC
traditional incandescent and halogen lights
• Output power: 240VAC: 288W
• Triac and Mosfet dimmable
• Product size: L103×W67×H30mm
• Leading edge dimming or trailing edge dimming set

Input voltage Output current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

100- 240VAC 1Channel x 1.2A 1/300 D 99DIMMERT1

AC TRIAC RF DIMMER SWITCH 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control IP20 FUNCTION:
• AC phase cut RF dimmer switch
• Control is done by installed IOS or Android application
SMART HOME

• Control is done by remote control. Can accept up to

10 remote control
• Suitable to use with dimmer switch. Great
compatibility with a variety of dimming remote
• Suitable to mounting in standard panel bottom box
• To dim and switch single color dimmable LED lamps,
traditional incandescent and halogen lights
• Triac and Mosfet dimmable
432 • Leading edge dimming or trailing edge dimming set
by dip switch
• Minimum brightness set by dip switch
TECHNICAL DATA:
SMART HOME CONTROL

• Wireless control (remote distance): 30m

• Input voltage: 100-240VAC
• Output voltage: 100-240VAC
• Output power: 240VAC: 240W
• Product size: L52×W25×H26mm

Input voltage Output current Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

100- 240VAC 1Channel x 1A 1/200 D 99DIMMERMT

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu SMART HOME CONTROL

ONE CHANNEL SMART WIFI GLASS TOUCH PANEL 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Touch ON/OF • Input voltage: 90-250VAC
IP20 • Real-time turn ON/OF lighting from anywhere • Output power: 400W
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android • Output current: 2A
mobile application • Frequency: 2.4Ghz
• Time setting function- turn ON/OF at specified time • Working temperature: 0°C-40°C (32°F-104°F).
after setting • Humidity: 5%-90%RH, Non-condensing
• Through jump, strobe, gradual change style, fine
adjust color, realize thousands of powerful editing effect Download EWeLink Application from Android market
• Turn ON/OF a gang of devices with one tap or Apple store.
• Control can by shared to another mobile phones
• Control electrical devices over Wi-Fi Full info for the products, instructions, can be found at
• Supports max 8 enabled timing tasks www.elmarkholding.eu
• EU standard
• Possibility to voice control with AMAZON ALEXA,
Google Home(Stay tuned)
• Works with GOOGLE NEST

Input voltage Output current Output power Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

90-250V AC 2A 400 W white 1/1000 D 195020

#100#

WIFI SMART PLUG-IN SOCKET GERMAN/UK TYPE 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Tourn ON/OF electrical devices from enywhere • Input voltage: 90-250VAC
IP20

SMART HOME
• Real time control status • Output power: 2000W
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android • Output current: 10A
mobile application • Frequency: 2.4Ghz
• Time setting function- turn ON/OF at specified time • Working temperature: 0°C-40°C (32°F-104°F).
after setting • Humidity: 5%-90%RH, Non-condensing
• Turn ON/OF a gang of devices with one tap
• Control can by shared to another mobile phones Download EWeLink Application from Android market
• Control electrical devices over Wi-Fi or Apple store.
• Supports max 8 enabled timing tasks 433
• German / UK standard Full info for the products, instructions, can be found at
• Possibility to voice control with AMAZON ALEXA, www.elmarkholding.eu
Google Home(Stay tuned)
• Works with GOOGLE NEST
SMART HOME CONTROL

• Security mechanism: WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK/WPA/

WPA2/WAPI/WPS2
195021
Socket Type Input voltage Output current Output power Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

German 90-250V AC 10A 2000 W 1/900 D 195021

UK 90-250V AC 10A 2000 W 1/200 D 195022

195022

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
SMART HOME CONTROL www.elmarkholding.eu

WIFI SMART PLUG-IN SOCKET GERMAN TYPE 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Tourn ON/OF electrical devices from enywhere Input voltage: 100-240VAC
IP20 • Real time control status Output power: 3500W
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android Output current: 10A
• mobile application Frequency: 2.4Ghz
• Time setting function- turn ON/OF at specified time Working temperature: -10°C-50°C
• after setting Size (LxWxH)mm: 108x56x72
• Turn ON/OF a gang of devices with one tap
• Control electrical devices over Wi-Fi Download “Tuya smart” Application from Android
• Possibility to voice control with AMAZON ALEXA, market or Apple store.
• Google assistant
Full info for the products, instructions, can be found at
www.elmarkholding.eu

Socket Type Input voltage Output current Output power Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

German 100-240V AC 16A 3500 W 1/100 D 195023

ONE AND TWO CHANNEL SMART SWITCH 3+0

standard
3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

#100#
+extended

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• One and Two channel wireless ON/OF switch • Input voltage: 90-250VAC
IP20 • Real-time ON/OF devices status provided to • Output power: 2000W per channel
application from anywhere • Output current: 10A per channel
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android • Frequency: 2.4Ghz
SMART HOME

mobile application • Working temperature: 0°C-40°C (32°F-104°F).

• Time setting function- turn ON/OF at specified time • Humidity: 5%-90%RH, Non-condensing
after setting • Product size: L88×W38×H23mm
• Control can by shared to another mobile phones
• Control electrical devices over Wi-Fi Download EWeLink Application from Android market
• Supports max 8 enabled timing tasks or Apple store.
• Possibility to voice control with AMAZON ALEXA,
Google Home (Stay tuned) Full info for the products, instructions, can be found at
195001
434 • Works with GOOGLE NEST www.elmarkholding.eu

Input voltage Output current Output power Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number
SMART HOME CONTROL

90-250V AC 10A 2200 W white 1/800 D 195001

90-250V AC 2x10A 2x2200 W white 1/ 800 D 195004

195004

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu SMART HOME CONTROL

WIRELESS SMART SWITCH WITH

POWER CONSUMPTION MEASUREMENT
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control

IP20 FUNCTION:
• Real-time ON/OF control and monitoring status from
TECHNICAL DATA:
Input voltage: 90-250VAC
energy usage in a period via App (KWH calculator) Output power: 3500W
• Check energy usage daily and monthly via App Output current: 16A
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android Frequency: 2.4Ghz
mobile application Working temperature: 0°C-40°C (32°F-104°F).
• This device works perfectly with electric fan, air Humidity: 5%-90%RH, Non-condensing
conditioner, humidifier, smart fish tank, watering Product size: L114×W52×H32mm
system, etc.
• Time setting function- turn ON/OF at specified time Download EWeLink Application from Android market
after setting or Apple store.
• Control can by shared to another mobile phones
• Control electrical devices over Wi-Fi Full info for the products, instructions, can be found at
• Supports max 8 enabled timing tasks www.elmarkholding.eu
• Possibility to voice control with AMAZON ALEXA,
Google Home (Stay tuned)
• Works with GOOGLE NEST

Input voltage Output current Output power Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

90-250V AC 16A 3500 W white 1/800 D 195003

TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY MONITORING

WIFI WIRELESS SWITCH
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control

SMART HOME
IP20 FUNCTION:
• Real-time ON/OF control and monitoring status from
Google Home(Stay tuned)
• Works with GOOGLE NEST
temperature and humidity with sensor
TECHNICAL DATA:
• Can turn switch ON/OF electrical devices without
• Input voltage: 90-250VAC
monted
• Output power: 3500W
• sensor
• Output current: 16A
• This device works perfectly with electric fan, air
• Frequency: 2.4Ghz
conditioner, humidifier,
• smart fish tank, watering system, etc
• Working temperature: 0°C-40°C (32°F-104°F). 435
• Humidity: 5%-90%RH, Non-condensing
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android
• Product size: L114×W52×H32mm
mobile application
• Time setting function- turn ON/OF at specified time SENSORS:
SMART HOME CONTROL

after setting • 195030 - High-precision temperature & humidity

195002
• Control can by shared- temperature and humidity to sensor, -40°C/+80°C, 0~99.9% RH
another mobile phones • 195031 - Waterproof temperature sensor, IP68,
• Supports max 8 enabled timing tasks -55°C/+125°C
• Possibility to voice control with AMAZON ALEXA,

Input voltage Output current Output power Colour Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

90-250V AC 16A 3500 W white 1/800 D 195002

195030

195031

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
SMART HOME CONTROL www.elmarkholding.eu

SMART WIFI FOUR CHANNEL SWITCH 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Real-time ON/OF switching electrical devices from • Input voltage: 90-250VAC & 5-24VDC
IP20 anywhere • Output power: 4x2200W
• This device is good for industrial control • Output current: 4x10A
• Three modes to work- Switch among interlock/self- • Frequency: 2.4Ghz
locking/inching modes • Working temperature: 0°C-40°C (32°F-104°F).
• Posibility to turn on devices for 0,25-4 s • Humidity: 5%-90%RH, Non-condensing
• Control each channel separately • Product size: L145×W90
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android • Mounting: DIN rail
mobile application
• Time setting function- turn ON/OF at specified time Download EWeLink Application from Android market
after setting or Apple store.
• Control can by shared to another mobile phones
• Control electrical devices over Wi-Fi Full info for the products, instructions, can be found at
195006 • Supports max 8 enabled timing tasks www.elmarkholding.eu
• Possibility to voice control with AMAZON ALEXA,
Google Home(Stay tuned)
• Works with GOOGLE NEST

Input voltage Output current Output power Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

90-250V AC / 5-24V DC 4x10A 4x2200 W 1/ 350 D 195006

IP20 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

DESCRIPTION: TECHNICAL DATA:

SMART HOME

The remote devices for lighting control work through • Battery: 12V 23A
sending a frequent signal from the key to the receiver, • Input voltage: 220- 230 VAC
which commands the connected to it lighting bodies. • Cordless control of lighting fixtures
The installation of the key can be done in a standard • Frequency: 315Mhz–433.92 Mhz
round bracket as the advantage of this product is that
there is no additional requirement for wiring from
it towards the receiver. Thanks to this the product is
widely used in premises with build in installations
436 where there is no ability for adding the additional
cable layouts and expenses for their building are
reserved. The connection between the key and the
receiver is through a frequent signal in the range
SMART HOME CONTROL

-315Mhz – 433.92 Mhz.

Description Operating distance Output power Incandescent Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
in open air (per way) lamp (pcs) category
(m) ESL/ LED lamp

One way output power 50 200W 600W 1/60 D 99101

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu SMART HOME CONTROL

Description Operating distance Output power Incandescent Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
in open air (per way) lamp (pcs) category
(m) ESL/ LED lamp

Two ways output power 50 200W 600W 1/60 D 99102

Description Operating distance Output power Incandescent Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
in open air (per way) lamp (pcs) category
(m) ESL/ LED lamp

Three way output power 50 200W 600W 1/60 D 99103

Description Operating Output power Incandescent Packing/Box Product Catalogue number

distance in open (per way) ESL/ LED lamp (pcs) category
air (m) lamp

Two ways output power- 2xE27 50 150W 400W 1/60 D 99104

SMART HOME
437
SMART HOME CONTROL

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
SMART HOME CONTROL www.elmarkholding.eu

IP20 4 CHANNEL DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDERS 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA:
• Commpresion format: H.265 • Maximum output bandwidth: 16Mbps
• Video system: NTSC/PAL • Maximum decode performance: 1080N:140fps
• Operation system: Linux- embedded • Recording mode: Continuous/Manual/Motion detect
• Analog video-input /output: 4CH inputs / VGA and • Network type: Lan, DHCP, and DDNS
HDMI output • HDD interface: 1SATA HDD, up to 6TB
• IP Video Input: 2ch (only IP up to 6ch) • Multiplex operation: live display, record, playback,
• Composite video input: up to 6ch (Analog video + backup and network
IP video) • USB: 2xUSB(for mouse and backup/upgrade)
• Audio input /output: 1CH input /1CH output(RCA) • PTZ control: yes (RS485)
• Display resolution: Analog :1080N/720P/960H, • Mobile surveillance: Support Mobile Phones based
IP:1080P/720P on iPhone and Android operation system
• Display feature: single/Quad/S.E.Q. • VGA/HDMI: 1024*768,1280*1024,1440*900,1920*1
• Record resolution: Analog :1080N/720P/960H, 080
IP:1080P/720P • Power supply: DC 12V/2A
• Maximum input bandwidth: 8Mbps~16Mbps • Dimension(WxDxH): 300x227x53mm
(default is 8Mbps, decrease one Analog channel can • Working temperature: -10°C~+55°C
increase 4Mbps) • Working humidity: 10%~90%

Model Channel Input voltage Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

EL-4004 4 12V DC 1 D 195060

IP20 8 CHANNEL DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDERS 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

TECHNICAL DATA:
SMART HOME

• Commpresion format: H.265 • Maximum output bandwidth: 32Mbps

• Video system: NTSC/PAL • Maximum decode performance: 1080N:120fps
• Operation system: Linux- embedded • Recording mode: Continuous/Manual/Motion detect
• Analog video-input /output: 8CH inputs / VGA and • Network type: Lan, DHCP, and DDNS
HDMI output • HDD interface: 1SATA HDD, up to 6TB
• IP Video Input: 4ch (only IP up to 12ch) • Multiplex operation: live display, record, playback,
• Composite video input: up to 12ch (Analog video + backup and network
IP video) • USB: 2xUSB(for mouse and backup/upgrade)
438 • Audio input /output: 1CH input /1CH output(RCA) • PTZ control: yes (RS485)
• Display resolution: Analog :1080N/720P/960H, • Mobile surveillance: Support Mobile Phones based
IP:1080P/720P on iPhone and Android operation system
• Display feature: 1/4/6/8/9/10/13/14S.E.Q. • VGA/HDMI: 1024*768,1280*1024,1440*900,1920*1
• Record resolution: Analog :1080N/720P/960H, 080
SMART HOME CONTROL

IP:1080P/720P • Power supply: DC 12V/2A

• Maximum input bandwidth: 16Mbps~32Mbps • Dimension(WxDxH): 300x227x53mm
(default is 8Mbps, decrease one Analog channel can • Working temperature: -10°C~+55°C
increase 4Mbps) • Working humidity: 10%~90%

Model Channel Input voltage Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

EL-4008 8 12V DC 1 D 195061

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu SMART HOME CONTROL

IP66 HD 2MP BULLET CAMERA IP66 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

CAMERA TECHNICAL DATA: MENU:

• IR Distance: up to 20m • AGC: yes
• Image Sensor: 1/2.9” progressive CMOS • Day/Night Mode: EXT/auto/color/black and white)
• Signal system: PAL/NTSC • White balance: auto/manual
• Frame Rate: AHD/TVI/CVI: P/25fps N/30fps/ CVBS: • BLC: yes
960H • S/N ratio: 40dB
• Resolution: 2MP 1920(H)×1080(V) • OSD: support
• Lens: 3.6mm
• Day & Night: IR cut filter: 850nm INTERFACE:
• Synchronization: internal • Video Output: 1-channel BNC video output
• Dwdr: support • Swaitch Button: AHD/TVI/CVI/CVBS
• Communication: Up the coax, protocol

Model Input voltage Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

EL-2232 12V DC 1 D 195054

IP66 HD 2MP DOME CAMERA IP66 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

CAMERA TECHNICAL DATA: MENU:

IR Distance: up to 15m • AGC: yes
Image Sensor: 1/2.9” progressive CMOS • Day/Night Mode: EXT/auto/color/black and white)
Signal system: PAL/NTSC • White balance: auto/manual
Frame Rate: AHD/TVI/CVI: P/25fps N/30fps/ CVBS: • BLC: yes

SMART HOME
960H • S/N ratio: 40dB
Resolution: 2MP 1920(H)×1080(V) • OSD: support
Lens: 3.6mm
Day & Night: IR cut filter: 850nm INTERFACE:
Synchronization: internal • Video Output: 1-channel BNC video output
Dwdr: support • Swaitch Button: AHD/TVI/CVI/CVBS
Communication: Up the coax, protocol

Model Input voltage Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number 439
EL-328 12V DC 1 D 195055
SMART HOME CONTROL

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
SMART HOME CONTROL www.elmarkholding.eu

DVR AND CAMERA ACCESSORIES - CABLE SPLITTERS

1 to 4 or 1 to 8 power splitter power cable (power splitter connection)

Plug and play ready only for camera with DC power
For adapting power supply 12V2A

Description Power source type Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

1-4 cable splitter DC 1 D 195062

1-8 cable splitter DC 1 D 195063

DVR AND CAMERA ACCESSORIES- POWER ADAPTOR

High quality supply for DVR cameras with over current protection, over voltage protection, overload protection
and short-circuit protection

Description Input Voltage Output Voltage Current Packing/Box Product Catalogue number
(pcs) category

Power adaptor 100-240V AC 12V DC 2A 1 D 195065

DVR AND CAMERA ACCESSORIES- BNC CABLE

SMART HOME

BNC video and power security camera cable. Suitable just for camera with DC power and supply DC power for
security cameras
Plug and play connectors on both ends
It is used for CCTV cameras, DVRs, audio video systems.Compatible with all CCTV surveillance DVR camera system

Description Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

440 BNC cable 18.29 1 D 195064
SMART HOME CONTROL

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu WI-FI CAMERAS

4 CHANNEL WI-FI NETWORK

VIDEO RECORDERS + 4 CAMERA, SET
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control

IP66 NVR TECHNICAL DATA::

• Commpresion format: H.265+
CAMERA TECHNICAL DATA:
• IR Distance: 20-30m
• Operation system: Linux- embedded • Sensor: progressive scan
• Video-input: 4*1080P • Low illumination: Color: 0.1 Lux; B/W: 0.01 Lux
• Audio compression: G.711A • Effective pixel: HD 1080P
• Display resolution: Max 1080P • Video compression: H.265+
• Record resolution: Analog : 1080P • Lens: HD 3.6mm
• Access bandwidth: 24Mbps • Day & Night: IR cut filter with auto switch
• Forwarding bandwidth: 24Mbps • Power supply: DC12V 1A
• Maximum decode performance: 4x1080P • Consumption: max 6W
• Recording mode: Manual>Alarm>Dynamic • IP66
Detection>Timing
• Network interface: 1*RJ45 10M/100M Adaptive
Ethernet port+4ch WIFI
• HDD interface: 1SATA, up to 8TB for each disk- not
included
• Record storage: live display, record, playback, backup
and network
• USB: 2xUSB
• Mobile surveillance: Support Mobile Phones based
on iPhone and Android operation system

Model Channel Camera Included Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

EL-4004N 4 4 1 D 195069

SMART HOME
WI-FI CEILING SMART CAMERA 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android • Input voltage: 100-240VAC
IP20 mobil application • Output voltage: 5V
• Diferent view settings • Cover range: 50m 441
• Support TF recording & Cloud storage • Wiev angle: 360°
• Two-way voice communication • Effective pixel: HD 1080P
• Motion detection voice alarm & save alarm video
WI-FI CAMERAS

• Detailed alarm sector setting Download V380 pro Application from Android market
• Sending images or Apple store.
• Night vision
• Full info for the products, instructions, can be found
at www.elmarkholding.eu

Type Pixels Cover range Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

ceiling camera 200 1080 50m² 1 D 195052

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
WI-FI CAMERAS www.elmarkholding.eu

WI-FI SMART CAMERA 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android • Input voltage: 100-240VAC
IP20 mobil application • Output voltage: 5V, 1A
• Support TF recording & Cloud storage • Speaker: 8Ω 1W
• Two-way voice communication • Field of view: H.86° (355°)/V.64°(90°)
• Motion detection alarm • Resolution: 1280×720(1.0MP)
• Detailed alarm sector setting • Wireless Frequency: 2.4GHz~2.4835 GHz
• Sending images. Night vision

Type Resolution Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

EL-2019Y 1280×720(1.0MP) 1 D 195067

WI-FI SMART CAMERA 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android • Input voltage: 100-240VAC
IP20 mobil application • Output voltage: 5V, 2A
• Support TF recording & Cloud storage • Speaker: 8Ω 1W
• Two-way voice communication • Field of view: H.86° (355°)/V.64°(90°)
• Motion detection alarm • Resolution: 1920×1080(2.0MP)
• High quality videos аnd Night vision • Wireless Frequency: 2.4GHz~2.4835 GHz
• Sending images

Type Resolution Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

EL-2017G 1920×1080(2.0MP) 1 D 195068

SMART HOME

442
WI-FI OUTDOOR SMART CAMERA IP66 3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
• Control is done from anywhere with IOS or Android • Input voltage: 100-240VAC
IP66
WI-FI CAMERAS

mobile application • Output voltage: 5V, 1A

• Support TF recording & Cloud storage • Speaker: Built-in 18 euro 1W speaker
• Two-way voice communication • Field of view: H.86° (355°)/V.64°(90°)
• Motion detection alarm • Resolution: 1920x1080 (2MP)
• High quality videos аnd Night vision • Wireless Frequency: 2.4GHz~2.4835 GHz
• Sending images

Model Resolution Packing/Box (pcs) Product category Catalogue number

EL-2019Q 1920x1080 (2MP) 1 D 195070

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu WI-FI CAMERAS

WIFI IP CAMERA WITH ALARM

SYSTEM - KIT
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control

IP20 FUNCTION:
• Magnetic Sensor: Under arm mode, when the door
trigger the IR sensor, or break open the door/window
contact, or panic button was pressed
or window installed with magnetic sensor is opened, • Night Vision: Supported by IP Camera
tne magnetic sensor will send alarm signal to the main • Intercom: Two-way voice communication
unit, the main unit will take video and send message
to the smartphone. TECHNICAL DATA:
• IR Sensor: When someone is detected by the infrared • Working Distance: 100m (open area)
sensor, it will send alarm signal to the main unit. Under • IP Sensor Angle: Adjustable from 90° to 110°
arm mode, the main unit will take video and send • IP Canmera Lens: HD 1080P
message to the smartphone.
• SOS Panic Button: When someone press the SOS
panic button, it will send SOS signal to the main unit.
Under arm mode, the main unit will send alarm signal
and video to the users smartphone. Suitable for the
care of children, the elderly and disabled people.
• Main Unit: IP camera with built-in Wi-Fi module.
Receive wireless alarm signal from other security sensors.
Under arm mode, after received signal, the main unit will
take video and send message to the smartphone.
• Arm and disarm on smartphone
• View IP camera protected area from anywhere anytime.
• In arm mode IP camera will take video and send
message when intruder enters the front door and

Model Description Product category Catalogue number

EL-WFAK1 WIFI IP camera with sensors and panic button- KIT D 195091

SMART HOME
443
WI-FI CAMERAS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
WI-FI CAMERAS www.elmarkholding.eu

WIFI INFRARED ALARM SENSOR 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control FUNCTION: TECHNICAL DATA:
IR Sensor: When someone is detected by the infrared • Working Distance: 30m (open area)
IP20 sensor, it will send alarm signal to the smartphone via APP. • IP Sensor Angle: 110°max 7m

Model Description Product category Catalogue number

EL-AK3 WIFI IP Infrared alarm sensor D 195090

RECHARGEABLE WIFI SMART VIDEO

DOOR BELL WITH DOOR CHIME
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control

IP20 FUNCTION:
• Intercom: Two-way voice communication and local
OUTDOOR UNITS TECHNICAL DATA:
• Camera angle: 136°
intercom with 3 mobile users • Battery: Li- 4000mA
• Monitoring: See and speak to visitors via the APP • Night Vision: Supported
from anywhere • Distance: 1-3m for night vision
• Recording: TF card for storing the video recorder.
Photo taking

Model Description Product category Catalogue number

EL-RWF1DP1DC Rechargeable WIFI video doorbell switch with door chime D 195074
SMART HOME

444
WI-FI CAMERAS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu WI-FI CAMERAS

7 INCH WIFI SMART VIDEO INTERCOM

DOORBELL SYSTEMS
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control

IP20 FUNCTION:
• Monitoring: See and speak to visitors via the APP from
INDOOR MONITORS TECHNICAL DATA:
• Connecting wire: 4- core
anywhere • Ring tone: 16 melody
• Unlock door: when someone pressess the button on • Working Voltage: 12VDC
the outdoor unit, the smartphone and the indoor unit • Resolution: 800x400
will ring together. The local remote video intercom will • Working Current: ≤ 1100mA
be pushed to your smartphone APP, you can also unlock • Talking time: 120s±10%
the door strike remotely by APP, or unlock by the door • Monitoring time: 40s±10%
monitor unit. The door strike needs extra power supply.
• Recording: User can take photos or record video via APP
• Intercom: Two-way voice communication

OUTDOOR UNITS TECHNICAL DATA:

• Working Voltage: 12VDC
• Working Current: ≤ 500mA
• IP Rating: IP44
• Body material: Metal: anti-oxidation and anti-vandal
outdoor unit
• Night Vision: Supported

7 INCH WIFI SMART VIDEO INTERCOM DOORBELL SYSTEMS, SINGLE

WAY- ONE BUTTON ONE MONITOR

Model Description Monitors QTY Voltage Screen Product category Catalogue number
EL-WF1DP Single way smart intercom system 1 12VDC 7 inch D 195071

SMART HOME
7 INCH ADDITIONAL MONITOR FOR SINGLE WAY DOORBELL SYSTEM
Additional monitor is suitable only for single way intercom system. When a guest or visitor presses the doorbell
button on the camera unit, the homeowner can use a few monitors to see who is requesting entry, speak with the
caller, take a photo and unlock the door.
Model Description Monitors QTY Voltage Screen Product category Catalogue number
EL-1BM Additional monitor for EL-WF1DP 12VDC 7 inch D 195077
445
WI-FI CAMERAS

7 INCH WIFI SMART VIDEO INTERCOM DOORBELL SYSTEMS, DOUBLE

WAY- ONE UNIT WITH TWO BUTTON AND TWO MONITORS

Model Description Monitors QTY Voltage Screen Product category Catalogue number

EL-WF2DP Double way smart intercom system 2 12VDC 7 inch D 195072

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
WI-FI CAMERAS www.elmarkholding.eu

7 INCH WIFI SMART VIDEO INTERCOM DOORBELL SYSTEMS, SINGLE

WAY- ONE BUTTON AND TWO MONITORS

Model Description Monitors QTY Voltage Screen Product category Catalogue number
EL-WF1DP+1 Single way intercom with 2 monitors 2 12VDC 7 inch D 195080

7 INCH WIFI SMART VIDEO INTERCOM DOORBELL SYSTEMS, SINGLE

WAY- ONE BUTTON AND THREE MONITORS

Model Description Monitors QTY Voltage Screen Product category Catalogue number

EL-WF1DP+2 Single way intercom with 3 monitors 3 12VDC 7 inch D 195076

7 INCH WIFI SMART VIDEO INTERCOM DOORBELL SYSTEMS, SINGLE

WAY- ONE BUTTON AND FOUR MONITORS
SMART HOME

Model Description Monitors QTY Voltage Screen Product category Catalogue number

EL-WF1DP+3 Single way intercom with 4 monitors 4 12VDC 7 inch D 195078

446
WI-FI CAMERAS

7 INCH WIFI SMART VIDEO INTERCOM DOORBELL SYSTEMS, SINGLE

WAY- ONE BUTTON AND FIVE MONITORS

Model Description Monitors QTY Voltage Screen Product category Catalogue number

EL-WF1DP+4 Single way intercom with 5 monitors 5 12VDC 7 inch D 195079

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SMART HOME
www.elmarkholding.eu WI-FI CAMERAS

WIFI SMART VIDEO DOOR BELL

WITH TWO DOOR CHIMES
3+0
standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

Smartphone
Control

IP20 FUNCTION:
• Intercom: Two-way voice communication
OUTDOOR UNITS TECHNICAL DATA:
• Camera: Reinforced CMOS
• Monitoring: See and speak to visitors via the APP • Working Voltage: 12VDC
from anywhere • Working Current: ≤ 500mA
• Security: Built-in motion sensor. Once detected • IP Rating: IP55
the human body, it can send an photo to the • Body material: Metal: anti-oxidation and anti-vandal
owner’s e mail box, and send an alarm signal to the outdoor unit
smartephone! • Night Vision: Supported

Model Description Voltage Product category Catalogue number

EL-WF2DP2DC WIFI video doorbell switch with 2 extra door chimes 12VDC D 195073

DOORPHONE KIT 3+0

standard
+extended 3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

FUNCTION: OUTDOOR UNITS TECHNICAL DATA:

• Intercom: Two-way voice communication • Working Voltage: 12VDC
• Unlock door strike • Working Current: ≤ 500mA
• IP Rating: IP44
• Body Material: Metal: anti-oxidation and anti-vandal
outdoor unit

SMART HOME
• Night Vision: Supported
• Two-wire connection

Model Description Product category Catalogue number

EL-1DP1IU Doorphone kit D 195075

447
WI-FI CAMERAS

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 DOORBELLS
WIRELESS DOORBELLS www.elmarkholding.eu

5020
DOORBELLS

5016 5019

448
WIRELESS DOORBELLS

WIRELESS DOORBELLS WITH LED FLASH LIGHT

Catalogue number Product QTY Transmiter/Reciever Voltage Sound level Volume levels Music Distance Packing/Box
category (V) db(A) (m) (pcs)

5020 D One/One 220 65-85 Low/Middle/High 36 melodies 80 1/60

5016 D One/One 220 65-85 Low/Middle/High 36 melodies 80 1/60
5019 D One/One 220 65-85 Low/Middle/High 36 melodies 80 1/60

Transmitter battery: 12V A23

The item is without a coded frequency! Within a montage at a distance less than 80 meters and of two or more analogue doorbells, their work can be influenced by or disturbances to happen.
2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 DOORBELLS
www.elmarkholding.eu WIRELESS DOORBELLS

5015

DOORBELLS
5018

449
WIRELESS DOORBELLS

WIRELESS DOORBELLS WITH LED FLASH LIGHT

Catalogue number Product QTY Transmiter/Reciever Voltage Sound level Volume levels Music Distance Packing/Box
category (V) db(A) (m) (pcs)

5015 D One/Two 220 65-85 Low/Middle/High 36 melodies 80 1/60

5018 D One/Two 220 65-85 Low/Middle/High 36 melodies 80 1/60

Transmitter battery: 12V A23

The item is without a coded frequency! Within a montage at a distance less than 80 meters and of two or more analogue doorbells, their work can be influenced by or disturbances to happen.
2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 DOORBELLS
WIRELESS DOORBELLS www.elmarkholding.eu

5023/1
5024

#N#
DOORBELLS

5023/2
450
WIRELESS DOORBELLS

WIRELESS DOORBELLS WITH LED FLASH LIGHT

Catalogue number Product QTY Transmiter/ Transmiter Voltage Receiver Voltage Sound level Volume levels Music Distance Packing/Box
category Reciever (V) (V) db(A) (m) (pcs)

5023/1 D One/One 12V 23A Battery DC 3x1.5V AAA Battery 70-85 Low/Middle/High 36 melodies 80 1/60
5023/2 D One/Two 12V 23A Battery DC 3x1.5V AAA Battery 70-85 Low/Middle/High 36 melodies 80 1/60
5024 D One/One 12V 23A Battery 220V AC 70-85 Low/Middle/High 36 melodies 80 1/60

The item is without a coded frequency! Within a montage at a distance less than 80 meters and of two or more analogue doorbells, their work can be influenced by or disturbances to happen.
2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 DOORBELLS
www.elmarkholding.eu WIRELESS DOORBELLS

5025BL
#N#

DOORBELLS
5025WH 451
WIRELESS DOORBELLS

DIGITAL WIRELESS DOORBELLS WITH LED FLASH LIGHT

Catalogue number Product QTY Transmiter/ Transmiter Voltage Receiver Voltage Sound level Volume levels Music Distance Packing/Box
category Reciever (V) (V) db(A) (m) (pcs)

5025BL D One/One 12V 23A Battery DC 2x1.5V AA Battery 70-85 Low/Middle/High 32 melodies 120 1/60
5025WH D One/One 12V 23A Battery DC 2x1.5V AA Battery 70-85 Low/Middle/High 32 melodies 120 1/60

2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 DOORBELLS
WIRELESS DOORBELLS www.elmarkholding.eu

5021
DOORBELLS

5022
452
WIRELESS DOORBELLS

INFRARED INDUCTION DOORBELLS

Catalogue number Product Description Voltage Sound level Detection angle Sensor detection distance Music Packing/Box
category (V) db(A) (m) (pcs)

5021 D Doorbell with sensor 4,5V DC 85 100° up to 7 36 melodies 1/60

5022 D Doorbell & sensor 4,5V DC 85 100° up to 7 36 melodies 1/60

5021 - This is an electric appliance with inserted motion sensor.It is used for advisement for guests,visitors or customers.When there is a motion ,it starts / there is a sound which advises that there is a
visitor/customer/ in the premisses.Working area - up to 7 meters
5022 - This is a complex product that combines two appliances.It is used for advisor for guests,visitors or customers.The sensor is installed to the place that we would like to know there is a motion/
visitor,this usually is the shop entrance,offices,warehouses and etc.The bell can be installed at a distance up to 130 m from the sensor which we will receive the signal for motion /visitor.
Working frequency: 315MHz/433.92 MHz
2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 DOORBELLS
www.elmarkholding.eu WIRELESS DOORBELLS

5012
5220

5001

DOORBELLS
453
WIRELESS DOORBELLS

BELL / BELL TRANSFORMER

Catalogue number Product Type In (V) Un (V) Conssumption (VA) Sound level Packing/Box
category db(A) (pcs)

5012 D Bell 230 8-12 3.6 70 1 /12 / 240

5220 D Bell 230 230 5 70 1 /12 / 240
5001 D Bell transformer 230 8/12/24 8 - 1 / 80

Mounting: on DIN-rail |
5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
 www.elmarkholding.eu
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

454 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS


 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu CITY

White/White Champagne metallic/White Orenge/White

Yellow/White Red/White Green/White Blue/White

Orange metallic/White Bordo metallic/ Grey/White

White

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

2 gangs Champagne metallic/White 3 gangs Red/White

455
CITY

4 gangs Bordo metallic/White

5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
5 gangs Grey/White

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
CITY www.elmarkholding.eu

190011 190011L 190041 190191 190181

190021 190021L 190051
190031

190183 190211s 190371s 190211D 190211F

190043 190062 190060 190066 190064

190045
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART PLUS PANEL “CITY” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current Packing/
category In (A) Box (pcs)
190011 C 1 button 1 way switch White 10 10/100
190011L C 1 button 1 way switch with light White 10 10/100
190021 C 1 button 2 way switch White 10 10/100
190021L C 1 button 2 way switch with light White 10 10/100
456 190031 C 1 button cross switch White 10 10/100
190041 C 2 buttons 1 way switch White 10 10/100
190051 C 2 buttons 2 way switch White 10 10/100
190064 C 3 buttons 1 way switch White 10 10/100
CITY

190191 C Dimmer switch LED 3-300W White - 10/60

190181 C Door bell switch White - 10/100
190183 C Push light button White - 10/100
screw type socket
190211S C German screw type socket White 16 10/100
190211F C French screw type socket White 16 10/100
190211D C German screw type socket IP44 White 16 10/100
190371S C German screw type socket (double) White 16 10/60
190060 C 1 Gang cable outlet without cable terminal White 10/100
190062 C German screw type socket 2хUSB port White 16 10/60
190043 C Key card power switch * White 10 10/60
190045 C 1-2 mode curtain control switch White 10 10/60
190066 C Interlock shutter switch White 10 10/100

*is not compatible with another decorative frame or frame designed for more than one functional part
screwless type socket
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu CITY

190261 190281 190711 190251 190033

190034 190731

190791 190721 190751 190747 190771

190090 190171 190741 190091

190092

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART PLUS PANEL “CITY” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current Packing/
category In (A) Box (pcs)

190261 C Phone socket RJ11 White - 10/100

190281 C Computer socket RJ45 CAT5E White - 10/100
190034 C Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 White - 10/100 457
190731 C Phone socket RJ11 + computer socket RJ45 White - 10/100
190711 C Computer socket RJ45 - double White - 10/100
CITY

190251 C TV socket White - 10/100

190033 C TV+FM+SAT White - 10/100
190791 C 1 button double pole switch White 20 10/100
190721 C Audio socket- double White 10 10/100
190751 C USB socket- double White 2 10/100
190747 C HDMI socket White 10/100
190771 C Motion sensor 200W White 10/100
190171 C Doorbell switch with light name card White 10 10/100
190741 C 1 Gang blank Plate White 10/100
190090 C Silicone cover IP44 White - 100
190091 C 1 Gang Surface mounting box White - 126
190092 C 2 Gang Surface mounting box White - 66

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
CITY www.elmarkholding.eu

190012 190012L 190042 190192 190182

190022 190052
190032

190184 190212s 190372s 190212D 190212F

190044 190065 190069 190067

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART PLUS PANEL “CITY” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current Packing/Box
category In (A) (pcs)

190012 C 1 button 1 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100

190012L C 1 button 1 way switch with light Champagne metallic 10 10/100
190022 C 1 button 2 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100
190022L C 1 button 2 way switch with light Champagne metallic 10 10/100
190032 C 1 button cross switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100
458 190069 C 1 button double pole switch Champagne metallic 20 10/100
190042 C 2 buttons 1 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100
190052 C 2 buttons 2 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100
CITY

190065 C 3 buttons 1 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100

190192 C Dimmer switch LED 3-300W Champagne metallic - 10/60
190182 C Door bell switch Champagne metallic - 10/100
190184 C Push light button Champagne metallic - 10/100 screw type socket
190212S C German screw type socket Champagne metallic 16 10/100
190212F C French screw type socket Champagne metallic 16 10/100
190372S C German screw type socket (double) Champagne metallic 16 10/60
190212D C German screw type socket IP44 Champagne metallic 16 10/100
190044 C Key card power switch * Champagne metallic 10 10/60
190046 C Curtain control switch Champagne metallic 10 10/60
190067 C Interlock shutter switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100

* is not compatible with another decorative frame or frame designed for more than one functional part
screwless type socket
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu CITY

190262 190282 190732 190252 190034F

190035 190712

190722 190742 190752 190772 190782

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

190792 190748 190172

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART PLUS PANEL “CITY” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current Packing/Box
category In (A) (pcs)

190262 C Phone socket RJ11 Champagne metallic - 10/100

459
190282 C Computer socket RJ45 CAT5E Champagne metallic - 10/100
190035 C Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 Champagne metallic - 10/100
190732 C Phone socket RJ11 + computer socket RJ45 Champagne metallic - 10/100
CITY

190712 C Computer socket RJ45 - double Champagne metallic - 10/100

190252 C TV socket Champagne metallic - 10/100
190034F C TV+FM+SAT Champagne metallic - 10/100
190722 C 1 button 1 way switch Champagne metallic 20 10/100
190742 C Audio socket- double Champagne metallic 10 10/100
190752 C USB socket- double Champagne metallic 2 10/100
190772 C HDMI socket Champagne metallic 10/100
190782 C Motion sensor 200W Champagne metallic 10/100
190792 F Thermostat* Champagne metallic 16 10/100
190748 C Doorbell switch with light name card Champagne metallic 10 10/100
190172 C 1 Gang blank Plate Champagne metallic 10/100

*Until Supply Last

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
CITY www.elmarkholding.eu

1 gang

2 gangs
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

3 gangs

460
1 GANG PANEL “CITY” SERIES 2 gangs PANELS “CITY” SERIES 3 gangs PANELS “CITY” SERIES
Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Product Type Colour
number category number category number category
CITY

190441 C 1 gang White 190551 C 2 gangs White 190661 C 3 gangs White

190442 C 1 gang Champagne metallic 190552 C 2 gangs Champagne metallic 190662 C 3 gangs Champagne metallic
190443 C 1 gang Orange 190553 C 2 gangs Orange 190663 C 3 gangs Orange
190444 C 1 gang Yellow 190554 C 2 gangs Yellow 190664 C 3 gangs Yellow
190445 C 1 gang Green 190555 C 2 gangs Green 190665 C 3 gangs Green
190446 C 1 gang Red 190556 C 2 gangs Red 190666 C 3 gangs Red
190447 C 1 gang Blue 190557 C 2 gangs Blue 190667 C 3 gangs Blue
190448 C 1 gang Orange metallic 190558 C 2 gangs Orange metallic 190668 C 3 gangs Orange metallic
190449 C 1 gang Bordo metallic 190559 C 2 gangs Bordo metallic 190669 C 3 gangs Bordo metallic
190450 C 1 gang Grey 190560 C 2 gangs Grey 190670 C 3 gangs Grey
Packing/Box (pcs): 1 gang 1/200 | 2 gangs 1/100 | 3 gangs 1/150
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu CITY

4 gangs

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

5 gangs

461
4 gangs PANELS “CITY” SERIES 5 gangs PANELS “CITY” SERIES
Catalogue number Product category Type Colour Catalogue number Product category Type Colour
CITY

190361 C 4 gangs White 190601 C 5 gangs White

190362 C 4 gangs Champagne metallic 190602 C 5 gangs Champagne metallic
190363 C 4 gangs Orange 190603 C 5 gangs Orange
190364 C 4 gangs Yellow 190604 C 5 gangs Yellow
190365 C 4 gangs Green 190605 C 5 gangs Green
190366 C 4 gangs Red 190606 C 5 gangs Red
190367 C 4 gangs Blue 190607 C 5 gangs Blue
190368 C 4 gangs Orange metallic 190608 C 5 gangs Orange metallic
190369 C 4 gangs Bordo metallic 190609 C 5 gangs Bordo metallic
190370 C 4 gangs Grey 190610 C 5 gangs Grey
Packing/Box (pcs): 4 gangs 1/100 | 5 gangs 1/100
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
LECCE www.elmarkholding.eu
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

462 LECCE
LECCE
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu LECCE

White/White Blue/White

Silver grey/White Golden/White

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

Graphite mat/White Graphite/White

463

Champagne/White Green/White
LECCE

Onix/White Cherry-tree/White

5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
LECCE www.elmarkholding.eu

sound dimmer boiler switch with neon* LED dimmer 200VA, 3 mod

1 button 1 way switch with light 1 button 1 way / 2 way / cross switch / push light 1 button 2 pole switch 16A

#100#
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

curtain Switch dimmer 250W door bell switch

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “LECCE” SERIES
464 Catalogue number Product Type
category
Colour Size Rated
current In (A)
Packing/Box
(pcs)

26016 C sound dimmer White 2 mod 1/120

26053 C LED dimmer 200VA White 3 mod -
LECCE

26024 C boiler switch with neon* White 3 mod 45 1/60

26001 C 1 button 1 way switch White 1 mod 16 1/300
26003 C 1 button 2 way switch White 1 mod 16 1/300
26026 C 1 button 2 pole switch White 1 mod 16
26004 C 1 button cross switch White 1 mod 10 1/240
26002 C 1 button 1 way switch with light White 1 mod 16 1/300
26006 C curtain Switch White 1 mod 6 1/240
26055 C dimmer 250W White 1 mod - 1/120
26005 C door bell switch White 1 mod 10 1/300
26027 C push light button White 1 mod 10

* the product comes without decorative tripple panel

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu LECCE

blank cover

computer socket phone socket TV socket Satellite socket

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

button without functional part key power switch

465

IP20
LECCE

FUNCTIONAL PART “LECCE” SERIES

Catalogue number Product Type Colour Size Rated Packing/Box
category current In (A) (pcs)

26017 C blank cover White 1 mod 1/600

26013 C computer socket RJ45 CAT5E White 1 mod 1/300
26013C C computer socket RJ45 CAT6 White 1 mod 1/300
26012 C phone socket White 1 mod 1/300
26010 C TV socket White 1 mod - 1/300
26011 C Satellite socket White 1 mod - 1/300
26023 C button without functional part White 3 mod 1/360
26025 C key power switch white 3 mod 30A

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
LECCE www.elmarkholding.eu

german type socket double pin socket italian standard

multi socket

door bell 2 port USB socket universal socket

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

audio socket italian type socket HDMI socket

466
IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “LECCE” SERIES
LECCE

Catalogue number Product Type Colour Size Rated Packing/Box

category current In (A) (pcs)

26008 C german type socket White 2 mod 16 1/140

26007SA C double pin socket White 1 mod 16 1/300
26007 C italian standard multi socket White 1 mod 16 1/300
26015 C door bell White 2 mod 1/100
26014 C 2 port USB socket, Input: 90-240V Output: 5V 2A White 1 mod 1/120
26009 C universal socket White 2 mod 13 1/120
26021 C audio socket White 1 mod 1/100
26020 C italian type socket White 2 mod 16 1/300
26022 C HDMI socket White 1 mod 1/300

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu LECCE

box for suspended mounting mounting frames mounting frames

IP65 3 & 4 mod 6 mod 3x2 mod

mounting frames mounting frames mounting frames

1 mod / 3 mod 2 mod 4 mod

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

Console box for plasterboard Console box for brick and concrete Console box for plasterboard
26636 24203 24205
71304 24206
68206

INSTALLATION FRAMES “LECCE”

Catalogue number Product Type Size Packing/Box
category (pcs)

26019 C mounting frames 1 mod 1/110 467

26019 C mounting frames 3 mod 1/110
26018 C mounting frames 2 mod 1/110
LECCE

26054 C mounting frames 4 mod 1/150

26156 C mounting frames 6 mod 1/240
26056 C mounting frames 2x3 mod 1/240
2603 C box for suspended mounting IP65 3 mod
2604 C box for suspended mounting IP65 4 mod
24203 C Console box for brick and concrete triple 1/300
71304 C Console box for brick and concrete quadruple 1/200
68206 C Console box for brick and concrete sixfold 1/200
24205 C Console box for plasterboard triple 1/300
24206 C Console box for plasterboard quadruple 1/200
26636 C Console for plasterboard sixfold 1/160

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
LECCE www.elmarkholding.eu

1 gang

2 gangs
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

3 gangs

468
1 GANG PANEL “LECCE” SERIES 2 gangs PANELS “LECCE” SERIES 3 gangs PANELS “LECCE” SERIES
Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Product Type Colour
number category number category number category
LECCE

26100 C 1 gang White 26200 C 2 gangs White 26300 C 3 gangs White

26101 C 1 gang Blue 26201 C 2 gangs Blue 26301 C 3 gangs Blue
26102 C 1 gang Silver grey 26202 C 2 gangs Silver grey 26302 C 3 gangs Silver grey
26103 C 1 gang Golden 26203 C 2 gangs Golden 26303 C 3 gangs Golden
26104 C 1 gang Graphite mat 26204 C 2 gangs Graphite mat 26304 C 3 gangs Graphite mat
26105 C 1 gang Graphite 26205 C 2 gangs Graphite 26305 C 3 gangs Graphite
26106 C 1 gang Champagne 26206 C 2 gangs Champagne 26306 C 3 gangs Champagne
26107 C 1 gang Green 26207 C 2 gangs Green 26307 C 3 gangs Green
26108 C 1 gang Onix 26208 C 2 gangs Onix 26308 C 3 gangs Onix
26109 C 1 gang Cherry-tree 26209 C 2 gangs Cherry-tree 26309 C 3 gangs Cherry-tree
Packing/Box (pcs): 1 gang 1/180 | 2 gangs 1/180 | 3 gangs 1/180
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu LECCE

4 gangs

3x2 gangs

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

6 gangs

469
4 gangs PANELS “LECCE” SERIES 6 gangs PANELS “LECCE” SERIES 3x2 gangs PANELS “LECCE” SERIES
Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Product Type Colour
number category number category number category
LECCE

26400 C 4 gangs White 266001 C 6 gangs White 26600 C 6 gangs White

26401 C 4 gangs Blue 26601 C 6 gangs Blue 26606 C 6 gangs Champagne
26402 C 4 gangs Silver grey 266021 C 6 gangs Silver grey 26602 C 6 gangs Silver grey
26403 C 4 gangs Golden 26603 C 6 gangs Golden 26605 C 6 gangs Graphite
26404 C 4 gangs Graphite mat 26604 C 6 gangs Graphite mat
26405 C 4 gangs Graphite 266051 C 6 gangs Graphite
26406 C 4 gangs Champagne 266061 C 6 gangs Champagne
26407 C 4 gangs Green 26607 C 6 gangs Green
26408 C 4 gangs Onix 26608 C 6 gangs Onix
26409 C 4 gangs Cherry-tree 26609 C 6 gangs Cherry-tree
Packing/Box (pcs): 4 gangs 1/200 | 6 gangs 1/160 | 3x2 gangs 1/80
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
RHYME www.elmarkholding.eu
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

470 RHYME
RHYME
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu RHYME

White metallic Champagne metallic

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

Grey metallic Graphite metallic

471
RHYME

Coffee metallic

5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
RHYME www.elmarkholding.eu

11011 11041 11721

11021 11051
11341

11171A 11411 11191

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11181 11181B 11181C

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
472
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box
category (pcs)

11011 C 1 button 1 way switch White metallic 10 10/100

RHYME

11021 C 1 button 2 way switch White metallic 10 10/100

11341 C 1 button cross switch White metallic 10 10/100
11041 C 2 buttons 1 way switch White metallic 10 10/100
11051 C 2 buttons 2 way switch White metallic 10 10/100
11721 C 3 buttons 1 way switch White metallic 10 10/100
11171A C curtain control switch White metallic - 10/100
11411 C sensor switch White metallic - 10/100
11191 C dimmer switch White metallic - 10/80
11181 C door bell switch White metallic - 10/100
11181B C door bell switch with name card White metallic - 10/100
11181C C Push light switch White metallic 10 10/100

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu RHYME

11211 11371 11211C

11261 11741 11281 11711

11731 112816E

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11251 11681 11331

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box
category (pcs) 473
11211 C German type socket White metallic 16 10/100
11211C C German type socket with cover White metallic 16 10/100
RHYME

11371 C German type socket (double) White metallic 16 10/50

11261 C Phone socket RJ11 White metallic 10/100
11741 C Phone socket RJ11 - double White metallic 10/100
11731 C Phone socket RJ11 + computer socket RJ45 White metallic 10/100
11281 C Computer socket (cat5e) RJ45 White metallic 10/100
112816E C Computer socket RJ45 (CAT6e) White metallic 10/100
11711 C Computer socket RJ45 - double White metallic 10/100
11251 C TV socket White metallic 10/100
11681 C TV socket+FM socket + SAT socket * White metallic 10/100
11331 C Key card power switch * White metallic 10/100

*is not compatible with another decorative frame or frame designed for more than one functional part
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
RHYME www.elmarkholding.eu

11012 11042 11722

11022 11052
11342

11172A 11412 11192

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11182 11182B 11182C

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
474
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box
category (pcs)

11012 C 1 button 1 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100

RHYME

11022 C 1 button 2 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100

11342 C 1 button cross switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100
11042 C 2 buttons 1 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100
11052 C 2 buttons 2 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100
11722 C 3 buttons 1 way switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100
11172A C curtain control switch Champagne metallic - 10/100
11412 C sensor switch Champagne metallic - 10/100
11192 C dimmer switch Champagne metallic - 10/100
11182 C door bell switch Champagne metallic - 10/100
11182B C door bell switch with name card Champagne metallic - 10/100
11182C C Push light switch Champagne metallic 10 10/100

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu RHYME

11212 11372 11212C

11262 11742 11282 11712

11732 112826E

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11252 11682 11332

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box
category (pcs) 475
11212 C German type socket Champagne metallic 16 10/100
11212C C German type socket with cover Champagne metallic 16 10/100
RHYME

11372 C German type socket (double) Champagne metallic 16 10/50

11262 C Phone socket RJ11 Champagne metallic 10/100
11742 C Phone socket RJ11 - double Champagne metallic 10/100
11732 C Phone socket RJ11 + computer socket RJ45 Champagne metallic 10/100
11282 C Computer socket (cat5e) RJ45 Champagne metallic 10/100
112826E C Computer socket RJ45 (CAT6e) Champagne metallic 10/100
11712 C Computer socket RJ45 - double Champagne metallic 10/100
11252 C TV socket Champagne metallic 10/100
11682 C TV socket+FM socket + SAT socket * Champagne metallic 10/100
11332 C Key card power switch * Champagne metallic 10/100

* is not compatible with another decorative frame or frame designed for more than one functional part
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
RHYME www.elmarkholding.eu

11014 11044 11724

11024 11054
11344

11174A 11414 11194

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11184 11184B 11184C

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
476
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box
category (pcs)

11014 C 1 button 1 way switch Grey metallic 10 10/100

RHYME

11024 C 1 button 2 way switch Grey metallic 10 10/100

11344 C 1 button cross switch Grey metallic 10 10/100
11044 C 2 buttons 1 way switch Grey metallic 10 10/100
11054 C 2 buttons 2 way switch Grey metallic 10 10/100
11724 C 3 buttons 1 way switch Grey metallic 10 10/100
11174A C curtain control switch Grey metallic - 10/100
11414 C sensor switch Grey metallic - 10/100
11194 C dimmer switch Grey metallic - 10/100
11184 C door bell switch Grey metallic - 10/100
11184B C door bell switch with name card Grey metallic - 10/100
11184C C Push light switch Grey metallic 10 10/100

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu RHYME

11214 11374 11214C

11264 11744 11284 11714

11734 112846E

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11254 11684 11334

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box
category (pcs) 477
11214 C German type socket Grey metallic 16 10/100
11214C C German type socket with cover Grey metallic 16 10/100
RHYME

11374 C German type socket (double) Grey metallic 16 10/50

11264 C Phone socket RJ11 Grey metallic 10/100
11744 C Phone socket RJ11 - double Grey metallic 10/100
11734 C Phone socket RJ11 + computer socket RJ45 Grey metallic 10/100
11284 C Computer socket (cat5e) RJ45 Grey metallic 10/100
112846E C Computer socket RJ45 (CAT6e) Grey metallic 10/100
11714 C Computer socket RJ45 - double Grey metallic 10/100
11254 C TV socket Grey metallic 10/100
11684 C TV socket+FM socket + SAT socket * Grey metallic 10/100
11334 C Key card power switch * Grey metallic 10/100

* is not compatible with another decorative frame or frame designed for more than one functional part
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
RHYME www.elmarkholding.eu

11015 11045 11725

11025 11055
11345

11175A 11415 11195

#K#
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11185 11185B 11185C

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
478
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box
category (pcs)

11015 C 1 button 1 way switch Graphite metallic 10 10/100

RHYME

11025 C 1 button 2 way switch Graphite metallic 10 10/100

11345 C 1 button cross switch Graphite metallic 10 10/100
11045 C 2 buttons 1 way switch Graphite metallic 10 10/100
11055 C 2 buttons 2 way switch Graphite metallic 10 10/100
11725 C 3 buttons 1 way switch Graphite metallic 10 10/100
11175A C curtain control switch Graphite metallic - 10/100
11415 C sensor switch Graphite metallic - 10/100
11195 C dimmer switch Graphite metallic - 10/100
11185 C door bell switch Graphite metallic - 10/100
11185B C door bell switch with name card Graphite metallic - 10/100
11185C C Push light switch Graphite metallic 10 10/100

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu RHYME

11215 11375 11215C

11265 11745 11285 11715

11735 112856E

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11255 11685 11335

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box 479
category (pcs)

11215 C German type socket Graphite metallic 16 10/100

11215C C German type socket with cover Graphite metallic 16 10/100
RHYME

11375 C German type socket (double) Graphite metallic 16 10/50

11265 C Phone socket RJ11 Graphite metallic 10/100
11745 C Phone socket RJ11 - double Graphite metallic 10/100
11735 C Phone socket RJ11 + computer socket RJ45 Graphite metallic 10/100
11285 C Computer socket (cat5e) RJ45 Graphite metallic 10/100
112856E C Computer socket RJ45 (CAT6e) Graphite metallic 10/100
11715 C Computer socket RJ45 - double Graphite metallic 10/100
11255 C TV socket Graphite metallic 10/100
11685 C TV socket+FM socket + SAT socket * Graphite metallic 10/100
11335 C Key card power switch * Graphite metallic 10/100
* is not compatible with another decorative frame or frame designed for more than one functional part
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
RHYME www.elmarkholding.eu

11016 11046 11726

11026 11056
11346

11176A 11416 11196

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11186 11186B 11186C

IP20
480 FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box
category (pcs)

11016 C 1 button 1 way switch Coffee metallic 10 10/100

RHYME

11026 C 1 button 2 way switch Coffee metallic 10 10/100

11346 C 1 button cross switch Coffee metallic 10 10/100
11046 C 2 buttons 1 way switch Coffee metallic 10 10/100
11056 C 2 buttons 2 way switch Coffee metallic 10 10/100
11726 C 3 buttons 1 way switch Coffee metallic 10 10/100
11176A C curtain control switch Coffee metallic - 10/100
11416 C sensor switch Coffee metallic - 10/100
11196 C dimmer switch Coffee metallic - 10/100
11186 C door bell switch Coffee metallic - 10/100
11186B C door bell switch with name card Coffee metallic - 10/100
11186C C Push light switch Coffee metallic 10 10/100
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu RHYME

11216 11376 11216C

11266 11746 11286 11716

11736 112866E

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

11256 11686 11336

IP20
FUNCTIONAL PART “RHYME” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type
category
Colour Rated current In (A) Packing/Box
(pcs)
481
11216 C German type socket Coffee metallic 16 10/100
11216C C German type socket with cover Coffee metallic 16 10/100
RHYME

11376 C German type socket (double) Coffee metallic 16 10/50

11266 C Phone socket RJ11 Coffee metallic 10/100
11746 C Phone socket RJ11 - double Coffee metallic 10/100
11736 C Phone socket RJ11 + computer socket RJ45 Coffee metallic 10/100
11286 C Computer socket (cat5e) RJ45 Coffee metallic 10/100
112866E C Computer socket RJ45 (CAT6e) Coffee metallic 10/100
11716 C Computer socket RJ45 - double Coffee metallic 10/100
11256 C TV socket Coffee metallic 10/100
11686 C TV socket+FM socket + SAT socket* Coffee metallic 10/100
11336 C Key card power switch * Coffee metallic 10/100

* is not compatible with another decorative frame or frame designed for more than one functional part
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
RHYME www.elmarkholding.eu

2 gangs

3 gangs
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

4 gangs
482
RHYME

2 GANGS PANEL “RHYME” SERIES 3 GANGS PANELS “RHYME” SERIES 4 GANGS PANELS “RHYME” SERIES
Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Product Type Colour
number category number category number category

11551 C 2 gangs White metallic 11661 C 3 gangs White metallic 11361 C 4 gangs White metallic
11552 C 2 gangs Champagne metallic 11662 C 3 gangs Champagne metallic 11362 C 4 gangs Champagne metallic
11554 C 2 gangs Grey metallic 11664 C 3 gangs Grey metallic 11364 C 4 gangs Grey metallic
11555 C 2 gangs Graphite metallic 11665 C 3 gangs Graphite metallic 11365 C 4 gangs Graphite metallic
11556 C 2 gangs Coffee metallic 11666 C 3 gangs Coffee metallic 11366 C 4 gangs Coffee metallic
Packing/Box (pcs): 2 gangs 20/200 | 3 gangs 20/200 | 4 gangs 10/100
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu RHYME

5 gangs

6 gangs
#K#

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

Outlet safety cap
Wall protector

483
RHYME

5 GANGS PANEL “RHYME” SERIES 6 GANGS PANELS “RHYME” SERIES OUTLET SAFETY CAP
Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Product Type Colour Catalogue Type Colour
number category number category number

11601 C 5 gangs White metallic 11621 C 6 gangs White metallic 192215 Outlet safety cap White
11602 C 5 gangs Champagne metallic 11622 C 6 gangs Champagne metallic 192214 Outlet safety cap Brown
11604 C 5 gangs Grey metallic 11624 C 6 gangs Grey metallic 192121/WH Wall protector White
11605 C 5 gangs Graphite metallic 11625 C 6 gangs Graphite metallic 192121/TR Wall protector Transperent
11606 C 5 gangs Coffee metallic 11626 C 6 gangs Coffee metallic
Packing/Box (pcs): 2 gangs 20/200 | 3 gangs 20/200 | 4 gangs 10/100
In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
WATER HEATER SWITCH www.elmarkholding.eu

M030137

#N#
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

M030164

484
WATER HEATER SWITCH

IP20
WATER HEATER SWITCH WITH LIGHT LABEO SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Voltage (V) Current (A) Mounting type Length Height Width Packing/
category (mm) (mm) (mm) Box (pcs)

M030137 G LABEO FM 220 AC 25 flush 100 100 50 1

M030164 G LABEO SM 220 AC 25 surface 100 100 50 1

2+0
standard
+extended 2 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 30 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu WATER HEATER SWITCH

26024
#K#

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

24203 24205

485
WATER HEATER SWITCH

IP20
WATER HEATER SWITCH AND MOUNTING CONSOLE BOXES “LECCE” SERIES
Catalogue number Product Type Colour Size Rated Packing/Box
category current In (A) (pcs)

26024 C boiler switch with neon* White 3 mod 45 1/60

24203 C Console box for brick and concrete Black triple 1/300
24205 C Console box for plasterboard Blue triple - 1/300

* the product comes without decorative tripple panel

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
WATERPROOF www.elmarkholding.eu

191011 191041
191021
191031

191012
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

191071
486

IP44
WATERPROOF

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated Packing/Box
category current In (A) (pcs)

191011 C 1 Gang 1 Way Switch white 10AX 10/100

191021 C 1 Gang 2 Way Switch white 10AX 10/100
191031 C 1 Gang Intermediate Switch white 10AX 10/100
191041 C 2 gangs 1 Way Switch white 10AX 10/100
191012 C German type socket white 16A 10/100
191071 C German type socket- double white 16A 10/100

5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
www.elmarkholding.eu WATERPROOF

191111 191141
191121
191181

191112
#K#

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

191171
487

IP65
WATERPROOF

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

Catalogue number Product Type Colour Rated Packing/Box
category current In (A) (pcs)

191111 C 1 Gang 1 Way Switch grey 10AX 10/100

191121 C 1 Gang 2 Way Switch grey 10AX 10/100
191141 C 2 gangs 1 Way Switch grey 10AX 10/100
191181 C 1 Gang Push Button Switch grey 10AX 10/100
191112 C German type socket grey 16A 10/100
191171 C German type socket- double grey 16A 10/100

5+0
standard
+extended 5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY

In case of insufficient quantity in stock of any item listed on this page, the delivery time after order confirmation will be 90 days.
Mobile app for
users on the GO!
1. Download the App
2. Scan the QR code in the catalogue
for product information
3. Order quick & easy

ELMARK BUSINESS
Store partners
/For all customers/

Shopping without registration Designers & Projectors

Discounts with registration Construction companies
All benefits of the site Installation companies
Scan a QR code & buy a product Electrical & lighting traders

Visit elmarkstore.eu or Visit elmarkholding.eu or

download ELMARK Store from: download ELMARK BUSINESS from: